Test and Measurement
Division
Operating Manual
EMI TEST RECEIVER
ESIB7
1088.7490.07
ESIB26
1088.7490.26
ESIB40
1088.7490.40
Printed in the Federal
Republic of Germany
1088.7531.12-04
I
10/02
Dear Customer,
throughout this manual, the EMI test receiver R&S ESIB is abbreviated as ESIB.
This product contains technology licensed by Marconi Instruments LTD. under US patent 4609881
and under the corresponding patent in Germany and elsewhere.
1088.7531.12
2
E-4
ESIB
Tabbed Divider Overview
Tabbed Divider Overview
Volume 1
Data Sheet
Safety Instructions
Certificate of quality
EC Certificate of Conformity
Support Center
List of R & S Representatives
Manuals for EMI Test Receiver ESIB
Tabbed Divider
1
Chapter 1:
Putting into Operation
2
Chapter 2:
Getting Started
3
Chapter 3:
Operation
4
Chapter 4:
Functional Description
Tabbed Divider
1088.7531.12
5
Chapter 5:
Remote Control – Basics
6
Chapter 6:
Remote Control – Commands
7
Chapter 7:
Remote Control – Program Examples
8
Chapter 8:
Maintenance and Hardware Interfaces
9
Chapter 9:
Error Messages
10
Index
RE
E-3
Before putting the product into operation for
the first time, make sure to read the following
Safety Instructions
Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer
its customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required
for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with
these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. This product has been
designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s
plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, Rohde & Schwarz will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is
designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in
any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used
for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and
within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that the
products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the
required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be
indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation.
Symbols and safety labels
Observe
operating
instructions
Weight
indication for
units >18 kg
Supply
voltage
ON/OFF
1171.0000.42-02.00
Danger of
electric
shock
Standby
indication
Direct
current
(DC)
Warning!
Hot
surface
PE terminal
Alternating
current (AC)
Ground
Direct/alternating
current (DC/AC)
Ground
terminal
Attention!
Electrostatic
sensitive
devices
Device fully
protected by
double/reinforced
insulation
Sheet 1
Safety Instructions
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation. In these safety
instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde & Schwarz,
including instruments, systems and all accessories.
Tags and their meaning
DANGER
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
WARNING
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user
that can result in slight or minor injuries.
ATTENTION
This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage
to the product.
NOTE
This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention
to operating the product but which does not lead to damage.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist. It is therefore
essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the
associated documentation and the associated product. The use of tags in connection with unassociated
products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal
injury or material damage.
Basic safety instructions
1. The product may be operated only under
the operating conditions and in the
positions specified by the manufacturer. Its
ventilation must not be obstructed during
operation. Unless otherwise specified, the
following requirements apply to
Rohde & Schwarz products:
prescribed operating position is always with
the housing floor facing down, IP protection
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage
category 2, use only in enclosed spaces,
max. operation altitude max. 2000 m.
Unless specified otherwise in the data
sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to
the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the
nominal frequency.
2. Applicable local or national safety
regulations and rules for the prevention of
accidents must be observed in all work
performed. The product may be opened
only by authorized, specially trained
personnel. Prior to performing any work on
the product or opening the product, the
1171.0000.42-02.00
product must be disconnected from the
supply network. Any adjustments,
replacements of parts, maintenance or
repair must be carried out only by technical
personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz.
Only original parts may be used for
replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g.
power switches, power transformers,
fuses). A safety test must always be
performed after parts relevant to safety
have been replaced (visual inspection, PE
conductor test, insulation resistance
measurement, leakage current
measurement, functional test).
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
the use of substances that induce an
allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel)
such as aluminum cannot be generally
excluded. If you develop an allergic
reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent
sneezing, red eyes or respiratory
difficulties), consult a physician immediately
to determine the cause.
Sheet 2
Safety Instructions
4. If products/components are mechanically
and/or thermically processed in a manner
that goes beyond their intended use,
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be
released. For this reason, the product may
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal
purposes, by specially trained personnel.
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to
your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
5. If handling the product yields hazardous
substances or fuels that must be disposed
of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine
oils that must be replenished regularly, the
safety instructions of the manufacturer of
the hazardous substances or fuels and the
applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also
observe the relevant safety instructions in
the product documentation.
6. Depending on the function, certain products
such as RF radio equipment can produce
an elevated level of electromagnetic
radiation. Considering that unborn life
requires increased protection, pregnant
women should be protected by appropriate
measures. Persons with pacemakers may
also be endangered by electromagnetic
radiation. The employer is required to
assess workplaces where there is a special
risk of exposure to radiation and, if
necessary, take measures to avert the
danger.
7. Operating the products requires special
training and intense concentration. Make
certain that persons who use the products
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit
enough to handle operating the products;
otherwise injuries or material damage may
occur. It is the responsibility of the
employer to select suitable personnel for
operating the products.
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on
the product matches the nominal voltage of
the AC supply network. If a different voltage
is to be set, the power fuse of the product
may have to be changed accordingly.
9. In the case of products of safety class I with
movable power cord and connector,
operation is permitted only on sockets with
earthing contact and protective earth
connection.
1171.0000.42-02.00
10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth
connection either in the feed line or in the
product itself is not permitted. Doing so can
result in the danger of an electric shock
from the product. If extension cords or
connector strips are implemented, they
must be checked on a regular basis to
ensure that they are safe to use.
11. If the product has no power switch for
disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
of the connecting cable is regarded as the
disconnecting device. In such cases, it
must be ensured that the power plug is
easily reachable and accessible at all times
(length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
Functional or electronic switches are not
suitable for providing disconnection from
the AC supply. If products without power
switches are integrated in racks or systems,
a disconnecting device must be provided at
the system level.
12. Never use the product if the power cable is
damaged. By taking appropriate safety
measures and carefully laying the power
cable, ensure that the cable cannot be
damaged and that no one can be hurt by
e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an
electric shock.
13. The product may be operated only from
TN/TT supply networks fused with max.
16 A.
14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
the way into the socket. Otherwise this can
result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
15. Do not overload any sockets, extension
cords or connector strips; doing so can
cause fire or electric shocks.
16. For measurements in circuits with voltages
Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
current limiting, electrical separation,
insulation) should be taken to avoid any
hazards.
17. Ensure that the connections with
information technology equipment comply
with IEC 950/EN 60950.
18. Never remove the cover or part of the
housing while you are operating the
product. This will expose circuits and
components and can lead to injuries, fire or
damage to the product.
Sheet 3
Safety Instructions
19. If a product is to be permanently installed,
the connection between the PE terminal on
site and the product's PE conductor must
be made first before any other connection
is made. The product may be installed and
connected only by a skilled electrician.
20. For permanently installed equipment
without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or
similar protective devices, the supply circuit
must be fused in such a way that suitable
protection is provided for users and
products.
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings
in the housing that are not designed for this
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into
the housing. This can cause short circuits
inside the product and/or electric shocks,
fire or injuries.
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the
product. Otherwise the operating personnel
will be endangered by electric shocks.
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not
protected against penetration of water,
unless otherwise specified (see also safety
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into
account, there exists the danger of electric
shock or damage to the product, which can
also lead to personal injury.
24. Never use the product under conditions in
which condensation has formed or can form
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was
moved from a cold to a warm environment.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the
product, since they are necessary for
ventilation and prevent the product from
overheating. Do not place the product on
soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or
inside a closed housing, unless this is well
ventilated.
26. Do not place the product on heatgenerating devices such as radiators or fan
heaters. The temperature of the
environment must not exceed the maximum
temperature specified in the data sheet.
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
batteries and storage batteries away from
children. If batteries or storage batteries are
improperly replaced, this can cause an
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace
the battery or storage battery only with the
1171.0000.42-02.00
matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
spare parts list). Batteries and storage
batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of
them only in specially marked containers.
Observe local regulations regarding waste
disposal. Do not short-circuit batteries or
storage batteries.
28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
may be hazardous to your health may
escape from the product.
29. Please be aware of the weight of the
product. Be careful when moving it;
otherwise you may injure your back or other
parts of your body.
30. Do not place the product on surfaces,
vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when installing the
product and fastening it to objects or
structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
31. Handles on the products are designed
exclusively for personnel to hold or carry
the product. It is therefore not permissible
to use handles for fastening the product to
or on means of transport such as cranes,
fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is
responsible for securely fastening the
products to or on the means of transport
and for observing the safety regulations of
the manufacturer of the means of transport.
Noncompliance can result in personal injury
or material damage.
32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
other damage in the event of an accident.
Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
the safety of the vehicle; the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
collisions.
33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product,
do not use any other settings or functions
than those described in the documentation.
Otherwise this may be hazardous to your
health, since the laser beam can cause
irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try
to take such products apart, and never look
into the laser beam.
Sheet 4
Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de
la primera puesta en funcionamiento las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad
Informaciones de seguridad
Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de
seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los
equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante de conformidad
adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los
estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento
libre de peligros, deberá el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y
notas de alerta. Rohde&Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas
referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la indústria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de
ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del
producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante
queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de
consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver
hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso de los productos hace
necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma inglés. Por eso se deberá tener en
cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas péritas o debidamente
minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de
seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Ver manual
de
instrucciones
del uso
Informaciones
para
maquinaria
con uns peso
de > 18kg
potencia EN
MARCHA/PARADA
1171.0000.42-02.00
Peligro de
golpe de
corriente
Indicación
Stand-by
¡Advertencia!
Superficie
caliente
Corriente
continua
DC
Conexión a
conductor
protector
Corriente
alterna AC
Conexión
a tierra
Corriente
continua/alterna
DC/AC
Conexión
a masa
conductora
¡Cuidado!
Elementos de
construción
con peligro de
carga
electroestática
El aparato está
protegido en su
totalidad por un
aislamiento de
doble refuerzo
página 1
Informaciones de seguridad
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda
clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se
tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán
ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro
capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de
seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde&Schwarz bajo la
denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda clase de
accesorios.
Palabras de señal y su significado
PELIGRO
Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el
ususario.Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas.
ADVERTENCIA
Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas .
ATENCIÓN
Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo pequeño para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o
pequeñas
CUIDADO
Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
INFORMACIÓN
Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el
uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un
daño del mismo.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el ámbito de la
comunidad económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición. Por eso se
debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en
combinación con la correspondiente documentación y solamente en combinación con el producto
correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en combinación con productos o
documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por
consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Informaciones de seguridad elementales
1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente
a la situación y posición de funcionamiento
sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se
convino de otra manera, es para los
productos R&S válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define
principialmente la posición con el suelo de la
caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X,
grado de suciedad 2, categoría de
sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en
estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar.
A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la
hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5%
sobre la frecuencia nominal.
1171.0000.42-02.00
2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de
trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
personal périto autorizado. Antes de efectuar
trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este
ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste,
el cambio de partes, la manutención y la
reparación deberán ser solamente
efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
el enchufe, los transformadores o los
fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos
por partes originales. Despues de cada
recambio de partes elementales para la
seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de
página 2
Informaciones de seguridad
seguridad (control a primera vista, control de
conductor protector, medición de resistencia
de aislamiento, medición de medición de la
corriente
conductora,
control
de
funcionamiento).
3. Como en todo producto de fabricación
industrial no puede ser excluido en general
de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos
que puedan generar alergias, los llamados
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes,
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente
a un médico para averigurar los motivos de
estas reacciones.
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia
de metales pesados como por ejemplo
plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental
del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de
ser efectuada solamente por personal
especializado para estos tratamientos. La
partición elemental efectuada
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las
directivas nacionales referentes al
tratamiento de materias residuales.
5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o
aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en
cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del
fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o
combustibles y las regulaciones regionales
para el tratamiento de materias residuales.
Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso
dado las prescripciones de seguridad
especiales en la descripción del producto.
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las
instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a
causa de su función natural, emitir una
radiación electromagnética aumentada. En
vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo
deberían ser protegidas personas
embarazadas debidamente. También las
personas con un bypass pueden correr
1171.0000.42-02.00
peligro a causa de la radiación
electromagnética. El empresario está
comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de
trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de
exposición a radiaciones aumentadas de
riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos.
7. La utilización de los productos requiere
instrucciones especiales y una alta
concentración en el manejo. Debe de
ponerse por seguro de que las personas que
manejen los productos estén a la altura de
los requerimientos necesarios referente a
sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y
emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos.
El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de
seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el
manejo de los productos.
8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto
se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a
la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
cambiar la preselección de la tensión
también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar
los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto.
9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
producto solamente deberán ser conectados
para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
protector conectado.
10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
intencionada del conductor protector, tanto
en la toma de corriente como en el mismo
producto ya que puede tener como
consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente
por el producto. Si se utilizaran cables o
enchufes de extensión se deberá poner al
seguro, que es controlado su estado técnico
de seguridad.
11. Si el producto no está equipado con un
interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
fácil acceso y nabejo (medida del cable de
distribución aproximadamente 2 m). Los
interruptores de función o electrónicos no
son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si
los productos sin interruptor están integrados
en construciones o instalaciones, se deberá
instalar el interruptor al nivel de la
instalación.
página 3
Informaciones de seguridad
12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el
cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las
medidas de protección y de instalación
adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no
pueda ser dañado o de que nadie pueda ser
dañado por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por
un golpe de corriente.
20. En caso de que los productos que son
instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
protector implementado, autointerruptor o
similares objetos de protección, deberá la
toma de corriente estar protegida de manera
que los productos o los usuarios estén
suficientemente protegidos.
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A.
21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que
no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la
caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna
clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto
puede producir corto circuitos en el producto
y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego
o heridas.
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga
a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas.
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los
cables de extensión o los enchufes de
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego
o golpes de corriente.
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo
medios de medición adecuados, seguros,
limitación de tensión, corte protector,
aislamiento etc.).
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
técnica informática se deberá tener en
cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de
la EC950/EN60950.
18. Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el
producto está en funcionamiento. Esto pone
a descubierto los cables y componentes
eléctricos y puede causar heridas, fuego o
daños en el producto.
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el
conductor protector fijo con el conductor
protector del aparato antes de hacer
cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la
conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un
electricista especializado.
1171.0000.42-02.00
22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de
que no pueda originarse en el producto una
sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
corriente.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos
contra el agua si no es que exista otra
indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se
tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de
golpe de corriente o de daños en el producto
lo cual también puede llevar al peligro de
personas.
24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
producto como por ejemplo cuando se
desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
lugar caliente.
25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el
producto encima de materiales blandos como
por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de
una caja cerrada, si esta no está
suficientemente ventilada.
26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo
radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura
ambiental no debe superar la temperatura
máxima especificada en la hoja de datos.
página 4
Informaciones de seguridad
27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego.
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del
alcance de los niños. Si las baterías o los
acumuladores no son cambiados con la
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión
(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por
los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de
piezas de recambio). Baterías y
acumuladores son deshechos problemáticos.
Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes
especiales para este fín. Por favor tengan en
cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada
país referente al tratamiento de deshechos.
Nunca sometan las baterías o acumuladores
a un corto circuito.
28. Tengan en consideración de que en caso de
un incendio pueden escaparse gases tóxicos
del producto, que pueden causar daños a la
salud.
29. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de
un incendio pueden desprenderse del
producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos
etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud.
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies,
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus
características de peso o de estabilidad no
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
estantes).
1171.0000.42-02.00
31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
solamente está previsto para personas. Por
eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte
como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas
elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El
usuario es responsable de que los productos
sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios
de transporte y de que las prescripciones de
seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso
de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden
causarse daños en personas y objetos.
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
para evitar en caso de un accidente las
lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
conductor. Siempre queda en la
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
seguridad del vehículo y el fabricante no
asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad
por accidentes o colisiones.
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
producto de laser en un producto R&S (por
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas
en la documentación. De otra manera pondrá
en peligro su salud, ya que el rayo laser
puede dañar irreversiblemente sus ojos.
Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser.
página 5
EC Certificate of Conformity
Certificate No.: 2001-70
This is to certify that:
Equipment type
Stock No.
Designation
ESIB7
ESIB26
ESIB40
1088.7490.07
1088.7490.26
1088.7490.40
EMI Test Receiver
ESIB-B1
ESIB-B2
1089.0547.02
1137.4494.26/.40
Linear Video Output
Preamplifier
complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States
- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits
(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC)
- relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN61010-1 : 1993 + A2 : 1995
EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999
EN61326-1 : 1997 + A1 : 1998
For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class
B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used
as a basis.
Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2001
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
Munich, 2001-11-26
1088.7490.01
Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker
CE
E-3
EC Certificate of Conformity
Certificate No.: 9502052
This is to certify that:
Equipment type
Stock No.
Designation
FSE-B1
FSE-B10
FSE-B11
FSE-B12
FSE-B13
FSE-B15
FSE-B16
FSE-B17
FSE-B18
FSE-B19
FSE-B2
FSE-B21
FSE-B23
FSE-B24
FSE-B3
FSE-B4
FSE-B7
FSE-B77
FSE-B8
FSE-B9
FSE-Z2
1073.4990.02
1066.4769.02
1066.4917.02
1066.5065.02
1119.6499.02
1073.5696.02/.03
1073.5973.02/.03/.04
1066.4017.02
1088.6993.02
1088.7248.xx
1073.5044.02
1084.7243.02
1088.7348.02
1106.3680.02
1073.5244.02
1073.5396.02
1066.4317.02
1102.8493.02
1066.4469.02
1066.4617.02
1084.7043.02
Color Display
Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator
Output Attenuator
1 dB Input Attenuator
Computer Function
Ethernet Interface
2nd IEC BUS Interface
Removeable Harddrive
Second Harddisk
7 GHz Frequency Extension
External Mixer Output
741,4 MHz Broadband Output
44 GHz Frequency Extension
TV Demodulator
OCXO 10 MHz and Low Phase Noise
Signal Vectoranalysis
Signal Vectoranalysis
Tracking Generator
Tracking Generator
PS/2 Mouse
complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation
of the laws of the Member States
-
relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN55011 : 1998 + A1 : 1999, Klasse B
EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000
EN61000-3-3 : 1995
EN50082-1 : 1992
Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
Munich, 2001-01-11
1073.4990.02
Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker
CE
E-11
ESIB
Manuals
Contents of Manuals for EMI Test Receiver ESIB
Operating Manual ESIB
The operating manual describes the following models and options:
• ESIB7 20 Hz to 7 GHz
• ESIB26 20 Hz to 26,5 GHz
• ESIB40 20 Hz to 40 GHz
•
•
•
•
•
Option ESIB-B1
Option ESIB-B2
Option FSE-B10/11
Option FSE-B16
Option FSE-B17
Linear Video Output
Preamplifier
Tracking Generator
Ethernet Adapter
Second IEC/IEEE Bus Interface
Options FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis, and FSE-B21, External Mixer Output, are described in separate manuals.
The present operating manual contains comprehensive information about the technical data of the
instrument, the setup and putting into operation of the instrument, the operating concept and controls
as well as the operation of the ESIB via the menus and via remote control. Typical measurement
tasks for the ESIB are explained using the functions offered by the menus and a selection of program examples.
In addition the operating manual gives information about maintenance of the instrument and about
error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument. It is subdivided into
2 volumes containing the data sheet plus 9 chapters:
Volume 1
The data sheet
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 10
Volume 2
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
1088.7531.12
informs about guaranteed specifications and characteristics of the instrument.
describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as
well as all procedures required for putting the ESIB into operation and integration into a test system.
gives an introduction to typical measurement tasks of the ESIB which are explained step by step.
describes the operating principles, the structure of the graphical interface and
offers a menu overview.
forms a reference for manual control of the ESIB and contains a detailed description of all instrument functions and their application.
contains an index for the operating manual.
describes the basics for programming the ESIB, command processing and the
status reporting system.
lists all the remote-control commands defined for the instrument. At the end of
the chapter a alphabetical list of commands and a table of softkeys with command assignment is given.
contains program examples for a number of typical applications of the ESIB.
describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument’s
interfaces.
gives a list of error messages that the ESIB may generate.
contains a list of error messages.
contains an index for the operating manual.
0.1
E-2
Manuals
ESIB
Service Manual - Instrument
The service manual - instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications (performance test) and on the self tests.
Service Manual
The service manual is not delivered with the instrument but may be obtained from your R&S service
department using the order number 1088.7531.94.
The service manualinforms on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It
contains all information required for the maintenance of ESIB by exchanging modules.It contains information about the individual modules of ESIB. This comprises the test and adjustment of the modules, fault detection within the modules and the interface description.
1088.7531.12
0.2
E-2
Beiblatt B zum Datenblatt
Signalanalysator FSIQ26, Spektrumanalyzer FSEM und
Funkstörmeßempfänger ESIB26
Folgende Daten weichen für FSIQ26, FSEM und ESIB26 von den im Datenblatt spezifizierten ab:
Störfestigkeit
Nebenempfang (Spiegel), f > 22 GHz
-75dB
Supplement B to Data sheet
Signal Analyzer FSIQ26, Spectrum Analyzer FSEM and EMI Test
Receiver ESIB26
Correction of data sheet specifications for models FSIQ26. FSEM and ESIB26. The following
specifications are valid:
Immunity to Interference
Image frequency, f > 22 GHz
151.4160.12/22
-75dB
B
D/E-4
Supplement A
to Operating Manual,Version 01
EMI Test Receiver ESIB7, ESIB26 and ESIB40
(Firmware Version 4.31 and higher)
Dear Customer,
your EMI test receiver is equipped with a new firmware version. The new firmware offers a number of
extensions and improvements which are not yet described in the operating manual. They are explained
on the following pages. The new functions concern:
• Setting the input attenuation to 0 dB via roll-key no longer possible in Analyzer mode
• Limit lines with additional unit dBpT, editing feature extended
• Extended functionality for option External Mixer Output (FSE-B21)
• Extension of the detector selection by the CISPR Average detector.
• Extension of the adjacent channel power measurement.
• Selection of trace averaging method
• Additional IEEE/IEC-bus commands
Correction of Operating Manual, Section "Windows-NT Software Installation"
The stated path for starting the reinstallation is only valid for software pack 3 ("C:\SP3\I386\update").
To start the reinstallation of software pack 5 path "C:\SP5\I386\update\update" has to be entered into
the command line.
Input Attenuation 0 dB can no longer be set via Roll-key in Analyzer mode
In order to prevent the input attenuation from being inadvertently switched off, value 0 dB can only be
set via manual input. The input attenuation can only be reduced up to 10 dB via roll-key or UP/DOWN
keys. In Receiver mode, the availability of the 0 db setting is already controlled with the 0 DB MIN
softkey.
Limit lines with additional unit dBpT, editing feature extended
dBpT can be set as additional unit for limit lines.
In firmware versions used so far, a physical unit once set could not be changed. In the new firmware
version this is now possible. The entered reference values remain unchanged
External Mixer option FSE-B21 extended
The permissible setting range of parameter HARMONIC NUMBER under BAND LOCK OFF was
increased from 40 to 62.
1088.7490.01
A
E-10
CISPR Average Detector (CISPR AV)
The weighting modes that can be selected have been extended by the detector CISPR Average.
CONFIGURATION MODE EMI RECEIVER menu:
TRACE menu:
DETECTOR
DETECTOR The DETECTOR softkey opens a
submenu to select the detector.
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
Multiple detection is activated by
switching on up to four single
QUASIPEAK detectors.
QUASIPEAK
AVERAGE
AVERAGE
CISPR
AVERAGE
CISPR
AVERAGE
RMS
RMS
MIN PEAK
FINAL
MAX PEAK
The MIN PEAK, RMS and AC
VIDEO detector cannot be
switched on simultaneously.
The AVERAGE and CISPR
AVERAGE detector cannot be
switched on simultaneously.
Softkey AC VIDEO is available
only if the instrument is equipped
FINAL
with the linear video output
QUASIPEAK (option ESIB-B1).
AC VIDEO
FINAL
AVERAGE
QP RBW
COUPLED
FINAL
CISPR AV
FINAL
RMS
CISPR AV detector
For the measurement of the average according to CISPR 16-1,
the maximum value of the linear average value is displayed
during the measurement time. It is used for the measurement
of pulsed sinusoidal signals with low pulse frequency, for
example. The maximum value is calibrated with the rms value
of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal.
On the ESIB, averaging is done with lowpass filters of the 2nd
order (simulation of a mechanical instrument). The lowpass
time constants and the IF bandwidths are fixed depending on
the frequency. The main parameters are listed in the following
table:
1088.7490.01
CISPR Band A
CISPR Band B
CISPR Band C/D
Frequency range
9 kHz to 150 kHz
150 kHz to 30 MHz
30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IF bandwidth
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
Lowpass time constant
160 ms
160 ms
100 ms
B
E-10
Setting the Measurement Time
The measurement time is the time during which ESIB measures the input signal and forms a
measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measurement time does not include settling
times. ESIB automatically waits until transients are over.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
MEAS TIME
The MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field for the measurement time.
The measurement time can be set with 2 digits resolution in the range 100 µs
to 100 s, e.g. 980 ms, 990 ms, 1 s, 1.1 s.
When the quasi-peak detector is used, the minimum measurement time is
1 ms.
When the CISPR average detector is used, the minimum measurement time
is 100 ms.
With the average, RMS, AC video or min/max peak detector the smallest
settable measurement time depends on the bandwidth.
Bandwidth
Shortest measurement time
AV, RMS
Shortest measurement time
PK+, PK-, AC video
≤ 10 Hz
1s
10 ms
100 Hz
100 ms
1 ms
200 Hz
50 ms
1 ms
1 kHz
10 ms
0.1 ms
9 kHz
1 ms
0.1 ms
≥ 100 kHz
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <numeric_value>
Effect of measurement time with
CISPR Average measurement
1088.7490.01
With CISPR Average measurements, the maximum value of
the weighted signal during the measurement time is displayed.
The relatively long time constants used with CISPR Average
detectors entail long measurement times to obtain correct
results. With unknown signals the measurement time should be
at least 1 s. This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a
pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
After a frequency change or a modification of the attenuation,
the receiver waits until the lowpass has settled before the
measurement time starts. The measurement time is selected
depending on the IF bandwidth and the characteristics of the
signal to be measured. Unmodulated sinusoidal signals as well
as signals with high modulation frequency can be measured
within a short time. Slowly fluctuating signals or pulse signals
require longer measurement times.
C
E-10
Weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals
Rel. level
Pulse width/ms
Fig. 1
Differences of the weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals resulting from display modes AV,
CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s, pulse
frequency = 1 Hz, IF bandwidth = 9 kHz, averaging time constant = 160 ms).
Rel. level/dB
Pulse width/ms
Fig. 2
Differences of the weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals resulting from display modes AV,
CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s, pulse
frequency = 1 Hz, IF bandwidth = 120 kHz, averaging time constant = 100 ms).
1088.7490.01
D
E-10
rel. level
Pulse frequency/Hz
Fig. 3
Differences of the weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals resulting from display modes AV,
CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse width (measurement time = 2 s,
pulse width = 10 ms, IF bandwidth = 9 kHz, averaging time constant = 160 ms).
rel. level/dB
Pulse frequency/Hz
Fig. 4
Differences of the weighting of pulsed sinusoidal signals resulting from display modes AV,
CISPR AV and Pk depending on the pulse frequency (measurement time = 2 s,
pulse width = 10 ms, IF bandwidth = 120 kHz, averaging time constant = 100 ms).
1088.7490.01
E
E-10
Adjacent Channel Power Measurements
The chapter "Channel Configuration" of the operating manual was extended to include adjacent channel
power measurements.
The ACP STANDARD softkey activates the selection of a digital mobile-radio
standard. The parameters for the adjacent channel power measurement are
set according to the regulations of the selected standard.
ACP
STANDARD
ACP STANDARD
NONE
NADC
TETRA
PDC
PHS
CDPD
CDMA800 FWD
CDMA800 REV
CDMA1900 FWD
CDMA1900 REV
W-CDMA FWD
W-CDMA REV
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
W-CDMA 3GPP REV
CDMA2000 MC
CDMA2000 DS
CDMA ONE 800 FWD
CDMA ONE 800 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 FWD
CDMA ONE 1900 REV
TD-SCDMA
The following standards can be selected:
NADC (IS-54 B)
TETRA
PDC (RCR STD-27)
PHS (RCR STD-28)
CDPD
CDMA 800 FWD
CDMA 800 REV
CDMA 1900 REV
CDMA 1900 FWD
W-CDMA FWD
W-CDMA REV
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
W-CDMA 3GPP REV
CDMA2000 Multi Carrier
CDMA2000 Direct Sequence
CDMA ONE 800 FWD
CDMA ONE 800 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 FWD
TD-SCDMA
Selection of Trace Averaging Method
Section "Trace Selection and Setup" of the operating manual was extended to include the selection of
the trace averaging method.
TRACE 1 right side menu:
AVG MODE
LOG
LIN
The AVERAGE LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
averaging in case of logarithmic level display.
In case of logarithmic averaging, the dB values of the display voltage are
averaged, in case of linear averaging the level values in dB are converted into
linear voltages or powers prior to averaging. These voltages or powers are
averaged and then again converted into level values.
For stationary sinewave signals the two averaging methods yield the same
result.
Logarithmic averaging is recommended if sinewave signals are to clearly
stand out against the noise since, with this averaging, noise suppression is
greater while the sinewave signals remain unchanged.
IEC/IEEE command
1088.7490.01
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE
F
VIDeo|LINear
E-10
New and Extended IEEE-Bus Commands
The new firmware was extended by the following IEEE-bus commands:
• Additional command for active limit lines.
• Additional power measurement standard.
• Selection of Trace Averaging Method.
• Additional detector.
• Additional command for firmware update via IEC/IEEE bus interface.
• Additional parameter PHOLd for TRACe:DATA command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACTive?
This command queries the name of all activated limit lines. The names are output in alphabetical
order. If no limit line is activated, an empty string will be output. The numeric suffixes in
CALCulate<1|2> and LIMit<1 to 8> are not significant.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:ACT?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>: FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD |
FWCDma
|
RWCDma
|
FW3Gppcdma
|
RW3Gppcdma|
F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma |
R19Cdma | M2CDma | D2CDma |
FO8Cdma | RO8Cdma | FO19CDMA
| RO19CDMA | TCDMa | NONE
This command selects the settings for power measurement of one of the standards.
Example:
"CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC"
Features:
*RST value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A-F
TCDMa
TD-SCDMa
The selection of a standard influences the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and
spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time.
1088.7490.01
G
E-10
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | MINimum | SCALar | VIDeo | LINear
This command selects the trace averaging method.
VIDeo
Averaging of logarithmic level values.
LINear
Averaging of linear power values prior to their conversion into level values.
Example:
":AVER:TYPE LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
Note:
VIDeo
device-specific
A, VA (“VIDeo“ and “LINear“ are not available in VA mode)
It is also possible to select the evaluation mode (MAXimum, MINimum, SCAlar) for the
trace with this command. However, it is recommended to use command
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE for this purpose. The command
AVERage:TYPE should be used only to select the trace averaging method. Also, the
query reads out the trace averaging mode only.
The following functions are defined but should not be used:
MAXimum (MAX HOLD):
AVG(n) = MAX(X1...Xn)
MINimum (MIN HOLD):
AVG(n) = MIN(X1...Xn)
AVG (n)=
SCALar (AVERAGE):
n
1
× å xi
n i =1
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive| SAMPle | RMS |
AVERage | CAVerage | QPEak | ACVideo
This command switches the detector for recording of the measured value.
Example:
Features:
":DET POS"
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
Trace1: POSitive
Trace 2: AVERage
conforming
R, A
In scan mode of the receiver, the detectors POSitive, RMS, AVERage, CAVerage, QPEak and
ACVideo are available (ACVideo only with option ESIB-B1).
In the analyzer mode, the detectors APEak, POSitive, NEGative, RMS, SAMPLe and AVERage are
available. The value "APEak" (AutoPeak) displays both the positive peak value and the negative
peak value when noise is present. The positive peak value is displayed when one signal is present.
The trace is selected by means of the numeric suffix after DETector.
1088.7490.01
H
E-10
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | CAVerage |
QPEak| ACVideo
This command switches on the detectors for single measurements.
Example:
":DET:REC POS,AVER,QPE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
POS
device-specific
The trace is not selectable; up to four detectors may be switched on simultaneously.
The RMS, NEgative and ACVideo detector cannot be switched on simultaneously.
The AVERage and CAVerage detector cannot be switched on simultaneously.
Selection ACVideo is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video output (option
ESIB-B1).
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>:FMEasurement
NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage |
CAVerage | QPEak | ACVideo
This command selects the detector for the final measurement (the detector used for the subsequent
final measurement).
Example:
"DET:FME POS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
Trace 1, 3 POS
Trace 2, 4 AVERage
device specific
R
:SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate <string>
This command starts a firmware update using the files in the set directory.
Example :
":SYST:FIRM:UPD ‘C:\V4.32’"
Features :
*RST value:
–
SCPI : conforming
Mode:
A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and has therefore no query and no *RST value assigned.
:TRACe[:DATA]
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4| SINGle | PHOLd | SCAN | STATus | FINAL1
| FINAL2 | FINAL3 | FINAL4, <block> | <numeric_value>
This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument, the query reads trace data
out of the instrument.
Receiver
PHOLd yields the level value of the maxhold marker of the bargraph.
1088.7490.01
I
E-10
ESIB
Contents - Preparing for Operation
Contents - Chapter 1 " Preparing for Operation "
1 Preparing for Operation
Description of Front and Rear Panel Views .................................................................................. 1.1
Front View................................................................................................................................ 1.1
Rear View .............................................................................................................................. 1.13
Start-Up........................................................................................................................................... 1.18
Unpacking the Instrument...................................................................................................... 1.18
Setting up the Instrument ...................................................................................................... 1.18
Stand-alone Operation ................................................................................................ 1.18
19" Rack Installation.................................................................................................... 1.19
EMI Protection Measures ...................................................................................................... 1.19
Connecting to AC Supply....................................................................................................... 1.19
AC Power Line Fuses ............................................................................................................ 1.19
Switching the Instrument on/off ............................................................................................. 1.19
Switching on the Instrument ........................................................................................ 1.20
Startup Menu and Booting........................................................................................... 1.20
Switching off the Instrument ........................................................................................ 1.20
Energy Saving Mode ................................................................................................... 1.21
Battery Backed-up Memory ................................................................................................... 1.21
Function Test ................................................................................................................................. 1.21
Controller Function - Windows NT .............................................................................................. 1.22
Connecting a Mouse...................................................................................................................... 1.23
Connecting an External Keyboard ............................................................................................... 1.24
Connecting an External Monitor .................................................................................................. 1.25
Connecting a Printer...................................................................................................................... 1.27
Installation of a Network Printer (with option FSE-B16 only) ................................................. 1.33
Connecting a CD-ROM Drive ........................................................................................................ 1.35
Firmware Update............................................................................................................................ 1.37
Installing Windows NT Software .................................................................................................. 1.38
Options ........................................................................................................................................... 1.39
Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface ..................................................................... 1.39
Installing the software.................................................................................................. 1.39
Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.41
Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter ..................................................................................... 1.42
Hardware Installation................................................................................................... 1.42
Software Installation .................................................................................................... 1.43
Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.47
NOVELL ......................................................................................................... 1.47
MICROSOFT .................................................................................................. 1.47
1088.7531.12
I-1.1
E-3
Contents - Preparing for Operation
1088.7531.12
ESIB
I-1.2
E-3
ESIB
Front View
1 Preparing for Operation
Chapter 1 describes the controls and connectors of the EMI Test Receiver ESIB by means of the front
and rear view. Then follows all the information that is necessary to put the instrument into operation and
connect it to the AC supply and to external devices.
A more detailed description of the hardware connectors and interfaces can be found in chapter 8.
Chapter 2 provides an introduction into the operation of the ESIB by means of typical examples of
configuration and measurement; for the description of the concept for manual operation and an
overview of menus refer to chapter 3. For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and
parameters and background information refer to the reference part in chapter 4. For remote control of
the ESIB refer to the general description of the SCPI commands, the instrument model, the status
reporting system, and command description in chapter 5 and 6.
Description of Front and Rear Panel Views
Front View
1
Display Screen
see Chap. 3 and 4
Softkeys
see Chap. 3 and 4
Generate macros
see Chap. 4
Select and set marker
see Chap. 4
2
3
USER
USER
4
MARKER
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA
5
MKR
NORMAL
Select and set the marker
SEARCH
Set and start the peak/min search
DELTA
Select and set the delta markers
MKR ⇒
Set the active marker
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
CENTER /
FREQ
SPAN /
ZOOM
START
STOP
1088.7531.12
Define frequency axis in the active window
CENTER/
FREQ
Set center frequency etc.
Set receiver frequency
SPAN/
ZOOM
Set sweep span
Set zoom frequencies
START
Set start frequency
STOP
Set stop frequency
1.1
see Chap. 4
E-3
Fig. 1-1
1088.7531.12
25
26
27
28
23
REMOTE
20
REF /
UNIT
LEVEL
1.2
24
LOCAL
REMOTE
SRQ
STATUS
SETTING
START
HARDCOPY
SETUP
22
COUPLING /
RUN
SWT
VBW
RBW
SWEEP /
SCAN
TRIGGER
SWEEP
15
14
50 W
16
STEP
EXP
Hz
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
50 W
17
18
BACK
-
PROBE / CODE
HOLD
.
3
MHz
dB
µV
µs
GHz
dBm
mV
ms
-dBm
V
s
DATA VARIATION
CLR
0
2
1
6
9
9
07
DC 0V
MAX
13
MADE IN GERM ANY
RF INPUT 1
INPUT
CONFIG
RECALL
SAVE
MEMORY
1088.7490
+ 30 dBm
MAX
19
4
2
GEN OUTPUT 50W
MENU
3
1
LIMITS
5
8
DATA ENTRY
4
7
8
+ 30 dBm
MAX
21
MKR
TRACE
DELTA
D LINES
LINES
SPAN /
ZOOM
MARKER
START
CENTER /
FREQ
7
NORMAL SEARCH
PROBE POWER
6
FREQUENCY
5
MODE
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
USER
4
CONFIGURATION
AF OUTPUT
3
RANGE
INFO
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB
2
STOP
DISPLAY
CAL
SYSTEM
PRESET
1
12
11
10
Front View
ESIB
Front View
E-3
ESIB
6
Front View
LINES
LINES
Setup evaluation lines and tolerance limits
D LINES
D LINES
Setup evaluation lines (display lines)
LIMITS
Definition and recall of tolerance limits
LIMITS
7
see Chap. 4
LEVEL
Define reference levels and display range in the active
measurement window.
LEVEL
REF /
UNIT
REF/ UNIT Set reference level (= max. display level)
Set unit
RANGE
RANGE
8
see Chap.4
Set range
DATA ENTRY
Keypad for data input
DATA ENTRY
7
8
9
-dBm
V
s
4
5
6
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
1
2
3
dB
µV
µs
kHz
0
.
-
dB..
nV
ns
Hz
CLR
BACK
GHz
0...9
input numbers
.
input decimal point
–
change sign
CLR
– close input field (for
uncompleted or already closed
inputs, the original entry is
kept)
– erase the current entry in input
field (beginning of an input)
– close message window
(status, error and warning
messages)
BACK
erase last character input
EXP
see Chap.3
GHz
The units keys close the data
-dBm V s input and define the multiplication factor for each basic unit.
MHz dBm For dimension-less or
mV ms
alphanumeric inputs, the units
keys have weight 1.
kHz dB They behave, in this case, like
µV µs
the ENTER key.
Hz dB
nV ns
EXP
1088.7531.12
Append an exponent
1.3
E-3
Fig. 1-1
1088.7531.12
25
26
27
28
23
REMOTE
20
REF /
UNIT
LEVEL
1.4
24
LOCAL
REMOTE
SRQ
STATUS
SETTING
START
HARDCOPY
SETUP
22
COUPLING /
RUN
SWT
VBW
RBW
SWEEP /
SCAN
TRIGGER
SWEEP
15
14
50 W
16
STEP
EXP
Hz
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
50 W
17
18
BACK
-
PROBE / CODE
HOLD
.
3
MHz
dB
µV
µs
GHz
dBm
mV
ms
-dBm
V
s
DATA VARIATION
CLR
0
2
1
6
9
9
07
DC 0V
MAX
13
MADE IN GERM ANY
RF INPUT 1
INPUT
CONFIG
RECALL
SAVE
MEMORY
1088.7490
+ 30 dBm
MAX
19
4
2
GEN OUTPUT 50W
MENU
3
1
LIMITS
5
8
DATA ENTRY
4
7
8
+ 30 dBm
MAX
21
MKR
TRACE
DELTA
D LINES
LINES
SPAN /
ZOOM
MARKER
START
CENTER /
FREQ
7
NORMAL SEARCH
PROBE POWER
6
FREQUENCY
5
MODE
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
USER
4
CONFIGURATION
AF OUTPUT
3
RANGE
INFO
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB
2
STOP
DISPLAY
CAL
SYSTEM
PRESET
1
12
11
10
Front View
ESIB
Front View
E-3
ESIB
Front View
9
3 1/2" diskette drive; 1.44 MByte
10
DATA VARIATION
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
Key group for entering data and for cursor
movement
HOLD
Disable control elements / overall
control. The LED indicates the
hold condition.
STEP
Set step size for cursor keys and
roll-key.
see Chap. 3
Cursor keys – Move the cursor within the
input fields and tables.
– Vary the input value.
– Define the direction of
movement for the roll-key.
Roll-key
11
MEMORY
Memory media and file management
MEMORY
SAVE
RECALL
SAVE
Save instrument data
RECALL
Recall instrument data
CONFIG
Configuration of memory media
and data
CONFIG
12
see Chap. 4
INPUT
Set impedance and attenuation at the RF
input.
INPUT
13
see Chap. 4
RF INPUT 1
RF-Input 1
RF INPUT 1
+ 30 dBm
MAX
50
– Vary input values.
– Move markers and limits.
– Select letters in the help line
editor.
– Move cursor in the tables
DC 0V
MAX
W
MADE IN GERMANY
1088.7531.12
Caution:
The maximum DC voltage is
0 V, the maximum power is 1 W
(=;^ 30 dBm at ≥ 10 dB
attenuation)
1.5
see Chap. 4
E-3
Fig. 1-1
1088.7531.12
25
26
27
28
23
REMOTE
20
REF /
UNIT
LEVEL
1.6
24
LOCAL
REMOTE
SRQ
STATUS
SETTING
START
HARDCOPY
SETUP
22
COUPLING /
RUN
SWT
VBW
RBW
SWEEP /
SCAN
TRIGGER
SWEEP
15
14
50 W
16
STEP
EXP
Hz
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
50 W
17
18
BACK
-
PROBE / CODE
HOLD
.
3
MHz
dB
µV
µs
GHz
dBm
mV
ms
-dBm
V
s
DATA VARIATION
CLR
0
2
1
6
9
9
07
DC 0V
MAX
13
MADE IN GERM ANY
RF INPUT 1
INPUT
CONFIG
RECALL
SAVE
MEMORY
1088.7490
+ 30 dBm
MAX
19
4
2
GEN OUTPUT 50W
MENU
3
1
LIMITS
5
8
DATA ENTRY
4
7
8
+ 30 dBm
MAX
21
MKR
TRACE
DELTA
D LINES
LINES
SPAN /
ZOOM
MARKER
START
CENTER /
FREQ
7
NORMAL SEARCH
PROBE POWER
6
FREQUENCY
5
MODE
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
USER
4
CONFIGURATION
AF OUTPUT
3
RANGE
INFO
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB
2
STOP
DISPLAY
CAL
SYSTEM
PRESET
1
12
11
10
Front View
ESIB
Front View
E-3
ESIB
14
Front View
PROBE/CODE
PROBE / CODE
15
Power supply and coded socket for R&S
accessories.(12-pin Tuchel)
see Chap. 8
Input sweep parameters
see Chap. 4
SWEEP
SWEEP
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
Set trigger source. The LED illuminates on
valid trigger.
SWEEP/
SCAN
Define the sweep mode
Define the scan parameters.
SWEEP /
SCAN
RBW
COUPLING/ Set coupled parameters. Resolution
RUN
Bandwidth (RBW), Video Bandwidth
(VBW) and Sweep Time (SWT).
The LEDs light indicating coupled
parameters which are manually cancelled.
Start scan.
VBW
SWT
COUPLING /
RUN
GEN OUTPUT 50Ω
16
GEN OUTPUT 50
17
W
Generator output; N-connector
see Chap. 8
MENU
see Chap. 3
Menu-change keys
MENU
Call main menu
Change to left menu
Change to right menu
18
TRACE
Select and activate measurement traces (Trace 1...4).
TRACE
1
2
3
4
1088.7531.12
see Chap. 4
The LEDs indicate traces turned on.
1.7
E-3
Fig. 1-1
1088.7531.12
25
26
27
28
23
REMOTE
20
REF /
UNIT
LEVEL
1.8
24
LOCAL
REMOTE
SRQ
STATUS
SETTING
START
HARDCOPY
SETUP
22
COUPLING /
RUN
SWT
VBW
RBW
SWEEP /
SCAN
TRIGGER
SWEEP
15
14
50 W
16
STEP
EXP
Hz
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
50 W
17
18
BACK
-
PROBE / CODE
HOLD
.
3
MHz
dB
µV
µs
GHz
dBm
mV
ms
-dBm
V
s
DATA VARIATION
CLR
0
2
1
6
9
9
07
DC 0V
MAX
13
MADE IN GERM ANY
RF INPUT 1
INPUT
CONFIG
RECALL
SAVE
MEMORY
1088.7490
+ 30 dBm
MAX
19
4
2
GEN OUTPUT 50W
MENU
3
1
LIMITS
5
8
DATA ENTRY
4
7
8
+ 30 dBm
MAX
21
MKR
TRACE
DELTA
D LINES
LINES
SPAN /
ZOOM
MARKER
START
CENTER /
FREQ
7
NORMAL SEARCH
PROBE POWER
6
FREQUENCY
5
MODE
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
USER
4
CONFIGURATION
AF OUTPUT
3
RANGE
INFO
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB
2
STOP
DISPLAY
CAL
SYSTEM
PRESET
1
12
11
10
Front View
ESIB
Front View
E-3
ESIB
19
Front View
PROBE POWER
Power supply connector (+15V / - 12.6V) for
measurement accessories (probes)
PROBE POWER
see Chap. 8
20
Reserved for options
21
RF INPUT 2 20 Hz ... 1 GHz
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
+ 30 dBm
MAX
50
22
W
RF-Input 2
Caution:
The maximum power is 1 W
(=;^ 30 dBm at ≥ 10 dB atten.)
see Chap. 4
AF OUTPUT
AF OUTPUT
AF output connector (head phones)
(miniature phone jack)
see Chap. 8
Internal loudspeaker
see Chap. 6
and Chap. 8
23
The loudspeaker is disabled when the phone jack
is inserted in the AF output.
REMOTE
In position REMOTE the volume can be
controlled via remote control command
SYSTem:SPEaker<1|2>:VOLume.
24
ON/STANDBY-switch
see Chap.1
Caution:
In standby mode, the AC line
voltage is still present within the
instrument.
1088.7531.12
1.9
E-3
Fig. 1-1
1088.7531.12
25
26
27
28
23
REMOTE
20
REF /
UNIT
LEVEL
1.10
24
LOCAL
REMOTE
SRQ
STATUS
SETTING
START
HARDCOPY
SETUP
22
COUPLING /
RUN
SWT
VBW
RBW
SWEEP /
SCAN
TRIGGER
SWEEP
15
14
50 W
16
STEP
EXP
Hz
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
50 W
17
18
BACK
-
PROBE / CODE
HOLD
.
3
MHz
dB
µV
µs
GHz
dBm
mV
ms
-dBm
V
s
DATA VARIATION
CLR
0
2
1
6
9
9
07
DC 0V
MAX
13
MADE IN GERM ANY
RF INPUT 1
INPUT
CONFIG
RECALL
SAVE
MEMORY
1088.7490
+ 30 dBm
MAX
19
4
2
GEN OUTPUT 50W
MENU
3
1
LIMITS
5
8
DATA ENTRY
4
7
8
+ 30 dBm
MAX
21
MKR
TRACE
DELTA
D LINES
LINES
SPAN /
ZOOM
MARKER
START
CENTER /
FREQ
7
NORMAL SEARCH
PROBE POWER
6
FREQUENCY
5
MODE
RF INPUT 2 20Hz ... 1GHz
USER
4
CONFIGURATION
AF OUTPUT
3
RANGE
INFO
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESIB
2
STOP
DISPLAY
CAL
SYSTEM
PRESET
1
12
11
10
Front View
ESIB
Front View
E-3
ESIB
25
Front View
STATUS
STATUS
SRQ
REMOTE
Indicators for remote control and switch for manual
control.
LOCAL
LOCAL
26
see Chap. 4 and
Chap. 6
Switch from remote to manual control.
The LED SRQ indicates that a service
request from the instrument is active on the
IEC/IEEE-bus.
The LED REMOTE indicates that the
instrument is under remote control.
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY
START
Printer control
see Chap. 4
START
Start a print job with the setup defined in
the SETTING menu.
SETTING
Configure the diagram, parameter list and
measurement protocol outputs on the
various output media.
SETTING
27
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
MODE
SETUP
28
Select operational modes and define default settings
MODE
Select mode
SETUP
Define configurationss
see Chap. 1 and
Chap. 4
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
PRESET
CAL
DISPLAY
INFO
1088.7531.12
General instrument default settings
PRESET
Recall instrument default settings
DISPLAY
Configure the display screen format
CAL
Calibrate the analyzer
INFO
– Call information concerning instrument
state and measurement parameters
– Call help functions
1.11
see Chap. 4
E-3
51
1088.7531.12
1.12
50
PC MONITOR
SUPPLY
CHECK
30
ON
49
48
LPT
47
46
COM1
IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
OFF
Fig. 1-2
MOUSE
I/Q DATA
OUT
29
45
44
COM2
43
EXT TRIG
GATE
31
42
ANALYZER MONITOR
EXT REF
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
CCVS/FBAS
OUT
32
41
USER PORT
TG IN
I/AM/ALC
33
TG IN
Q/FM
34
40
NOICE
SOURCE
39
36
38
37
KEYBOARD
LOG
VIDEO OUT
SCPI
SWEEP
IEC 625
21.4 MHz
OUT
35
Rear View
ESIB
Rear View
E-3
ESIB
Rear View
Rear View
29
Power switch
see Chap. 1
Fuse holder
AC power connector
30
Power supply fans
31
EXT TRIG/GATE
EXT TRIG
GATE
IN/OUT
32
Input connector for an external trigger or an external
gate signal
see Chap. 4
and
Chap. 8
CCVS/FBAS OUT
Not used in ESIB
33
TG IN I/AM/ALC
Signal input connector for external modulation of
Tracking Generator (option FSE-B11)
TG IN
IN/OUT
I/AM/ALC
34
TG IN Q FM
Signal input connector for external modulation of
Tracking Generator (option FSE-B11)
TG IN
IN/OUT
I/Q FM
35
see Chap. 4
see Chap. 4
21.4 MHZ OUT
21.4 MHz
IN/OUT
OUT
Output connector for 21.4 MHz IF
see Chap. 8
I
1088.7531.12
1.13
E-3
51
1088.7531.12
1.14
50
PC MONITOR
SUPPLY
CHECK
30
ON
49
48
LPT
47
46
COM1
IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
OFF
Fig. 1-2
MOUSE
I/Q DATA
OUT
29
45
44
COM2
43
EXT TRIG
GATE
31
42
ANALYZER MONITOR
EXT REF
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
CCVS/FBAS
OUT
32
41
USER PORT
TG IN
I/AM/ALC
33
TG IN
Q/FM
34
40
NOICE
SOURCE
39
36
38
37
KEYBOARD
LOG
VIDEO OUT
SCPI
SWEEP
IEC 625
21.4 MHz
OUT
35
Rear View
ESIB
Rear View
E-3
ESIB
36
Rear View
LOG VIDEO OUT
Output connector for video signal
LOG
VIDEO
OUT
IN/OUT
37
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
38
SCPI
see Chap. 8
IEC Bus-connector
see Chap. 8
NOISE SOURCE
Output connector for a switchable noise source
see Chap. 8
USER PORT
USER PORT
42
Output connector
During a sweep, a sawtooth voltage is output which is
proportional to frequency.
NOICE
SOURCE
IN/OUT
41
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
IEC625 <SCPI>
IEC 625
40
Connector for an external keyboard
(5-pin DIN socket)
SWEEP
SWEEP
IN/OUT
39
see Chap. 8
User interface connector with configurable inputs and
outputs (USER-PORT A and USER-PORT B)
see Chap. 8
ANALYZER MONITOR
ANALYZER MONITOR
1088.7531.12
Connector for an external VGA monitor
1.15
see Chap. 8
E-3
51
1088.7531.12
1.16
50
PC MONITOR
SUPPLY
CHECK
30
ON
49
48
LPT
47
46
COM1
IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
OFF
Fig. 1-2
MOUSE
I/Q DATA
OUT
29
45
44
COM2
43
EXT TRIG
GATE
31
42
ANALYZER MONITOR
EXT REF
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
CCVS/FBAS
OUT
32
41
USER PORT
TG IN
I/AM/ALC
33
TG IN
Q/FM
34
40
NOICE
SOURCE
39
36
38
37
KEYBOARD
LOG
VIDEO OUT
SCPI
SWEEP
IEC 625
21.4 MHz
OUT
35
Rear View
ESIB
Rear View
E-3
ESIB
43
Rear View
EXT REF IN/OUT
EXT REF
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
44
Input for external reference frequency (1 MHz to 16
MHz), can be switched to output 10 MHz.
see Chap. 4
and
Chap. 8
Connector for serial interface 2
(9-pin socket; COM2)
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
Cover plate for retrofitting option FSE-B16, Ethernet
Interface
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
Connector for serial interface 1
(9-pin socket; COM1)
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
COM2
COM2
45
46
COM1
COM1
47
48
IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION <SCPI> IEC625
see Chap. 5
and
Chap. 8
Parallel interface connector
(printer connector, Centronics compatible)
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
LPT
LPT
49
Cover plate for retrofitting option FSE-B17, Second
IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
I/O DATA OUT
Cover sheet for retrofitting digital interfaces (option
FSE-B77)
50
MOUSE
MOUSE
51
Connector for PS/2-Mouse
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
PC MONITOR
PC MONITOR
1088.7531.12
Connector for an external PC-Monitor
1.17
see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8
E-3
Start-Up
ESIB
Start-Up
The following section describes how to put the instrument into service and how to connect external
devices like eg printer and monitor.
Important Note:
Before turning the instrument on, check the following:
• instrument covers are in place and screwed down,
• fan openings are free from obstructions,
• signal levels at the input connectors are all within specified limits,
• signal outputs are connected correctly and not overloaded.
The instrument may be damaged if the above conditions are not observed.
Unpacking the Instrument
½ Take the instrument out of its transport container and check
whether the items listed in the packing list and in the lists of
accessories are all there.
½ Remove the two protective covers from the front and rear of the
ESIB and carefully check the instrument for damage.
remove protective caps
½ Should the instrument be damaged, immediately notify the carrier
which shipped the instrument to you and keep the container and
packing material.
½ For further transport or shipment of the ESIB the original packing
should also be used. It is recommended to keep at least the two
protective covers for the front and rear to prevent damage to the
controls and connectors.
Setting up the Instrument
Stand-alone Operation
The instrument is designed for use under general laboratory conditions. The ambient conditions must be
as follows:
Wrist strap with cord
Building ground
Ground connection
of operational site
Heel strap
Floor mat
•
The ambient temperature must
recommended in the data sheet.
•
All fan openings must be unobstructed and the air flow at
the rear panel and at the side-panel perforations must not
be obstructed. The distance from the wall should be at
least 10 cm.
•
The ESIB should be placed on a level surface.
•
In order to avoid damage of electronic components of the
instrument or of the device under test due to electrostatic
discharge on manual touch, protection of the operational
site against electrostatic discharge is recommended.
be
in
the
range
For applications in the laboratory or on a work bench, it is recommended that the support feet on the
bottom of the instrument be extended. For the LCD display, this provides the optimum viewing angle
which typically ranges from perpendicular to the display front to approximately 30° below.
1088.7531.12
1.18
E-3
ESIB
Start-Up
19" Rack Installation
Important Note:
When the instrument is rack-mounted, ensure that the air flow through the sidepanel holes and the air outlet in the rear panel are not obstructed.
The instrument may be mounted in a 19" rack by using the rack adapter kit ZZA-95 (order number: see
data sheet). The installation instructions are included in the adapter kit.
EMI Protection Measures
In order to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI), the instrument may be operated only when all
covers are correctly in place. Only adequately shielded signal and control cables may be used (see
recommended accessories).
Connecting to AC Supply
The ESIB features automatic AC-line voltage selection (range: see power supply name-plate). The AC
power connector is located on the rear panel (see below).
½ Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered with the
instrument.
AC Power Line Fuses
The ESIB is protected by two fuses as specified on the power supply name-plate. The fuses are located
in a removable fuse holder which is located between the AC power switch and the AC power connector
(see below).
Switching the Instrument on/off
Caution:
Do not power down during booting. This may corrupt harddisk files.
Note: On power-up, the drive should contain no disk, since otherwise the instrument will try to boot from
the disk.
1088.7531.12
1.19
E-3
Start-Up
ESIB
Power switch
After turn-on (position ON), the instrument is in the ready
state (STANDBY) or in operation dependent upon the
position of the ON/STANDBY switch located on the
instrument front panel (see below).
Ac power switch
I
0
ON
OFF
AC power switch on the rear panel
Fuse holder
Note: The AC power switch can be left ON all the time..
Switching to OFF is only required when the instrument
has to be completely disconnected from the AC power
source.
AC power connector
Switching to OFF (position OFF) disconnects the ESIB
completely from the AC power source.
.
ON/STANDBY switch on the front panel
ON
STANDBY
Standby
½ ON/STANDBY switch is not depressed.
The yellow LED (STANDBY) is on. Only the ESIB‘s
internal power is connected to the AC line. The crystal
oven is maintained at the normal operating temperature.
Operation
Caution:
In standby mode, the ESIB is
still live.
½ ON/STANDBY is depressed.
The green LED (ON) is on. The instrument is ready for
operation. All modules within the instrument are supplied
with power.
Switching on the Instrument
½ To switch on the ESIB, set the power switch on the rear panel to position I.
½ Pressing the ON/STANDBY key on the front panel. The green LED ahould come on.
Startup Menu and Booting
When the instrument is switched on, a message indicating the installed BIOS version (eg Analyzer BIOS
Rev. 1.2) appears on the screen for a few seconds.
Windows NT is booted first and then the instrument firmware. As soon as boot up is over, the instrument
will start measuring. The settings used will be the one that was active when the instrument was
previously switched off, provided no other device configuration than FACTORY had been selected with
AUTO RECALL in the MEMORY menu.
Switching off the Instrument
½ Remove the disk, if any, from the drive before switching off.
½ Press the ON/STANDBY key on the front panel. The yellow LED should come on.
Only when completely disconnecting the ESIB from the AC power source:
½ Set the power switch on the rear panel to position 0.
1088.7531.12
1.20
E-3
ESIB
Functional Test
Energy Saving Mode
The ESIB offers an energy saving mode for the screen display. The screen goes blank if no entries have
been made from the front panel (key, softkey or hotkey and rollkey) for a selectable period of time.
To switch on the energy saving mode:
1. Call the SYSTEM DISPLAY - CONFIG DISPLAY submenu to configure the screen display:
½ Press the DISPLAY key
½ Press the CONFIG DISPLAY softkey
2. Activate the save mode
½ Press the SCR. SAVER ON softkey.
The softkey is highlighted, indicating that the energy saving mode is on. At the
same time the data entry for the shutdown time opens.
3. Enter the shutdown time
½ Press the SCR. SAVER TIME softkey.
½ Enter the shutdown time in minutes and confirm the entry using the ENTER key.
The screen will go blank when the shut down time elapsed.
Battery Backed-up Memory
The ESIB has a battery-powered read/write memory (CMOS-RAM) for backing up instrument settings
on power-off. After each power-on, the ESIB is reloaded with the operational parameters which were
active just prior to the last power-off (STANDBY or AC power OFF) or were set with AUTO RECALL
(see Chapter 4 "Saving and Recalling Data Sets").
A lithium battery powers the CMOS-RAM. When the battery goes flat (after approx. 5 years), any data
stored in the CMOS-RAM will be lost. If this happens, the factory setup is loaded on power up. As the
ESIB has to be opened to replace the battery, please contact the representative of our company
responsible for you for changing batteries.
Function Test
On power up, the ESIB displays the following message on the screen:
Receiver BIOS
Rev.x.y
Copyright
Rohde & Schwarz
Munich
Booting
A self-test of the digital hardware is then performed. If the self-test finds no faults, Windows NT is
booted up and the instrument starts measuring.
Any errors which occur in self-test are transferred as ASCII text to the printer interface (LPT). Therefore,
an error diagnosis can be carried out, even for serious failures.
A check of the data contents of the instrument is performed in system error correction (CAL, CAL
TOTAL key) The individual results of the correction (PASSED / FAILED) can be displayed in the
calibration menu.
With the aid of the built-in self-test functions (INFO key, SELFTEST soft key), the functional integrity of
the instrument can be verified and/or defective modules can be localized.
1088.7531.12
1.21
E-3
Windows NT Controller Function
ESIB
Controller Function - Windows NT
Caution:
The drivers used in the integrated controller function are specially configured for the
instrument. To prevent functions crashing, only the settings described below should
be used. Only the update software released by Rohde&Schwarz should be used to
update the drivers. Only programs authorized by Rohde&Schwarz for use on the
instrument may be run on the instrument.
Do not power down during booting. This may corrupt the harddisk files.
The instrument has an integrated Windows-NT controller. The user can switch between the
measurement screen and the controller screen. When an external monitor is connected, the
measurement function and the controller function can be displayed simultaneously (see section
"Connecting an External Monitor"). The controller function is automatically booted on power-up.
Windows NT operation is described in the supplied manual or in the online help of Windows NT.
Login
The user has to login to Windows NT by entering his name and password. As a factory default, the
instrument is configured for Auto Login, i.e. the login is performed automatically and in the background.
The user name used is then "instrument" and the password is also "instrument" (lower case).
To login under another name, call up the logout window in the task bar with START - SHUT DOWN.
Mark the item "Close all programs and log on as a different user?" in the window and click YES while
holding the SHIFT key down until the login window is displayed to enter the user identification. The
password should be entered in the correct syntax including lower-case and upper-case characters.
Administrator identification
Some of the installations (eg CD-ROM drive) described below require the administrator login. This is
indicated in the relevant window.
The administrator is an identification which in particular allows system settings which are disabled for
the standard user.
The password for the administrator is 894129 for the instrument.
After an installation under the administrator identification, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT has to be
re-installed, see section "Installation of Windows NT Software".
On power-up following an installation under the administrator identification, the NT login window is
displayed (no autologin). The user name "Administrator" is indicated in the window. This entry is to be
replaced by "instrument" and then "instrument" as password entered. An autologin is then possible.
Changeover between measurement screen and controller screen
To call up the controller screen use key combination <ALT><SYSREQ> (US keyboard).
To return to the measurement screen, activate the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" on the controller.
Logout
The instrument can be switched off (standby mode). Logging out of Windows NT is not necessary.
1088.7531.12
1.22
E-3
ESIB
Connecting an External Keyboard
Connecting a Mouse
Caution:
The keyboard may only be connected when the instrument is switched off
(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the keyboard cannot be guaranteed.
A mouse can be connected to the PS/2 (MOUSE) connector on the rear panel of the instrument to make
it easier to use.
MOUSE
During measurements, softkeys, tables and data input fields may also be controlled by mouse. For
computer function, the mouse has the usual functions.
The control functions for the mouse during measurement operation are described in Chapter 3 in the
section "Mouse Control of Further Display Elements". This section contains a list in which the screen
display elements for mouse control of the corresponding softkeys and push buttons of the instrument
are described. Chapter 8 describes the connector interface.
After connection of the mouse and subsequent power-on, the mouse will be automatically recognized.
Special settings such as mouse cursor speed etc., can be made in the Windows NT menu START SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - MOUSE.
1088.7531.12
1.23
E-3
Connecting a Mouse
ESIB
Connecting an External Keyboard
Caution:
The mouse may only be connected when the instrument is switched off
(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the mouse and instrument cannot be
guaranteed.
The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel 5-contact DIN connector (KEYBOARD) for the connection of
an external PC keyboard.
KEYBOARD x
During measurements, the keyboard makes it easier to enter comments, filenames, etc. For computer
function, the keyboard has the usual functions.
Chapter 3, in section "External Keyboard Control", contains a list which describes the assignment of the
instrument front-panel key functions to the key codes of the external keyboard as well as special key
combinations used for quick operations. Chapter 8 describes the interface for the connector.
After connection of the keyboard and subsequent power-on, the keyboard will be automatically
recognized. The default setting is for the US keyboard. Special settings such as repetitional rate etc. can
be performed in Windows NT menu START - SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - KEYBOARD.
1088.7531.12
1.24
E-3
ESIB
Connecting an External Monitor
Connecting an External Monitor
Caution:
The monitor may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY).
Otherwise, the monitor may be damaged.
Do not modify the screen driver (display type) as this would cause a malfunction.
Notes:
- When connecting the monitor to the PC MONITOR connector, the display of controller
function can be adapted to the external screen (eg higher resolution) in the NT menu
START-SETTING - CONTROL PANEL - DISPLAY PROPERTIES.
- CHIPS (setting = both) should not be modified since otherwise switching between the
external monitor and the instrument screen is not possible.
The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel connector PC MONITOR or ANALYZER MONITOR for an
external monitor.
PC MONITOR
ANALYZ ER MONITOR
Chapter 8 describes the connector interface.
With an external monitor it is possible to have an enlarged display of the measurement screen
(ANALYZER MONITOR connector) or of the controller screen (PC MONITOR connector). The
measuring instrument and the Windows NT controller can be operated in parallel. The mouse and the
keyboard are allocated to only one mode.
Display of the measurement screen - Connection to ANALYZER MONITOR connector
Connection
After connecting the external monitor the measurement screen is displayed on both the external monitor
and the instrument. Further settings are not necessary.
Operation
The instrument is operated as usual via its softkeys, the mouse and keyboard, etc..
Toggle between measurement screen and controller screen
Key combination <ALT><SYSREQ> is used to call up the controller. After call up, the mouse and
keyboard are allocated to the controller function.
By activating the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" the user returns to the measurement screen and the
mouse and keyboard are allocated to this screen.
Display of the controller screen - Connection to PC MONITOR connector
Connection
After connecting the monitor external monitor operation should be selected.
Setting is performed in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu (key group: CONFIGURATION, see in
Chapter 4, the section "Presettings and Interface Configuration"):
1088.7531.12
1.25
E-3
Connecting an External Monitor
ESIB
Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu
CONFIGURATION
EXTERNAL
MODE
REFERENCE
½ Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION
field.
The SETUP menu is opened.
SETUP
GENERAL
SETUP
½ Press the GENERAL SETUP softkey.
The GENERAL SETUP submenu is opened and the
current settings of the instrument parameters are
displayed on the screen in the form of tables.
MONITOR
CONNECTED
Selecting the external monitor mode
½ Press the MONITOR CONNECTED softkey.
The softkey is in color to indicate that the external
monitor mode is activated. The external monitor
displays the controller screen.
Operation
The controller function is operated as usual with the mouse and keyboard. The measuring instrument
(displayed on the instrument screen) can be operated with both the softkeys and keys of the instrument.
Toggle between screens
By activating (clicking) the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" at the controller the mouse and keyboard
are allocated to the measurement screen. The mouse and keyboard are allocated to the controller when
the window is deactivated.
1088.7531.12
1.26
E-3
ESIB
Connecting a Printer
Connecting a Printer
Caution:
The printer may be connected only when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY)
Notes:
- The installation of some printer drivers is possible only under the administrator identification
(see section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function".
- If bad printouts are produced after installing the printer driver, it is recommended to obtain
the latest drivers from the printer manufacturer (eg via Internet). Experience has shown that
printer problems are thus solved in most cases.
The instrument provides an option for connecting up to three different printers to provide screen
hardcopy.
The interfaces can also be used for printing in the controller mode. The output formats "WMF"
(Windows Metafile) and "Clipboard" are preset. A large number of output devices can be connected
under Windows NT after installing suitable printer drivers.
The output devices supported by the instrument can be found in the selection box DEVICE/LANGUAGE
in the HARDCOPY –SETTINGS DEVICE1/2 menu (see in Chapter 4, the section "Documentation of
Measurement Results"). To print out via the COM interface, the latter must be assigned the controller
function in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu (owner = OS).
Chapter 8 describes the connector interfaces.
The interface connectors are located on the rear panel:
LPT
COM1
COM2
After the printer has been connected to the appropriate interface connector, the interface needs to be
configured, the printer driver has to be installed and assigned to an interface.
1. Connecting the keyboard and mouse
Ti install and configure of printer drivers on the ESIB, it is necessary to connect a keyboard to the front
panel and a PS/2 mouse to the rear panel (see sections "Connecting a Mouse" and "Connecting a
Keyboard").
2. Configuring of the interface
LPT1
The LPT1 needs no configuration.
Note:
COM1/COM2
1088.7531.12
An external CM-ROM drive can be connected to this interface. If this is
the case, one of the serial interfaces can be used for the printout.
The COM interfaces have to be assigned to the controller function (OWNER = OS)
in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu. The configuration of serial interfaces
COM1 and COM2 can then be performed in the Windows NT menu START SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - PORTS. The parameters COM PORTS
BAUDRATE, BITS, PARITY, STOPBITS, HW/SW-HANDSHAKE must be those
specified for the printer in question (see the operating manual for the output
device).
1.27
E-3
Connecting a Printer
ESIB
Note:
The serial interfaces can be used for remote control when the analyzer
is made the owner (Owner = Instrument). The settings made for the
serial interface in the menu SETUP - GENERAL SETUP overwrite the
settings in the NT menu..
However, settings in the Windows NT menu do not overwrite those of
the SETUP menu. This means that the settings are only valid as long as
the interface is assigned to the operating system.
3. Selection and installation of the printer driver
The selection and installation of the printer driver, the assignment to the interface and the setting of
most of the printer-specific parameters (eg paper size) is performed under Windows NT in the
START - SETTINGS - PRINTER menu.
4. Configuration of the connected output device
The printer connected to the instrument is configured in the HARDCOPY DEVICE–SETTINGS
DEVICE1/2 menu (key group: HARDCOPY, see Chapter 4, Section "Selection and Configuration of
the Output Device "). The configuration of one or two output devices (DEVICE1 and DEVICE2) can
be entered, at least one of which must be activated for printing.
• The parameter DEVICE/LANGUAGE determines which printer is used.
• The parameter PRINT TO FILE determines if the output is written to a file.
• The parameter ORIENTATION sets the page format to horizontal or vertical (landscape or
portrait).
Selecting the printer type automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION to
values which correspond to the standard mode for this printer. Other printer-dependent parameters
such as FORMFEED, PAPERFEED etc., can be modified under Windows NT in the printer
properties window (START/SETTINGS/PRINTERS/SETTINGS/....).
Table 1-1 shows the standard factory settings for the two output devices.
The factory settings of DEVICE 1 correspond to the "WMF" (Windows Metafile) output format, with
printout to a file. WMF is a common format which is used to import of hardcopies (eg of
measurement windows) to other Windows applications that support this format (eg WinWord).
The factory setting of DEVICE 2 is "Clipboard". In this setting, the printout is copied to the Windows
NT clipboard. Most Windows applications support the clipboard. The clipboard contents can be
directly inserted into a document with EDIT - PASTE.
Table 1-1 Factory settings for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the HARDCOPY-DEVICE SETTINGS menu.
Parameter
Parameter name
DEVICE 1 settings
DEVICE 2 settings
Output device
DEVICE
WINDOWS METAFILE
CLIPBOARD
Output
PRINT TO FILE
YES
---
Paper orientation
ORIENTATION
---
---
In the following example, an HP DeskJet 660C printer is connected to interface LPT1 and configured as
DEVICE2 for hardcopies of the screen.
Switch off ESIB.
Connect printer to the LPT1 interface .
Switch on both the ESIB and the printer.
1088.7531.12
1.28
E-3
ESIB
Connecting a Printer
Select printer driver under Windows NT
½ Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.
½ In the Start menu click on "Settings" and
then "Printers".
The printer window is opened.
½ Double-click "Add Printer".
The "Add Printer Wizard" window is
opened. This window leads through the
following printer driver installation.
½ Click first "My computer" and then "Next".
The available ports are displayed.
½ Select LPT1 port.
The selection is indicated by a tick.
½ "Click "Next".
The available printer drivers are displayed.
The left-hand selection table indicates the
manufacturers and the right-hand one the
available printer drivers.
1088.7531.12
1.29
E-3
Connecting a Printer
ESIB
½ Mark "HP" in the "Manufacturers" selection
table and "HP DeskJet 660C" in the
"Printers" selection table .
Note: If the required printer type is not in the
list, the driver has not yet been
installed. In this case click "HAVE
DISK". A message box requesting to
insert a disk with the printer driver will
be displayed. Insert the disk, press OK
and select the printer driver. After
installation, Service Pack must be
reinstalled (see section "Installing
Windows NT Software").
½ Click "Next".
The entry field for the printer name is
displayed.
½ The printer name can be modified in the
entry field "Printer name" (max. 60
characters).
If one or more printers have already been
installed, a query is displayed in this
window to ask if the printer last installed as
the default printer should be selected for
the Windows NT applications (Do you
want your Windows-based programs to
use this printer as default printer?) "No" is
preset.
½ Click "Next".
A query is displayed whether the printer is
to be shared with other network users..
This query is irrelevant when installing a
local printer. The answer "Not shared" is
preset.
½ Click "Next".
The window for printing a test page is
displayed. The test page is for checking if
the installation was successful.
1088.7531.12
1.30
E-3
ESIB
Connecting a Printer
½ Switch on printer.
½ Click Yes (recommended)".
½ Click "Finish".
A test page is printed out if the installation
was successful.
If the test page is not printed out or not
completely, the Windows NT online help
offers troubleshooting instructions under
the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting".
Note:
If a request for the printer driver path
appears after clicking "Finish", this printer
installation should be performed under the
administrator identification (see section
"Controller Function".
Now, the instrument needs to be configured
so that hardcopies of
the measurement
screen can be printed out on this printer.
Configuring HP DeskJet 660C.
½ Click the "R&S Analyzer Interface" button.
The measurement screen is displayed.
½ Press the SETTINGS key in the
HARDCOPY field.
H AR D CO P Y
START
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
ON
The SETTING menu is opened.
COLOR
OFF
SETTING
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
½ Press the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey.
The HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu is
opened and the current settings of the two
possible output devices are displayed in
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS-table.
SETTINGS
DEVICE2
1088.7531.12
½ Press the SETTING DEVICE2 softkey.
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS
Device1
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
YES
Orientation
---
Device2
CLIPBOARD
Print to File
---
Orientation
---
Line DEVICE2
selection bar.
1.31
is
marked
with
the
E-3
Connecting a Printer
DATA ENTRY
-dBm
s
V
ESIB
½ Press one of the unit keys.
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS
GHz
Device1
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
YES
Orientation
---
Device2
CLIPBOARD
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
---
ENHANCED METAFILE
Orientation
---
BITMAP FILE
DEVICE
CLIPBOARD
The DEVICE selection box is displayed on
the screen. The current selection is
marked by a tick and highlighted by the
selection bar.
HP DeskJet 660C
½ Press the cursor key à until the entry
HP DeskJet 600C is highlighted by the
selection bar.
DATA VARIATION
-dBm
s
V
GHz
½ Press one of the unit keys.
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS
DATA ENTRY
Device1
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
YES
Orientation
---
Device2
HP Deskjet 660C
Print to File
NO
Orientation
PORTRAIT
The DEVICE selection box is closed and
HP DeskJet 660C is entered in the
DEVICE2 row.
Note:
Selecting the printertype automatically sets
the parameters PRINT TO FILE and
ORIENTATION to standard mode values for
this printer. Other printer-dependent
parameters such as PAPERSIZE, can be
modified under Windows NT in the printer
properties window
(START/SETTINGS/PRINTER/SETTINGS)..
Start printing.
ENABLE
DEV1 DEV2
½ Press the ENABLE softkey until DEV2 is
marked on the second softkey line.
Printing can then be started with the
START key in the HARDCOPY menu.
Return to main menu
MENU
½ Press the menu key several times.
Note:
1088.7531.12
1.32
After the installation, the "Service
Pack" of Windows NT is to be reinstalled, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".
E-3
ESIB
Connecting a Printer
Installation of a Network Printer (with option FSE-B16 only)
After opening the "Printers" dialog window
proceed with the installation as follows:
½ Double-click the "Add Printer" line.
The "Add Printer Wizard" window is
opened. This window guides the user
through the printer driver installation.
½ Click "Network printer server" and then
"Next".
A window to set the path to the printer
server is displayed.
½ Set the path to the desired printer server,
mark it and select it with OK.
½ Confirm the following request for the
installation of a suitable printer driver with
OK.
The list of printer drivers is displayed.
The manufacturers are listed in the
window at the left, the available printer
drivers at the right.
1088.7531.12
1.33
E-3
Connecting a Printer
ESIB
½ Select the manufacturer in the
"Manufacturers" window and then the
printer driver in the "Printers" window.
Note:
If the required type of output device is not
included in the list, the driver has not yet
been installed. In this case click on button
"HAVE DISK". A message box requesting
to insert a disk with the corresponding
printer driver will be displayed. Insert the
disk, press OK and select the required
printer driver.
½ Click "Next"
If one or more printers are already
installed, a prompt is displayed in this
window to ask if the printer last installed as
default printer should be selected for the
Windows NT applications ("Do you want
your Windows-based programs to use this
printer as default printer?"). The default
selection is "No".
½ Start the printer driver installation with
"Finish".
Note:
If a prompt for the printer driver path
appears after pressing "Finish", the
Service Pack must be re-installed after this
printer installation (see Chapter 1, section
"Installing Windows NT Software").
After installation, the instrument has to be configured for printout with this printer in the HCOPY SETTINGS menu.
Finally, Service Pack x must be re-installed (see section "Installing Windows NT Software").
1088.7531.12
1.34
E-3
ESIB
Connecting a CD ROM Drive
Connecting a CD-ROM Drive
Caution:
The CD-ROM may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY).
If this is not observed correct operation of the CD-ROM and the instrument cannot be
guaranteed.
Notes:
- The installation of a CD-ROM is possible only under the administrator identification (see
section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function",
The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel interface LPT1 for the connection of a CD-ROM drive.
LPT
The following CD-ROM drives are supported:
− MICROSOLUTIONS BACKPACK External CD-ROM.
− FREECOM IQ DRIVE
− ADAPTEC Parallel SCSI Adapter + SCSI CD-ROM
After connection, the CD-ROM drive is to be installed under Windows NT.
Switch off ESIB.
Connect CD-ROM drive to interface LPT1 of the
instrument and to AC power source.
Switch on ESIB.
Administrator identification
½ Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.
½ Call the logout window with "Shut Down" in
the "Start" menu.
1088.7531.12
1.35
E-3
Connecting a CD ROM Drive
ESIB
½ Mark entry "Shut down and log on as a
different user".
½ Press the "Shift" key and click button "Yes" at
the same time.
The login window is displayed.
½ Enter "administrator" under "name" and
"894129" under "password", confirm entry
with "OK".
Select driver under Windows NT
½ In the Start menu press first "Setting" and
then "Control Panel".
The system control window is opened.
½ Double-click "SCSI Adapters".
The "SCSI Adapters" window is opened.
½ Click the "Driver" index card and then button
"Add".
The list of installed drivers is displayed.
½ Click "Have Disk".
This window leads through the following
installation.
Note:
1088.7531.12
1.36
After the installation, the "Service Pack"
of Windows NT is to be re-installed,
see "New Installation of Windows NT
Software.
E-3
ESIB
Installing Windows NT Software
Firmware Update
The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built-in diskette drive and does
not require opening the receiver. The firmware update kit contains several diskettes.
The installation program is called up in the CONFIGURATION - SETUP menu.
Insert diskette 1 into the drive.
CONFIGURATION
MODE
Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu
½ Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION
field.
SETUP
The SETUP menu is opened.
MENU
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
UPDATE
½ Change to the right-hand menu using the menu key.
½ Press the FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey.
The submenu is opened.
½ Press the UPDATE softkey.
The installation program starts and leads the user
through the remaining steps of the update.
The installation can be cancelled.
RESTORE
½ Press the RESTORE softkey.
The previous firmware version is restored.
1088.7531.12
1.37
E-3
Firmware Update
ESIB
Installing Windows NT Software
The driver software and the Windows NT system settings are exactly adapted to the measurement
functions of the instrument. Correct operation of the instrument can, therefore, be guaranteed only if the
software and hardware used is released or provided by Rohde & Schwarz.
The use of other software or hardware may cause the ESIB to malfunction.
The latest list of software authorized for use on the ESIB can be obtained from your nearest
Rohde&Schwarz agency (see list of addresses).
After each software installation requiring the administrator identification, "Service Pack" of Windows NT
must be re-installed (also with administrator identification; see section "Controller Function"):
Re-installing Service Pack
½ In the Start menu click "Run".
The entry window opens.
Service Pack 5:
½ Enter "C:\SP5\I386\UPDATE\UPDATE" into
command line and start installation with "OK".
the
The following window leads through the installation.
Service Pack 3:
½ Enter "C:\SP3\I386\UPDATE" into the command line
and start installation with "OK".
The following window leads through the installation.
1088.7531.12
1.38
E-3
ESIB
Options
Options
This section describes options FSE-B17, Second IEC/IEE Interface, and FSE-B16, Ethernet Interface.
Note: - Option ESIB-B1, Linear Video Output,
Detectors’
is described in Chapter 4, Section ’Selection of
- Options FSE-B10 to B12, Tracking Generator, are described in Chapter 4, Section ’Tracking
Generator
Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface
Notes:
- The installation of option FSE-B17 is possible only under the administrator identification
(see section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function".
- Interface "COM2" is no longer available after installation of option FSE-B17.
Besides the instrument external devices can also be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus using the optional
2nd bus interface FSE-B17 and the computer function for instrument. The interface software permits
IEC/IEEE-bus commands to be included in user programs. The installation instructions are enclosed
with the option.
Installing the software
The operating software is already installed and need not be loaded from the driver diskettes which serve
as backup diskettes.
The driver must be loaded on the start-up of Windows NT. To do this, enter the type of board, configure
the board and enter the parameters for the connected equipment. If the option is factory fitted, all this
has been done in the factory.
The following parameters may not be changed after selection on configuration of the board:
Board Type ...................AT-GPIB/TNT
Base I/O Address .............02C0h
Interrupt Level ..............3
DMA Channel ..................5
Enable Auto Serial Polling ...No
For further parameters, refer to manual for the board.
Selecting the board type
½ Click "Start" in the task bar.
½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control
Panel" and "GPIB" in this sequence.
The "GPIB Configuration" menu for
selecting the board type and configuring
the board is opened.
½ Click button "Board Type".
The "Board Type" menu for selecting the
board type is opened.
1088.7531.12
1.39
E-3
Options
ESIB
½ Mark "GPIB0" in the "GPIB Board" list.
½ Mark "AT-GPIB/TNT" in the "Board Type"
list.
½ Confirm the selection with "OK".
The "GPIB Configuration"
displayed again.
menu
is
½ Click button "Configure".
The "GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT)" menu for
configuring the board is opened.
Configuring the board
½ Set "3" in the "Interrupt Level" list.
½ Click button "Software".
The menu is extended.
½ Deactivate (= no tick) "Enable Auto Serial
Polling" in the "Advanced Items" field.
½ Quit the menu with "OK".
The "GPIB Configuration" menu is displayed
again.
Note:
The settings of the following parameters
should not be no longer modified.
Board Type ......... AT-GPIB/TNT
Base I/O Address ......... 02C0h
Interrupt Level .............. 3
DMA Channel .................. 5
Enable Auto Serial Polling .. No
1088.7531.12
1.40
E-3
ESIB
Options
Setting the parameters for the connected
equipment
½ Mark the instrument in the "Device
Template" list and confirm selection with
"OK".
The "DEV.. Settings" menu is opened.
½ Perform the settings for the selected unit
in the "DEV.. Settings" menu.
The logic name for the instrument is preset
with DEV1 and address 20. See board
manual for further units.
Note:
When assigning logic names to
connected equipment note that
these names do not correspond to
the directory names under DOS.
½ Terminate setting with "OK".
The query asking if the GPIB software
should be re-started is displayed.
½ Select "No".
½ Re-start controller with Start-Restart in the
task bar.
After the controller has been re-started,
the settings for the GPIB interface are
effective.
Note:
After the installation, the "Service
Pack" of Windows NT is to be reinstalled, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".
Use of DOS Programs
When using DOS programs, driver GPIB-NT.COM should be loaded. For this to take place, the line
device=C:\PROGRA~1\NATION~1\GPIB\NI488\DosWin16\Gpib-nt.com has to be activated in
the file C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\CONFIG.NT. If the option is factory fitted, this line will have been
entered in the factory.
Operation
The second IEC/IEEE-bus interface corresponds physically to that of the instrument (see Chapter 8).
If the instrument is to be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus, a bus cable must be plugged to both bus
connectors. The interface can be driven under DOS/WINDOWS3.1/95/NT by R&S software (FS-K3,
Order No. 1057.3028.02, etc.) or by user-written software. The handling of IEC/IEEE-bus commands in
user programs is described in the manual for the card.
The files are in directory C:\Program Files\National Instrument\GPIB\NI488.
1088.7531.12
1.41
E-3
Options
ESIB
Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter
With the option Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16, the device can be connected to an Ethernet-LAN (local area
network). It is possible to transmit data via the network and to use the network printer. The adapter
operates with a 10 MHz Ethernet in line with standards IEEE 802.3 10Base2 (Thin Ethernet,
CheaperNet, BNC-Net) (B16 model 03) or 10Base5 (Thick Ethernet) (B16 model 02).
Hardware Installation
Caution:
Prior to installation contact the network administrator, especially in case of complex
LAN installations since mistakes in cabling might have influence the whole network.
If the adapter is installed at the factory, it is preconfigured. In case of retrofitting, refer to the installation
instructions. The hardware settings must not be modified since the functions of the device could
otherwise be impaired.
The following parameters are factory-set:
I/O Addr. 300,
IRQ 5,
MEM D0000
The connection with the network depends on the connectors used in the network.
BNC (Thin Ethernet, CheaperNet; FSE-B16 Var. 03)
Connection
Network traffic
Requirements
The device is looped into the LAN segment via rear-panel 2 BNC
connectors.
If a cable is not connected to one of the BNC connectors, this BNC
connector has to be terminated with 50 Ohm. BNC T connectors
must not be used.
Note that the network traffic is disturbed if a segment is interrupted.
Thin Ethernet segment requirements have to be complied with:
- maximum segment length of 185 m
- minimum distance between the connectors of 0.5 m
- maximum of 30 connectors per segment.
If components that comply with enhanced requirements are
exclusively used (Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16 complies with the
enhanced requirements):
- maximum length of segment of 300 m
- maximum number of connectors of 100
With repeaters used:
- maximum total length of the network of 900 m containing a
- maximum of 3 segments
- maximum of two repeaters between two connectors
1088.7531.12
1.42
E-3
ESIB
Options
AUI (Thick Ethernet; FSE B16 Var. 02)
Connection
The device is connected to the LAN segment using a transceiver
cable (DB-15 AUI connector, not part of the equipment supplied)
which is connected to the rear panel and to the transceiver.
Network traffic
The connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The device
can also be disconnected from the network without any problems
but make sure that data are not being transmitted.
Requirements
The Thick Ethernet segment requirements have to be taken into
account.
- The maximum segment length should be 500 m and the
- distance between the connectors should at least be 2.5 m.
- A maximum of 100 connectors may be used in a segment.
With repeaters used,
- the total length of the network must not be more than 2500 m
containing
- a maximum of 3 segments.
- There should be no more than two repeaters between two
connectors.
If other network components are used, these conditions may vary.
RJ45 (UTP, 10BaseT, Western Connector)
Connection
The device is connected to the LAN segment using a RJ45 cable
(not part of the equipment supplied) which is connected to the rear
panel and to the network hub of the LAN segment.
Network traffic
This connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The
device can also be disconnected from the network without any
problems but make sure that data are not being transmitted.
Requirements
Since RJ45 is not a bus but a star topology no special requirements
have to be taken into account for the connection.
The LAN requirements should be considered in the installation.
Software Installation
Data transmission within the network is by means of data blocks, the so-called packets. Besides user
data other information, the so-called protocol data (transmitter, receiver, type of data, order) are
transmitted. The drivers corresponding to the protocol have to be installed to process protocol
information. A network operating system is required for network services (data transmission, directory
services, printing in the network) and thus has to be installed.
1088.7531.12
1.43
E-3
Options
ESIB
Calling up Configuration Menu for Network Settings
½ Click "Start" in the task bar.
½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control
Panel" and "Network".
The "Network" configuration menu for
network settings is opened.
Registering the Identification
Note: It is important for the computer name to be unique in the network..
½ Select "Identification".
½ Confirm computer and workgroup names
with "OK" or enter new names in submenu
"Change".
1088.7531.12
1.44
E-3
ESIB
Options
Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network Adapter
½ Select "Adapter".
½ Click "Add" and mark network driver "SMC
8416 EtherEZ" and select with "OK".
The query "Files.." is displayed.
½ Answer it by clicking "Continue".
The "SMCEthernet Card Setup" window is
displayed.
½ Close the window with "OK".
Some files are copied and the network
adapter is displayed under "Network
Adapters".
The entry "MS Loopback Adapter" refers
to a driver which ensures instrument
control and should not be modified.
Note: The network adapter settings must
not be modified since this may cause
problems to the instrument.
Installation of Network Protocols
Note: The network administrator knows which protocols are to be used..
½ Select "Protocol".
½ Click "Add", mark the desired protocol and
select with "OK".
This operation has to be performed
several times when several protocols are
selected.
½ Execute the
"Continue".
installation
by
clicking
Note: If a protocol requires further settings,
they can be performed with "Properties" after marking the corresponding
entry.
If further settings are not
possible, this field is gray.
1088.7531.12
1.45
E-3
Options
ESIB
Installation of Network Services
To utilize the resources of the network it is necessary to install the corresponding services.
Note: The network administrator knows which services are to be used.
½ Select "Services".
½ Click "Add", mark the desired service and
select with "OK".
This operation has to be performed
several times when several services are
selected.
Some services are pre-installed and can
be cleared with "Remove" if they are not
needed.
½ Execute the
"Continue".
installation
by
clicking
Note: If a service requires further settings,
they can be performed with
"Properties" after marking the corresponding entry. If further settings are
not possible, this field is gray.
Terminating the Installation
½ Quit the "Network" configuration menu for
network settings with "OK".
The settings are checked and processed.
Missing information is queried.
½ Answer the query "You must shutdown..."
with "Yes".
The settings are valid after computer restart.
Note:
1088.7531.12
1.46
After the installation, the "Service
Pack" of Windows NT is to be reinstalled, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".
E-3
ESIB
Options
Examples of Configurations
Network
Protocols
Services
Notes
NOVELL Netware
NWLink IPX/SPX
Compatible
Transport
Client Service for
NetWare
The "Frame Type" used under "Protocols Properties" should be set.
IP networks
(FTP, TELNET, WWW,
GOPHER, etc.)
TCP/IP Protocol
Simple TCP/IP
Services
An "IP Address" unambiguous in the network
should be set under "Protocols - Properties".
MICROSOFT network
NetBEUI Protocol
or
TCP/IP Protocol
Workstation
Server
A name unambiguous in the network should be
registered under "Identification - Computer
Name".
Operation
After installing the network operating system it is possible to transfer data between the device and other
computers and to use printers in the network. A precondition for network operation is the authorization to
use network resources. Resources may be access to the file directories of other computers or the use of
a central printer. The network or server administrator will grant the authorizations. The network name of
the resource and the corresponding authorization are required. Passwords protect the resources
against improper use. A user name is normally assigned to every authorized user. The user also has a
password. Resources may then be assigned to the user. The type of access, i.e. whether data are only
read or also written as well as a shared access to data has to be defined. Other types are possible
depending on the network operating system.
NOVELL
Operating system NETWARE from NOVELL is as server-supported system. Data transfer between the
individual workstations is not possible. Data transfer is between workstation computers and a central
computer, the server. This server provides storage capacity and the connection to the network printers.
Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to the workstation as
virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be processed accordingly.
This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal printers.
Network operating system NOVELL is available in two forms: NETWARE 3 and NETWARE 4 NDS. In
the previous version NETWARE 3, each server manages its own resources itself and is independent. A
user has to be managed separately on each server. For NOVELL 4 NDS, all resources are managed in
the NDS (NOVELL DIRECTORY SERVICE). The user only has to log in once and gains access to the
resources released for him. The individual resources and the user are managed as objects in a
hierarchical tree (NDS TREE). The position of the object in the tree is called CONTEXT for NETWARE
and must be known in order to access the resources.
MICROSOFT
For MICROSOFT, data can be transferred between workstations (peer-to-peer) but also between
workstations and servers. The servers can provide access to individual files as well as the connection to
network printers. Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to
the workstation as virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be
processed accordingly. This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal
printers. A connection to DOS, WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS, WINDOWS95, WINDOWS NT is
possible.
1088.7531.12
1.47
E-3
Options
ESIB
Installing a user
After the network software has been installed, the instrument logs with an error message during the next
start-up since there is no user "Instrument" (= user identification for NT autologin) in the network. It is
therefore necessary to install a user which should be the same for Windows NT and for the network.
The network administrator is responsible for the installation of new users in the network.
Note:
The installation of new users is possible only under the administrator identification (see
section "Controller Function").
½ Click "Start" in the task bar.
½ Click
consecutively
"Programs"
"Administrative Tools (Common)" and
"User Manager" .
The "User Manager" menu is opened.
½ Click "User" and select "New User".
The menu "New User" for entering user
data is opened.
½ Fill in the lines "Username", "Password"
and "Confirm Password" and confirm
the entry with OK.
The user data should correspond to the
network settings.
1088.7531.12
1.48
E-3
ESIB
Options
Only NOVELL network:
Configure NOVELL Client
½ Click "Start" in the task bar.
½
Click
consecutively
"Settings",
"Control Panel", "CSNW".
NOVELL 3.x
½ Click "Preferred Server".
½
Under "Select Preferred Server"
select the NOVELL server for which
the user has been installed.
NOVELL 4.x
½ Click "Default Tree and Context" .
½ Enter the NDS Tree under "Tree" and,
under "Context", the hierarchical path
for which the user has been installed.
Note: These specifications
obtained from the
administrator.
can be
network
Login in the Network
Network login is automatically performed with the operating system login. A prerequisite is that the user
name and the password are the same under Windows NT and in the network.
Use of Network Drives
½ Click "Start" in the task bar.
½ Click consecutively "Programs" and
"Windows NT Explorer".
½ Click "Network"
Directories" list.
line
in
the
"All
A list of available network drives is
displayed.
½ Click "Tools" and "Map Network Drive".
In the list "Shared Directories:" the
network paths available in the network
are displayed.
½ Mark the desired network path.
1088.7531.12
1.49
E-3
Options
ESIB
½ Select the drive under "Drive:"
½ Activate "Reconnect at Logon:" if the
link is to be automatically established at
each unit start.
½ Connect the network path to the
selected drive with "OK".
The user name and the password are
queried. The drive is then displayed in
the "All Directories" list of Explorer.
Note:
Only drives for which an
authorization is available may
be connected.
Disconnect link:
½ Click "Tools" and "Disconnect Network
Drive" in Explorer.
½ Select under "Drive:" the drive whose
connection is to be removed.
½ Disconnect link with "OK". The query
should be answered with "Yes".
Printing on a Network Printer
Select printer driver under Windows NT
½ Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.
½ In the Start menu press first "Setting" and
then "Printers".
The printer window is opened.
1088.7531.12
1.50
E-3
ESIB
Options
½ Double-click line "Add Printer".
The "Add Printer Wizard" window is
opened. This window leads through the
following printer driver installation.
½ Click first "Network Printer Source" and
then "Next".
The list of available network printers is
displayed.
½ Mark the printer and select with "OK".
The available printer drivers are displayed.
The left-hand selection table indicates the
manufacturers and the right-hand one the
available printer drivers.
½ Mark the manufacturer in selection table
"Manufacturers" and then the printer driver
in selection table "Printers".
1088.7531.12
1.51
E-3
Options
ESIB
½ Click "Next".
The window for starting a test page is
displayed. The test print is for checking if
the installation was successful.
½ Switch on printer.
½ Click Yes (recommended)".
½ Click "Finish".
A test page is printed out if the installation
was successful.
If the test page is not printed out or not
completely, the Windows NT online help
offers troubleshooting instructions under
the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting".
The instrument has to be configured with
this printer for the printout of the
measurement screen. This configuration is
described in this chapter in the section
"Connecting an Output Device".
Server Function
With the server function data can be provided on the instrument for use in other computers. This is
possible only in the MICROSOFT network. The server function is released after network installation as
standard. If this is not required, it should be deactivated, see "Installation of Network Services".
The availability of instrument data in the network is controlled by releases. The release is a property of
a file or of a directory. To grant a release, the object is to be marked in "Windows NT Explorer" and
pressed by the right-hand mouse key. The release is performed under Properties -> Sharing by
selecting "Shared As". Other computers can then access these objects with the names allocated under
"Share Name". The online help gives further information on the network operation.
TCP/IP
The TCP/IP protocol allows files to be transmitted between different computer systems. A program
running on both computers is required to control the data transfer. The same operating or file system
need not be used by the two partners. A file transfer is possible between DOS/WINDOWS and UNIX,
for example. One partner has to be configured as host the other as client or vice versa. The system
performing several processes at the same time (UNIX) will normally be the host. The usual file transfer
program used for TCP/IP is FTP (File Transfer Protocol). An FTP host is installed as standard on most
of the UNIX systems.
After installing the TCP/IP services, a terminal link can be established with "Start" - "Programs" "Accessories" - "Telnet" or a data transmission with FTP using "Start" - "Run" "ftp" - "OK". Thus, all
controller systems can be accessed which support these universal protocols (UNIX, VMS, ...).
Further information is given in the NT online help which can be called up with "Help".
1088.7531.12
1.52
E-3
ESIB
Options
FTP
For a complete description of the functions and commands see the FTP documentation.
Establishing a connection
½ Click "Start" and then "Run" in the task bar.
The program is started with the DOS command
FTP
The following command sets up the connection:
OPEN <xx.xx.xx.xx>
xx.xx.xx.xx = IP address, e.g. 89.0.0.13
File transmission
To transmit a file to the target system, the following command is
used:
PUT <file name>
file name = name of file e.g. DATA.TXT.
To call a file from the target system, the following command is
used:
GET<file name>
file name = name of file e.g. SETTING.DAT.
TYPE B
allows the transmission of files in the BINARY format, no
conversion is performed.
TYPE A
allows the transmission of files in the ASCII format. Thus, control
characters are converted so that the text files can be read on the
target system, too.
Examples:
PUT C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT
sends the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to the target system.
LCD DATA
changes to subdirectory DATA in the computer function.
CD SETTING
changes to the subdirectory SETTING on the target system.
Changing directories
The command
LCD <path>
changes the directory as the corresponding DOS command.
LDIR
lists the directory.
These commands refer to the computer function of the
instrument. If the ’L’ preceding the commands is omitted, they
apply to the target system.
1088.7531.12
1.53
E-3
ESIB
Contents - Getting Started
Contents - Chapter 2 "Getting Started"
4 Getting Started..................................................................................................... 2.1
Measurement Example .................................................................................................................... 2.1
Example of Level and Frequency Measurement ..................................................................... 2.2
Measurement ................................................................................................................ 2.2
Main Test Receiver Functions....................................................................................... 2.2
Measurement Sequence - Level and Frequency Measurement ................................... 2.2
1088.7531.12
I-2.1
E-3
Contents - Getting Started
1088.7531.12
ESIB
I-2.2
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
2 Getting Started
Chapter 2 provides a fast introduction to operation by guiding the user step by step through a
measurement example.
Before starting any measurement with the ESIB, please note the instructions given in chapter 1 for
putting the instrument into operation. In chapters 3 you will find detailed information on customizing the
instrument and the display.
For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and parameters and background information refer
to the reference part in chapter 4.
Measurement Example
This section describes a typical and simple measurement task for an EMI test receiver. Each operating
step is explained with the aid of ESIB for rapid familiarization of the user without the need to know all the
details of the operating functions.
In the introductory example a standard measurement of level and frequency is performed with the aid
of the SCAN table. This measurement is an overview and precertification measurement to be performed
before the final standard-conformal measurement is carried out.
Note:
ESIB is provided with 2 RF inputs. Input 1 (20 Hz to 7/26 /40 GHz) and input 2 (20 Hz to 1
GHz). If unknown (RFI) signals are to be measured, input 2 with at least 10 dB RF attenuation
should be given preference because of its higher pulse loading capacity.
In the following example the test receiver is set to default values. The default setup is activated with
PRESET in the SYSTEM section. The main default parameters are listed in the following table.
Table 2-1
Parameter
Default parameters after preset
Setting
Mode
EMI Receiver
Receiver frequency
100 MHz
RF attenuation
Auto
Preamplifier
Off
Input
Input 1
Detector
AV
Measurement time
100 ms
RES bandwidth
120 kHz
Demodulator
Off
Trigger
Free run
1088.7531.12
2.1
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
Example of Level and Frequency Measurement
Measurement
Measurement and display of RFI signal levels versus frequency is one of the most frequent tasks
performed by an EMI test receiver. In the case of unknown signals, PRESET values will mostly be used
for the measurement. If levels higher than +137 dBµV (10 dB RF attenuation) are expected or possible,
a power attenuator has to be connected in front of the test receiver input. Very high levels may
otherwise damage or destroy the attenuator or input mixer.
Main Test Receiver Functions
The main functions required for the level and frequency measurement are setting the SCAN table
(START FREQUENCY, STOP FREQUENCY, STEPSIZE), selecting the resolution (IF) bandwidth (RES
BW), setting the measurement time (MEAS TIME) and selecting the detectors (eg peak or average) and
MARKER functions required for the analysis.
Measurement Sequence - Level and Frequency Measurement
In this example the spectrum of the signal present at RF INPUT 2 is recorded in the frequency range
150 kHz to 30 MHz. The scan table and associated parameters are manually set.
The example is generally suitable for all fast pre-compliance measurements required for measuring
unknown noise spectra of DUTs in the development stage and for modifying prototypes and can be
used as a basis for final tests later on.
The high speed of fully synthesized scans, the frequency and amplitude accuracy and the wide dynamic
range of Test Receiver ESIB are of utmost importance and very useful for these measurements.
The following measurement steps are performed:
1. PRESET of instrument.
2. Selecting EMI RECEIVER mode (in ESIB automatically selected with PRESET).
3. Programming the scan table: stop frequency 30 MHz; input 2, 1 scan range
4. Selecting detectors, measurement bandwidth and measurement time
5. Applying the signal (RF input 2)
6. Starting the scan
7. Level analysis in the frequency domain using MARKER function
8. Setting the SPLIT SCREEN function
9. Tuning to the receiver frequency using the TUNE TO MARKER function and obtaining final test
results using the QUASI PEAK detector
10. From overview to standard-conformal measurement
11. Storing test results, tables and diagrams
1088.7531.12
2.2
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
1.
2.
SYSTEM
PRESET
Resetting the instrument and
Selecting the EMI RECEIVER mode
½ Press the PRESET key.
In the default setup the main receiver menu is
automatically opened. The receiver mode is set.
The EMI RECEIVER menu is the starting point for
all subsequent settings.
The following screen is displayed:
USER
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
ATTEN
PREAMP
ON
OFF
RES BW
DETECTOR
MEAS TIME
DEMOD
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
DEFINE
SCAN
RUN
SCAN
Fig.2-1
1088.7531.12
Display after selecting default setup with PRESET
2.3
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
3. Programming a SCAN table
DEFINE
SCAN
½ Press the DEFINE SCAN key.
A menu is displayed where the whole display range
can be defined and divided into scan subranges.
After PRESET a scan range of 150 kHz to 1 GHz is
set on the frequency axis. The SCAN table is
automatically activated.
Now the stop frequency is set to 30 MHz.
USER
DEFINE
SCAN
SCAN TABLE
SCAN
100 dBµV
0 dBµV
Start
Stop
150 kHz
1 GHz
Max Level
Min Level
Step
LIN Auto
Frequency Axis LOG
ADJUST
AXIS
SINGLE
SCAN
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
SCAN
RANGES
SCAN RANGES
RANGE 1
Start
Stop
Step Size
RES BW
Meas Time
Auto Ranging
RF Attn
Preamp
Auto Preamp
Input
RANGE 2
RANGE 3
RANGE 4
RANGE 5
INS BEFORE
RANGE
150.000 kHz 30 MHz
1 GHz
30 MHz
40 kHz
4 kHz
120 kHz
9 kHz
100 µs
1 ms
OFF
OFF
10 dB
10 dB
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
INPUT 1
INPUT 1
INS AFTER
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
RANGES
1-5
6-10
RUN
SCAN
Fig.2-2 Scan range after selecting default setup with PRESET
:
DATA VARIATION
½ Press the DOWN cursor key in the DATA
VARIATION field.
The set stop frequency is marked.
1088.7531.12
2.4
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
½ Press 3 + 0 on the numeric keypad and terminate
the entry by pressing MHz.
DATA ENTRY
3
The new value for the stop frequency is entered in
the table.
0
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
STOP FREQUENCY
30 MHz
½ Press the SCAN RANGES softkey.
SCAN
RANGES
The SCAN RANGES table is activated and the set
start frequency is marked in the RANGE 1 column.
½ Press the DOWN cursor in the DATA VARIATION
field repeatedly until the INPUT line is marked.
DATA VARIATION
½ Press one of the unit keys, eg MHz.
DATA ENTRY
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
DATA VARIATION
Input 2 should now be selected.
INPUT
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
The input selection table is opened.
½ Press the DOWN cursor key in the DATA
VARIATION field.
INPUT 2 is marked.
DATA ENTRY
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
½ Press one of the unit keys, eg MHz.
The selection table is closed and INPUT 2 is
displayed in the SCAN RANGES table.
Only one scan range is defined in the example. For
this reason the second subrange (column
RANGE 2) should be cleared.
DATA VARIATION
½ Press the RIGHT
VARIATION field.
cursor
key in the
DATA
An entry in the RANGE 2 column is marked.
1088.7531.12
2.5
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
½ Press the DELETE RANGE softkey.
DELETE
RANGE
All entries in column RANGE 2 are cleared.
The following scan table is now displayed:
USER
DEFINE
SCAN
SCAN TABLE
SCAN
100 dBµV
0 dBµV
Start
Stop
150 kHz
30 MHz
Max Level
Min Level
Step
LIN Auto
Frequency Axis LOG
ADJUST
AXIS
SINGLE
SCAN
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
SCAN
RANGES
SCAN RANGES
RANGE 1
Start
Stop
Step Size
RES BW
Meas Time
Auto Ranging
RF Attn
Preamp
Auto Preamp
Input
RANGE 2
RANGE 3
RANGE 4
RANGE 5
INS BEFORE
RANGE
150.000 kHz
30 MHz
4 kHz
9 kHz
1 ms
OFF
10 dB
OFF
OFF
INPUT 2
INS AFTER
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
RANGES
1-5
6-10
RUN
SCAN
Fig.2-3 Modified SCAN table for preparing a SCAN
After editing the scan subrange, the frequency
display has to be adapted to the new settings. The
lowest START frequency of SCAN range 1 and the
highest STOP frequency of the subsequently
defined subranges are used for defining the start
and stop frequencies of the graphics display. In the
example the limit frequencies of SCAN RANGE 1
are therefore also the limits of the graphics display.
ADJUST
AXIS
MENU
½ Press the ADJUST AXIS softkey.
The respective frequency values in the table are
transferred to adapt the display.
½ Press the
key in the MENU field.
The SCAN RANGES submenu is closed.
1088.7531.12
2.6
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
4. Selecting detectors, measurement bandwidth
and measurement time
Up to four detectors can be connected in parallel to
simultaneously display the amplitude at every frequency
as a function of detector weighting. When a parallel
detector is selected, the slowest detector (in the sense
of a calibrated measurement) determines the speed or
the total measurement time required for the scan. The
fastest scan is performed when the peak detector is
used as the sole detector.
In the example, the peak detector (trace 1) and the
average detector (trace 2; default) are used in an
overview measurement.
½ Press the 1 key in the TRACE key field.
TRACE
1
The TRACE1 menu is opened where the detector for
the selected trace can be selected.
SCAN
COUNT
DETECTOR
COPY
USER
½ Press the DETECTOR softkey.
TRACE1
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
PEAK
QUASIPEAK
The TRACE1 DETECTOR menu is opened where
different detectors, eg PEAK, QUASIPEAK,
AVERAGE and RMS, can be selected for trace 1.
AVERAGE
RMS
PEAK
The peak detector is selected.
½ Press the PEAK softkey.
The level (LEVEL) for two detectors is displayed
numerically and on two bargraphs.
CONFIGURATION
MODE
½ Press the MODE key in the CONFIGURATION key
field.
The EMI RECEIVER main menu opens.
A measurement bandwidth of 9 kHz should now be
set.
1088.7531.12
2.7
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
RES BW
RES BW
ESIB
½ Press the RES BW softkey.
120 kHz
A window with the currently set resolution bandwidth
is opened (120 kHz in the example).
½ Press 9 on the numeric keypad and terminate the
entry by pressing kHz.
DATA ENTRY
9
dB
µV
ns
kHz
The new value for the resolution bandwidth is
displayed.
RES BW
9 kHz
A measurement time of 1 kHz should be set.
MEAS TIME
MEAS TIME
½ Press the MEAS TIME softkey.
100 ms
A window with the currently set measurement time
is opened (100 ms in the example).
½ Press 1 on the numeric keypad and terminate the
entry by pressing MHz.
DATA ENTRY
1
The new value for the measurement time is
displayed.
MEAS TIME
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
1 ms
5. Applying the signal
½ Connect RF cable to input 2.
RUN
SCAN
6.
Starting the scan
½ Press the RUN SCAN softkey.
The measurement with the selected PEAK and
AVERAGE detectors is continuously repeated
because the default setting CONTINUOUS SCAN
remains unchanged.
At the same time the HOLD SCAN and STOP
SCAN softkeys are displayed with the aid of which
the scan can be interrupted (HOLD SCAN) or
aborted (STOP SCAN).
In the example the scan should be aborted.
1088.7531.12
2.8
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
½ Press the STOP SCAN softkey.
STOP
SCAN
The measurement is aborted.
Peak and average results (see Fig.2-4 should be
further analyzed with the aid of the built-in marker
functions.
Depending on the DUT, diverse trace forms are
obtained. For this reason the diagram below should
be regarded as an example.
USER
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
ATTEN
PREAMP
ON
OFF
RES BW
DETECTOR
MEAS TIME
DEMOD
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
DEFINE
SCAN
RUN
SCAN
Fig.2-4
1088.7531.12
Result display of standard pre-compliance measurement using
peak/average detector
2.9
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
7. Level analysis in frequency domain using
MARKER functions
MARKER
NORMAL
½ Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER field.
Measured values can be read in the marker field at
the screen top.
½ Move the marker on the trace with the aid of the
spinwheel.
DATA VARIATION
The respective level and frequency values are
displayed in the marker field.
or with
PEAK search functions
MARKER
SEARCH
½ Press the SEARCH key in the MARKER field.
USER
The MARKER SEARCH menu is opened.
MARKER
SEARCH
PEAK
NEXT PEAK
N
O
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
PEAK
½ Press the PEAK softkey.
The marker is positioned at the maximum level in
the display.
NEXT PEAK
½ Press the NEXT PEAK softkey.
The marker moves to the next lower level in the
spectrum irrespective of whether the frequency is
higher or lower than that of the previously measured
PEAK value.
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
½ Press the NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey.
The marker is displayed on the next level at a higher
frequency (see Fig.2-5).
The displayed spectrum can be further analyzed
with the aid of up to four markers. The markers can
be assigned to different traces.
1088.7531.12
2.10
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
USER
MARKER
SEARCH
PEAK
NEXT PEAK
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
TUNE TO
MARKER
MARKER
TRACK
SETTINGS
COUPLED
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MRK DELTA
Fig.2-5
Screen display with marker
8.
Setting the SPLIT SCREEN function
The SPLIT SCREEN function simplifies the analysis
of measured data, particularly at critical frequencies.
In the split-screen mode, the frequency, eg that of
the active marker, and the level of the active
detectors are displayed in the upper half of the
screen numerically and on a bargraph.
SYSTEM
DISPLAY
USER
½ Press the DISPLAY key in the SYSTEM field.
The SYSTEM DISPLAY menu is opened.
DISPLAY
FULL
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
1088.7531.12
½ Press the SPLIT SCREEN softkey.
Two windows are displayed on the screen.
2.11
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
9. Tuning the receiver frequency and obtaining
final test results using the QUASI-PEAK detector
The currently measured frequency can be rapidly
changed eg with the TUNE TO MARKER softkey in
the MARKER NORMAL menu. Other or additional
detectors can be switched on at this receive
frequency and an overview of levels of all active
detectors is given. For measurements to standard,
the measurement time must first be set to 1 s.
½ Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER field.
MARKER
Marker 1 is displayed. Frequency and level values
can be read in the marker field at the top left of the
screen.
NORMAL
USER
MARKER
MKR
½ Press the MKR→ key in the MARKER field.
The MARKER → menu is opened.
MARKER ->
PEAK
TUNE TO
MARKER
½ Press the TUNE TO MARKER softkey.
TUNE TO
MARKER
The current receive frequency is tuned to the
marker frequency.
A measurement time of 1 s must be set for
measurements to standard.
CONFIGURATION
½ Press the MODE key in the CONFIGURATION field.
MODE
The EMI RECEIVER menu is opened.
MEAS TIME
MEAS TIME
½ Press the MEAS TIME softkey.
1 ms
The window with the currently set measurement
time is opened (1 ms in the example).
1088.7531.12
2.12
E-3
ESIB
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
½ Enter 1 on the numeric keypad (DATA ENTRY) and
terminate by pressing s.
DATA ENTRY
1
MEAS TIME
-dBm
V
s
GHz
The new measurement time is displayed.
1 s
The quasi-peak detector should now be switched on
in addition.
USER
½ Press the DETECTOR softkey.
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
PEAK
QUASIPEAK
The DETECTOR menu is opened. The peak and
average
detectors
of
the
pre-compliance
measurement are active.
AVERAGE
RMS
½ Press the QUASI-PEAK softkey.
QUASIPEAK
The LEVEL at the current receive frequency is
displayed for three detectors numerically and on
three bargraphs (see Fig.2-6).
USER
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
QUASIPEAK
AVERAGE
RMS
MIN PEAK
FINAL
MAX PEAK
FINAL
QUASIPEAK
FINAL
AVERAGE
FINAL
RMS
FINAL
MIN PEAK
Fig.2-6 Analysis of single frequencies with standard measurement time and several detectors
1088.7531.12
2.13
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
10.
ESIB
From overview to standard-conformal
measurement
Data reduction and automatic routines for final
measurement
The ESIB offers several data reduction methods for
interactive or automatic final measurements.
The methods are described in Chapter 4, Section
"Data Reduction and Subrange Maxima".
Limit lines
A final measurement to standard can be performed
when active limit lines are displayed in the diagram
during the described analysis and measurements
are repeated at all critical frequencies using the
standard measurement time and a corresponding
detector.
The use and setting of limit lines is described in
Chapter 4, Section "Limit Lines - LIMIT Key".
Transducer
Care should be taken that the correction values or
transducer factors available in tabular form are
considered in the measurement result when
accessories with frequency-dependent
characteristics are used. Several correction tables
can be combined to form a transducer set.
The use and entry of transducer tables is described
in Chapter 4, Section "Using Transducers".
11.
Storing test results, tables or diagrams on
floppy
In the example, test results are stored on a floppy.
Measured data are output to a file type *.wmf for use
in other applications.
DEVICE1 and output to a file type *.wmf is
automatically selected with PRESET.
The display elements are now selected.
HARDCOPY
½ Press the SETTINGS key in the HARDCOPY field.
SETTINGS
The HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu is opened.
1088.7531.12
2.14
E-3
ESIB
COPY
SCREEN
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
½ Press the COPY SCREEN softkey.
The output of the whole screen content to a file is
selected.
½ Insert a floppy into the floppy disk drive.
HARDCOPY
½ Press the START key in the HARDCOPY field.
START
The output is started. A window is displayed where
the file name and the path must be entered using
the built-in auxiliary line editor or the external
keyboard, eg
A:\ display.wmf.
DATA ENTRY
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
½ Press one of the unit keys, eg MHz.
The screen content is stored on the floppy under the
specified file name.
During storing the softkeys are blanked. Operation
in the menus can be continued when the softkeys
are displayed again.
The file can be used in other Windows applications,
ie it can be linked.
Fig. 2-7 gives an example of a stored display. In the
example, two limit lines are active and four markers
positioned in the spectrum.
1088.7531.12
2.15
E-3
Example - Level and Frequency Measurement
ESIB
marker info
USER
HARDCOPY
SETTING
COPY
SCREEN
COPY
TRACE
COPY
TABLE
SELECT
QUADRANT
limit
lines
ENTER
TEXT
marker
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
COLOR
ON
OFF
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC
Fig. 2-7 Result display stored in a file in WMF format
Note:
A detailed description of the file management for complete receiver setups, data records for
traces (traces 1-4), limit lines and transducer is given in in Chapter 4, Section
"Management of Data Files".
1088.7531.12
2.16
E-3
ESIB
Contents - Manual Operation
Contents - Chapter 3 "Manual Operation"
3 Manual Operation ................................................................................................ 3.1
The Screen........................................................................................................................................ 3.2
Diagram Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.3
Displays in the Diagram Area ........................................................................................ 3.4
Full Screen............................................................................................................................... 3.9
Split Screen ............................................................................................................................. 3.9
Softkey Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.11
Changing the Menu ............................................................................................................... 3.12
Setting the Parameters.................................................................................................................. 3.14
Data Entry.............................................................................................................................. 3.14
Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel ........................................................................... 3.14
Roll-key and Cursor Keys............................................................................................ 3.15
Entry Windows....................................................................................................................... 3.16
Setting Up the Entry Window ...................................................................................... 3.16
Editing of Numeric Parameters ................................................................................... 3.17
Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters........................................................................... 3.18
Help Line Editor ........................................................................................................... 3.18
Table Entry ............................................................................................................................ 3.19
Shifting Mode............................................................................................................... 3.19
Editing Mode................................................................................................................ 3.19
Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key .............................................................................. 3.20
Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key................................................................................................... 3.21
Mouse and External Keyboard Control ....................................................................................... 3.22
External Keyboard Control..................................................................................................... 3.22
Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control .............................................................................. 3.23
Mouse Control of Further Display Elements .......................................................................... 3.24
Menu Overview .............................................................................................................................. 3.25
System Key Group................................................................................................................. 3.25
Configuration Key Group ....................................................................................................... 3.27
Hardcopy Key Group ............................................................................................................. 3.31
Frequency Key Group............................................................................................................ 3.32
Level Key Group, Input Key ................................................................................................... 3.34
Marker Key Group ................................................................................................................. 3.36
Lines Key Group .................................................................................................................... 3.40
Trace Key Group ................................................................................................................... 3.41
Sweep Key Group.................................................................................................................. 3.42
Memory Key Group................................................................................................................ 3.45
User Key ................................................................................................................................ 3.47
1088.7531.12
I-3.1
E-13
Contents - Manual Operation
1088.7531.12
ESIB
I-3.2
E-13
ESIB
Manual Operation
3 Manual Operation
Chapter 3 verviews manual operation of the ESIB. This includes a description of the screen, menu
operation and the setting of parameters. There is an overview of the menus at the end of this chapter.
The functions of the menus are described in detail in Chapter 4. Chapter 2 contains a short introduction
which goes through simple measurements step-by-step. The remote control is described in Chapters 5,
6 and 7.
The ESIB is menu-controlled via keys and softkeys. Instrument parameters and test parameters can be
set directly via softkeys or by entering values in entry fields and by making selections from tables.
Softkey are used to select operating modes and the screen mode.
If required, data entry windows and tables also be displayed on the measurement screen.
After switching on the instrument a message about the BIOS version installed is displayed for a few
seconds (e.g. "Analyzer BIOS Rev. 1.2").
The results of the self test is displayed next.
MAINPROCESSOR
SELFTEST STARTING ...
TESTING CMOS ...
DMA CHANNEL ...
INTERRUPTS ...
NMI ...
BASE MEMORY ...
EXTENDED MEMORY ...
HD CAPACITY ...
INIT FLOPPY DRIVE ...
INIT HD ...
SELFTEST DONE,
SYSTEM IS BOOTING ...
Subsequently, the Windows NT controller boots and the instrument then starts measuring. The type of
measurement which was activated prior to last switch-off is performed, as long as no other instrument
configuration was selected via AUTO RECALL in the MEMORY RECALL menu. While the
measurement is being performed other menus and measuring modes can be entered simultaneously.
The measurement results and the settings of the parameters are displayed on the screen.
1088.7531.12
3.1
E-13
Screen
ESIB
The Screen
The screen informs continuously on the results and parameters for the selected measuring functions.
The display mode for test results, the softkey labeling and the type of menu depend on the selected
measuring function.
The screen is divided into two areas:
softkey area
diagram area
USER
DET
MA/QP/AV
RES BW 120 kHz
Meas T
100 ms
Att 0 dB
INPUT 2
FREQUENCY
LEVEL PK+
1.0000000
17.05 dBµV
12.62 dBµV
5.89 dBµV
QPK
AV
Trd
Unit
dBuV
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
GHz
ATTEN
ON
PREAMP
OFF
RES BW
DETECTOR
SCAN RANGES
Marker [T1]
30.23 dB V/m
161.45000000 MHz
MEAS TIME
DEMOD
SPLIT SCR
ON
OFF
DEFINE
SCAN
RUN
SCAN
Fig. 3-1
Basic screen areas
Diagram area
This area contains the measuring diagrams and other result displays as well
as the parameters and status information which are important for analyzing
the results.
Message fields, entry windows and tables may also be shown in this area.
Softkey area
This area displays the instrument functions which can be selected via the
softkeys. No other images are superimposed on the softkey area.
1088.7531.12
3.2
E-13
ESIB
Screen
Diagram Area
Status
Hardware settings
Marker /deltamarker
ER
R
S
Logo
Reference-/
max level
U N C AL O V L D
Marker 1 [T1 CNT]
-36.42 dBm
100.002 MHz
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
RBW
VBW
SWT
1 MHz
1 MHz
5 ms
RF Att
Mixer
Unit
20 dB
-40 dBm
dBυV
0
Entry window
*
START FREQUENCY
1.000000 MHz
-10.0
A
-20.0
LVL
FRQ
-30.0
WARNING
Message field
1-R
2-R
3-R
4-R
GAT
TRG
Hardcopy not completed.
Stop printer?
-40.0
NO
YES
-50.0
MOUSE
-60.0
Table
Interface
Owner
-70.0
Level scale
labelling
Instrument settings
(enhancement
labels)
75Ω
MAC
PS/2
Instrument
-80.0
Grid
-90.0
Frequency scale
or time scale
labelling
Fig. 3-2
-100.0
0
Span 50.0 MHz
Center 100.0 MHz
Screen areas in analyzer mode
Display line
(frequency line)
Display line
(frequency line)
D1
Limit lines
Display lines
(level lines)
L1
L3
L2
D2
2
Marker
Deltamarker
3
Trace
F2
F1
Fig. 3-3
Measuring diagram
1088.7531.12
3.3
E-13
Screen
ESIB
Displays in the Diagram Area
The following graphic elements are displayed in the diagram area:
Status information
A status information indicates that a problem has occurred.
In addition the status display displays MAX / REF LVL, if the maximum
level and the reference level have different values (analyzer mode).
UNCAL
"UNCAL" is displayed under the following circumstances:
• no valid correction data (Status CALIBRATION FAILED in
table CAL RESULTS), may occur after a cold start
following a firmware update
⇒ record correction data (CAL TOTAL)
• correction data are switched off (menu CAL, CAL CORR
OFF).
⇒ switch on CAL CORR ON or PRESET
• Sweep time too short for current instrument settings
(span, resolution bandwidth, video band width), (analyzer
mode).
⇒ increase sweep time
• resolution bandwidth too small for set symbol rate (Vector
Anaylsis, option FSE-B7: digital demodulation) .
⇒ increase resolution bandwidth
1088.7531.12
OVLD
„Overload“ is displayed when the input mixer is overloaded
⇒ Increase input attenuation
IFOVLD
„IF Overload“ is displayed when an overload occurs after the
input mixer.
⇒ Increase input attenuation
DIFOVL
„Digital IF Overload“ is displayed when the digital resolution
filter is overloaded.
⇒ Increase input attenuation
ExtRef
„External Reference“ is displayed when the instrument is set
to REFERENCE EXT (menu SETUP), but the reference
signal is missing at the rear panel connector.
⇒ Ceck input signal of external reference
LO unl
„LO unlock“ is indicated when the 1st LO is unlocked
(module error).
LO Lvl
„LO Level“ is displayed when the output level of the 1st LO
is too small (module error).
LO LvD
„LO Level Digital IF“ is displayed when the output level of
the oscillator of module Digital IF is too small (module
error).
OCXO
'OCXO cold' is indicated when the crystal oscillator has not
yet reached ist operating temperature. This indication
vanishes after a few minutes after switch on.
UNLD
'Underload' is displayed when the analyzer is not in its
optimal dynamic range. In this case the measuring accuracy
is not optimal. This indication is only output in vector
analyzer operating mode (option FSE-B7).
⇒ Decrease reference level
3.4
E-13
ESIB
Screen
Marker/Deltamarker
This label displays the position of the last selected marker or
deltamarker in the x and y-directions and the marker/deltamarker index.
As additional information, 2 fields in square brackets are provided which
contain the curve which the marker is assigned to and the active
measuring function of the marker indicated. The measuring function of
the markers in the second field is indicated by the following
abbreviations:
CNT
frequency counter active
TRK
NOI
signal track active
noise measurement active
The marker text has the same color as the trace which the marker is
assigned to. If, for example, the active marker is assigned to trace 1,
and trace 1 is yellow, the marker text will be yellow, too.
Hardware settings
EMI Receiver mode
RBW
Det
Meas T
Indication of the set measurement time
Indication of the active transducer factors or sets
Unit
Indication of unit of measurement results
RBW
Display of the set resolution bandwidth.
VBW
Display of the set video bandwidth.
SWT
Display of the set sweep time.
RF Att
Display of the set RF attenuation.
Mixer
Display of the user set level at the input mixer (only when level differs
from standard settings) ( = level of the reference level REF LVL).
Unit
Display of the level unit of the measuring results and the associated
setting and test parameters in full length. This label is particularly
important for selection of units with more than 4 digits, since they can
only be indicated as dB* in the other labels (except for marker).
Tracking generator mode
TG Lvl
Only available with one of the options FSE-B10/11
Indication of the set output level of the tracking generator
Vector Analyzer mode
Only available with option FSE-B7
CF
Display of the set center frequency
SR
Display of the symbol rate
Demod
Standard
1088.7531.12
Indication of the set detectors
Trd
Analyzer mode
Grid
Indication of the set resolutíon bandwidth
Display of the switched on demodulator.
Display of the set standard (e.g. GSM)
X-axis: frequency or time,
Y-axis: level
3.5
E-13
Screen
ESIB
Instrument settings
(Enhancement Labels)
*
Display of user instrument settings which influence the measuring result
and which are not immediately obvious when viewing the measured
values.
The current instrument setting is not the same as the setting selected
when one of the traces was stored. This occurs under the following
circumstances:
• The instrument setting is modified while a sweep is being performed.
• The instrument setting is modified in SINGLE SWEEP mode after the
end of the sweep and no new sweep is started.
• The instrument setting is modified after setting the trace to VIEW.
The display will not change until the cause is eliminated by the user. I.e.,
either a new sweep is started (SINGLE SWEEP mode), or the trace in
question is switched to BLANK (all cases).
1088.7531.12
A
Identification for screen A. Screen A is activated for the entry of test
parameters.
B
Identification for screen B. Screen B is activated for the entry of test
parameters.
C
If, in the Vector Analyzer (Option FSE-B7) mode, the inphase and
quadrature signal is displayed in the measurement window A, the
window is subdivided into two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked
with an A and the bottom one with C.
D
If, in the Vector Analyzer (Option FSE-B7) mode, the inphase and
quadrature signal is displayed in the measurement window B, the
window is subdivided into two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked
with an B and the bottom one with D.
LN
The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW
NOISE in analyzer mode (analyzer mode).
LD
The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW
DISTORTION (analyzer mode). in analyzer mode
P0
RF preselection and 0 dB preamplification is switched on.
P20
RF preselection and 20 dB preamplification is switched on.
IN1
RF input 1 is switched on.
I2A
RF input 2 with AC coupling is switched on.
I2D
RF input 2 with DC coupling is switched on.
NOR
Normalization is activated; high accuracy (only with one of the options
FSE-B10/11).
APP
Normalization is activated; medium accuracy (only with one of the
options FSE-B10/11)
TDF
An antenna correction factor (TRANSDUCER FACTOR) is switched on.
TDS
A set of antenna correction factors (TRANSDUCER SETS) is switched
on.
LVL
A level offset ≠ 0 dB has been set. A level offset of the installed tracking
generator (option) leads to the same display.
3.6
E-13
ESIB
Screen
FRQ
A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz has been set.
SGL
The scan/sweep is set to SINGLE SCAN or SINGLE SWEEP.
1-<n>
Subtraction Trace 1 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or
subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)
2-<n>
Subtraction Trace 2 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or
subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)
3-<n>
Subtraction Trace 3 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or
subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)
4-<n>
Subtraction Trace 4 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or
subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)
<n>AP
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AUTOPEAK.
<n>MA
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MAX PEAK.
<n>MI
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MIN PEAK.
<n>SA
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to SAMPLE.
<n>AV
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AVERAGE.
<n>RM
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to RMS.
<n>QP
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to QUASIPEAK.
<n>AC
For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AC VIDEO (ESIB-B1)
GAT
The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG/GATE connector.
TRG
The instrument is not triggered in FREE RUN mode.
EXT
The unit is configured for operation with external reference
75 Ω
The input impedance of the unit is set to 75 Ω.
MAC
Macro recording active.
PRN
A printout is taking place. PRN overwrites the enhancement label
MAC.
<n>VIEW
<n>AVG
1088.7531.12
Trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) is set to VIEW
Trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) is set AVERAGE
MIX
The external mixer output is switched on (option FSE-B21).
SID
External mixer output: SIGNAL ID is switched on (option FSE-B21).
AID
External mixer output: AUTO ID is switched on (option FSE-B21).
3.7
E-13
Screen
ESIB
Frequency axis labeling
Display of the x-scaling.
123.4 ms/Div
The distance between two grid lines is displayed in this label.
Center 1.2345678901234 GHz
The set center frequency or start frequency is displayed in this label
depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP were
last pressed.
If span = 0 Hz, the center frequency is always displayed.
Start 1.2345678901234 GHz
Span 1.2345678901234 GHz
Stop 1.2345678901234 GHz
Trigger 1.234 ms
Optional indication of date, time and comment.
Optional labeling
14.Jun 97
The set frequency range (SPAN) or the stop frequency is displayed,
depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP
were last pressed.
If span = 0 Hz, the trigger moment (PRETRIGGER) is displayed.
12:13
Level axis labeling
Display of the y-scaling.
Entry window
The data entry window is superimposed in the diagram area, if
required.
Reference level/ Max.
level
Display of the set reference level or combined display of maximum
level and reference level in analyzer mode.
Input/RFattenuation
Att
Auto
Preamp
Input <n>
Indication of set RF attenuation.
Auto range function is active.
Preamplifier is switched on.
Indication of the selected input (n = 1, 2)
Limit lines
Limit lines are are the upper and/or lower limits for level curves or
spectral distributions.
Traces 1 to 4
Up to 4 traces can be displayed simultaneously.
Display lines
Utilities for trace analysis.
The ESIB provides two display modes:
• Full Screen:
1 window, all traces are displayed in one screen.
• Split Screen:
2 windows, traces, grid and labels are distributed on the two screens.
1088.7531.12
3.8
E-13
ESIB
Screen
Full Screen
In the full-screen mode,, the settings and measurements are performed in the active visible window. All
indications on the screen refer to this window. The designation (SCREEN A or SCREEN B) is inserted
as enhancement label A or B on the right diagram margin.
The DISPLAY key is used to switch between the windows. The current measurement is terminated
when its window goes blank.
Switching from split-screen to full-screen mode is performed in menu SYSTEM DISPLAY.
Split Screen
In the Split Screen mode, the screen is divided into two halves.
USER
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
Marker 1 [T1 CNT]
-36.42 dBm
100.002 MHz
RBW
VBW
SWT
20 dB
RF Att
Mixer -40 dBm
dBm
Unit
1 MHz
1 MHz
5 ms
-20.0
A
SOFTKEY 1
-40.0
-60.0
SOFTKEY 2
-80.0
SOFTKEY 3
-100.0
SOFTKEY 4
-120.0
Center 100.0 MHz
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
Marker 1 [T1 CNT]
-36.42 dBm
100.002 MHz
5 MHz/
RBW
VBW
SWT
Span 50.0 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
5 ms
20 dB
RF Att
Mixer -40 dBm
dBm
Unit
-20.0
-40.0
SOFTKEY 5
SOFTKEY 6
SOFTKEY 7
-60.0
SOFTKEY 8
-80.0
SOFTKEY 9
-100.0
-120.0
SOFTKEY 10
Center 100.0 MHz
Fig. 3-4
5 MHz/
Span 50.0 MHz
Split Screen mode
In the default receiver mode, the screen is divided up according to fixed configurations.
Table 3-1
Default assignment of traces to windows with split screen in the receiver mode
upper (screen A)
Indication of level and frequency
Zoomed scan
lower (screen B)
Scan spectrum
Scan spectrum
However, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A) between bargraph
display of the receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode.
With spectrum analyzer selected, the scan display in the lower half of the screen remains unchanged
and the spectrum analyzer with all its measurement functions is available in the upper screen half (see
Chapter 4, Section ’Display Configuration’).
1088.7531.12
3.9
E-13
Screen
ESIB
In analyzer mode, the upper half is always assigned to Screen A, the lower to Screen B. The
measurement settings can be selected independently for both screens. E.g., a spectrum may be
displayed in Screen A and a time amplitude in the time range is displayed in Screen B. The window for
entry of the measuring parameters or the marker operation is selected using the DISPLAY key.
The indications which apply only to one window appear in the margin of the associated diagram.
Indications which apply to the two windows are displayed between the diagrams.
The assignment of traces to the windows is fixed and cannot be modified.
Table 3-2
Trace 1:
Trace 2:
Assignment of traces to windows with split screen in the signal or vector analyzer mode
upper (screen A)
lower (screen B)
Trace 3:
Trace 4:
upper (screen A)
lower (screen B)
The two windows can be subdivided into two measurement diagrams. This applies to separate display
of measurement values, eg to the display of the inphase and quadrature signal in vector analysis.
Screen A is divided into diagrams A and C, screen B is divided in diagrams B and D.
1088.7531.12
3.10
E-13
ESIB
Screen
Softkey Area
The layout of the softkey area is independent of the operating mode. It consists of the following graphic
elements:
Menu title
SOFTKEY
MENU TITLE
SOFTKEY
LABEL 1
SOFTKEY
LABEL 2
Indication of submenu (arrow)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 3
Softkey active (green)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 4
Softkey function not available
(without 3D frame)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 5
Softkey menu
SOFTKEY
LABEL 6
SOFTKEY
LABEL 7
Softkey active, opens a data
entry field (red)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 8
SOFTKEY
LABEL 9
SOFTKEY
LABEL 10
Menu display
Fig. 3-5
Layout of the softkey area
The softkeys have different functions depending on the instrument state. Therefore, their labeling
changes. The current state of the softkeys is indicated by color coding. The color code is factory-set as
follows:
Table 3-3
Factory-set color code for softkeys
Softkey color
Meaning
gray
Softkey off
green
Softkey on
red
Softkey on and data entry active
These colors can be changed by the user as desired in the SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY
menu.
A softkey is switched on or off by pressing it. If a mouse is connected to the instrument, the softkey label
on the display can be clicked.
Softkey labels are not displayed if the function they represent is not available. There are two cases:
• If an instrument function depends on an option, and this option is not fitted, the associated softkey
label will not be displayed.
• If the instrument function is not available temporarily due to specific settings, the softkey is displayed
without the 3D frame.
1088.7531.12
3.11
E-13
Screen
ESIB
Changing the Menu
With manual control, the ESIB can be operated via the front-panel keys, the external keyboard or with a
mouse.
Operation is menu-controlled. Various softkey menus are displayed depending on the instrument
status. The menus are organized using a tree structure. The start menu (the root of the menu tree) is
always called by pressing a hardkey. The softkeys are then used to branch into further menus
(submenus).
USER
Root menu
SCREEN
Submenu
Supplementary
menus
Fig. 3-6
Theory of menu selection
Each softkey menu consists of max. 30 softkeys, 10 softkeys being arranged in a main menu, 10 in a
left-hand supplementary menu and 10 in a right-hand supplementary menu. In contrast to empty main
menus, empty supplementary menus are not displayed. Arrows at the lower edge of the softkey area
indicate whether a supplementary menu exists or not.
1088.7531.12
3.12
E-13
ESIB
Screen
Left-hand supplementary menu
Main menu
Right-hand supplementary menu
Softkey
21
Softkey
1
Softkey
11
Softkey
22
Softkey
2
Softkey
12
Softkey
23
Softkey
3
Softkey
13
Softkey
24
Softkey
4
Softkey
14
Softkey
25
Softkey
5
Softkey
15
Softkey
26
Softkey
6
Softkey
16
Softkey
27
Softkey
7
Softkey
17
Softkey
28
Softkey
8
Softkey
18
Softkey
29
Softkey
9
Softkey
19
Softkey
30
Softkey
10
Softkey
20
Fig. 3-7
Switching between main menu and supplementary menu
The menu arrows help to orient inside the menu tree.
Examples:
This menu has a right-hand and a lefthand supplementary menu. It is the
root menu since there is no ⇑ arrow.
Only a right-hand supplementary menu or the upper menu can be accessed
from this menu.
ME N U
The MENU keys allow for selecting the main menu and the supplementary
menus. If a mouse is connected to the instrument, the menu arrows can be
selected to enter the respective menus. The MENU keys have the following
functions:
When this key is pressed, the ESIB enters the left-hand supplementary
menu.
This key is pressed to call the upper menu which is located in the next higher
hierarchical level in the menu tree. Several menus provide for automatic
change, i.e., return to the next higher menu is caused automatically after
pressing a softkey.
The right-hand supplementary menu is selected by pressing this key.
A supplementary menu cannot be selected from another supplementary
menu but only via the main menu.
Submenu are always selected with a softkey.
SOFTKEY
The labeling of all softkeys which call a submenu includes an arrow.
The softkeys are masked out in remote mode and during macro processing.
1088.7531.12
3.13
E-13
Setting the Parameters
ESIB
Setting the Parameters
Data Entry
Instrument parameters can be entered in an entry window or in a table via the numeric keypad on the
front panel (DATA ENTRY), an external keyboard and the roll-key.
The numeric keypad DATA ENTRY is provided for entry of numeric parameters (e.g., the start
frequency). The roll-key is used for fast incrementing or decrementing of numeric parameters with a
defined step size.
It is advisable to use the external keyboard for definition of alphanumeric parameters (e.g., file names)
since the front panel does not allow for entry of letters.
Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel
The keys are assigned the following functions:
D AT A E N T R Y
0
...
Number keys
9
D AT A E N T R Y
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. A "-" is inserted at the cursor
position in the case of an alphanumeric parameter.
-
D AT A E N T R Y
.
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position in the numeric string.
D AT A E N T R Y
1088.7531.12
-dBm
V
s
GHz
Append the selected unit to the numeric value that has been entered
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
The unit keys are all assigned the value "1" if quantities are indicated
without dimensions in order to prevent faulty operations The unit keys,
therefore, also adopt the function of an ENTER key. The same applies to
alphanumeric entries.
dB
µV
µs
kHz
dB..
nV
ns
Hz
3.14
E-13
ESIB
Setting the Parameters
D AT A E N T R Y
EXP
Adds an exponent (E-xx) to the end of the numeric string.
D AT A E N T R Y
BACK
D AT A E N T R Y
CLR
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor with numeric entry.
Toggles between the current parameter and the previous value - but not
when an entry is being made (UNDO function).
Closes the entry field when entry has been made.
Aborts the entry before it has been confirmed.
Closes the system message windows.
Roll-key and Cursor Keys
DAT A VAR IATION
The roll-key has several functions.
• With numeric entry, the instrument parameter is incremented (turning
clockwise) or decremented (turning counterclockwise) at a defined step
size.
The step size may be equal to or smaller (e.g., 1/10) than the step size
being defined for the cursor keys (see description of the STEP key).
• In tables, the roll-key can be used to shift the cursor horizontally or
vertically when no entry window is open. The direction (horizontal/
vertical) is changed with the cursor keys.
• The roll-key is used with the help-line editor to select the individual
letters.
• It can be used to shift markers, display lines, limit lines etc.
As the roll-key is turned faster, the step size increases so speeding up the
setting procedure.
Cursor keys:
D A T A V AR I A T I O N
With numeric entry, the keys
are used to increase or decrease the
or
instrument parameter by the selected step size. The keys are disabled With
alphanumeric entry, the keys are used to toggle between the editing line
and the help line editor.
and
are used to shift the cursor to the required position
The keys
within the (alpha)numeric editing line..
In tables, the cursor keys are used to shift the cursor between the lines and
columns of the table.
1088.7531.12
3.15
E-13
Setting the Parameters
ESIB
Entry Windows
Setting Up the Entry Window
The instrument parameters are not entered at the location where the parameter is displayed but in an
individual entry window.
The entry window is called by a softkey or a hardkey and is used for definition of numeric or
alphanumeric instrument parameters (START FREQUENCY by way of example):
Headline with
parameter designation
START FREQUENCY
Editing line with
parameter value and unit
10.2457535 GHZ
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE
Status and error messages
Fig. 3-8 Setup of an entry window
Subsequent to calling the entry window the current parameter value including the unit is displayed in the
editing line. Status and error messges which refer to the current entry are displayed in the third and
(optionally) fourth line.
The entry window is displayed in the left upper edge of the active measuring window with the default
setting. When a mouse is connected to the instrument, open entry windows can be shifted to any
position on the screen provided that they do not cover the softkey line. The new position is valid until
measuring window is selected. The data entry window is represented transparent or non-transparent, as
required.
Alphanumeric parameters are displayed as a simple character string in the editing line. Numeric
parameters which consist of mantissa, exponent and unit are set up as follows:
Mantissa
Exponent
Unit
-123.456789 E-12 MHz
Sign
Fig. 3-9
Space
Setup of numeric parameters
Mantissa:
The first character is the sign of the mantissa, the positive sign is not displayed. The
actual numeric value follows. The number of digits depends on the instrument
parameter. The cursor may be shifted to the first digit of the mantissa at maximum,
however, it may not precede the sign. The decimal point can be set as required.
Exponent:
The exponent is separated from mantissa by a space character. The sign field of the
exponent follows the "E", the positive sign "+" being not displayed similar to the
representation of the mantissa. The cursor skips the "E" and the sign field. Two
characters are fixed for the exponent value.
Unit:
The unit (not represented in editing mode) is separated from the exponent by a space
character.
The number of digits which can be entered for each instrument parameter is limited by the width of the
input field only, but not by the amount which is physically enabled. (Example: Levels should be indicated
with two decimals. The user may, however, enter as many decimals as desired - the entered value is
rounded accordingly).
1088.7531.12
3.16
E-13
ESIB
Setting the Parameters
There are two types of entry windows:
START FREQUENCY
10.2457535 GHZ
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE
HARDCOPY TITLE
BANDPASS-FILTER TEST 23A
The editing line of the entry window for numeric
parameters allows for display of up to 24
characters. Horizontal scrolling is not possible in
the editing line.
The editing line of the entry window for
alphanumeric parameters allows for display of up
to 60 characters (cf. display section). Maximum
256 characters may be entered. Horizontal
scrolling is possible.
Editing of Numeric Parameters
Calling the entry window:
• Subsequent to calling the entry window, the current value of the numeric parameter including the unit
is displayed in inverted color. The cursor is not displayed in this state. The transparent data entry
window has no background color.
• The entry window is closed upon pressing the key CLR.
Editing mode:
• Pressing a number, sign or decimal point key causes the value and unit to be deleted. The new value
is output left-justified. The individual characters are entered in insert mode. If the maximum amount of
characters for the mantissa or the exponent has been entered, no further entry is possible (no
horizontal scrolling). If characters are positioned to the right of the cursor, they are shifted right when
reaching the maximum length and get lost.
• Pressing the keys DATA VARIATION
or
causes normal representation of the current value.
The unit is no longer displayed and the cursor precedes the first digit of the mantissa (
) or follows
the last digit entered (
and
). The DATA VARIATION keys
change the numeric value of the
cursor.
• Pressing the DATA VARIATION keys
or
or the roll-key causes the original parameter value to
be restored and modified according to the defined step size for this parameter.
• The data management of the instrument stores the previous value of a parameter in addition to the
current value. The BACK key allows for toggling between these two values.
Termination and abortion of entry:
• The editing mode is terminated by pressing a unit key. The validity of the new parameter value is
checked and accepted for the instrument setting. If an error occurs, a corresponding error message is
displayed in the status line of the editing field, e.g., "Out of range", "Value adjusted", etc.
• Editing of a parameter can be aborted by pressing the key CLR. The original parameter is then
displayed again. The entry window is closed by pressing the CLR key again.
• Pressing a key or softkey subsequent to starting the entry causes the entry to be aborted and the
entry window to be closed. If the same softkey which has opened the entry window is activated during
entry, the original value is restored and displayed.
1088.7531.12
3.17
E-13
Setting the Parameters
ESIB
Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters
Generally, the regulations for numeric parameters analogously apply for alphanumeric parameters. Note
the exceptions given below:
• Alphanumeric parameters are not displayed with a unit.
• The four unit keys adopt the function of the ENTER key.
• Horizontal scrolling is possible in the editing line.
• Incrementing or decrementing cannot be effected via the keys
,
or the roll-key.
• Pressing the sign key causes a "-" character to be inserted at the cursor position, the decimal point
key causes insertion of a point ".".
• The exponent key has no function.
Help Line Editor
The help line editor allows for labelling or text entries to be made without an external keyboard being
required. In this case, a field containing letters and special characters is added to the standard entry
window. The help line editor is displayed automatically if no external keyboard is provided and an entry
window for alphanumeric entry is opened.
CALIBRATION FILE
C:\MEASDATA\STANDARD.CAL
Three-line entry window
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÄÖÜ!?"$%/(){[]}\+*#~'-_=.:
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzäöüß,;<>|@µ²³^°123456789 0
Fig. 3-10
Uppercase and
lowercase letters,
special characters
and digits
Help line editor
• The keys
and
are used to toggle between the editing line and the help line editor.
• The cursor can be positioned to the required character in the help line editor using the cursor keys
and the roll-key.
• A character is entered in the editing line by pressing any of the unit keys.
• If the cursor is already located in the editing line, pressing a unit key terminates data entry.
1088.7531.12
3.18
E-13
ESIB
Setting the Parameters
Table Entry
The ESIB uses numerous tables for indication and configuration of instrument parameters. The tables
differ very much in the number of lines, columns and inscriptions and have a different functionality.
Tables are represented in a non-transparent form. The size is predefined and cannot be modified. If a
mouse is connected, the tables may be shifted on the display without covering the softkeys. Tables can
be superimposed by entry windows or suchlike.
Tables are mostly coupled to a softkey menu which provides further functions for editing table entries,
e.g., deletion of tables, copying lines or columns, marking of table elements, restoring of default states
etc. Another kind of tables is exclusively used for indication of instrument parameters and cannot be
edited.
The definition of individual tables and the operation of particular editing functions can be looked up in the
reference section with the description of the corresponding softkey menu.
The basic concept of operation is, however, the same for all tables. A differentiation is made between
shifting mode and editing mode.
Shifting Mode
This mode is active subsequent to opening a table. The cursor is shifted between the table elements by
means of the cursor keys. The table element which is below the cursor is represented in inverted color.
TRANSDUCER SET
Name
Unit
Antenna
Ant_Cab2
Ant_Pre
Ant_Cab1
Probeset
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dBµA
Cursor
Fig. 3-11
Shifting mode
Editing Mode
A table element which is marked by a cursor can be editied as follows:
• by pressing one of the unit keys on the front panel or the ENTER key on the external keyboard.
• by a double-click of the mouse on the table element. If the clicked element is not yet marked by the
cursor, the letter is positioned on the element, additionally.
• For numeric or alphanumeric instrument parameters, the editing operation may be started by entry of
any number or letter on the front panel or on the external keyboard.
The data entry window, the selection list or the toggle editor are provided for this purpose.
After the editing operation has been terminated, the table enters the shifting mode again. The cursor is
positioned automatically on the next table element.
1088.7531.12
3.19
E-13
Disabling the Control Elements
ESIB
Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key
The individual softkeys have the following functions:
D A T A V AR I A T I O N
HOLD
The functions of the HOLD menu allow for disabling individual control
elements or the complete instrument control. The LED above the HOLD
key indicates that either the function LOCK DATA or LOCK ALL has been
activated. The control can be enabled again by successively pressing the
two UNLOCK softkeys in any order.
Switching off the instrument resets control such that the instrument can be
normally operated again after subsequent switch-on.
UNLOCK
After selecting the two UNLOCK softkeys, the instrument keyboard is enabled
again. The LED above the HOLD key goes out.
LOCK DATA
Selection of softkey LOCK DATA causes the roll-key to be disabled in order
to prevent a parameter from being varied by mistake.
LOCK ALL
1088.7531.12
Selection of LOCK ALL softkey disables the complete front panel (including
the PRESET key and roll-key, not including the UNLOCK softkeys), the
mouse and all keys of the external keyboard. Exit from the HOLD menu is no
longer possible. Control is enabled again by actuating the two UNLOCK
softkeys.
3.20
E-13
ESIB
Setting the Step Size
Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key
A number of numeric instrument parameters allow for step-by-step incrementing or decrementing the
value in the editing line of the entry window using the keys
or
or the roll-key. The stepsize used
with the cursor keys can be specified for the selected parameters in the STEP menu.
Notes: – It is not possible to set the stepsize by all of the numeric parameters.
– An extended STEP menu is available by some parameters. The extra functions are
described by the respective parameter.
– Setting the step size has no effect on the roll-key (the resolution of the roll-key is higher than
that of the step size functuion)
D A T A V AR I A T I O N
STEP
The STEP key opens the STEP menu for entry of the stepsize.
The stepsize of an instrument parameter can only be varied when this
parameter is edited in an entry window.
The softkeys in the STEP menu are disabled if no instrumentnparameter is
being varied or if the parameter being edited does not support stepsize
variation (as is the case by all of the alphanumeric parameters.
leads to exit from the STEP menu and automatic return to the
The key
previously active menu.
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The softkey STEPSIZE AUTO causes the stepsize for the corresponding
instrument parameter to be set automatically and be continuously varied with
varying instrument settings (in accordance with other parameters).
Example:
The stepsize of the CENTER frequency depends on the selected span.
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The softkey STEPSIZE NORMAL calls an entry window for definition of a
stepsize by the user. The parameter whose stepsize is varied, is displayed in
the headline of the entry window:
START FREQUENCY STEPSIZE
100 kHz
The stepsize remains constant until a new value is entered or until the
STEPSIZE AUTO softkey is activated. It is no longer coupled to other
instrument parameters.
1088.7531.12
3.21
E-13
Mouse and External Keyboard Control
ESIB
Mouse and External Keyboard Control
External Keyboard Control
The connection of an external keyboard provides additional characters for the entry (letters and special
characters). It is permitted to use both, front panel keys and the external keyboard, for control.
The number, cursor and sign keys have the same effect as the corresponding front panel keys. A few
keys of the external keyboard provide an extended functionality with entries or tables which is described
in the following table.
The table shows the external keyboard key combinations through which the functions of the front panel
keys can be emulated.
Note:
The key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ> switches between the instrument display screen
and the controller display screen
Table 3-3
Front Panel Keyboard Emulation
ESIB front panel keys
Softkeys:
Menu select:
Cursor control:
Roll-key:
SK1
SK2
SK3
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
SK9
SK10
Menu left
Menu right
Menu up
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
Cursor left
Cursor right
Cursor up
Cursor down
←
→
↑
↓
Turn left
Turn right
SHIFT ↑
SHIFT ↓
0 to 9
ALT-G
ALT-M
ALT-K
<ENTER>
<ESC>
BACK
Numeric keys:
Units keys:
0 to 9
GHz...
MHz...
kHz...
Hz...
Edit keys:
Clear
Backspace
Misc. data entry keys:
Exponent "Exp"
Sign "+/-"
Decimal point"."
Hold key:
Hold
User menu:
User
System keys:
Preset
Cal
Display
Info
Configuration key group: Mode
Setup
Hardcopy key group: Start
Settings
1088.7531.12
Key assign. for
the ext. keyboard
ESIB front panel keys
Status key group :
CTRL ←
CTRL →
CTRL ↑
ALT-E
.
SHIFT-F1
SHIFT-F2
SHIFT-F4
ALT-F12
ALT-F10
SHIFT-F5
ALT-F2
SHIFT-F8
SHIFT-F6
SHIFT-F9
3.22
Local
Key assign. for
the ext. keyboard
SHIFT-F3
Frequency key group: Start
Stop
CenterCenter
/Freq
Span/Zoom
CTRL-F7
CTRL-F8
CTRL-F9
CTRL-F10
Level key group:
Ref/Unit
Range
Input
Cal
CTRL-F11
CTRL-F12
ALT-F11
ALT-F12
Marker key group :
Normal
Search
Delta
→ Mkr
CTRL-F1
CTRL-F2
CTRL-F3
CTRL-F4
Lines key group :
Display
Limit
CTRL-F5
CTRL-F6
Traces key group :
1
2
3
4
ALT-1
ALT-2
ALT-3
ALT-4
Sweep key group :
---Coupl./Run
Sweep/Scan
Trigger
ALT-F3
ALT-F4
ALT-F5
ALT-F6
ALT-F7
ALT-F8
Memory key group:
Config
Save
Recall
SHIFT-F10
SHIFT-F11
SHIFT-F12
Data entry key group : Step
SHIFT-F7
Letters and special characters
A to Z (ext.)
a to z (ext.)
Special
characters (ext.)
Edit key
Delete
Cursor control
Home
End
Page up
Page down
E-13
ESIB
Mouse and External Keyboard Control
Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control
With a mouse being connected, additional functions are provided in the entry windows. Therefore,
buttons are displayed in the entry window.
Essentially, the definitions which have been made for all types of entry window also apply for mouse
control. However, note the following deviations:
• The so-called close-button is displayed on the left margin of the headline. Selecting this button via the
mouse aborts the entry and closes the entry window. This corresponds to the function of the CLR key
with manual control.
• In the numeric entry window, two buttons ( ) are displayed on the left margin of the editing line.
Simply clicking the buttons causes the parameter in the editing line to be incremented or
decremented (similar to the keys
/
or the roll-key with manual control).
• The cursor can be positioned in the entry line by clicking a character using the mouse.
• A character in the letter window of the help line editor can be selected by a single click. A double click
copies the character from the letter window into the editing line.
• Open entry windows can be shifted across the complete screen using the mouse; they must not,
however, be superimposed on the softkey line. Shifting is performed by clicking the headline and
pushing the mouse while he mouse-key is being pressed.
Example:
Numeric entry window with mouse control
START FREQUENCY
10.2457535 GHZ
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE
1088.7531.12
3.23
E-13
Mouse and External Keyboard Control
ESIB
Mouse Control of Further Display Elements
In analyzer mode, all display and control elements (enhancement labels, softkeys, function fields,
display and limit lines) which can be displayed on the display screen can also be controlled by the
mouse. Each softkey or key is assigned to a display element.
Double-klicking an display or control element opens the corresponding softkey menu. The assignment
of softkeys/keys to display elements is shown in the following table.
Klicking the right mouse key call all softkey menus one after the other.
Table 3-4
Mouse Control of Display Elements
Display element for mouse control.
Assigned softkey or key
Display field for Softkey 1 to Softkey 10
Softkey 1 to Softkey 10
Display field for menu arrow: right/center/left
Key right/center/left supplementary menu
Enhancement labels
Status display
*
PA
PS
UNS
LVL
FRQ
1-x
2-x
3-x
4-x
-SETUP key
SETUP key
COUPLING/RUN key
REF/UNIT key
CENTER/FREQ key
TRACE 1 key
TRACE 2 key
TRACE 3 key
TRACE 4 key
TRG
DC
75Ω
MAC
TRIGGER key
INPUT key
INPUT key
USER key
UNCAL
OVLD
ERR
CAL key
REF/UNIT key
INFO key
Display fields above the diagram
Ref. Level / Max
Level
Marker
RBW
VBW
SWT
RF Att
Mixer
Unit
REF/UNIT key
NORMAL key
COUPLING/RUN key
COUPLING/RUN key
COUPLING/RUN key
INPUT key
INPUT key
REF/UNIT key
Display fields below the diagram
Start
Stop
Center
Span
Trigger
/Div
1088.7531.12
START key
STOP key
CENTER/FREQ key
SPAN/ZOOM key
TRIGGER key
--
3.24
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Menu Overview
System Key Group
SYSTEM
PRESET
CAL
DISPLAY
INFO
Receiver
DISPLAY
FULL
SCREEN
Analyzer
SPLIT
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
SCREEN A
BARGRAPH
ACTIVE
SCREEN C
SCREEN A
SWEEP
ACTIVE
SCREEN D
DISPLAY
FULL
SCREEN
RUN SCAN
DATAENTRY
FIELD
DATAENTRY
X
SCREEN
COUPLING
SCREEN
COUPLING
CONFIG
DISPLAY
CONFIG
DISPLAY
CONFIG
DISPLAY
SELECT
OBJECT
CONFIG
DISPLAY
TIME
ON
OFF
BRIGHTNESS
DISPLAY
COMMENT
HORIZONTAL
SCALING
TINT
DATAENTRY
Y
SCREEN
COUPLING
MODE
COUPLED
SATURATION
SCR SAVER
ON
OFF
SCR SAVER
TIME
DEFAULT
POSITION
VERTICAL
SCALING
COUPLING
CONTROL
DEFAULT
COLORS
PREDEFINED
COLORS
LOGO
ON
OFF
FREQUENCY analyzer
ON
OFF only
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE
1088.7531.12
SCREENS
UNCOUPLED
DATAENTRY
FIELD
3.25
E-13
Menu Overview
SYSTEM
ESIB
CALIBRATE
PRESET
CAL
DISPLAY
INFO
CAL SHORT
CALIBRATE
CAL
RESULTS
CAL TOTAL
CAL
RES BW
CAL LOG
CAL
LO SUPP
with option
FSE-B7 only
CAL
CAL
I/Q
I/Q
EMI
PRESEL
SYSTEM
PRESET
PRESEL
PEAK
PAGE UP
CAL CORR
ON
OFF
PAGE DOWN
INFO
CAL
FIRMWARE
VERSIONS
DISPLAY
INFO
HARDWARE+
OPTIONS
SELFTEST
SELFTEST
EXECUTE
TESTS
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
OPTIONS
STATISTIC
STATISTIC
CLEAR
MESSAGE
ATTEN
SWITCHES
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
UPDATE
MESSAGES
.
.
.
1088.7531.12
3.26
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Configuration Key Group
CONFIGURATION
MODE
ANALYZER
MODE
EMI
RECEIVER
SETUP
TRACKING
GENE RATOR
VECTOR
ANALYZER
with option FSE-K10 only;
see manual of option
GSM MS
ANALYZER
with option FSE-K11 only;
see manual of option
GSM BTS
ANALYZER
with option tracking
generator only; see below
with option FSE-B7 only;
see manual of option
EMI
RECEIVER
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
PEAK
SEARCH
ATTEN
EDIT PEAK
LIST
PREAMP
ON
OFF
NO OF
PEAKS
RES BW
PEAK
SUBRANGES
DETECTOR
MARGIN
MEAS TIME
FINAL
MEAS TIME
DEMOD
LISN
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
DEFINE
SCAN
INTER
ACTIVE
RUN
SCAN
RUN
FINAL MEAS
ATTEN
DETECTOR
DEMOD
DEFINE
SCAN
DEFINE
SCAN
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
MAX PEAK
DEMOD
ON
OFF
SCAN TABLE
CISPR
RANGE A
0 DB MIN
ON
OFF
QUASIPEAK
AM
ADJUST
AXIS
CISPR
RANGE B
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
AVERAGE
FM
SINGLE
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE C
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
RMS
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE D
MIN PEAK
SCAN
RANGES
SCAN
RANGES
AC VIDEO
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
RANGES
1-5 6-10
RANGES
1-5 6-10
with option
ESIB-B1 only
QP RBW
UNCOUPLED
RUN
SCAN
see below
see below
see below
HOLD
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
STOP
SCAN
CONTINUE
SCAN
CONT AT
REC FREQ
CONTINUE
AT HOLD
STOP
SCAN
1088.7531.12
3.27
E-13
Menu Overview
CONFIGURATION
MODE
SETUP
ESIB
MODE
ANALYZER
EMI
RECEIVER
EMI
RECEIVER
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
PEAK
SEARCH
ATTEN
EDIT PEAK
LIST
PREAMP
ON
OFF
NO OF
PEAKS
RES BW
PEAK
SUBRANGES
TRACKING
GENE RATOR
VECTOR
ANALYZER
with option tracking
generator only; see below
with option FSE-B7 only;
see manual of option
DETECTOR
MARGIN
with option FSE-K10 only;
see manual of option
GSM MS
ANALYZER
MEAS TIME
FINAL
MEAS TIME
with option FSE-K11 only;
see manual of option
GSM BTS
ANALYZER
DEMOD
LISN
left side menu
see above
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
DEFINE
SCAN
INTER
ACTIVE
RUN
SCAN
RUN
FINAL MEAS
EDIT PEAK
LIST
LISN
EDIT
FREQUENCY
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
INSERT
ESH3-Z5
OFF
HOLD
FINAL MEAS
CONTINUE
FINAL MEAS
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
INTER
ACTIVE
SKIP
FREQUENCY
DELETE
SORT BY
FREQUENCY
HOLD
FINAL MEAS
STOP
FINAL MEAS
PRESCAN/FINAL
PHASES
PHASE N
PRESCAN
PHASES
FINAL
PHASES
SORT BY
DELTA LIM
ASCII
EXPORT
PHASE L1
ASCII
CONFIG
PHASE L2
ASCII
CONFIG
EDIT
PATH
DECIM SEP
.
,
PAGE UP
NEW
APPEND
PHASE L3
MEASURE
STOP
FINAL MEAS
1088.7531.12
PE
GROUNDED
PE
FLOATING
3.28
PAGE DOWN
HEADER
ON
OFF
ASCII
COMMENT
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
CONFIGURATION
TRACKING GENERATOR
MODE
MODE
ANALY ZER
EMI
RECEIVER
SETUP
with option tracking TRACKING
GENERA TOR
generator only
with option FSE-B7 only;
see manual of option
VECTOR
ANALYZER
TRACKING
GENERATOR
SOURCE
ON
OFF
SOURCE
POWER
POWER
OFFSET
with option FSE-K10 only;
se manual of option
with option FSE-K11 only;
see manual of option
GSM MS
ANALYZER
GSM BTS
ANALYZER
SOURCE
CAL
SOURCE
CAL
CAL
TRANS
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
MODULATION
MODULATION
EXT AM
CAL REFL
SHORT
CAL REFL
OPEN
EXT FM
NORMALIZE
EXT ALC
REF VALUE
POSITION
EXT I/Q
REF VALUE
RECALL
1088.7531.12
3.29
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
OP TI O NS
TRANSDUCER
EN ABLE NEW
OPTION
MODE
PREAMP
OFF
Analyzer only
PRESELECT
ON
OFF
Analyzer only
ON
SETUP
PRESELECT
ON LISN OFF
OPTIONS
REFERENCE
INT
EXT
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
EXT REF
FREQUENCY
SERVICE
GENERAL
SETUP
GPIB
ADDRESS
SERVICE
SERVICE
INPUT
RF
CAL GEN
120 MHZ
USE R
PORT A
INPUT
CAL
PULSE
25 HZ
USER
PORT B
NOISE
SOURCE
PULSE
100 HZ
COM
PORT1
REFERENCE
ADJUST
PULSE
100 KHZ AB
PULSE
100 KHZ CD
COM
PORT2
MODE FSE
ON
OFF
GENERAL
SETUP
TIME
DATE
UPDATE
MONITOR
CONNECTED
RESTORE
KEY CLICK
ON
OFF
TRANSDUCER
ENTER
PASSWORD
T RANS DUCE R
FAC TOR
R E FER E NC E
A DJ US T
T RANS DUCE R
SET
REF EREN CE
LISN
EDIT TRD
FACTOR
EDIT TRD
SET
NEW
FACTOR/SET
DELETE
F ACTOR/SET
EDIT
TRANSD SET
TRANSD S ET
NA ME
TR ANSD SET
UNI T
TR ANSD SET
RANGES
INS ER T
LI NE
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
EDIT TRD
F ACTO R
TR D FA CTOR
NAME
TR D FA CTOR
UNIT
ESH3-Z5
TR D FACTOR
VALUES
OFF
INSERT
LINE
PHASE N
DELETE
LINE
PHASE L1
DELET E
LINE
SAVE TRD
SET
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
REFERENCE
PROG
PHASE L2
SAVE TRD
FACTOR
PHASE L3
DRAW TRD
FACTOR
DR AW
TRD SET
PE
GROUNDED
PAGE UP
PE
FLOATING
PAGE DOWN
1088.7531.12
3.30
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Hardcopy Key Group
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY
SETTINGS
COPY
SCREEN
START
COPY TRACE
SETTINGS
COPY TABLE
SELECT
QUADRANT
ENTER
TEXT
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
SETTINGS
DEVICE 1
COLOR
ON
OFF
SETTINGS
DEVICE 2
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC
ENABLE
DEV1 DEV2
ENTER
TEXT
COMMENT
SCREEN A
COMMENT
SCREEN B
SELECT
QUADRANT
UPPER
LEFT
LOWER
LEFT
UPPER
RIGHT
LOWER
RIGHT
TITLE
FULL
PAGE
HARDCOPY
START
SETTINGS
without softkey menu
1088.7531.12
3.31
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Frequency Key Group
FREQUENCY
Receiver
Analyzer
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ ZOOM
F R EQ U E N CY
CENTER
CENTER
MANUAL
- --
START
START
FIXED
STOP
SPAN
FIXED
STOP
FIXED
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
MIXER
FREQ
AXIS
LIN
LOG
INTERNAL
MIXER
EXTERNAL
Analyzer
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ ZOOM
START
STOP
Without function in
receiver mode.
SPAN
SPAN
MANUAL
FREQUENCY
ZOOM
MOVE ZOOM
WINDOW
START
FIXED
MOVE ZOOM
START
CENTER
FIXED
MOVE ZOOM
STOP
STOP
FIXED
ZOOM
OFF
ZERO SPAN
FULL SPAN
LAST SPAN
ZOOM
FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG
1088.7531.12
3.32
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Analyzer
START FREQ
Receiver
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ ZOOM
START
MANUAL
START FREQUENCY
- --
CENTER
FIXED
START
STOP
SPAN
FIXED
STOP
FIXED
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
Analyzer
STOP FREQ
STOP
MANUAL
Receiver
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ ZOOM
START
STOP FREQUENCY
---
START
FIXED
CENTER
FIXED
STOP
SPAN
FIXED
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
1088.7531.12
3.33
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Level Key Group, Input Key
LEVEL
REF/
UNIT
Receiver
UNIT
Analyzer
REF L EVEL
dBµV
R EF L EVEL
REF LEVEL
MAX LEVEL
AUTO
dBm
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
MAX LEVEL
MANUAL
RANGE
dB µA
ABS
GR ID
REL
U NIT
dBp W
dBp T
dBµV/m
RF AT TEN
MANU AL
dBµA/m
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL
d B* / MHz
REF
EL
ATTENLEV
AUTO
A UTO
LOW
NOISE
AT TEN A UTO
L OW DI ST
PR OBE COD E
ON
OFF
MIXER
LEVEL
UNIT
dBm
dBmV
dBµV
dB µA
dBp W
d B* / M H
V OL T
AMP ER E
W ATT
PR OBE COD E
ON
OFF
1088.7531.12
3.34
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Receiver
Analyzer
LEVEL
LEV EL RANGE
LEV EL R ANGE
REF/
UNIT
LOG 120 dB
LOG 120 dB
LOG 1 00 dB
LOG 1 00 dB
LOG 5 0 dB
LOG 5 0 dB
LOG 2 0 dB
LOG 2 0 dB
LOG 1 0 dB
LOG 1 0 dB
LOG
MANUA L
LOG
MANUA L
RANGE
LINEAR/dB
INPUT
GRID
MAX LEVEL
LINEAR/%
GRID
MIN LEVEL
GR ID
REL
AB S
Receiver
Analyzer
INPUT
INPUT
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
0 dB MIN
ON
OFF
ATT EN A UTO
NORMAL
RF I NPUT
50 OHM
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
ATT EN AUTO
LOW NOISE
RF I NPUT
75 OH M/RAM
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
ATTEN AUTO
LOW D IST
RF I NPUT
75 OH M/RAZ
ON
PREAMP
OFF
INPUT
SELECT
M IXER
L EVEL
INPUT 1
INPUT
SEL ECT
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 2
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
1088.7531.12
3.35
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Marker Key Group
MARKER
Receiver
Analyzer
NORMAL SEARCH
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
MARKER 2
DELTA
MARKER
DEMOD
MKR DEMOD
ON
OFF
MKR
MARKER 3
AM
MARKER 3
MARKER 4
FM
MARKER 4
SIGNAL
COUNT
MARKER
ZOOM
MARKER
DEMOD
PREV ZOOM
RANGE
MARKER
ZOOM
MKR DEMOD
STOP TIME
ZOOM
OFF
MARKER
INFO
MARKER
INFO
ALL MARKER
OFF
ALL MARKER
OFF
POWER MEAS
SETTING
SET NO. OF
ADJ CHAN’S
ACP
STANDARD
CH FILTER
ON
OFF
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
MARKER
NORMAL
POWER MEAS
SETTING
CHANNEL
POWER
CP / ACP
ABS REL
SET CP
REFERENCE
LIMIT
CHECK
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
1088.7531.12
COUNTER
RESOL
C / N
SIGNAL
TRACK
C / No
NOISE
CHANNEL
SPACING
EDIT
ACP LIMITS
MARKER
NORMAL
COUNTER
RESOLUTION
10 kHz
1 kHz
ADJACENT
CHAN POWER
100 Hz
ADJUST CP
SETTINGS
10 Hz
OCC U PIED
PWR BAN DW
1 Hz
0. 1 H z
3.36
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
MARKER
DELTA
MARKER
DELTA 1
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA 2
DELTA
MKR
DELTA 3
DELTA 4
PHASE
NOISE
REFERENCE
POINT
REFERENCE
FIXED
DELTA MKR
ABS
REL
ALL DELTA
OFF
analyzer only
REFERENCE
POINT
REF POINT
LEVEL
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
REF POINT
TIME
1088.7531.12
3.37
analyzer only
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
MARKER
Receiver
NORMAL SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
DELTA
Analyzer
MARKER
SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
MIN
PEAK
NEXT MIN
NEXT PEAK
NEXT PEAK
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT MIN
LEFT
NEXT MIN
LEFT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
TUNE TO
MARKER
TUNE TO
MARKER
MARKER
TRACK
MARKER
TRACK
SETTINGS
AUTO
PEAK
COUPLED
ON
OFF
SETTINGS
COUPLED
PEAK
EXCURSION
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
PEAK
MKR
SUM MKR
ON
OFF
SUMMARY
MARKER
SUMMARY
MARKER
RMS
MARKER
SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
MIN
N DB DOWN
NEXT MIN
SHAPE FACT
60 /3 DB
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
SHAPE FACT
60 /6 DB
NEXT MIN
LEFT
MEAN
PEAK HOLD
ON
OFF
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
SWEEP
COUNT
ALL SUM
MKR OFF
ALL MARKER
TO MIN
EXCLUDE LO
ON
OFF
PEAK
EXCURSION
1088.7531.12
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
3.38
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Receiver
MARKER
MARKER
Analyzer
MARKER
PEAK
PEAK
NEXT PEAK
CENTER
ADD TO
PEAK LIST
REF LEVEL
TUNE TO
MARKER
AUTOSCALE
MKR->CF
STEPSIZE
MKR->CF
STEPSIZE
MARKER
TRACK
START
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA
MKR
MKR
MKR
MKR
MKR
SETTINGS
COUPLED
1088.7531.12
STOP
MKR
MKR
TRACE
TRACE
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
3.39
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Lines Key Group
Receiver
Analyzer
SPAN = 0
DISPLAY
LINES
LINES
DISPLAY
LINES
D LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
SPAN = 0
DISPLAY
LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
DISPLAY
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINE 2
THRESHOLD
LINE
THRESHOLD
LINE
THRESHOLD
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
TIME
LINE 1
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
TIME
LINE 2
SHOW
LINE INFO
SHOW
BASELINE
LINE
INFO
CLIPPING
BASELINE
SHOW
CLIPPING
LINE
INFO
DISPLAY
LINE 1
LIMITS
oder
LINES
D LINES
LIMIT LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
LIMITS
NEW LIMIT
LINE
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
NEWCOPY
LIMIT
LINE
LIMIT
LINE
EDIT
LIMIT LINE
NAME
VALUES
INSERT
VALUE
DELETE
VALUE
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
X OFFSET
SHIFT
EDIT Y
LIMIT GRAPH
LINE
TABLE
Y OFFSET
ACCEPT
POSITION
PAGE UP
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
1088.7531.12
3.40
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Trace Key Group
1
3
Analyzer
Receiver
TRACE
2
TRACE 1
TRACE 1
TRACE 1
CLEAR/
WRITE
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
CLEAR/
WRITE
VIEW
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
VIEW
BLANK
T1-T4+REF
-> T1
BLANK
4
T1-REF
->T1
AVERAGE
TRACE MATH
OFF
MAX HOLD
ASCII
EXPORT
ASCII
CONFIG
ASCII
EXPORT
HOLD CONT
ON
OFF
SCAN
COUNT
ASCII
CONFIG
SWEEP
COUNT
TRACE 1
DETECTOR
AUTO
SELECT
DETECTOR
COPY..
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
COPY..
ASCII CONFIG
TRACE MATH
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
EDIT PATH
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
DECIM SEP
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
NEW
APPEND
DETECTOR
RMS
NEW
APPEND
HEADER
OFF
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
ASCII CONFIG
MAX PEAK
EDIT PATH
QUASIPEAK
DECIM SEP
,
AVERAGE
RMS
ON
MIN PEAK
AC VIDEO
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
AUTOPEAK
.
without ESIB-B1
with ESIB-B1
MIN HOLD
FINAL
RESULTS
TRACE 1
DETECTOR
TRACE
MATH
MAX HOLD
MIN HOLD
only trace
3 and 4
TRACE 1
ANALOG TR
OFF
ON
ASCII
COMMENT
with
option
ESIB-B1
DETECTOR
AC VIDEO
.
,
ON
HEADER
OFF
T1-T4+REF
-> T1
T1-REF
->T1
ASCII
COMMENT
FINAL
MAX PEAK
FINAL
QUASIPEAK
FINAL
AVERAGE
1088.7531.12
FINAL
RMS
ADJUST TO
TRACE
FINAL
MIN PEAK
TRACE MATH
OFF
3.41
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Sweep Key Group
Receiver
SWEEP
Analyzer
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
FREE RUN
FREE RUN
TRIGGER
S
S
/
VIDEO
N
LINE
RBW
VBW
EXTERN
EXTERN
SW T
COUPLING
/RUN
RF POWER
TRIGGER
DELAY
SLOPE
POS
NEG
1088.7531.12
SLOPE
POS
NEG
3.42
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Analyzer
SWEEP
Receiver
Receiver
TRIGGER
SCAN
SCAN
SWEEP
SCAN TABLE
CISPR
RANGE A
CONTINOUS
SWEEP
ADJUST
AXIS
CISPR
RANGE B
SINGLE
SWEEP
SINGLE
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE C
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE D
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
SCAN
RANGES
SCAN
RANGES
SWEEP
COUNT
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
RANGES
1-5 6-18
RANGES
1-5 6-18
SWEEP /
SCAN
R
W
V
W
SW T
COUPLING
/RUN
GAP SWEEP
ON
OFF
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
TRIGGER
LEVEL
PRE
TRIGGER
TRG TO GAP
TIME
GAP
LENGTH
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
ON
GATE
OFF
GATE
SETTINGS
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
RUN
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
STOP
SCAN
CONT AT
REC FREQ
CONTINUE
AT HOLD
STOP
SCAN
GATE
SETTINGS
GATE
LEVEL
GATE
ADJUST
GATE
LEVEL
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
GATE POL
POS
NEG
GATE POL
POS
NEG
GATE
DELAY
GATE
DELAY
GATE
LENGTH
GATE
LENGTH
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
GATE
EXTERN
RES BW
MANUAL
GATE
RF POWER
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
VIDEO BW
AUTO
GATE
ADJUST
1088.7531.12
3.43
E-13
Menu Overview
ESIB
Analyzer
Receiver
HOLD
SCAN
SWEEP
TRIGGER
SWEEP /
SCAN
RBW
COUPLED
FUNCTIONS
RES BW
MANUAL
COUPLED
FUNCTIONS
RBW 1 kHz
ANA
DIG
RES BW
AUTO
RBW<=1kHz
NORM
FFT
RES BW
3dB
6dB
VBW
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
SW T
COUPLING
/RUN
VIDEO BW
AUTO
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
CONTINUE
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
STOP
SCAN
.
.
.
COUPLING
DEFAULT
COUPLING
RATIO
COUPLING
RATIO
RBW / VBW
SINE [1]
CONT AT
REC FREQ
RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1]
CONTINUE
AT HOLD
RBW / VBW
NOISE [10]
STOP
SCAN
RBW / VBW
MANUAL
MAIN PLL
BANDWIDTH
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
1088.7531.12
3.44
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
Memory Key Group
MEMORY
SAVE
MEMORY
SAVE
EDIT
NAME
EDIT
PATH
RECALL
EDIT
COMMENT
CONFIG
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
SELECT
ITEMS
DATA SET
LIST
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DATA SET
CLEAR
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
DEFAULT
CONFIG
1088.7531.12
3.45
E-13
Menu Overview
MEMORY
SAVE
ESIB
MEMORY
RECALL
EDIT
NAME
EDIT
PATH
RECALL
AUTO
RECALL
CONFIG
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
SELECT
ITEMS
DATA SET
LIST
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DATA SET
CLEAR
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
DEFAULT
CONFIG
MEMORY
MEMORY
CONFIG
MEMORY
CONFIG
SAVE
EDIT
PATH
RECALL
COPY
CONFIG
FORMAT
DISK
DELETE
RENAME
MAKE
DIRECTORY
SORT MODE
1088.7531.12
PA GE U P
PAGE UP
PA GE D OWN
PAGE DOWN
3.46
E-13
ESIB
Menu Overview
User Key
USER
USER
(MACRO 1)
(MACRO 3)
DEFINE
MACRO
RECORD
ON
OFF
(MACRO 4)
DEFINE
PAUSE
(MACRO 2)
(MACRO 5)
(MACRO 6)
(MACRO 7)
DELETE
MACRO
MACRO
TITLE
DEFINE
MACRO
SELECT
MACRO
1088.7531.12
3.47
E-13
ESIB
Contents - "Instrument Functions"
Contents - Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions"
4 Instrument Functions.......................................................................................... 4.1
General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key Groups...................................... 4.2
ESIB Initial Configuration – PRESET Key ............................................................................... 4.2
Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key .................................................................................... 4.3
Display Screen Mode Selection..................................................................................... 4.4
Measurement Window Coupling ................................................................................... 4.6
Display Screen Configuration ........................................................................................ 4.7
Recording the Correction Data – CAL Key ............................................................................ 4.10
Correction Function Calls ............................................................................................ 4.11
Results of System Error Correction............................................................................. 4.13
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key............................................. 4.14
Firmware Versions ...................................................................................................... 4.14
Hardware Configuration and Options .......................................................................... 4.15
Self Test ...................................................................................................................... 4.16
System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4.17
Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching ....................................................... 4.18
Mode Selection – MODE Key ................................................................................................ 4.19
Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key............................................... 4.21
Using Transducers ...................................................................................................... 4.21
Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets ..................................... 4.22
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors................................................ 4.24
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets..................................................... 4.28
Preamplification and Preselection (incl. ESBI-B2) ...................................................... 4.32
Preselection.................................................................................................... 4.32
Preamplification .............................................................................................. 4.34
Control of V-networks (LISNs)..................................................................................... 4.35
Enabling Firmware Options ......................................................................................... 4.37
External Reference Oscillator...................................................................................... 4.37
Service Functions ........................................................................................................ 4.38
Setting the Interface Configuration and Time.............................................................. 4.41
IEC/IEEE-Bus Address Selection ................................................................... 4.41
User Port Configuration .................................................................................. 4.42
Serial Interface Configuration ......................................................................... 4.43
Setting the Date and Time.............................................................................. 4.46
Connecting the External Monitor .................................................................... 4.46
Switching the Beeper ON/OFF ....................................................................... 4.46
Firmware Update......................................................................................................... 4.47
Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family ...................................................................... 4.47
Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key Group ................................................ 4.48
Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group.............................................................. 4.49
Printing Data – START Key ................................................................................................... 4.49
Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key ............................................................................... 4.51
Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings ................................................ 4.52
Selection of Hardcopy Format..................................................................................... 4.53
Entry of Comment Text ............................................................................................... 4.54
Selection and Configuration of the Printer................................................................... 4.55
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group............................................................ 4.57
Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key ............................................................................. 4.59
Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key ............................................................................................. 4.61
Selecting the Data Set for Saving................................................................................ 4.62
Selecting the Data subset for Storage......................................................................... 4.64
1088.7531.12
I-4.1
E-2
Contents - "Instrument Functions"
ESIB
Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key ................................................................................. 4.66
Selecting the Data Set for Recalling............................................................................ 4.67
Building a Data Set ......................................................................................... 4.69
Macros – USER Key....................................................................................................................... 4.71
Fundamentals ........................................................................................................................ 4.71
Starting Macros...................................................................................................................... 4.72
Defining Macros..................................................................................................................... 4.73
EMI RECEIVER Mode..................................................................................................................... 4.75
Operation on a Discrete Frequency....................................................................................... 4.76
Setting the Receive Frequency ................................................................................... 4.76
Setting the RF Attenuation .......................................................................................... 4.77
Preamplifier ................................................................................................................. 4.79
Setting the IF Bandwidth ............................................................................................. 4.79
Selecting the Detector (incl. ESIB-B1) ........................................................................ 4.80
Setting the Measurement Time ................................................................................... 4.84
AF Demodulators ........................................................................................................ 4.86
Switchover between Full Screen and Split Screen Mode............................................ 4.86
Frequency Scan..................................................................................................................... 4.87
Entry of Scan Data ...................................................................................................... 4.89
Editing a Scan ............................................................................................................. 4.94
Running a Scan ........................................................................................................... 4.95
Data Reduction and Peak List ............................................................................................... 4.97
Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement .......................................................... 4.108
Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks ............................................. 4.109
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group............................................... 4.111
Start Frequency – START Key .................................................................................. 4.111
Stop Frequency – STOP Key .................................................................................... 4.111
Receiver Frequency – FREQ Key ............................................................................. 4.111
Receiver Frequency Step Size .................................................................................. 4.112
Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group.......................................... 4.113
Display Units - UNIT Key........................................................................................... 4.113
Level Range – RANGE Key ...................................................................................... 4.115
RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key ........................................................................ 4.116
Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group ........................................................................... 4.119
Main Markers– NORMAL Key ................................................................................... 4.119
Marker Step Size .......................................................................................... 4.123
Delta Markers – DELTA Key ..................................................................................... 4.124
Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key............................................................. 4.127
Search Functions – SEARCH Key ............................................................................ 4.128
Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key .................................... 4.133
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.134
Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.134
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.136
Limit Line Selection ...................................................................................... 4.137
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines .................................................................... 4.139
Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group................................................................. 4.143
Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key.............................................. 4.143
Mathematical Functions for Traces ........................................................................... 4.148
ASCII Export for Trace data ...................................................................................... 4.149
Scan Control – SWEEP Key Group..................................................................................... 4.153
Entry of Scan Data – SCAN Key ............................................................................... 4.153
Start of Frequency Sweep – RUN Key ...................................................................... 4.153
Triggering a Level Measurement – TRIGGER Key ................................................... 4.154
1088.7531.12
I-4.2
E-2
ESIB
Contents - "Instrument Functions"
Analyzer Mode.............................................................................................................................. 4.155
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group............................................... 4.155
Start Frequency – START Key .................................................................................. 4.155
Stop Frequency – STOP Key .................................................................................... 4.157
Center Frequency – CENTER Key............................................................................ 4.158
Center Frequency Step Size ..................................................................................... 4.160
Frequency Span – SPAN Key ................................................................................... 4.162
Display Zoom............................................................................................................. 4.164
Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group.......................................... 4.165
Reference Level – REF key ...................................................................................... 4.165
Display Units.............................................................................................................. 4.167
Level Range – RANGE Key ...................................................................................... 4.169
RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key ........................................................................ 4.171
Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group ........................................................................... 4.175
Main Markers– NORMAL Key ................................................................................... 4.175
LF Demodulation .......................................................................................... 4.179
Frequency Measurement.............................................................................. 4.181
Noise Power Density Measurement ............................................................. 4.182
Channel Power Measurements .................................................................... 4.183
Marker Step Size .......................................................................................... 4.197
Delta Markers – DELTA Key ..................................................................................... 4.198
Phase Noise Measurement .......................................................................... 4.201
Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key............................................................. 4.202
Search Functions – SEARCH Key ............................................................................ 4.203
Summary Marker .......................................................................................... 4.208
Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key .................................... 4.211
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.213
Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.213
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.217
Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group................................................................. 4.226
Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key.............................................. 4.226
Detector Selection ..................................................................................................... 4.231
Quasi Analog Display ................................................................................................ 4.235
Mathematical Functions for Traces ........................................................................... 4.235
Trace Export.............................................................................................................. 4.237
Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group .................................................................................. 4.240
Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key ......................................................................... 4.240
Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep
Time............................................................................................ 4.241
Sweep Coupling Ratio .................................................................................. 4.247
Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key ............................................................................... 4.249
Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key..................................................................................... 4.251
Gated Sweep ................................................................................................ 4.253
Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep ..................................................................... 4.259
Tracking Generator Option ......................................................................................................... 4.263
Tracking Generator Settings................................................................................................ 4.264
Transmission Measurement ................................................................................................ 4.265
Calibration of the Transmission Measurement.......................................................... 4.265
Normalization............................................................................................................. 4.267
Reflection Measurements.................................................................................................... 4.271
Calibration of Reflection Measurement ..................................................................... 4.271
Calibration Methods................................................................................................... 4.272
Frequency-Converting Measurements ................................................................................ 4.273
External Modulation of Tracking Generator......................................................................... 4.274
1088.7531.12
I-4.3
E-2
Contents - "Instrument Functions"
1088.7531.12
ESIB
I-4.4
E-2
ESIB
Instrument Functions
4 Instrument Functions
All functions of the EMI receiver are explained in detail in this chapter.
The instrument functions for general settings, printout and data management are described at the
beginning of this chapter – key groups SYSTEM, CONFIGURATION, HARDCOPY, MEMORY and the
USER key.
The sequence of the following key groups depends on their appearance on the front panel: key groups
FREQUENCY, LEVEL, MARKER, LINES, TRACE, SWEEP and the INPUT key. The menus are
described separately for the different operating modes.
Option Tracking Generator is described at the end of the chapter. Further options are supplied with a
separate manual.
The various softkeys in a menu are described from top to bottom and from the left to the right side
menu. The submenus are indicated by an indentation or displayed in a separate section. The whole path
(key - softkey - ...) is indicated in the line above the menu display.
An overview of the menus is given in chapter 3 which also contains the description of the operating
concept.
For fast reference a list of softkeys with the associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands is given at the end of
Chapter 6.
An index at the end of the handbook provides as further help for the user.
1088.7531.12
4.1
E-15
Initial Configuration
ESIB
General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key
Groups
ESIB Initial Configuration – PRESET Key
SYSTEM
PRESET
CAL
DI
INFO
AY
Using the PRESET key, the ESIB can be brought to a predefined initial state
equivalent to the state after power on. All previous setting are deleted if they
were not previously saved in memory. Returning to the PRESET state is not
critical with regard to an arbitrary signal which may still be present at the input
as long as the signal is within the specified voltage range.
Note:
The initial state set by the PRESET key can be adapted to the
user requirements using the AUTO RECALL function. When the
PRESET key is pressed, the AUTO RECALL dataset is loaded.
For further information refer to Section "Saving and Recalling
Data Sets".
IEC/IEEE- bus command
:*RST
Pressing the PRESET key, causes the ESIB to enter its initial state according to the following table:
Table 4-1
Initial state of the ESIB
Parameter
Setting
Mode
EMI Receiver
Receiver Frequency
100 MHz
RF Attenuation
Auto
Preamplification
off
Input
Input 1
Detector
AV
Measurement Time
100 ms
IF Bandwidth (RES BW)
120 kHz
Demodulation
off
Trigger
free run
1088.7531.12
4.2
E-15
ESIB
Display Configuration
Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key
The measurement results are displayed on the screen of the ESIB either in a full-screen window or in
two spli-screen windows. In some cases, the two windows can be subdivided into two diagrams each, e.
g. for the representation of the inphase and quadrature signal in the vector analyzer mode (Option FSEB7). In the EMI RECEIVER mode, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A)
between bargraph display of receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode.
If only one window is used, this window fills the complete display screen. Two measurement windows
are always placed over each other. The axes labelling and measurement settings are defined
independently in each measurement window.
When two measurement windows are used, the settings can be chosen to be either coupled or fully
independent from each other (depending on the operating mode). The measurement procedure is
always sequential.
New instrument settings can only be entered in the active measurement window. This window is marked
on the upper right corner of the grid. Coupled settings are changed simultaneously in both windows at
the time of entry.
The entry of the measurement parameters for each of the two windows can be either independent from
one another using numerical inputs, or by graphical definition of the span through the use of level and
frequency lines. The former case, e.g., may be used for harmonic or frequency converter
measurements, and the latter case, for a zoom display of a frequency or level segment.
USER
10.0
Ref Lvl
10 dBm
MKR1 [T1]
+9.8 dBm
10.010000 MHz
RBW
1 kHz
VBW
1 kHz
SWT 100 ms
RF ATT 40 dB
Mixer -30 dBm
Unit
dBm
MARKER
SEARCH
1
A
-0
PEAK
-10
-20
NEXT PEAK
-30
-40
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
-50
-60
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
-70
-80
-90
Center
Ref Lvl
10 dBm
10.000002 MHz
DELTA [T2]
-36.8 dBm
10.000010 MHz
10 kHz/
RBW
1 kHz
VBW
1 kHz
SWT 100 ms
Span 100 kHz
RF ATT 40 dB
Mixer -30 dBm
Unit
dBm
10.0
-0
-10
-20
B
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
1
-30
-40
-50
SELECT
-60
-70
-80
-90
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
Center
Fig. 4-1
1088.7531.12
20.000004 MHz
10 kHz/
Span 100 kHz
Split screen mode
4.3
E-15
Display Configuration
ESIB
SYSTEM DISPLAY menu:
RECEIVER
DISPLAY
FULL
SCREEN
SYSTEM
PRESET
DISPLAY
CAL
ANALYZER
DISPLAY
FULL
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
SPLIT
SCREEN
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
SCREEN A
BARGRAPH
ACTIVE
SCREEN C
SCREEN A
SWEEP
ACTIVE
SCREEN D
The DISPLAY key calls a menu which is used
to configure the display screen and to select
the active measurement window in SPLITSCREEN mode.
The menu differs for the two operating modes
EMI RECEIVER and ANALYZER.
INFO
RUN SCAN
SCREEN
COUPLING
SCREEN
COUPLING
CONFIG
DISPLAY
CONFIG
DISPLAY
Display Screen Mode Selection
SYSTEM DISPLAY menu:
FULL
SCREEN
The FULL SCREEN softkey selects the full-screen display.
In this mode, the ACTIVE SCREEN A / ACTIVE SCREEN B and SCREEN
COUPLING softkeys are not used.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
SPLIT
SCREEN
:DISPlay:FORMat SINGle
The SPLIT SCREEN softkey selects the split screen mode. The upper screen
is designated SCREEN A, the lower screen SCREEN B.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:FORMat SPLit
This is the default setting of the ESIB.
1088.7531.12
4.4
E-15
ESIB
Display Configuration
EMI RECEIVER mode:
In the RECEIVER mode, a selection can be made in the upper half of the screen (SCREEN A) between
bargraph display of the receiver mode and the spectrum analyzer mode.
With spectrum analyzer selected, the scan display in the lower half of the screen remains unchanged
and the spectrum analyzer with all its measurement functions is available in the upper screen half.
It is therefore possible to perform first a premeasurement with a scan and then to further investigate
suspect signals with the aid of the spectrum analyzer, eg in the zero span to determine time
characteristics. The center frequency of the spectrum analyzer can be coupled to the marker frequency
of the scan display so that the frequencies to be analyzed can be easily displayed in the spectrum
analyzer.
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
If SPLIT SCREEN display is activated, the ACTIVE SCREEN A and ACTIVE
SCREEN B softkeys activate either screen A or screen B.
The entry of new settings is only possible for the active window.
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
When switching back to FULL SCREEN mode, the active measurement
window is displayed.
These softkeys are only displayed if operation with two independent channels
and different softkey menus - receiver with scan display and spectrum
analyzer - is selected (SCREEN A SWEEP). Only in this case will it be
necessary to assign entries to the receiver or to the spectrum analyzer.
IEC/IEEE bus command
SCREEN A
BARGRAPH
The SCREEN A BARGRAPH softkey switches on the bargraph display in the
upper half of the screen (SCREEN A).
IEC/IEEE bus command
SCREEN A
SWEEP
- (the screen is selected via the numeric suffix)
:INSTrument[1][:SELect] RECeiver
The SCREEN A SWEEP softkey switches on the analyzer mode in the upper
half of the screen (SCREEN A).
The softkeys of all menus are assigned the analyzer functions. An exception
is the DISPLAY menu where the SCREEN A BARGRAPH softkey is
displayed to allow a return to the bargraph display of the receiver mode.
IEC/IEEE bus command :INSTrument[1][:SELect] SANalyzer
RUN SCAN
The RUN SCAN softkey starts the frequency scan with the selected settings.
(see Section "Frequency Scan").
ANALYZER mode:
ACTIVE
SCREEN A
If SPLIT SCREEN display is activated, the ACTIVE SCREEN A and ACTIVE
SCREEN B softkeys activate either screen A or screen B.
The entry of new settings is only possible for the active window.
ACTIVE
SCREEN B
When switching back to FULL SCREEN mode, the active measurement
window is displayed.
If, in addition, the two screens are both subdivided into two diagrams, the
ACTIVE SCREEN A/B softkeys activate the upper diagram, ACTIVE
SCREEN C/D the lower diagram in each screen.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.5
- (the screen is selected via the numeric suffix)
E-15
Display Configuration
ESIB
Measurement Window Coupling
For the most part, the settings for the two windows can be either independently performed or coupled to
one another. In many cases, when changes are made in one window (e.g., the reference level) it is
desirable to also make the corresponding changes in the second window. The measurement window
parameters which are to be coupled may be selected in the SCREEN COUPLING menu.
SYSTEM DISPLAY-SCREEN COUPLING submenu:
SCREEN
COUPLING
SCREEN
COUPLING
MODE
COUPLED
HORIZONTAL
SCALING
The SCREEN COUPLING softkey calls a sub-menu in
which the coupling between the two measurement
windows SCREEN A and SCREEN B can be defined. This
coupling is only effective when both windows are
displayed (SPLIT SCREEN).
In the default setting, all of the items which are selectable
are also coupled.
VERTICAL
SCALING
COUPLING
CONTROL
...
SCREENS
UNCOUPLED
MODE
COUPLED
The MODE COUPLED softkey switches the coupling of the operating mode
(Analyzer, Vector Analyzer) on/off.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle MODE
HORIZONTAL
SCALING
The HORIZONTAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the
horizontal axes on and off. In the frequency domain, the center frequency and
the frequency span are identical. In the time domain, the sweep time for both
windows is the same.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle X
VERTICAL
SCALING
The VERTICAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the vertical
axes on and off. For a level measurement, this means that the reference level
and the vertical resolution (LEVEL RANGE) are set to the same values in
both windows.
IEC/IEEE- bus command : INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle Y
COUPLING
CONTROL
The COUPLING CONTROL softkey switches the coupling of the trigger and
gate parameters and of SWEEP COUNT and SWEEP SINGLE/
CONTINOUS on/off.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle CONTrol
SCREENS
UNCOUPLED
The SCREENS UNCOUPLED softkey switches all of the possible couplings
between the measurement windows to off.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.6
: INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle NONE | ALL
E-15
ESIB
Display Configuration
Display Screen Configuration
SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY submenu:
CONFIG
DISPLAY
CONFIG
DISPLAY
TIME
ON
OFF
CONFIG
DISPLAY
SELECT
OBJECT
BRIGHTNESS
DISPLAY
COMMENT
The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey calls a submenu, in
which the selection of color and brightness for the
individual elements on the display screen takes
place. The actual selection of the elements takes
place in the corresponding menu table.
The color assignment of the softkeys is coupled with
the color assignment of other display elements.
TINT
SATURATION
SCR SAVER
ON
OFF
SCR SAVER
TIME
DEFAULT
COLORS
PREDEFINED
COLORS
LOGO
ON
OFF
FREQUENCY
ON
OFF
Changing for example the color of SOFTKEY
STATE OFF causes the color of the table
background to be changed at the same time. The
same applies to SOFTKEY STATE DATA ENTRY
and display lines, and to SOFTKEY STATE ON and
enhancement labels.
In the right side menu, date, time and a diagram
label can be displayed on the screen and the energy
saving mode can be activated.
The FREQUENCY ON/OFF softkey is not available
in receiver mode.
DATAENTRY
FIELD
SELECT
OBJECT
The SELECT OBJECT softkey activates the SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT
table, with which a graphics element can be selected. After selection, the
brightness, tint and saturation of the selected element can be changed using
the softkeys of the same name. The color changes can be seen immediately
on the display screen.
SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT
TRACE 1
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
MARKER
GRID
SOFTKEY STATE ON
SOFTKEY STATE DATA ENTRY
SOFTKEY STATE OFF
SOFTKEY SHADE
TEXT
TITLE
BACKGROUND
BRIGHTNESS
The BRIGHTNESS softkey is used to enter the brightness of the color for the
selected element. The range of input values is 0 to 100%.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
TINT
The TINT softkey is used to enter the color tint of the selected element. The
percentage that is entered specifies a point in a color spectrum ranging from
red (0%) to blue (100%).
The TINT function is not available for monochrome (black/white) displays.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
4.7
:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
E-15
Display Configuration
SATURATION
ESIB
The SATURATION softkey is used to enter the color saturation of the
selected element.
The range is 0 to 100%.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
DEFAULT
COLORS
The DEFAULT COLORS softkey restores the default settings for brightness,
color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
PREDEFINED
COLORS
:DISPlay:CMAP:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
:DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:DEFault
The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey activates a table, to select the
predefined colors for the diplay screen elements can be selected.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:PDEFined BLACk
LOGO
OFF
The LOGO softkey switches the Rohde & Schwarz company logo displayed in
the upper left corner of the display screen on or off.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF
FREQUENCY
ON
OFF
The FREQUENCY softkey switches the frequency information on the screen
on and off. The softkey is available only in analyzer mode.
ON Frequency information is displayed.
OFF Frequency information is not output to the display. This can be used for
example to protect confidential data.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON|OFF
TIME
ON
OFF
The TIME softkey switches on or off the date and time display at the lower
edge of the diagram.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF
DISPLAY
COMMENT
The DISPLAY COMMENT softkey activates the entry of a label comprising a
maximum of 50 characters. This label is displayed at the lower edge of the
diagram.
Pressing the softkey again causes the label to be switched off. The stored
text, however, is not deleted.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF
SCR.SAVER
ON
OFF
The SCR. SAVER softkey is used to switch the energy saving mode for the
display on/off.
After the elapse of the shutdown time (SCR. SAVER TIME) the display is
completely switched off, ie including backlighting.
The screen saver is deactivated by pressing any key or by sending the
corresponding IEC/IEEE- bus command.
ON
IEC/IEEE- bus command
SCR.SAVER
TIME
1088.7531.12
:DISPlay:PSAVer[:STATe] ON | OFF
The SCR. SAVER TIME softkey activates the entry of the time for the screen
saver to respond. The shut-down time is entered in minutes between 1 to 100
minutes.
IEC/IEEE- bus command :DISPlay:PSAVer:HOLDoff <num_value>
4.8
E-15
ESIB
Display Configuration
SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY DATAENTRY FIELD Untermenü:
DATAENTRY
FIELD
DATAENTRY
FIELD
DATAENTRY
X
The DATAENTRY FIELD softkey displays a submenu used to specify
the position and characteristics of the data entry field.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
--
DATAENTRY
Y
DEFAULT
POSITION
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE
DATAENTRY
X
The DATAENTRY X
horizontally.
softkey shifts the position of the data entry field
IEC/IEEE- bus command
DATAENTRY
Y
The DATAENTRY Y
vertically.
softkey shifts the position of the data entry field
IEC/IEEE- bus command
DEFAULT
POSITION
--
The DATAENTRY OPAQUE softkey sets the data entry windows to opaque.
This means that entry windows are underlayed with the background color for
tables and that diagrams and traces behind an entry window can no longer be
seen.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
--
The DEFAULT POSITION
softkey positions the data entry field
automatically. In general, its position is the upper left edge of the grid on the
active screen.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE
--
4.9
--
E-15
Calibration
ESIB
Recording the Correction Data – CAL Key
The ESIB maintains its high measurement accuracy thanks to its integrated system-error correction
method. The CAL hard key provides a series of correction functions which allow not only the system
error correction of the complete instrument, but also correction functions which are specifically
applicable to the measurement requirements of relevant instrument sections.
The measurement settings of the ESIB are saved and, after system error correction, completely
restored. The correction data valid before system error correction are saved and, in case of a correction
abort, restored.
A window shows the progress of the correction data recording. ABORT can be used to abort the
procedure at any time.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
Cal BW and CentFreq of 5MHz filt
ABORT
Note:
The term "Calibration" formerly used for integrated system error correction was often taken to be
the "true" calibration of the instrument performed during production and service. It is, therefore,
no longer used although it appears in abbreviated form in the name of keys ("CAL...").
SYSTEM CAL menu:
CALIBRATE
SYSTEM
PRESET
CAL
CAL SHORT
CALIBRATE
CAL
RESULTS
The CAL key displays a menu with
the system error correction functions.
CAL TOTAL
DISPLAY
I
O
CAL
RES BW
CAL LOG
CAL
LO SUPP
CAL I/Q
EMI
PRESEL
PRESEL
PEAK
PAGE UP
CAL CORR
ON
OFF
PAGE DOWN
.
1088.7531.12
4.10
E-15
ESIB
Calibration
Correction Function Calls
SYSTEM CAL menu:
CAL
SHORT
The CAL SHORT softkey starts a short calibration, in which the absolute gain
of the analyzer as well as the gain errors of the selected bandwidth are
corrected.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CAL
TOTAL
:CALibration:SHORt?
The CAL TOTAL softkey starts a complete correction of the receiver including
additional partial corrections shown in the menu.
UNCAL is displayed in the status line if the correction data recording has
failed or if the correction values are deactivated (CAL CORR softkey= OFF).
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CAL
RES BW
The CAL RES BW softkey starts the correction of the center frequency, the
bandwidth and the gain of the resolution filter.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CAL LOG
:CALibration:BANDwidth[:RESolution]?
The CAL LOG softkey starts the correction of the linearity of the logarithmic
amplifier.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CAL
LO SUPP
:CALibration[:ALL]?
:CALibration:LDETector?
The CAL LO SUPP softkey starts the correction of the compensation of the
first oscillator at low frequencies. After correction, the display of the internal
oscillator at the frequency 0 Hz is very small.
It is recommended that the correction be performed whenever sensitive
measurements are to be made at low frequencies.
CAL I/Q
The CAL I/Q softkey starts the correction of the gain error of the I/Q
demodulator.
The softkey is only available in conjunction with option FSE-B7.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.11
:CALibration:IQ?
E-15
Calibration
EMI
PRESEL
ESIB
The EMI PRESEL softkey calibrates the frequency response of the
preselector and the preamplifier.
IEC/IEEE- bus command ::CALibration:PRESelector?
PRESEL
PEAK
The PRESEL PEAK softkey optimizes the tuning of the preselector for input
signals in the frequency range above 7 GHz.
This calibration should be used whenever signal levels in the frequency range
above 7 GHz are to be measured and high accuracy is desired.
If a marker is not active when the PRESEL PEAK softkey is pressed, marker
1 is activated as the reference marker and placed on the signal maximum in
the active trace. Otherwise the active marker is used.
The following window is displayed on the screen while the peaking function is
running. The function can be aborted at any time using the ABORT line. In
this case, the correction value determined at the factory is restored.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
PEAKING
ABORT
The input signal’s signal-to-noise ratio must be at least 10dB in order that the
peaking function runs properly. Otherwise, the preselector may be set
incorrectly, which would cause level errors by subsequent measurements.
If the instrument setting (start/stop frequency, sweep time) is changed after
PRESEL PEAK has been called, the correction value for the preselector
determined by the function is no longer used. Instead, the correction value
determined at the factory is restored.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CAL CORR
ON
OFF
:CALibration:PPEak?
The CAL CORR ON/OFF softkey switches the correction data on/off.
ON
The status message depends upon the results of the total correction
OFF The message UNCAL appears in the ESIB status line.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.12
:CALibration:STATe ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Calibration
Results of System Error Correction
SYSTEM CAL menu:
CAL
RESULTS
The CAL RESULTS softkey in the right-hand supplementary menu calls the
CALIBRATION RESULTS table, which displays the correction data that has
been recorded.
The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information:
page 1:
• date and time of the last recorded correction values
• overall results of the correction value recording
• list of the correction procedures according to function/module, including the
correction values, the measured results and the individual results for each
of the correction procedures
The results for the individual correction procedures are categorised and
displayed as follows:
PASSED
system error correction was completely successful
CHECK
deviations larger than expected, however, corrections could
be performed
FAILED
deviations too large, no corrections were possible
ABORTED
correction aborted
CALIBRATION RESULTS
CALIBRATION: PASSED
Last cal total: 05.Jun 1997 16:24:54
Calibration of IF Filters
PASSED
IF GAIN Adjust
PASSED
Bandwidth:
Filter Cal Val [Hz] DAC Val State
1kHz
2.806e+01
1679
PASSED
2kHz
1.603e+01
2887
PASSED
3kHz -6.012e+00
3238
PASSED
5kHz -1.002e+01
3514
PASSED
10kHz
1.804e+02
3703
PASSED
20kHz
3.607e+02
3801
PASSED
30kHz
8.417e+02
3831
PASSED
50kHz
1.403e+03
3743
PASSED
100kHz
1.804e+03
3698
PASSED
200kHz
3.607e+03
3606
PASSED
300kHz
8.417e+03
3516
PASSED
500kHz
1.403e+04
3329
PASSED
1MHz
2.806e+04
2881
PASSED
IEC/IEEE- bus command
PAGE UP
--
The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys can be used to page through the
table of correction results.
PAGE DOWN
1088.7531.12
4.13
E-15
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters
ESIB
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key
SYSTEM INFO menu:
INFO
SYSTEM
PRESET
INSTRUMENT
SETTINGS
CAL
INFO
•
•
•
•
firmware version
installed hardware and hardware options
modification level of the individual modules
self-test results with the option of calling self-test
functions
• list of generated system messages
• installed firmware and hardware options.
• Statistical evaluations
FIRMWARE
VERSIONS
DISPLAY
The INFO key is used to request general information
concerning the instrument. These include:
HARDWARE+
OPTIONS
SELFTEST
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
OPTIONS
STATISTIC
HELP
Firmware Versions
SYSTEM INFO menu:
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The FIRMWARE VERSIONS softkey opens two tables, which provide the
following informations:
•
Table MODEL displays the exact instrument model.
MODEL
ESIB26
•
In the FIRMWARE VERSION table, the version of each software
component installed in the instrument is listed. The versions of
programmable logic devices are also included if the firmware version of
the device can be determined.
FIRMWARE VERSION
BIOS
1.2
RECEIVER
1.65
SERIAL NUMBER 101379/005
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.14
:*IDN?
E-15
ESIB
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters
Hardware Configuration and Options
SYSTEM INFO menu:
HARDWARE+
OPTION
The HARDWARE+OPTIONS softkey opens two tables in which the modules
(INSTALLED COMPONENTS) installed in the instrument are listed.
• Table MODEL lists the instrument name and model:
MODEL
ESIB26
• Table INSTALLED COMPONENTS consists of four columns:
COMPONENT name of module
MODEL INDEX model number of the module
MODIF INDEX main modification index of the module
HW CODE
secondary modification index of the module
These lists contain only the modules which are actually present in the
instrument, i.e., the modules which were identified by the module
recognition software.
INSTALLED COMPONENTS
COMPONENT
MODEL INDEX
Main Processor
Graphic Board
I/O Board
FRAC SYN
RF Module
2nd IF Converter
LO Phase
Preselector
MW Converter
MW YIG Filter
Detector
RF Attenuator
IF Filter
Digital IF
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
3
2
IEC/IEEE- bus command
OPTIONS
MODIF INDEX
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
0
2
4
6
0
0
0
4
2
0
HW CODE
0
0
0
4
4
2
12
0
0
0
2
0
3
2
*OPT?
:SYSTem:BINFo?
The OPTIONS softkey opens two tables listing the options installed. The
standard ESIB is equipped with options FSE-B4 and FSE-B5. The options are
indicated for reasons of compatibility to instrument family FSE.
FIRMWARE OPTIONS
DESIGNATION
TYPE
CODE
FFT
B5
1938496289
Note: New firmware options can be enabled in the SETUP menu.
HARDWARE OPTIONS
DESIGNATION
CODE
Low Phase Noise & OCXO
Vector Signal Analysis
B4
B7
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.15
*OPT?
E-15
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters
ESIB
Self Test
SYSTEM INFO-SELFTEST submenu:
SELFTEST
EXECUTE
TESTS
SELFTEST
EXECUTE
TESTS
The SELFTEST softkey opens a submenu with which the self test
can be started.
.
.
.
The instrument has extensive self test functions which
comprehensively test instrument functionality. In case of a fault,
the instrument can locate a defective module on its own. The self
test sequence is described in more detail in the service manual
instrument (supplied with the ESIB).
The EXECUTE TESTS softkey starts the test of the complete instrument.
During the self test a window is displayed:
SELFTEST
in progress
ABORT
The functions are tested in the following order:
1. Modules main CPU, digital motherboard, graphics and the interfaces
2. Reference frequency conditioning, the synthesizer modules and all LO
signals
3. All RF, IF and signal-weighting modules
If no failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the following message
is displayed when the complete self test is finished:
SELFTEST
successfully completed
OK
If a failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the self test is
immediately aborted and a message indicating the defective module and the
defective function is displayed:
SELFTEST FAILED
IF Filter Stepgain
ABORT
Further testing should be performed by an R&S service department.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
4.16
:*TST?
E-15
ESIB
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters
System Messages
The SYSTEM MESSAGES softkey opens a submenu with a table in which the generated system
messages are displayed. The most recent messages are at the top of the list.
The following information is presented:
NO
Device-specific three-digit error code (shown as XXX in the figure)
MESSAGE
Brief description of the reason for the message
DATE/TIME
Date and time of the message
Error messages that have occurred since the SYSTEM MESSAGES menu was last called are marked by
an asterix "*".
SYSTEM INFO-SYSTEM MESSAGES submenu:
USER
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
SY STEM MESSAGES
NO
MESSAGE
DATE/TIME
17.Oct.99; 12:05:33
102 * CH1 LO unl: frac syn synth.
CLEAR
MESSAGE
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
UPDATE
MESSAGES
IEC/IEEE- bus command :SYSTem:ERRor?
CLEAR
MESSAGE
The CLEAR MESSAGE softkey deletes the message just selected.
All subsequent messages are shifted automatically one line upwards so that
no empty lines exist. When the last message has been deleted, the selection
bar also disappears.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES
The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey deletes all messages.
IEC/IEEE- bus command
UPDATE
MESSAGES
--
The UPDATE MESSAGES softkey causes all newly arrived messages to be
entered at the top of the table. At this time, all messages previously indicated
as "new" are displayed as "old" messages
IEC/IEEE- bus command
1088.7531.12
:SYSTem:ERRor?
4.17
--
E-15
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters
ESIB
Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching
SYSTEM INFO menu:
STATISTIC
ATT
SWITCHES
STATISTICS
ATT
SWITCHES
The STATISTICS softkey calls a submenu for indication of
device statistics.
The ATT SWITCHES softkey displays various tables listing the mechanical
switches and attenuators fitted in the instrument, plus the number of
switching operations for the respective switch or attenuator.
INPUT ATTENUATOR
Date
Calibration Input
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
5 Aug 1999
6
121
217
137
IEC/IEEE- bus command
:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation <1|2|3>
1088.7531.12
4.18
E-15
ESIB
Mode Selection
Mode Selection – MODE Key
The ESIB can be operated in one of several modes, each of which is different with respect to
functionality and control. The differences in control, however, consist not only in the enabling/disabling of
additional softkeys within existing softkey menus, but rather in the fact that existing menus are
completely replaced by new menus and menu trees which are tailored to the functional requirements.
CONFIGURATION MODE menu
CONFIGURATION
MODE
ANALYZER
The MODE key opens the menu for selection
of the mode.
MODE
Herein, the modes can be selected according
to the available ESIB options.
EMI
RECEIVER
SE
P
• Analyzer
TRACKING
GENERATOR
• EMI Test Receiver
• Tracking Generator
VECTOR
ANALYZER
• Vector Signal Analysis and
.
.
ANALYZER
The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode.
The functions provided correspond to those of a conventional spectrum
analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the test signal
over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep
time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer
EMI
RECEIVER
The EMI RECEIVER softkey selects the EMI Test Receiver mode.
This mode is the default setting of the ESIB.
In the receiver mode, ESIB behaves like a test receiver, ie if the basic
settings are active, it measures the level with the selected bandwidth and
measurement time at the set frequency. The signal is evaluated by means of
the four detectors average, peak, rms and quasi peak.
A frequency sweep may be carried out with the start and stop frequencies
and the stepwidth.
The main menu of the RECEIVER mode is described in detail in Section ’EMI
Receiver Mode’.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
TRACKING
GENERATOR
1088.7531.12
:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver
The TRACKING GENERATOR softkey selects the operating mode Scalar
Network Analysis.
The softkey is only available if ESIB is equipped with option: FSE-B10 or B11.
For a detailed description of operation see Section ’Option Tracking
Generator’.
4.19
E-15
Mode Selection
VECTOR
ANALYZER
ESIB
Softkey VECTOR ANALYZER selects the vector analysis mode.
The softkey is only available if ESIB is equipped with Option FSE-B7.
In the vector analyzer mode the ESIB is automatically set to a fixed
frequency (center frequency) since vector analysis can only be carried out on
one frequency.
The IF signal is digitized by the selected resolution bandwidth after filtering
and mixed into the baseband by a digital mixer. Further processing is via
digital signal processors which display the time characteristic of the amplitude
or phase. As an option, the baseband can also be demodulated and the
demodulated signal can be displayed. Principally any type of modulation
(digital and analog) can be processed.
The functions of the analyzer mode are supplemented by the vector analysis
functions which are described in detail in a separate manual to the option.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :INSTrument[:SELect] DDEMod
1088.7531.12
4.20
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
CONFIGURATION
MODE
SETUP
TRANSDUCER
SETUP
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
PRESELECT
ON
OFF
SETUP
PREAMP
ON
OFF
FSE MODE
ON
OFF
The SETUP key opens
configuration of the ESIB.
the
menu
for
The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a
submenu for entering correction characteristics for the measurement transducer.
Softkey
PRESELECT
activates
preselection in the Analyzer mode.
the
Softkey PREAMP switches the preamplifier on
and off while preselection is active.
LISN
The LISN softkey opens the submenu
including the settings required to control Vnetworks (LISNs).
OPTIONS
The OPTIONS softkey allows the enabling of
firmware options (Application Firmware
Modules).
REFERENCE
INT
EXT
The REFERENCE INT/EXT and EXTERNAL
REF FREQUENCY softkeys determine the
reference to be used.
EXT REF
FREQUENCY
SERVICE
The SERVICE softkey provides special setup
functions which, although not necessary in
normal use, are useful in instrument service.
GENERAL
SETUP
The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a
submenu for all the general settings such as
date and time as well as the configuration of
the device interfaces.
The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens a
submenu for the installation of a firmeware
update.
The FSE MODE softkey determines whether
the ESIB is FSE-compatible after preset.
Using Transducers
A transducer is often connected ahead of ESIB both during the measurement of useful signals and EMI
and converts the useful or interference variable such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a
voltage across 50 Ohm. Transducers with a frequency-independent transducer factor can be coded in
10-dB steps together with the unit at connector PROBE CODE. They are supplied at the same time by
this connector. Transducers such as antennas, probes or current probes mostly have a frequencydependent transducer factor which can be stored in ESIB and automatically has the correct unit during
level measurement.
If a transducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measurement, ie the
measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude. When working with two measurement
windows, the transducer is always assigned to two windows.
ESIB distinguishes between transducer factor and transducer set. A transducer factor takes the
frequency response of a single transfer element, eg an antenna into consideration. A transducer set can
summarize different transducer factors in several subranges (several transducer factors at the same
time), eg an antenna, a cable and a diplexer.
1088.7531.12
4.21
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
A transducer factor consists of max. 50 reference values defined with frequency, transducer factor and
the unit. For the measurement between frequency values linear or logarithmic interpolation of the
transducer factor can be chosen.
Several factors can be compiled in a transducer set provided that all factors have the same unit or unit
"dB". The frequency range covered by a set can be subdivided into max. 10 subranges (each with up to
4 transducer factors) which follow each other without a gap, ie the stop frequency of a subrange is the
start frequency of the next subrange.
The transducer factors used in a subrange have to fully cover the subrange.
The definition of a transducer set is recommended if different transducers are used in the frequency
range to be measured or if a cable attenuation or an amplifier has to be taken into consideration.
If a transducer set is defined during a frequency sweep, the latter can be stopped at the interface
between two transducer ranges and the user is asked to exchange the transducer.
The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached:
TDS Range # reached, CONTINUE / BREAK
He can continue the sweep by confirming the message (CONTINUE) or he can switch off the transducer
(BREAK).
With the automatic switchover of the transducer used, the frequency sweep is not interrupted.
Note:
Transducers cannot be used in vector analyzer mode.
Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets
The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu in which already defined transducer factors or sets can
be activated or deactivated, new transducer factors or sets can be generated or existing transducer
factors or sets can be edited. Tables with the defined transducer factors and sets are displayed. The
table (factor or set) in which a transducer is active is set.
By switching on the transducers all the level settings and outputs are automatically made in the unit of
the transducer. A change of the unit in menu LEVEL REF is no longer possible as ESIB together with
the transducer used is regarded as a measuring instrument. Only if the transducer has the unit dB, can
the original unit at ESIB be maintained and changed.
Note:
If one of the units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA, or dBµA/m is selected, the LEVEL REF key (see
UNIT-submenu) can be used to switch to the corresponding units referred to the bandwidth,
i.e. dBµV/MHz, dBµV/mMHz, dBµA/MHz, dBµA/mMH.
If a transducer factor is active, TDF is displayed in the column of the enhancement labels and TDS if the
transducer set is active.
After switching off all the transducers, ESIB continues to use the unit which was selected before a
transducer was switched on.
In the analyzer mode, an active transducer for a sweep is uniquely calculated for each point displayed
after its setting and added to the result of the level measurement during the sweep. If the sweep range
is changed, the correction values are recalculated. If several measured values are combined, only a
single value is taken into consideration.
If an active transducer factor/set is not defined over the whole sweep or scan range during the
measurement, the missing values are replaced by zero.
1088.7531.12
4.22
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu
USER
TRANSDUCER
ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR
Name:
Unit:
Cable_1
dB
Comment:
Cable length 1.50 m, No.112234
Freq range:
to:
TRANSDUCER FACTOR
Name
Antenna1
Probe_A
Probe_B
Probe_C
My_Probe
Cable_1
Cable_2
Preamp
_
0 Hz
2.000 GHz
TRANSDUCER SET
Name
Unit
Antenna
dBµV/m
Ant_Cab2
dBµV/m
Ant_Pre
dBµV/m
Ant_Cab1
dBµV/m
Probeset
dBµA
_
Unit
dBµV/m
dBµA
dBµA
dBµA
dBµV
dB
dB
dB
TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
FACTOR
TRANSDUCER
SET
EDIT TRD
FACTOR
EDIT
TRD SET
NEW
FACTOR/SET
DELETE
FACTOR/SET
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
Press ENTER to (de)activate
The upper table ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR / SET indicates the active transducer factor or the
set with the associated name, frequency range and unit. If no factor or set is active, none is displayed in
the table. Additional information can be entered in a comment line. If a transducer factor is active, the
selected interpolation is displayed in addition, if a set is active, the break setting is displayed.
The left table TRANSDUCER FACTOR comprises all the defined factors with name and unit. If the
number of defined transducer factors exceeds the number of possible lines in the table, the table will be
scrolled.
The right table TRANSDUCER SET comprises all the defined transducer sets with the corresponding
information.
Only one set or transducer can be activated. An already active transducer factor or set is switched off
automatically if another one is switched on. An activated transducer factor or set is marked with a check
sign.
TRANSDUCER
FACTOR
The TRANSDUCER FACTOR softkey sets the selection bar to the position of
the active transducer factor.
If no transducer factor is switched on, the bar is positioned to the first line of
the table.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <name>
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF
TRANSDUCER
SET
The TRANSDUCER SET softkey sets the selection bar to the position of the
active transducer set.
If no transducer set is switched on, the bar is set to the first line of the table.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name>
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.23
E-15
Configuration/Setup
DELETE
FACTOR/SET
ESIB
The DELETE FACTOR/SET softkey deletes the marked factor or set. To
avoid deletion by mistake, deletion has to be confirmed.
MESSAGE
Do you really want to
delete factor or set?
YES
NO
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:DELete
PAGE UP
The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys are used to scroll in large tables
which cannot fully be displayed on the screen.
PAGE DOWN
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors
A transducer factor is characterized by
•
•
•
reference values with frequency and transducer factor (Values)
the unit of the transducer factor (Unit) and
the name (Name) to distinguish between the different factors.
During the entry, ESIB checks the transducer factor according to specific rules that have to be met to
ensure trouble-free operation.
•
The frequencies for the reference values always have to be entered in ascending order. Otherwise,
the entry is not accepted and the following message is displayed:
Frequency Sequence!
•
The entered frequencies do not necessarily have to be set at ESIB, as only the values for the
frequency display range are considered for a set sweep or scan. The minimum frequency for a
reference value is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz.
•
The minimum or maximum value for a transducer factor is -200 dB or 200 dB. The unit "dB" means
that the transducer factor is always logarithmic and has nothing to do with the physical transducer
factor, which, for example, establishes the relationship between field strength and voltage into 50
Ohm. If the minimum or maximum value is exceeded, ESIB signals:
Min Level -200 dB or
Max Level 200 dB.
•
Amplifiers have a negative transducer factor, attenuation values have to be entered as a positive
transducer factor.
Note:
A unit activated by switching on the transducer has priority over a coded unit of the
connected probe.
With the exception of dB*/MHz, the softkeys for the unit in the menu under key LEVEL REF
are inoperative with the transducer switched on.
1088.7531.12
4.24
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
EDIT TRD
FACTOR
The EDIT TRD FACTOR and NEW FACT/SET softkeys
both open the submenu for editing and entering new
transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW
FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located
in the table when the table TRANSDUCER FACTOR is
called up.
NEW TRD
FACTOR/SET
USER
EDIT TRANSDUCER FACTOR
Name:
Antenna1
Unit:
dBuV/m
Interpolation: LIN
Comment:
Ant1 and cable 1
NO.
TDF/dB..
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
20.0000
25.0000
30.0000
40.0000
50.0000
60.0000
70.0000
80.0000
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
EDIT TRD
FACTOR
TRD FACTOR
NAME
TRD FACTOR
UNIT
TDF/dB..
TRD FACTOR
VALUES
25.5
23.8
20.5
19.8
20.0
19.5
19.1
18.2
INSERT
LINE
DELETE
LINE
SAVE TRD
FACTOR
DRAW TRD
FACTOR
24
25
48
49
50
The table with the data of the marked factor (the EDIT TRD FACTOR softkey) or an empty table is
displayed in which the following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey):
Unit:
dB
Interpolation:
LIN for linear frequency scaling
LOG for logarithmic frequency scaling
The characteristics of the factor can be entered in the header field of the table, the frequency and the
transducer factor in the columns of the table.
Name
Entry of the name
Unit
Selection of unit
Interpolation
Selection of interpolation
Comment
Entry of a comment
FREQUENCY
Entry of the frequency of the reference points
TDF/dB
Entry of the transducer factor.
An overwritten transducer factor remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored
with the SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey or until the table is closed. A factor overwritten by mistake can be
restored by leaving the entry.
1088.7531.12
4.25
E-15
Configuration/Setup
TRD FACTOR
NAME
ESIB
The TRD FACTOR NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer factor
characteristics in the header field of the table.
Name - Entry of name
A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have
to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically
stores all transducer factors with the extension .TDS.
If an existing name is changed, the factor stored under the previous name is
retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The
previous factor can be deleted at a later time, using DELETE FACTOR/SET.
Thus, factors can be copied.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TRAN:SELect <name>
TRD FACTOR
UNIT
Unit - Selection of unit
The unit of the transducer factor is selected from a selection box activated by
the TRD FACTOR UNIT softkey.
FACTOR UNIT
dB
dBm
dBµV
dBµV/m
dBµA
dBµA/m
dBpW
dBpT
The default setting is dB.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TRAN:UNIT <string>
Interpolation - Selection of interpolation
Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled
between LIN and LOG (toggle function).
The following diagrams indicate the effect of the interpolation on the
calculated characteristic:
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TRAN:SCAL LIN|LOG
Fig. 4-2 Linear frequency axis and linear interpolation
1088.7531.12
4.26
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Fig. 4-3 Logarithmic frequency axis and logarithmic interpolation
Fig. 4-4 Logarithmic frequency axis and linear interpolation
Comment - Entry of a comment
The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50
characters.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENS<1|2>:]CORR:TRAN:COMM <string>
TRD FACTOR
VALUES
The TRD FACTOR VALUES softkey activates the entry for the reference
values of the transducer factor.
INSERT
LINE
The selection bar marks the first reference value. The desired reference
values have to be entered in ascending frequency sequence.
After entering the frequency the selection bar automatically jumps to the
corresponding level value. After entering the first reference value the table
can be edited. The two INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are
displayed. Individual values are changed at a later time by marking the field
and by entering the new value.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENS<1|2>:]CORR:TRAN:DATA
<freq>,<level>
The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked reference
value. When entering a new reference value into this line watch out for the
ascending frequency sequence.
DELETE
LINE
The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked reference value (the whole
line). The following reference values move up.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
SAVE TRD
FACTOR
The SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey saves the changed table in a file on the
internal hard disk.
If a transducer factor with the same name already exists, a corresponding
query is performed beforehand.
If the factor to be newly saved is currently switched on, the new values will
immediately be valid. If a transducer set is switched on comprising the factor,
the values will only be used when the set is switched on next time.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.27
- (executed automatically)
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets
A transducer set is characterized by:
− maximum 10 ranges (Ranges) in which different transducer factors can be active
− the combination of several transducer factors per range (Factor)
− a transducer-set name (Name)
EDIT
TRD SET
The EDIT TRD SET and NEW FACTOR/SET softkeys
both open the submenu for editing and entering new
transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW
FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located
in the table TRANSDUCER SET.
NEW TRD
FACTOR/SET
USER
EDIT
TRANSD SET
TRANSD SET
NAME
EDIT TRANSDUCER SET
Name:
Unit:
Break:
Comment:
Ant_Cab1
dBµV/m
ON
Ant. 1 and cable 1
TRANSDUCER SET RANGES
Start
Stop
TRANSD SET
UNIT
TRANSD SET
RANGES
Sel
fac
INSERT
LINE
20.00000 MHz 80.00000 MHz
80.00000 MHz 400.00000 MHz
400.0000 MHz
1.00000 GHz
DELETE
LINE
SAVE TRD
SET
DRAW
TRD SET
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
The table with the data of the marked set (the EDIT TRD SET softkey) or an empty table in which the
following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey) is displayed:
Unit:
dB
Break:
NO
The characteristics of the set can be entered in the header field of the table, the subranges in the
columns of the set.
Name
Entry of the name
Unit
Selection of unit
Break
Activating the query when changing the subrange
Comment
Entry of a comment
Start
Entry of the start frequency of the subrange
Stop
Entry of the stop frequency of the subrange
Sel Fac
Selection of the transducer factors for the subrange
1088.7531.12
4.28
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
An overwritten transducer set remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored
with the SAVE TRD SET softkey or until the table is closed. A set overwritten by mistake can be
restored by leaving the entry.
TRANSD SET
NAME
The TRD SET NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer set
characteristics in the header field of the table.
Name - Entry of name
A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have
to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically
stores all transducer sets with the extension .TDS.
If an existing name is changed, the set stored under the previous name is
retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The
previous set can be deleted at a later time using DELETE FACTOR/SET.
Thus, sets can be copied.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TSET:SELect <name>
TRANSD SET
UNIT
Unit - Selection of unit
The unit of the transducer set is selected from a selection box activated by
the TRANSD SET UNIT softkey.
The unit should be selected prior to the entry as it determines the settable
transducer factors. The preset unit for new sets is "dB". The unit can no
longer be changed when editing a set as the set of selected transducer
factors will otherwise become inconsistent.
SET UNIT
dB
dBm
dBµV
dBµV/m
dBµA
dBµA/m
dBpW
dBpT
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TSET:UNIT <string>
Break - Activation of query when changing a subrange
The sweep can be stopped if the user changes the subrange and selects a
new subrange of the transducer. A message informs the user that the limit
has been attained. He can continue the sweep or switch off the transducer.
The interruption is activated by setting Break to ON. Selection is by the
ENTER key which toggles between ON and OFF (toggle function).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TSET:BREak ON|OFF
Comment - Entry of a comment
The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50
characters.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORR:TSET:COMMent <string>
1088.7531.12
4.29
E-15
Configuration/Setup
TRANSD SET
RANGES
ESIB
Softkey TRANSD SET RANGES activates the entry of subranges and the
associated transducer factors. The selection bar marks the frequency values
last active.
Start - Entry of start frequency of subrange
Stop - Entry of stop frequency of subrange
The individual subranges have to be linked without a gap. That is why the
start frequency is already defined from the second subrange (= stop
frequency of previous range).
After entering the first frequency value the table can be edited. The two
INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are displayed. Some values are
changed at a later time by marking the field and by entering the new value. It
should be noted that both the stop frequency of a particular subrange and the
start frequency of the subsequent subrange are changed to the same extent.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<1..10>
<freq>,<freq>,<name>..
Sel fac- Selection of factors for the subrange
A check sign in column Sel Fac (select factor) indicates whether one or
several transducer factors were selected for the subrange.
The permissible transducer factors for the marked subrange can be selected
in a selection box. Only factors matching with the unit of the set and fully
covering the selected subrange are permissible.
After each change of range limits, ESIB thus checks the factor list and, if
required, rebuilds it.
After reducing the start frequency or increasing the stop frequency of a range
it may happen that the factors defined for this range no longer fully cover the
range. These factors are deleted for this range when the transducer factor
table is opened next time.
A maximum of 4 transducer factors can be switched on at the same time in
each subrange. If none of them is switched on, 0 dB is assumed as a factor
for the whole subrange.
SELECT TRANSDUCER FACTOR
Name
Antenna1
Probe_A
Probe_B
Probe_C
My_Probe
Cable_1
Cable_2
Preamp
Unit
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dBµV/m
dB
dB
dB
dB
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.30
--
E-15
ESIB
INSERT
LINE
DELETE
LINE
Configuration/Setup
The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked subrange.
The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked subrange (whole line). The
following subranges move up.
In both cases ESIB checks that the ranges follow each other without a gap.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SAVE TRD
SET
--
The SAVE TRD SET softkey saves the changed table in a file on the internal
hard disk. If a transducer name with the same name already exists, a
corresponding query is performed beforehand:
MESSAGE
File exists! Do you
want to overwrite?
YES
NO
After pressing ENTER, the data set is overwritten on the hard disk.
If the saved set is switched on, the new values will be used immediately.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
-- (executed automatically)
PAGE UP
The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys set the table to the next or
previous page.
PAGE UP
The softkeys are locked during selection of factors in the right table.
1088.7531.12
4.31
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
Preamplification and Preselection
In the frequency range up to 7 GHz, ESIB has a preselection with switchable preamplifier which can be
selected by the user in the analyzer mode. The preselection is always active in the receiver mode.
Option ESIB-B2, Preamplification, extends the frequency range for preamplification to 26.5 GHz or
40 GHz.
The 20 dB preamplifier is available only if the preselection is switched on.
Preselection
The frequency range 20 Hz to 7 GHz is distributed over nine filter bands. Two fixed-tuned filters are
used up to 2.025 MHz, six tracking passband filters from 2.025 to 1000 MHz and a fixed-tuned highpass filter above 1 GHz.
The filters are switched by a relay at 150 kHz and by PIN-diode switches above 150 kHz.
LP 150 kHz
BP 150 kHz...2.025MHz
BP 2.025...8.025MHz
Preamplifier
BP 8.025...25.025MHz
20 Hz...7 GHz
20 Hz...7 GHz
BP 25.025...80.025MHz
BP 80.025...200.025MHz
BP 200.025...500.025MHz
BP 500.025 ...1000MHz
HP 1GHz
Fig. 4-6 Preselection and preamplifier
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
PRESELECT
ON
OFF
The PRESELECT ON/OFF softkey switches the preselection on or off.
The softkey is available only in the analyzer mode.
IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut<1|2>:PRESelection[:STATe] ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.32
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Preselection causes additional dependencies which are automatically taken into account in the coupled
setting.
• With the preselection active, the FFT bandwidths are not available.
• With the preselection active, the start frequency is set to 150 kHz in the FULL SPAN setting to avoid
permanent switching of the relay at the band limit of 150 kHz.
• When the measurement is performed with activated preselection, it must be ensured that the
resolution bandwidth is not greater than the preselection bandwidth. On entering the resolution
bandwidth (RBW), this value is limited depending on the selected start frequency:
Start frequency
Max. RBW
fstart < 150 kHz
100 kHz
150 kHz ≤ fstart < 8.025 MHz
500 kHz
8.025MHz ≤ fstart < 25.025 MHz
2 MHz
25.025 MHz ≤ fstart < 80.025 MHz
5 MHz
fstart ≥ 80.025 MHz
10 MHz
• Due to the limited tuning speed of the tracking passband filters, the maximum sweep rate (7 GHz / 5
ms) can no longer be attained with the preselection switched on. The minimum settable sweep time is
obtained from the sum of the minimum possible sweep times in the associated filter bands.
Filter band
Min. sweep time for
filter band
20 Hz to 150 kHz
-
150 kHz to 2,025 MHz
-
2.025 to 8.025 MHz
500 ms
8.025 to 25.025 MHz
50 ms
25.025 to 80.025 MHz
50 ms
80.025 to 200.025 MHz
50 ms
200.025 to 500.025 MHz
50 ms
500.025 to 1000 MHz
-
1000 to 7000 MHz
-
A longer sweep time is distributed over the filter bands such that only the times in the bands with the
shorter sweep times are increased. The time available is uniformly distributed over all bands provided
all bands are swept at the same speed.
1088.7531.12
4.33
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
Preamplification
Switching on the preamplifier diminishes the total noise figure of the ESIB, thus increasing the
sensitivity. The preamplifier follows the preselection filters so that the risk of overdriving by strong out-ofband signals is reduced to a minimum. The signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that
the maximum input level is reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. The total noise figure of ESIB is
reduced from approx. 18 dB to approx. 11 dB with the preamplifier switched on. The use of the
preamplifier is recommended when measurements with a maximum sensitivity are to be performed. If
the measurement should be performed at maximum dynamic range, the preamplifier should be switched
off.
The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. On switching on the
preamplifier the RF attenuation or the reference level is adapted depending on the settings of the ESIB.
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
ON
PREAMP
OFF
The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on or off.
The softkey is available only in the analyzer mode when the measurement
with preselection is activated.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.34
:INPut<1|2>:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Control of V-networks (LISNs)
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
LISN
LISN
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
ESH3-Z5
PRESELECT
OFF
ON
OFF
The LISN softkey opens the submenu including the settings
required to control V-networks (LISNs).
Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF or PHASE
N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 as well as PE
GROUNDED and PE FLOATING are toggle keys. Only one of
them can be activated at a time.
PHASE N
PHASE L1
PHASE L2
PHASE L3
PE
GROUNDED
PE
FLOATING
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
ESH3-Z5
Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF allow to select the Vnetwork to be controlled via the user port.
ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200
four-line V-network is controlled,
ESH3-Z5
two-line V-network is controlled,
OFF
remote control is deactivated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
INPut:LISN[:TYPE]
TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF
OFF
1088.7531.12
4.35
E-15
Configuration/Setup
PHASE N
PHASE L1
PHASE L2
ESIB
Softkeys PHASE N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 select the phase
of the V-network on which the RFI voltage is to be measured.
PHASE N
RFI on phase N is measured,
PHASE L1
RFI on phase L1 is measured,
PHASE L2
RFI on phase L2 is measured
(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200),
PHASE L3
RFI on phase L3 is measured
(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
INPut:LISN:PHASe
L1 | L2 | L3 | N
PHASE L3
PE
GROUNDED
PE
FLOATING
1088.7531.12
Softkeys PE GROUNDED and PE FLOATING switch the protective earth
conductor chokes on or off.
PE GROUNDED
protective earth conductor choke switched off,
PE FLOATING
protective earth conductor choke switched.
IEC/IEEE-bus command INPut:LISN:PEARth
4.36
GROunded | FLOating
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Enabling Firmware Options
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
OPTIONS
The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu for entering keywords for new
firmware options (Application Firmware Modules). Options which are already
available are indicated in a table that is opened when the menu is called.
ENABLE NEW
OPTION
The ENABLE OPTION softkey activates the entry of a
keyword for a firmware option.
One or several keywords may be specified in the entry
field. When a valid keyword is entered, the message
OPTION KEY OK appears in the info line and the option
is written into the FIRMWARE OPTIONS table.
The FIRMWARE OPTIONS table can also be displayed
using the FIRMWARE OPTIONS softkey in the INFO
menu.
If a keyword is invalid the message OPTION KEY
INVALID is displayed in the info line.
IEC/IEEE-bus command --
External Reference Oscillator
In general, the ESIB can generate all internal oscillators from either the internal or an external reference
oscillator. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source. A reference oscillator
output is also available at the rear panel via the EXT REF IN/OUT connector.
This output can be used, e.g., to synchronize other instruments to the ESIB. This connector can also be
used as an input connector for application of an external frequency standard. The ESIB requires that the
frequency of the external standard be entered so that the internal oscillators can be synchronized to it.
CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu:
REFERENCE
INT
EXT
The REFERENCE INT EXT softkey toggles between the internal and external
references.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
EXT REF
FREQUENCY
The EXT REF FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry of the frequency of
the external source.
Range of input values is 1 MHz to 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSC:SOURce INT | EXT
4.37
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13 MHz
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
Service Functions
The service menu offers a variety of additional functions which are used for maintenance and/or trouble
shooting. The service functions are not necessary for normal measurements, however, incorrect use
can impair the functionality and/or data integrity of the ESIB. Therefore, many of the functions can only
be used after entering a password.
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
SERVICE
SERVICE
INPUT
RF
SERVICE
CAL GEN
120 MHZ
INPUT
CAL
NOISE
SOURCE
PULSE
25 Hz
PULSE
100 HZ
REFERENCE
ADJUST
PULSE
100 KHZ AB
The SERVICE softkey calls the service
submenu.
PULSE
100 KHZ CD
ENTER
PASSWORD
INPUT
RF
The INPUT RF and INPUT CAL softkeys are mutually exclusive selection
switches. Only one switch can be activated at any one time. They switch the
input to the ESIB between the INPUT RF connector (default) and the internal
calibration source (120 MHz, -40 dBm).
After PRESET, RECALL or ESIB power on, the INPUT RF is always selected.
INPUT
CAL
NOISE
SOURCE
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] RF| CAL
The NOISE SOURCE softkey switches the supply voltage for an external
noise source on or off. The source is connected to the NOISE SOURCE
connector on the instrument’s rear panel.
The dc voltages on the connector are described in Chapter 8.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce
1088.7531.12
4.38
ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
CONFIGURATION SETUP SERVICE menu:
REFERENCE
ADJUST
REFERENCE
ADJUST
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
PROG
The REFERENCE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu used to
adjust the frequency precision of the reference oscillator.
The value should be modified only after the frequency
precision was checked and found to be erroneous (setting
range 0 to 4095).
For more information about how to perform the adjustment of
the frequency precision refer to service manual instrument
(delivered with the ESIB).
The modified reference value is preserved when the menu is
closed.
The current adjustment value can be permanently stored in an
EEPROM in the instrument.
REFERENCE
Caution:
As the specifications of the whole instrument
depend directly on the setting of the reference
oscillator (frequency precision), storing incorrect
adjustment values should be avoided.
Note:
If no adjustment value has been stored
(REFERENCE PROG softkey) before the analyzer
is switched off and on again, the factory-set value
of the reference frequency or the value that has
been programmed last will be used.
The REFERENCE softkey adjusts the frequency precision of the
reference oscillator.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSC:[INT:]TUNe <num_value>
REFERENCE
PROG
The REFERENCE PROG softkey stores the current adjustment
value in an EEPROM in the instrument.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSC:[INT:]TUNe:SAVe
ENTER
PASSWORD
The ENTER PASSWORD softkey allows the entry of a password.
The ESIB has a variety of service functions which, if incorrectly used, can
impair the functionality of the instrument. These functions can only be
accessed with a password (ENTER PASSWORD).
IEC/IEEE-bus command :SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <string>
1088.7531.12
4.39
E-15
Configuration/Setup
CAL GEN
120 MHZ
ESIB
The CAL GEN 120 MHZ softkey switches on the 120 MHz calibration source
(default setting).
IEC/IEEE-bus command -
PULSE
25 HZ
The PULSE 25 HZ softkey switches on the 25 Hz pulse generator.
IEC/IEEE-bus command -
The PULSE 100 HZ softkey switches on the 100 Hz pulse generator.
PULSE
100 HZ
PULSE
100 KHZ AB
PULSE
100 KHZ CD
1088.7531.12
IEC/IEEE-bus command -
The PULSE 100 KHZ AB switches on the low frequency 100 kHz pulse
generator.
IEC/IEEE-bus command -
The PULSE 100 KHZ CD switches on the high frequency 100 kHz pulse
generator.
IEC/IEEE-bus command -
4.40
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Setting the Interface Configuration and Time
The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a submenu in which the general instrument setup can be entered.
The current settings are displayed as tables on the screen where they may be edited.
CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:
US E R
GENERAL
SETUP
GENERAL
SETUP
GPIB
ADDRESS
GPIB ADRESS
TIME AND DATE
19
Time 21:59
Date 01 Oct 1994
USER
PORT A
USER
PORT B
USER PORTS
Direction
Value
PORT A
PORT B
COM 1
Input
10101010
Output
00010001
COM 2
TIME
CO M P O R T S
COM 1
Baud
Bits
Parity
Stopbits
HW-Handshake
SW-Handshake
Owner
COM 2
9600
8
None
1
None
XON/XOFF
Instrument
1200
8
None
1
None
None
Instrument
DATE
MONITOR
CONNECTED
KEY CLICK
ON
OFF
IEC/IEEE-Bus Address Selection
CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
GPIB
ADDRESS
The GPIB ADDRESS softkey activates the entry of the IEC/IEEE-bus
address.
The range is 0 to 31. The default setting is 20.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 20
1088.7531.12
4.41
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
User Port Configuration
The instrument provides two parallel interfaces, each of which is 8 bits wide. Over these ports, arbitrary
bit patterns can be output or input. The interfaces are designated USER PORT A and USER PORT B.
CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
USER
PORT A
The USER PORT A and USER PORT B softkeys activate the columns PORT
A and PORT B, respectively, in the USERPORTS table for entry of the
parameters for both of the parallel interfaces in the instrument. Because the
two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an
interface is described in the following using USER PORT A.
The following parameters need to be configured in the table:
Direction
Direction of data transmission
Value
Indication/entry of current value
USERPORTS
PORT A
Direction
Value
INPUT
10101010
PORT B
OUTPUT
Direction – Direction of data transmission
The DIRECTION parameter determines in which direction the interface
transmits data.
INPUT
read operation
OUTPUT
write operation
DIRECTION
INPUT
OUTPUT
IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON|OFF
:OUTPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON|OFF
Value – Indication/Entry of current value
The VALUE parameter shows the current value of the data at the port for
data input as well as for data output. The displayed data is in binary format
with the least significant bit (LSB) on the right.
If the port is configured as an OUTPUT then, the displayed value can be
edited. Data entry must also be in binary format (i.e., only the digits 0 and 1
are accepted).
VALUE
00010001
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]?
:OUTPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] <Binary>
1088.7531.12
4.42
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Serial Interface Configuration
CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
COM
PORT 1
The COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 softkeys activate the columns COM1
and COM2, respectively, for entry of the serial interface parameters Since the
two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an
interface is described in the following using COM PORT 1.
COM
PORT 2
The following parameters must be in the table:
Baud rate
data transmission rate
Bits
number of data bits
Parity
bit parity check
Stop bits
number of stop bits
HW-Handshake
hardware handshake protocol
SW-Handshake
software handshake protocol
Owner
assignment of the serial port to the ESIB or computer
CO M POR TS
COM 1
Baud
Bits
Parity
Stopbits
HW-Handshake
SW-Handshake
Owner
Note:
9600
8
None
1
None
XON/XOFF
Instrument
COM 2
1200
8
None
1
None
None
Instrument
A serial interface (COM1 or COM2) cannot be used for another
purpose if a mouse is connected to it.
Baud – Data transmission rate
Allowed are the indicated values between 110 and 19200 baud. The default
setting is 9600 baud.
BAUD RATE
19200
9600
4800
1200
600
300
110
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BAUD 9600
Bits – Number of data bits per word
For the text transmission without special characters, 7 bits are adequate. For
binary data as well as text with special characters, 8 bits must be selected
(default setting).
BITS
7
8
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8
1088.7531.12
4.43
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
Parity – Bit parity check
NONE
no parity check (default setting)
EVEN
even parity check
ODD
odd parity check
PARITY
NONE
EVEN
ODD
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMM:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE]
EVEN| ODD| NONE
Stop bits – Number of stop bits
Available are 1 and 2. The default setting is 1 stop bit.
STOPBITS
1
2
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2
HW-Handshake – Hardware handshake protocol
The integrity of data transmission can be improved through the use of a
hardware handshake protocol which prevents uncontrolled transmission of
data and the resulting possible loss of data bytes. With the hardware
handshaking procedure, additional interface lines are used to transmit
acknowledge signals with which the data transmission can be controlled and,
if necessary, stopped until the receiver is ready to receive data again.
A prerequisite for handshaking is, however, that the interface lines (DTR and
RTS) are provided between the sender and receiver. For a simple, 3-wire
connection, this is not the case and a hardware handshake cannot be
realized.
Default setting is NONE.
HW-HANDSHAKE
None
DTR/RTS
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMM:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR IBFull|OFF
:SYSTem:COMM:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS IBFull|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.44
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
SW-Handshake – Software handshake protocol
Besides the hardware handshake procedure using interface lines, it is also
possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol.
In this case, control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes.
These control bytes can be used, as necessary, to stop data transmission
until the receiver is ready to receive data again.
In contrast to hardware handshaking, software handshaking can be realized
even for a simple, 3-wire connection.
Software handshaking, however, does have one limitation. Software
handshaking cannot be used for the transmission of binary data since, the
control characters XON and XOFF require bit combinations that are also
used for binary data transmission.
Default setting is NONE.
SW-HANDSHAKE
None
XON/XOFF
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SYSTem:COMM:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PACE XON|NONE
Owner – Assignment of the interface
The serial interface can be assigned either to the instrument or the computer
(operating system, OS).
INSTRUMENT
OS
Assignment to the instrument means that outputs to the
port by the OS are not possible as any output would be
lost.
Assignment to the operating system means that the
instrument cannot use the port, i.e. it is not possible to
remote control the instrument via this port.
OWNER
INSTRUMENT
OS
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.45
--
E-15
Configuration/Setup
ESIB
Setting the Date and Time
CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
TIME
The TIME softkey activates the entry of time for the internal real time clock. In
the corresponding dialog box, the time is partitioned into two input fields so
that hours and minutes can be entered independently.
TIME
TIME
10 : 33
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DATE
:SYSTem:TIME 0...23, 0...59, 0...59
The DATE softkey activates the entry of the date of the internal real-time
clock. In the corresponding dialog box, the date is partitioned into 3 input
fields so that day, month and year can be input separately.
For the selection of the month, pressing a units key opens a list of
abbreviations for the months.
DATE
DATE
10
MAY
MONTH
1995
IEC/IEEE-bus command
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
:SYSTem:DATE
<num>,<num>,<num>
Connecting the External Monitor
Submenu CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP:
MONITOR
CONNECTED
The MONITOR CONNECTED softkey informs the unit that an external
monitor is available at PC MONITOR connector
The external monitor displays the Windows NT mask.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
Switching the Beeper ON/OFF
CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
KEY CLICK
ON
OFF
The KEY CLICK ON/OFF softkey switches the beeper on or off. The beeper
acknowledges each key stroke with a beep.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.46
--
E-15
ESIB
Configuration/Setup
Firmware Update
New firmware versions can be installed from the integral disk drive. The firmware update kit contains
several disks.
The installation program is called in the SETUP menu.
CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu:
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens the submenu for
the installion of a new firmware version.
UPDATE
RESTORE
UPDATE
RESTORE
The UPDATE softkey starts the installation program and guides the user
through the remaining steps of the update procedure.
The RESTORE softkey restores the previous firmware version
Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family
CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu:
FSE MODE
ON
OFF
The FSE MODE ON/OFF softkey determines whether theESIB is FSEcompatible after a preset. Following a preset, the ESIB has not the same
settings as an FSE. With compatibility, the ESIB has the same default
settings as FSE after a preset.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.47
:SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible OFF | FSE
E-15
Manual Control
ESIB
Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key
Group
STATUS
SRQ
REMOTE
The SRQ LED, the REMOTE LED and the LOCAL. key are contained in the
STATUS key group.
SRQ LED indicates that a service request from the instrument has
é The
been asserted on the IEC Bus.
LOCAL
é The REMOTE LED indicates that the instrument is under remote control.
LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote to manual control,
é The
with the assumption that the remote controller has not previously set the
LOCAL LOCKOUT function.
A change in the control mode comprises:
- Enabling the Front Panel Keys
Under remote control, the softkey menu is turned off and all keys, with
the exception of PRESET and LOCAL, are disabled. Returning to
manual mode enables all disabled keys. The main menu of the current
mode is selected as the softkey menu..
- Turning off the REMOTE LED
- Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE
If the synchronization via *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active when the
LOCAL softkey is pressed, any measurement procedure that is running
is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding
bits in the registers of the status reporting system.
- Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register
If the status reporting system is configured appropriately, setting this bit
immediately elicits a service request (SRQ) which is used to inform the
controller that the user wishes to return to front-panel control. This
information can be used, e.g., to interrupt the control program so that the
user can make the necessary manual corrections to instrument settings.
This bit is set each time the LOCAL key is pressed.
é The LOCAL key aborts a running macro. The continuation of the macro is
not possible.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1065.6016.12
4.48
CALL IBLOC(receiver%)
E-15
ESIB
Documentation of Measurement Results
Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group
Note: The installation of additional printer drives is described in chapter 1, section "Installation and
Configuration of Printers".
Printing Data – START Key
The instrument uses the printer function of Windows NT to output hardcopies. Any printer supported by
Windows NT can be used. In addition, the instrument permits data output in the usual data formats
WMF, EWMF and BMP which enable hardcopies to be directly inserted into other documents. Network
printers can be used if the instrument is connected to a network.
HARDCOPY
START
SE
NG
The START key initiates the printing of measurement/ instrument status data.
The instrument can distinguish between two different printers, each of which
may be individually configured, e.g., a laser printer and a ink jet printer. All
documents are printed on the printer which is currently active.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
Pressing the HARDCOPY START key starts the print job. The settings under Windows NT and in the
HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu determine the printer configuration. All of the display items to be printed
out are written to the printer buffer of Windows NT. Since the printer runs in the background, the
instrument may be operated immediately after pressing the START key.
When COPY SCREEN is selected in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS, all the measurememt diagrams
with traces and status displays are printed as they appear on the screen. Softkeys, open tables and data
entry fields are not printed out. Specific traces can be printed out with the COPY TRACE function. With
COPY TABLE, tables can be printed out.
If CLIPBOARD is active in the HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu the clipboard can be used to directly
transfer hardcopies to Windows applications. The copy is written in the clipboard by pressing
HARDCOPY START. The user can then change to another Word document and insert the clipboard
content into the document with EDIT - PASTE by using the key combination CTRL+V.
If the PRINT TO FILE option in the HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu is selected, the printout is directed to
a file. When the HARDCOPY START is pressed , the file name to which the output data are to be
written is requested.
If the START key is pressed while printing is in progress, a second output can be released which can
also be joined to the printer queue. Any number of print jobs can be released consecutively.
Current print jobs can be aborted only by cancelling the entries in the Windows NT printer queue. After
starting the print a printer symbol is displayed in the task bar near the time indication.
1088.7531.12
4.49
E-15
Documentation of Measurement Results
ESIB
A double-click on this symbol opens a window containing the entries of the printer queue. The relevant
print order can be cancelled by marking it with the mouse and pressing the DEL key.
While a print job is in progress, problems may occur in the printer. If, while printing, the printer issues a
PAPER OUT message, i.e., no more paper is available, the user will be prompted by the following
message
ERROR
Paper out on device LPT
(manual feed)?
ABORT
CONTINUE
to load paper into the printer. The print job will then be either continued (CONTINUE) or aborted
(ABORT).
Switchover between b/w and colored printouts is possible with the COLOR ON/OFF softkey provided
that an appropriate printer is connected. The colors of the printout correspond exactly to those on the
screen, ie a red trace will be output in red.
To change the colors of the objects on the printout, the screen colors have to be changed in DISPLAYCONFIG DISPLAY menu. One exception is the color of the background and the color of the diagrams.
The output background is always white irrespective of the screen color and the diagrams are always
black.
If several traces are to be output one after the other on the same sheet different colors can be chosen
for each trace with the TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkey (Trace Color Auto Increment).
On most b/w printers, a better printout of the color screen is obtained on hardcopies if the color
information is converted into gray shades. For this, the color output in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS is
to be activated (COLOR ON).
1088.7531.12
4.50
E-15
ESIB
Documentation of Measurement Results
Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key
HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu:
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY
SETTINGS
COPY
SCREEN
START
COPY
TRACE
SETTINGS
COPY
TABLE
The SETTINGS key opens the menu to configure the printout.
The recommended procedure for configuring the printout is as
follows:
• Configure the desired printer and select the interface over
which the output is to take place by using Windows NT and
the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey.
• Select the display items to be printed with the COPY
SCREEN, COPY TRACE softkeys.
COPY
SEL ITEMS
SELECT
ITEMS
SELECT
QUADRANT
• Select between coloured and b/w printouts with the COLOR
ON/ OFF and TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkeys.
ENTER
TEXT
• Enter comment applicable to the diagram or add a title for the
overall printout by using the ENTER TEXT softkey.
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
• Select the page format (QUADRANT, FULL PAGE) through
use of the SELECT QUADRANT softkey.
COLOR
ON
OFF
The COPY SCREEN, COPY TRACE and COPY TABLE
softkeys are selection switches, i.e., only one function can be
enabled at any one time. The push buttons are used for
selection only and do not initiate a print job. The actual printing is
initiated by the HARDCOPY START key.
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC
1088.7531.12
4.51
E-15
Documentation of Measurement Results
ESIB
Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings
HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu:
COPY
SCREEN
The COPY SCREEN softkey selects the output of test results.
All the diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, display lines, limit lines etc.
are printed out as long as they are displayed on the screen. Softkeys, tables
and open data entry fields are not printed out. However, comments, title,
date, and time entered are printed out at the bottom of the printout. The logo
appears at the top left of the printout.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
COPY
TRACE
:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
The COPY TRACE softkey selects the output of all traces displayed on the
screen without any auxiliary information. Specifically, no markers or display
lines are printed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON|OFF
COPY
TABLE
The COPY TABLE softkey selects the output of all tables visible displayed on
the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe ON|OFF
ON
COLOR
OFF
The COLOR ON/ OFF softkey selects a coloured or b/w printout.
After having changed the printer driver or the hardcopy device (in submenu,
HARDCOPY SETTINGS) the softkey is automatically switched to ON.
One exception is printer driver HP PCL4 which only supports b/w printouts. In
this case, the softkey cannot be operated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC
:HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF
The TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkey automatically switches the colours of
the traces on to the next printout. On the second printout, trace 1 has the
colour of trace 2, trace 2 the colour of trace 3 etc. The fourth printout starts
with the first colour. With the softkey switched off, the colours of the traces
are reset to their original state.
When changing the printer driver or the hardcopy device (both in submenu
HARDCOPY SETTINGS) as well as the selection b/w printout (softkey
COLOR ON/ OFF in position OFF), softkey TRC COLOR AUTO INC is
switched off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF
1088.7531.12
4.52
E-15
ESIB
Documentation of Measurement Results
Selection of Hardcopy Format
HARDCOPY SETTINGS-SELECT QUADRANT submenu:
SELECT
QUADRANT
SELECT
QUADRANT
UPPER
LEFT
The SELECT QUADRANT softkey calls the the submenu for
selection of QUADRANTthe location of the display screen
graphics on the printed page.
LOWER
LEFT
UPPER
RIGHT
LOWER
RIGHT
FULL
PAGE
FULL
PAGE
The FULL PAGE softkey switches quadrant printing off, i.e., printing now
takes place at full size. The information as to which quadrant was last
selected is also lost. FULL PAGE is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
UPPER
LEFT
LOWER
LEFT
UPPER
RIGHT
:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL
The UPPER LEFT, LOWER LEFT as well as UPPER RIGHT, LOWER
RIGHT softkeys select the page quadrants where the printed data will be
positioned. In this case, the actual size of the data printed on the page is
reduced to 25% of normal size. This reduction is independent of how the
graphics are distributed on the display screen. Thus, for two measurement
windows (SPLIT SCREEN), both measurement diagrams shown on the
display are placed in the chosen quadrant. Thus, up to a maximum of 8
measurement windows can be printed on one page. (4 print commands for a
SPLIT SCREEN display, each to a different quadrant)
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 1|2|3|4
LOWER
RIGHT
1088.7531.12
4.53
E-15
Documentation of Measurement Results
ESIB
Entry of Comment Text
HARDCOPY SETTINGS-ENTER TEXT submenu:
ENTER
TEXT
ENTER
TEXT
COMMENT
SCREEN A
COMMENT
SCREEN B
The ENTER TEXT softkey calls the submenu for editing the
commentary for the individual windows. The comment text
appears in the print-out, but does not appear on the display
screen.
If a comment is not to appear on the printout, it has to be deleted.
By pressing PRESET, all comments will be deleted.
TITLE
COMMENT
SCREEN A
COMMENT
SCREEN B
The COMMENT SCREEN A softkey opens an entry field in which
a comment of at most two lines (60 characters per line) can be
entered for screen A or screen B. If the user enters more than 60
characters, the overflow characters appear on the second line on
the print-out. At any point, a manual line-feed can be forced by
entering the @ character. The comment is printed below the
corresponding screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT
TITLE
The TITLE softkey activates a single line entry box for entering a
title for the complete print-out with a maximum of 60 characters.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT
1088.7531.12
<string>
4.54
<string>
E-15
ESIB
Documentation of Measurement Results
Selection and Configuration of the Printer
The instrument permits two different printers to be configured. One of the devices is defined as the
active device and can be used for hardcopies.
The printers are mainly installed and configured under Windows NT and and the settings are valid for all
Windows applications (see Chapter 1, section "Connecting an Printer"). The active device and the
settings which concern only the output of hardcopies are selected in menu HARDCOPY DEVICE..
HARDCOPY SETTINGS submenu:
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
HARDCOPY
DEVICE
SETTINGS
DEVICE 1
The HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey switches to the submenu
which is used for the selection/configuration of the two printers.
When the sub-menu is called, the corresponding table is
displayed. The SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey is active and the
selection bar is located at the DEVICE1 line in the corresponding
column of the table.
SETTINGS
DEVICE 2
ENABLE
DEV1 DEV2
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS
Device1
.
.
.
SETTINGS
DEVICE 1
SETTINGS
DEVICE 2
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
YES
Orientation
---
Device2
CLIPBOARD
Print to File
---
Orientation
---
The SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey permits the selection and configuration of the
printer DEVICE 1. The SETTINGS DEVICE 2 softkey is used to configure DEVICE
2.
The actual selection of the active printer takes place with the ENABLE DEV1 DEV2
softkey in the HARDCOPY DEVICE sub-menu.
Device
The selection of the printer/language for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 is made in this
line.
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS
Device1
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
YES
Orientation
---
Device2
CLIPBOARD
WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File
---
ENHANCED METAFILE
Orientation
---
BITMAP FILE
DEVICE
CLIPBOARD
HP DeskJet 660C
1088.7531.12
4.55
E-15
Documentation of Measurement Results
ESIB
Three file formats and the Windows NT clipboard are always available, even if a
printer has not yet been installed under Windows NT. All installed printers are listed
below in alphabetic order.
The printer installation is described in Chapter 1, Section "Installation and
Configuration of Printers".
CLIPBOARD
The hardcopies are copied to the Windows NT clipboard. This
permits to obtain a printout of high quality which can be directly
inserted into other Windows applications (menu EDIT | PASTE or
key combination CTRL+V). The lines ’Print to File’, ’Orientation’ and
’GPIB Address’ are deactivated.
WINDOWS METAFILE and ENHANCED METAFILE
WMF and EWMF are vector graphics formats which can be
imported by most graphics and editing programs. EMF is
recommended for recent Windows32 applications.
BITMAP FILE BMP is a bitmap format which can also be imported by most
programs.
When WMF, EWMF and BMP are selected, the line "Print to File" is automatically
set to ON and line "Orientation" deactivated.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF|EWMF |BMP |GDI
:HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>
"MMEM"|"SYST:COMM:PRIN"|"SYST:COMM:CLIP"
:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed<1|2>:STATe
ON | OFF
Print to File
With "Print to File" ON, the printout is directed to a file. In this case the user is
prompted to enter a file name on starting the printout.
Note: This setting is coupled to the corresponding setting under Windows NT.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> "MMEM"
:MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
Orientation
In this line, the print format of the output page is set to either vertical (= PORTRAIT)
or horizontal (= LANDSCAPE).
ENABLE
DEV1 DEV2
The ENABLE DEV1 / DEV2 softkey determines the active printer. The default
printer is DEVICE 1, i.e., all output takes place on DEVICE 1.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
-- (The numeric suffix after HCOPy:IMMediate
denotes the first or second device.)
4.56
E-15
ESIB
Memory Configuration
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group
The keys in the MEMORY group call the following functions:
•
Functions for managing storage media (CONFIG). This includes among others functions listing files,
formatting storage media, copying, and deleting/renaming files.
•
Save/recall functions for saving (SAVE) settings such as instrument configurations
(measurement/display settings, etc.) and saving measurement results from working memory to
permanent storage media, or for recalling (RECALL) stored data.
The ESIB can internally store complete instrument settings with instrument configurations and
measurement data in the form of data-sets. The data are stored on the internal hard disk or, if if
required, on an external disk. The hard-disk drive and the floppy-disk drive are assigned logical names
as usual in PC applications:
Disk drive
hard disk
A:
C:
In addition to saving and recalling complete instrument settings, it is also possible to save/recall subsets
of settings. Configuration data and measurement values are stored in separate files. These files have
the same name as the data set but have a different extension. A data set therefore comprises several
files which have the same name but different extensions (see Table 4-2).
When saving or recallong a data set, the subsets which are to be saved or recallong can be selected in
the corresponding menus. This makes it easy to recall specific instrument settings.
When saving and recalling data via the SAVE and RECALL menus, data subsets are selected in a table
in the sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE/RECALL. The relationship between the designations in the table
and the contents of the data subsets is shown in Table 4-2
The saved data set files can be copied from one storage medium (e.g. drive C:) to another (e.g. drive
A:) or to another directory using the functions found in the MEMORY CONFIG menu. However, do not
change the file names and extensions when copying. Table 4-2 hows how extensions are assigned to
data subsets..
1088.7531.12
4.57
E-15
Memory Configuration
Table 4-2
Assignment of extensions to data subsets
Configuration data:
Measurement results:
1088.7531.12
ESIB
Extension
Contents
Designation in the table
SEL ITEMS TO
SAVE/RECALL
.SET
current settings of the measurement
hardware and designation, if present
HARDWARE SETTINGS
.LIN
data-point tables for the active limit lines
LINES
.LIA
all defined limit lines
ALL LINES
.CFG
current configuration of general instrument
parameters
GENERAL SETUP
.HCS
configuration for hardcopy output
HARDCOPY
.TCI
tracking generator settings
(only with option FSE-B10/11)
SOURCE CAL
.TS1
.TS2
settings for source calibration
(only with option FSE-B10/11)
SOURCE CAL
.TC1
.TC2
correction data for source calibration
(only with option FSE-B10/11)
SOURCE CAL
.CL
used conversion loss (cvl) tables
(only with option FSE-B21, External Mixer
Output)
USED CVL TABLES
.CLA
all conversion loss (cvl) tables
(only with option FSE-B21, External Mixer
Output)
ALL CVL TABLES
.TS
activated transducer set
TRANSDUCER
.TSA
all transducer sets
ALL TRANSDUCER
.TF
transducer factor
TRANSDUCER
.TFA
all transducer factors
ALL TRANSDUCER
.COL
user-defined color settings
COLOR SETUP
.TR1....4
measurement data trace 1 to trace 4
TRACE1...4
4.58
E-15
ESIB
Memory Configuration
Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key
MEMORY CONFIG menu:
The CONFIG key opens a menu for managing storage media and files.
MEMORY
SAVE
The Drive Management table displays the name and label of the storage
medium as well as the free memory.
RECALL
The File Management table displays the files in the current directory and
indicates if any subdirectories are present.
If a directory name is selected, the ESIB automatically changes to this
directory. Selection of the entry ’..’ moves the ESIB to the next highest
directory level.
CONFIG
Note: It is not possible to change menus as long as a file operation is
running.
USER
MEMORY
CONFIG
DRIVE MANAGEMENT
DRIVE:
LA BEL:
HARDDISK C:
FILE MANAGEMENT
PATH:
C:\USER\CONFIG
FILE NAME
DATE
DISK
COPY
FREE MEM: 394:510.336
TIME
SIZE
EDIT
PATH
DISK
LABEL
COP Y
FORMAT
DISK
..
SE TTING1.DRW
SE TTING2.DRW
SE TTING3.DRW
SE TTING4.DRW
10.MAY.93
10:25:18
15.MAY.93
17.MAY.93
28.MAY.93
13:08:27
08:15:21
17:05:42
68.175 kB
73.283 kB
174.315 kB
DELETE
1.236812 M B
UNDELETE
RENAME
MAKE
DIRECTORY
SORT MODE
EDIT
PATH
PA GE UP
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
PAGE DOWN
The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of the directory which will be used
for subsequent file operations.
The new path is included in the FILE MANAGEMENT table.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
1088.7531.12
4.59
:MMEMory:MSIS ’C:\’
:MMEMory:CDIRectory ’C:\user\data’
E-15
Memory Configuration
COPY
ESIB
The COPY softkey activates the entry of the destination for the copy
operation.
By prefixing a disk drive letter (e.g. C:), a file can also be copied to another
storage medium. When the ENTER key is pressed, the selected
files/directories are copied.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:MMEMory:COPY ’C:\user\data\setup.cfg’,’A:’
DELETE
The DELETE softkey deletes the selected files.
To prevent accidental deletion of data, confirmation by the user is requested.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
RENAME
:MMEMory:DELete ’TEST01.HCP’
:MMEMory:RDIRectory ’C:\test’
The RENAME softkey activates the entry of a new name for the selected file
or directory.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:MMEMory:MOVE ’TEST.CFG’, ’SETUP.CFG’
MAKE
DIRECTORY
The MAKE DIRECTORY softkey creates directories/sub-directories. The use
of sub-directories is recommended as a way of structuring the storage
medium to make it easier to navigate.
When entering a subdirectory, entry of an absolute path name (e.g.;
"\USER\MEAS") as well as the path relative to the current directory (e.g.,
"..\MEAS") is possible.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SORT MODE
:MMEMory:MDIRectory ’C:\user\data’
The SORT MODE softkey activates the selection of the sort criteria for the
files listed in the FILE MANAGEMENT table.
SORT MODE
by NAME
by DATE/TIME
by EXTENSION
Directory names are at the top of the list after the entry for the next highest
directory level ("..").
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FORMAT
DISK
The FORMAT DISK softkey formats disks located in drive A:.
To prevent accidental destruction of disks data, confirmation by the user is
requested.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
--
4.60
:MMEMory:INITialize <msus>
E-15
ESIB
Saving Data Sets
Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key
The SAVE key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for saving instrument data.
– Entry of the name of the data set which should be saved. Confirmation of the entry initiates a
save operation to store the data set.
Data set names may contain both alphabetical and numeric characters, in the simplest case
only numbers. The simplest example for the input of a data set name is illustrated by the
following key strokes:
<SAVE> <1> <units key>
– Entry of the directory in which the data set should be saved
– Input of data set description
– Selection of the data subsets to be saved (sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE)
– Indication of all available data sets
– Deletion of all available data sets
MEMORY SAVE menu
MEMORY
USER
MEMORY
SAVE
EDIT
NAME
SAVE
RE
LL
EDIT
PATH
SAVE DATA SET
CONFIG
NAME:
DATASET1
COMMENT:
PATH:C:\USER\CONFIG
ITEMS: DEFAULT
EDIT
COMMENT
Radio Monitoring
EDIT NAME
DATASET1_
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
DATA SET
LIST
DATA SET
CLEAR
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
The SAVE DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set:
Name
Name of data set
Path
Directory in which the data set will be saved
Items
Indicates whether the default selection of data subsets
(DEFAULT) or a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be
saved
Comment
Comments about the data set
The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be saved is activated
automatically.
1088.7531.12
4.61
E-15
Saving Data Sets
ESIB
Selecting the Data Set for Saving
MEMORY SAVE menu:
EDIT
NAME
The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of the name of the data set to be
saved.
Data entry is concluded by pressing one of the units keys which initiates a
save operation to store the data set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
EDIT
PATH
The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of a directory name where the
data sets are to be stored. Default path is c:\user\config.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
EDIT
COMMENT
--
The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of comments for the current
data set. A total of 60 characters are available for this purpose.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DATA SET
LIST
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,’test’
:MMEMory:COMMent <string>
The DATA SET LIST softkey opens the DATA SET LIST/CONTENTS table.
The DATA SET CLEAR and DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkeys are also
displayed.
The DATA SET LIST column lists all the data sets which are stored in the
selected directory.
The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the DATA SET CONTENTS
column indicate the saved data subsets and the comments for the currently
selected data set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
Note: The current instrument configuration can be easily stored under the
name of an existing data set:
½ Press a units key after selecting a data set
The name and the selection of the data subsets for the currently
selected data set will be placed in the SAVE DATA SET table. The
DATA SET LIST table is closed and, instead, the entry field for the
EDIT NAME function with the name of the selected data set is
opened.
½ Press a units key.
The current instrument configuration is saved as a data set under
this name.
1088.7531.12
4.62
E-15
ESIB
DATA SET
CLEAR
Saving Data Sets
The DATA SET CLEAR softkey clears the marked data set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
:MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,’test’
The DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkey deletes all data sets in the current
directory.
To prevent all the data sets from being accidentally lost, confirmation from the
user is required before actual clearing takes place.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
PAGE UP
:MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the
next or previous page.
PAGE DOWN
1088.7531.12
4.63
E-15
Saving Data Sets
ESIB
Selecting the Data subset for Storage
MEMORY SAVE-SELECT ITEMS TO SAVE sub-menu:
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
SELECT
ITEM
The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE softkey opens a sub-menu for
selection of the data subsets.
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
The ITEMS TO SAVE table displays the selectable data subsets:
ITEMS TO SAVE
GENERAL SETUP
HW-SETTINGS
TRACE 1
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
ACTIVE LINES
ALL LINES
USED CVL TABLES
ALL CVL TABLES
General Setup
HW-Settings
Trace1...4
Active Lines
All Lines
Used CVL Tables
All CVL Tables
Color Setup
Hardcopy Setup
Macros
Active Transducer
All Transducer
1088.7531.12
COLOR SETUP
HARDCOPY
MACROS
ACTIVE TRANSDUCER
ALL TRANSDUCER
current configuration of general instrument parameters
current measurement hardware settings
measurement data trace 1 to trace 4
active limit lines
all limit lines
activated conversion loss tables
all conversion loss tables
user-defined color settings
configuration for hardcopy output
macros
active transducer
all transducer
4.64
E-15
ESIB
SELECT
ITEMS
Saving Data Sets
The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first line, left
column of the table.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...4> ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer ON|OFF
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON|OFF
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE.
table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE
table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DEFAULT
CONFIG
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data
subset to be saved and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the SAVE
DATA SET table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
4.65
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
E-15
Recalling Data Sets
ESIB
Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key
The RECALL key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for recalling data sets.
– Entry of the name of the data set which should be recalled. Confirmation of the entry initiates
a load operation to recall the data set.
– Entry of the directory in which the data set is stored
– Display of data set description
– Selection of a data set which will be automatically loaded upon power-up
– Indication of all available data sets
– Deletion of all available data sets
– Selection of the data subsets which should be loaded (configurations, measurement and
calibration data, sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO RECALL)
Any settings not restored when data subsets are loaded will remain unchanged in the instrument. During
recall operations, the ESIB recognises which data subsets are present in the recalled data set and offers
only the corresponding settings for selection in the SELECT ITEM sub-menu.
A new instrument data set can be easily constructed from several existing data sets: the desired data
subsets are selected and recalled out of various data sets in several RECALL operations. When the
desired configuration is completed, the new data set can be saved under a new name.
MEMORY RECALL menu:
MEMORY
USER
MEMORY
RECALL
EDIT
NAME
SAVE
RECALL DATA SET
RECALL
NAME:
DATASET1
COMMENT:
CO FIG
R
PATH: C:\USER\CONFIG
ITEMS: DEFAULT
EDIT
PATH
EDIT NAME
DATASET1_
AUTO
RECALL
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
DATA SET
LIST
DATA SET
CLEAR
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
The RECALL DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set:
Name
Name of data set
Path
Directory in which the data set is located
Items
Indicates whether the default selection of data subsets (DEFAULT) or
a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be loaded
Comment
Comments about the data set
The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be loaded is
activated automatically.
1088.7531.12
4.66
E-15
ESIB
Recalling Data Sets
Selecting the Data Set for Recalling
MEMORY RECALL menu:
EDIT
NAME
The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of a data set name.
The data input is terminated by pressing one of the units keys which
simultaneously initiates the data set recall operation.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
EDIT
PATH
The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of a directory name in which the
data set is located. Default path is c:\user\config.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
AUTO
RECALL
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,’A:test’
--
The AUTO RECALL softkey activates the selection of a data set which will be
automatically recalled when the instrument is powered up. The DATA SET
LIST/CONTENT table is opened to make the selection (analogous to DATA
SET LIST).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,’C:\user\data\auto’
DATA SET LIST
DATASET1
DATASET2
DATASET3
AUTO RECALL SET CONTENT
CONTENTS
GENERAL SETUP COLOR SETUP
HARDCOPY
HW-SETTINGS
TRACE 1
MACROS
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
TRANSDUCER
LINES
CVL TABLES
COMMENT
GSM_MASK
The DATA SET LIST column displays all the data sets in the selected
directory.
The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the AUTO RECALL CONTENTS
column indicate the saved data subsets and the comments for the currently
selected data set.
In addition to the data sets saved by the user, the data set FACTORY, which
contains the settings of the instrument before it was last switched off
(Standby), is always included.
If a data set other than FACTORY is chosen the data subsets in the selected
data set that are available are recalled when the ESIB is powered up. The
data subsets which are not in this data set are taken from the FACTORY data
set.
Note:
1088.7531.12
The selected data set is also loaded on PRESET if AUTO RECALL
is active. The preset settings can then be configured as required.
4.67
E-15
Recalling Data Sets
DATA SET
LIST
ESIB
see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"
DATA SET
CLEAR
see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"
DATA SET
CLEAR ALL
see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"
PAGE UP
The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the
next or previous page.
PAGE DOWN
1088.7531.12
4.68
E-15
ESIB
Recalling Data Sets
Building a Data Set
MEMORY RECALL-SELECT ITEMS TO RECALL sub-menu:
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
SELECT
ITEM
The SEL ITEMS TO RECALL softkey opens a sub-menu to
select data subsets.
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
DEFAULT
CONFIG
The ITEMS TO RECALL table displays the selectable data subsets:
ITEMS TO RECALL
GENERAL SETUP
HW-SETTINGS
TRACE 1
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
LINES
CVL TABLES
General Setup
HW-Settings
Trace1...4
Lines
CVL Tables
Color Setup
Hardcopy Setup
Macros
Transducer
1088.7531.12
COLOR SETUP
HARDCOPY SETUP
MACROS
TRANSDUCER
current configuration of general instrument parameters
current measurement hardware settings
measurement data trace 1 to trace 4
data point tables for the active limit lines
conversion loss tables
user-defined color settings
configuration for hardcopy output
macros
transducer factor, transducer set
4.69
E-15
Recalling Data Sets
SELECT
ITEMS
ESIB
The SELECT ITEMS softkey activates the ITEMS TO RECALL table and sets
the selection bar to the first line, left column of the table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO RECALL
table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DISABLE
ALL ITEMS
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data
subset to be recalled and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the
RECALL DATA SET table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO
RECALL table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DEFAULT
CONFIG
see "Selecting the Data subset for Storage"
4.70
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
E-15
ESIB
Macros
Macros – USER Key
The ESIB menus are so designed that the receiver can be easily applied to most of the usual
measurement tasks with a minimum number of key operations. However, the USER menu also permits
a tailored adaptation of any necessary setup and measurement functions needed for special
applications. Here, a sequence of key operations, which may occur repeatedly, can be listed in the
USER menu as a key macro, then stored in memory and recalled as required by the application.
Fundamentals
Macros are defined as arbitrary key sequences which need to be defined only once and then can be
recalled as often as desired. Through the use of macros, often-needed measurement functions or
instrument setups, which may require a large number of key operations, can be easily performed. The
writing of macros is possible only under manual control. Macro generation is not possible under remote
control (e.g. via the IEC Bus interface) and when using a mouse.
A total of 7 different macros can be programmed and assigned to the individual softkeys of the USER
menu. Each macro has a title (arbitrarily defined by the user ) which is also used as a label for the
corresponding softkey. To indicate that a macro has not yet been programmed, the softkey label
appears in parenthesis (e.g. (MACRO 1)). After a key-sequence macro has been defined, the
parenthesis are removed and the softkey is replaced by the titel specified by the user.
A macro is executed by pressing the corresponding softkey.
During execution of macros, the key actions are repeated in exactly the same sequence as they were
programmed. The sequential execution of a macro may be interrupted by using the PAUSE instruction.
As soon as a macro is interrupted, adjustments on the Unit Under Test (UUT) may be made, etc. The
interrupted macro is allowed to continue by pressing CONTINUE in the message window and is aborted
by pressing ABORT.
MESSAGE
Macro "MACRO 1" stopped !
CONTINUE
ABORT
A running macro can be aborted by pressing the LOCAL key. At this time, the following message is
displayed:
WARNING
Execution of macro "MACRO 1" aborted
OK
During the time a macro is executing, manual operations on the instrument are not possible, and the
softkey panel is disabled. After interruption or conclusion of a macro, the applicable softkey panel is
enabled (i.e., menu state at the conclusion of the macro).
1088.7531.12
4.71
E-15
Macros
ESIB
Starting Macros
USER menu
USER MENU
USER
The USER key opens a menu for selection and starting
of macros.
(MACRO 1)
The macros can be defined in the DEFINE MACRO
submenu.
(MACRO 2)
(MACRO 3)
(MACRO 4)
DELETE
(MACRO 5)
LINE
(MACRO 6)
(MACRO 7)
DEFINE
MACRO
(MACRO 1)
he MACRO 1 to 7 softkeys start the execution of the macros.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
(MACRO 7)
1088.7531.12
4.72
E-15
ESIB
Macros
Defining Macros
In the DEFINE MACRO menu, all necessary softkeys needed for macro management are available.
Included are functions for starting and ending macro programming, editing of a macro title, etc.
USER DEFINE MACRO menu
DEFINE
MACRO
DEFINE
MACRO
RECORD
ON
OFF
DEFINE
PAUSE
The DEFINE MACRO softkey calls the sub-menu to define
the macros.
The SELECT MACRO softkey is active and opens the box to
select the macro to be edited. In case no selection is made,
MACRO 1 is automatically selected.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
DELETE
MACRO
MACRO
TITLE
SELECT
MACRO
ON
RECORD
OFF
The RECORD ON/OFF starts or stops the recording of the macro.
ON
All key actions are recorded until the softkey is changed to OFF . To
indicate that macro record is enabled, the enhancement label
MAC
is displayed.
The number of actions which can be stored in a macro is limited. If
the limit is exceeded, the error message "Macro too long.
Recording aborted" is output and the recording operation is aborted,
however, the actions already recorded do remain stored.
OFF
The recording is stopped. The key actions are stored under the
macro chosen by the SELECT MACRO softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.73
--
E-15
Macros
DEFINE
PAUSE
ESIB
The DEFINE PAUSE softkey inserts a pause instruction into the macro
sequence which is being recorded. A running macro will pause when it
reaches this instruction, at which point settings on the unit under test could for
example be made. CONTINUE in the message window is used to continue
the macro execution.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
MACRO
--
The DELETE MACRO softkey deletes the macro which was previously
selected by the SELECT MACRO softkey. The softkey of the deleted title now
carries its default label (MACRO X, X = macro number)
IEC/IEEE-bus command
MACRO
TITLE
--
The MACRO TITLE softkey activates the entry of the title for the selected
macro.
Because the macro title is used for labelling the corresponding softkey, a
maximum of only 20 characters is allowed. All text after the 10 th character is
written to the second line. However, entering the character @ forces a new
line at any point in the softkey title.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SELECT
MACRO
--
The SELECT MACRO softkey open the selection box with a list of all 7
macros. All softkey functions of this menu are related to this macro.
SELECT MACRO
Macro
(Macro
(Macro
(Macro
(Macro
(Macro
(Macro
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.74
1
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
--
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
EMI RECEIVER Mode
The mode is selected in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu (see also section "Mode Selection - Mode
Key")
The EMI RECEIVER softkey selects the receiver mode (RFI reception) and activates the menu for
setting the receiver parameters.
A window for receiver operation is opened.
The entry for the receiver frequency is automatically active (FREQUENCY softkey).
EMI RECEIVER is the default setting of ESIB.
CONFIGURATION
MODE
ANALYZER
MODE
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
EMI
RECEIVER
PEAK
SEARCH
.
.
.
ATTEN
EDIT PEAK
LIST
PREAMP
ON
OFF
NO OF
PEAKS
RES BW
PEAK
SUBRANGES
DETECTOR
MARGIN
MEAS TIME
FINAL
MEAS TIME
SETUP
DEMOD
IEC/IEEE-bus command
LISN
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
DEFINE
SCAN
INTER
ACTIVE
RUN
SCAN
RUN
FINAL MEAS
:INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver
In the receiver mode, ESIB acts as a test receiver, ie it measures the level at the set frequency with a
selected bandwidth and measurement time (RES BW and MEAS TIME softkeys). Signal weighting is by
means of the average, max peak, min peak, RMS and quasi-peak detectors (DETECTOR softkey).
The attenuation of the employed input can be selected (ATTEN softkey). The total noise figure can be
reduced by means of a preamplifier (PRAMP ON/OFF softkey).
The functions for the control of line impedance simulating network are available in the SETUP menu.
1088.7531.12
4.75
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
A frequency scan can be performed after setting the start and stop frequency and the step width. The
scan subranges can be defined in a table (DEFINE SCAN softkey). The entry of standard-conformal
frequency ranges and associated receiver settings are facilitated by default settings (softkeys CISPR
RANGE A...D).
The scan is started with the SCAN softkey or the RUN key in the SWEEP field.
To reduce the amount of data in RFI voltage measurements, a list of subrange maxima (softkey PEAK
LIST) can be generated from the scan results and an acceptance line (softkey MARGIN) may be
defined. A final measurement is performed only for frequencies with high RFI level.
The final measurement may be either automatic (softkey AUTOMATIC FINAL) or in interactive mode
(softkey INTERACTIVE). Automatic control functions for line impedance stabilization networks (softkey
LISN) are available. The final measurement is started with the softkey RUN FINAL MEAS.
The measurement examples given in section 2 serve as introduction into the different fields of
application of the EMI test receiver.
When the EMI receiver mode is active, the MODE key directly opens the main receiver menu. For a
change to the ANALYZER mode, the main menu must be called first.
Operation on a Discrete Frequency
Setting the Receive Frequency
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY
The RECEIVER FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry field of the receive
frequency.
The receive frequency can also be activated with the FREQ key in the
FREQUENCY field without quitting the currently selected menu. A precondition is
that the frequency and level display is active.
The adjustable frequency range depends on the selected input:
Input 1:
Input 2:
20 Hz ≤ fin ≤ fmax
20 Hz ≤ fin ≤ 1 GHz
When the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth
is automatically reduced so that this condition is met again.
If the frequency is increased again, the original IF bandwidth is restored. The
memory is cleared when the IF bandwidth is manually changed.
The resolution of the receive frequency is always 0.1 Hz.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <num_value>
1088.7531.12
4.76
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
Setting the RF Attenuation
ESIB is equipped with two signal inputs selectable in the INPUT menu. With INPUT 1 selected the RF
attenuation can be set between 0 and 70 dB in 10 dB steps. With INPUT 2 - this is the pulse-resistant
input - the attenuation can be set between 0 and 70 dB in 5 dB steps.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
ATTEN
ATTEN
ATTEN
MANUAL
The ATTEN softkey opens a submenu where the input
attenuator can be configured. The submenu includes setting
the RF attenuation and the autorange function.
0 DB MIN
ON
OFF
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
ATTEN
MANUAL
The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the attenuation
entry field.
The following attenuation can be set depending on the active
input:
• INPUT 1:
• INPUT 2:
0 to 70 dB
0 to 70 dB
in 10 dB steps,
in 5 dB steps..
Other entries are rounded to the next higher integer.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:ATTenuation <numeric_value>
1088.7531.12
4.77
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
0 DB MIN
ON
OFF
The 0 DB MIN softkey determines whether the 0 dB setting of
the attenuator may be used in the manual or automatic setting
of the attenuator.
0 DB MIN OFF is the default value, ie an RF attenuation of at
least 10 dB is always set on ESIB to protect the input mixer.
An attenuation of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This
avoids 0 dB being switched on inadvertently particularly when
DUTs with high RFI voltage are measured.
Caution:
If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with
autoranging, care must be taken that the
permissible signal level at the RF input is not
exceeded.
Exceeding this level would
damage the input mixer. The 0 dB
attenuation should under no circumstances
be used when RFI voltage measurements
are performed with artificial networks as in
this case very high pulses occur during
phase switching.
C/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
The AUTO RANGE ON/OFF softkey switches the autorange
function on and off.
With the autorange function active, ESIB automatically sets the
attenuation so that a good S/N ratio is obtained without the
receiver stages being overdriven.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
The AUTOPREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the autopreamp
function and or off.
With the autopreamp function active, the preamplifier is
considered in the autorange procedure. The preamplifier is cut
in when the RF attenuation is reduced to the minimum settable
value.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.78
:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
Preamplifier
In the frequency range up to 7 GHz, ESIB is provided with a switchable preamplifier of 20 dB gain.
Option ESIB-B2, Preamplification, extends the frequency range for preamplification to 26.5 GHz or
40 GHz.
Switching on the preamplifier reduces the total noise figure of ESIB and thus improves the sensitivity.
The disadvantage of a poorer large-signal immunity (intermodulation) is reduced by the connected
preselector. The signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that the maximum input level is
reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. The total noise figure of ESIB is reduced from approx. 18 dB to
approx. 10 dB when a preamplifier is used. The use of the preamplifier is recommended when
measurements with a maximum sensitivity are to be performed. On the other hand, if the measurement
should be performed at maximum dynamic range, the preamplifier should be switched off.
The gain of the preamplifier is automatically considered in the level display. The preamplifier follows the
preselection filters so that the risk of overdriving by strong out-of-band signals is reduced to a minimum.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
PREAMP
ON
OFF
The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on and off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF
Setting the IF Bandwidth
ESIB offers the IF bandwidths (6 dB bandwidths) 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1 kHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 100
kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz and 10 MHz.
The IF filters up to 1 kHz are digital Gauss filters. They behave like analog filters.
The 9 kHz and 10 kHz bandwidths are obtained by decoupled crystal filters and the bandwidths between
100 kHz and 1 MHz by decoupled LC filters. These filters contain 5 filter circuits.
The 10 MHz filter is a critically coupled LC filter.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
RES BW
The RES BW softkey activates the manual entry mode for the resolution
bandwidth.
For numerical inputs, the values are always rounded to the next valid bandwidth.
For rollkey or the UP/DOWN key entries, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps
either upwards or downwards.
When the quasi-peak detector is switched on, a fixed bandwidth is preset
depending on the frequency. However, the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the
frequency range can be cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED.
The bandwidth is limited by the set receive frequency:
RES BW ≤ fin /2
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]BANDwidth:RESolution <num_value>
1088.7531.12
4.79
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Selecting the Detector
The ESIB detectors are all-digital. Five different detectors can be selected for weighting the receive
signal. If ESIB is equipped with option ESIB-B1, Linear Video Output, the AC VIDEO detector has been
added to those already available.
The input signal of ESIB can be displayed weighted by five detectors.
Peak detectors
(MAX PEAK/ MIN PEAK)
Peak detectors are implemented with digital comparators, which
determine the largest sample values (max peak) or the smallest
sample values (min peak) of the levels measured during the set
measurement time.
Quasi-peak detector
(QUASIPEAK)
The quasi-peak detector yields the maximum detected value
weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time.
For this purpose ESIB uses the linear display voltage after
envelope detection. The linear sampling values are weighted with
a digital detector. The time constants defined for the bands A, B
and C/D are automatically set as a function of the receive
frequency.
With switched-on quasi-peak detector, a fixed bandwidth is preset
as a function of frequency.
Band A
Band B
Band C/D
< 150 kHz
150 kHz to 30 MHz
> 30 MHz
IF bandwidth
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
Charge time constant
45 ms
1 ms
1 ms
Discharge time constant 500 ms
160 ms
550 ms
Time constant of
instrument
160 ms
100 ms
Frequency range
160 ms
For frequencies above 1 GHz, ESIB uses the settings of band
C/D.
The coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range with
activated quasi peak detector can be cancelled using the QP
RBW UNCOUPLED softkey.
If the coupling is cancelled, any of the three CISPR bandwidths
200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz can be selected for a given frequency
range (softkey RES BW).
Average detector
(AVERAGE)
1088.7531.12
The average detector yields the average level of the samples
measured during the set measurement time.
The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope detection.
The linear sample values are summed and the sum is divided by
the number of measurement samples (= linear average value). In
the case of logarithmic display, the logarithm is then formed from
the average value.
The average detector gives the true average of the signal
irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white
noise or pulse signal).
4.80
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
RMS detector
(RMS)
The rms detector yields the rms level of the samples measured
during the set measurement time.
The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope detection.
The linear samples are squared, summed and the sum is divided
through the number of samples (= mean of square). In the case of
logarithmic display, the logarithm is then formed from the square
sum.
The rms detector gives the true power of the signal irrespective of
the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or pulse
signal). There is no need for the various waveform correction
factors which are required when other detectors are used to
measure power,
AC Video detector
(AC VIDEO,
with option ESIB-B1 only)
The AC video detector yields the difference (max peak – min
peak) of measurement results over a pixel or a result.
For this purpose ESIB uses the linear display voltage after
envelope detection. The max peak detector and the min peak
detector determine the maximum and minimum levels within a
shown measurement point and display it as a common
measurement result. For logarithmic representation, the logarithm
of the difference is formed. For linear representation, the
difference itself is shown. In receiver operation, the AC value
determined during the measurement time is shown.
Irrespective of the signal form (CW carrier, modulated carrier,
white noise of pulsed signal), the AC video detector always
supplies the AC component of the signal.
If during a frequency sweep the dwell time on a certain frequency
point is not sufficient, this may lead to incorrect results being
displayed.
1088.7531.12
4.81
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu:
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
QUASIPEAK
AVERAGE
The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the
detector.
Multiple detection is activated by switching on up to four single
detectors. The MIN PEAK, RMS and AC VIDEO detector
cannot be switched on simultaneously.
Softkey AC VIDEO is available only if the instrument is
equipped with the linear video output (option ESIB-B1).
RMS
MIN PEAK
AC VIDEO
QP RBW
COUPLED
MAX PEAK
The MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak detector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive
QUASIPEAK
The QUASIPEAK softkey selects the quasi-peak detector.
The quasi-peak detector yields the maximum detected value
weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time. The IF
bandwidth is adapted as a function of the frequency range. The
coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range can be
cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] QPEak
AVERAGE
The AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector.
The average detector supplies the straight average of the signal
during the measurement time.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] AVERage
1088.7531.12
4.82
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
RMS
The RMS softkey activates the rms detector.
The rms detector supplies the rms value of the signal. To this
effect the root mean square of all sampled values is formed during
the measurement time.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] RMS
MIN PEAK
The MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak detector..
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] NEGative
AC VIDEO
The AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO detector.
Irrespective of the signal form, the AC VIDEO detector always
supplies the AC component of the signal. For this purpose the
difference is formed of all maximum and minimum level values
collected during the set measurement time. The measurement
time therefore determines the number of values to be considered,
so the AC component is determined more accurately with
increasing measurement time. The AC VIDEO detector can thus
be used as an alternative for the detection of modulated signals.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] ACVideo
QP RBW
UNCOUPLED
The QP RBW UNCOUPLED softkey cancels the coupling of the
IF bandwidth to the frequency range with activated quasi peak
detector.
If the coupling is cancelled, any of the three CISPR bandwidths
200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz can be selected for a given frequency
range (softkey RES BW).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.83
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Setting the Measurement Time
The measurement time is the time during which ESIB measures the input signal and forms a
measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measurement time does not include settling
times. ESIB automatically waits until transients are over.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
MEAS TIME
The MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field for the measurement time.
The measurement time can be set in steps of 1-2-5 in the range 100 µs to
100 s. A measurement time of 15 s is available in addition.
When the quasi-peak detector is used, the minimum measurement time is
1 ms.
With the average, RMS, AC video or min/max peak detector the smallest
settable measurement time depends on the bandwidth.
Bandwidth
Shortest measurement time
AV, RMS
Shortest measurement time
PK+, PK-, AC video
≤ 10 Hz
1s
10 ms
100 Hz
100 ms
1 ms
200 Hz
50 ms
1 ms
1 kHz
10 ms
0.1 ms
9 kHz
1 ms
0.1 ms
≥ 100 kHz
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <numeric_value>
Effect of measurement time with different weighting modes:
MIN/MAX PEAK measurement:
With peak weighting selected, the maximum or minimum level
during the selected measurement time is displayed. The peak
detector is reset at the beginning of each measurement. At the
end of the measurement time the maximum or minimum level
occurred during the measurement time is displayed. Since the
peak detector of ESIB is a digital detector, discharging is
irrelevant even with long measurement times.
Unmodulated signals can be measured with the shortest possible
measurement time. When pulses are measured, the selected
measurement time must be long enough for at least one pulse to
occur during the measurement time.
AC video measurement:
Since the AC video detector is a combination of a min peak and a
max peak detector, the considerations for the peak measurement
apply here too
The longer the measurement time, the better the acquisition of
the AC voltage component of the test signal.
1088.7531.12
4.84
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Operation on a Discrete Frequency
Quasi-peak measurement:
With quasi-peak measurements, the maximum value of the
weighted signal during the measurement time is displayed. The
relatively long time constants used with quasi-peak detectors
entail long measurement times to obtain correct results. With
unknown signals the measurement time should be at least 1 s.
This ensures correct weighting of pulses down to a pulse
frequency of 5 Hz.
After internal switching, ESIB waits until the measurement result
has stabilized before it starts the actual measurement. Since the
level does not change during a frequency scan, known signals (eg
broadband RFI) can be correctly measured with a much shorter
measurement time.
Average measurement:
With average detection selected, the video voltage (envelope of
IF signal) is averaged during the measurement time. Averaging is
digital, ie the digitized values of the video voltage are summed up
and divided by the number of samples at the end of the
measurement time. With unmodulated signals the shortest
possible measurement time can be selected. With modulated
signals the measurement time is determined by the lowest
modulation frequency to be averaged. With pulse signals, the
selected measurement time should be long enough for sufficient
number of pulses (>10) to occur in the measurement window for
averaging.
RMS measurement:
With RMS weighting the same applies to the measurement time
as with the average measurement.
Measurement with several
detectors:
If several detectors are used simultaneously, a measurement time
suiting the slowest detector should be selected to obtain correct
results for all detectors. It is therefore recommended to set a
measurement time that matches the average detector when the
peak and average detectors are used.
1088.7531.12
4.85
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
AF Demodulators
ESIB provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators selected, a displayed
signal can be monitored using the internal loudspeaker or external headphones.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu:
DEMOD
DEMOD
DEMOD
ON
OFF
AM
The DEMOD softkey calls a submenu in which the desired
type of demodulation can be switched on.
The volume for loudspeaker and headphones is set by
means of control knob on the front panel. When the knob is
in the Remote position (left stop) the volume can be remotecontrolled.
FM
ON
DEMOD
OFF
The DEMOD ON/OFF softkey switches demodulation on/off.
When demodulation is on, the signal is demodulated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
[SENSe:]DEMod OFF
(DEModulation ON automatically switched
on with AM|FM)
AM
FM
The AM and FM selection switches can be activated one at a
time. They are used to set the desired demodulation type, FM
or AM. The default setting is AM.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DEMod AM | FM
Switchover between Full Screen and Split Screen Mode
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu:
SPLIT SCRN
ON
OFF
The SPLIT SCRN ON/OFF softkey toggles between full-screen and split-screen
mode.
During the scan ESIB automatically selects full-screen mode.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
--
4.86
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency Scan
Frequency Scan
In the scan mode, ESIB measures in a predefined frequency range with selectable step width and
measurement time for each frequency.
Up to 10 subranges which need not be next to each other can be defined within one scan. The
subranges are then scanned by ESIB one after the other. Measurement ranges should not overlap. The
parameters to be measured in each subrange can be selected independently.
Transducer factors or transducer sets and limit lines can be defined and displayed separately and are
not part of the scan data record.
The scanned frequency range is defined by the start and stop frequency set independently of the scan
table. A scan table can thus be defined for each measurement task, which can be stored and reloaded.
The required frequency range can be defined by means of two parameters which can be set via keys so
that no elaborate editing has to be done in the scan table.
start frequency
stop frequency
scan ranges
transducer set
Fig. 4-6
Definition of scan range
Full-screen or split-screen mode can be selected for result display. In the full-screen mode, the result
diagram covers the whole screen area.
In split-screen mode, the upper half of the screen displays either the frequency and level readout, ie a
bargraph or the spectrum analyzer screen with frequency sweep or zero span. The lower half holds the
result diagram possibly with the previously measured scan results.
In the split-screen mode, the upper half of the screen is used for frequency and level readout. The
diagram is displayed in the lower half. During the scan ESIB automatically selects full-screen display.
1088.7531.12
4.87
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Up to 4 detectors can be measured simultaneously. They are assigned to traces 1 to 4. Since the
detectors are set only once, it is not possible to measure with different detectors in different the
subranges.
The scan can be performed as a single scan or continuously. Scanning is started with the RUN SCAN
softkey and in the case of single scan it is stopped when the stop frequency is reached. The continuous
scan can be interrupted with the HOLD SCAN softkey or terminated with STOP SCAN.
The maximal number of measured frequencies which can be measured, is limited and depends on the
number of the traces which are switched on.
Number of traces
Measured values /trace
1
250.000
2
150.000
3
100.000
4
80.000
They are stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that more than the possible
values would be measured, a respective message is output upon the scan start. Afterwards the scan is
performed up to the maximum value.
In the DEFINE SCAN menu predefined settings of standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated
receiver settings can be selected (softkeys CISPR RANGE A...D)
1088.7531.12
4.88
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency Scan
Entry of Scan Data
A scan is defined in the form of tables. Each scan range is determined by the start frequency, stop
frequency, step width and by the measurement parameters valid for the range. Frequency and level
axes can be user-selected and are defined for the whole scan.
The DEFINE SCAN softkey opens a submenu where existing scan tables can be edited or new ones
created. Tables with the current scan settings are displayed.
Pressing the SCAN key in the SWEEP field also opens the DEFINE SCAN submenu.
The SCAN table at the top specifies limit frequencies for the diagram, linear or logarithmic frequency
switching and the display mode for the frequency axis.
The SCAN RANGES table at the bottom gives settings for the scan subranges. It contains 5 columns for
5 subranges and lines for entering the parameters for the different subranges. Up to 10 subranges can
be defined.
At least one scan is defined in the list. Two subranges with the limit frequencies 150 kHz and 30 MHz
and 30 MHz and 1 GHz are defined in the default setup. All other parameters are shown in the following
table:
Table 4-3
Default setup of scan table
Range 1
Range 2
Start frequency
150 MHz
30 MHz
Stop frequency
30 MHz
1 GHz
Step width
4 kHz
40 kHz
IF bandwidth
9 kHz
120 kHz
Measurement time
1 ms
100 µs
Auto ranging
off
off
RF attenuation
10 dB
10 dB
Preamplification
off
off
Auto-Preamp
off
off
Input
Input1
Input1
The diagram parameters to be defined are: start frequency 150 kHz, stop frequency 1 GHz, min. level
0 dBµV, max. level 100 dBµV, linear frequency switching and log. frequency axis.
The measurement parameters correspond to the settings recommended for overview measurements to
CISPR 16.
When the menu for creating and editing scans is quit and no runnable scan is available, the last scan
data record is activated.
1088.7531.12
4.89
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
ADJUST
AXIS
DEFINE
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE A
CISPR
RANGE B
SINGLE
SCAN
CISPR
RANGE C
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
SCAN
RANGES
CISPR
RANGE D
SCAN
RANGES
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS BEFORE
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
INS AFTER
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
DELETE
RANGE
RANGES
1-5 6-10
RUN
SCAN
RANGES
1-5 6-10
DEFINE
SCAN
DEFINE
SCAN
SCAN TABLE
The DEFINE SCAN softkey opens a submenu
where existing scan tables can be edited or new
ones created. Tables with the current scan
settings are displayed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
Limits for the diagram and the type of frequency switching can be entered in the
SCAN table .
Start
Stop
150 kHz
1 GHz
Step
LIN Auto
Start
Stop
Step
Max Level
Min Level
Frequency
SCAN TABLE
SCAN
Max Level
Min Level
100 dBµV
0 dBµV
Frequency Axis LOG
lower frequency limit
upper frequency limit
linear or logarithmic frequency switching
upper level limit
lower level limit
linear or logarithmic frequency axis
The SCAN TABLE softkey activates the entry field for the limits
in the SCAN table.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <num_value>
:[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG | AUTO
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <num_value>
:DISPlay:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <num_value>
:DISPlay:TRACe:X:SPACing LIN | LOG
1088.7531.12
4.90
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency Scan
In the SCAN RANGES table the parameters for the individual subranges can be set.
SCAN RANGES
RANGE 1
Start
Stop
Step Size
RES BW
Meas Time
Auto Ranging
RF Attn
Preamp
Auto Preamp
Input
RANGE 2
150.000 kHz
30.000 MHz
4 kHz
9 kHz
1 ms
OFF
10 dB
OFF
OFF
INPUT 1
RANGE 3
RANGE 4
RANGE 5
30.000 MHz
1.0000 GHz
40 kHz
120 kHz
100 µs
OFF
10 dB
OFF
OFF
INPUT 1
Start
Entry of start frequency
The following conditions should be observed:
The start frequency of a subrange must be equal to or
greater than the stop frequency of the previous subrange.
The start frequency of the next subrange must always be
greater than the stop frequency of the already defined one.
When the start frequency is entered, the entry field for the
stop frequency is automatically activated.
Stop
Entry of stop frequency
The following conditions should be observed:
The stop frequency of a subrange must be equal to or
greater than the start frequency of the subrange. The stop
frequency of a subrange must always be lower than the
start frequency of the next subrange.
When start and stop frequencies are entered, the adjacent
subranges are automatically adapted to ensure that the
above-mentioned conditions are met.
Step Size
1088.7531.12
Entry of step size
In the case of linear frequency increments, step widths
between 1 Hz and the maximum ESIB frequency can be
set. When a step size greater than the scan range is
entered (from start to stop), ESIB performs a measurement
at the start and stop frequency.
With logarithmic frequency increments, values between
0.1% and 100% can be set with steps of 1/2/3/5.
With STEP AUTO selected, the step size cannot be
changed because it is automatically set with respect to the
IF bandwidth.
4.91
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
RES BW
Entry of IF bandwidth
In the case of quasi-peak weighting, usually a fixed
bandwidth is set which cannot be changed (CISPR).
However, the coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency
range can be cancelled using softkey QP RBW
UNCOUPLED in the MODE EMI RECEIVER menu.
Meas Time
Entry of measurement time
The measurement time can be set between 100 µs and 100
s separately for each subrange.
Auto Ranging
Activates the autorange function
With automatic attenuation setting selected, ESIB
automatically sets the input attenuation as a function of the
signal level.
Caution:
1088.7531.12
If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with
autoranging, care must be taken that the
permissible signal level at the RF input is
not exceeded. Exceeding this level would
damage the input mixer. The 0 dB
attenuation should under no circumstances
be used when RFI voltage measurements
are performed with the aid of artificial
networks as in this case very high pulses
occur during phase switching.
RF Atten
Entry of a fixed RF attenuation
Preamp
Switching the preamplifier on and off
Auto Preamp
Activates the auto preamp function
The preamplifier is considered in autoranging. It is only cut
in after the attenuation has been reduced to the minimum
settable value.
Input
Selection of RF input
4.92
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency Scan
ADJUST
AXIS
The ADJUST AXIS softkey automatically sets the limits of the
diagram so that the lower limit frequency corresponds to the
start frequency of range 1 and the upper limit frequency to the
stop frequency of the last range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SINGLE
SCAN
--
Pressing the SINGLE SCAN softkey triggers a frequency scan.
ESIB stops at the end frequency.
The enhancement label SGL displayed at the screen edge
indicates that the single-scan mode is set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CONTINUOUS
SCAN
The CONTINUOUS SCAN softkey selects the continuous scan
mode. ESIB scans continuously until the scan is stopped.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SCAN
RANGES
:INITiate2:CONTinuous OFF
:INITiate2:CONTinuous ON
The SCAN RANGES softkey activates the entry of scan settings
in the SCAN RANGES table.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:RANGes[:COUNt] 1...10
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:STARt <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:STOP <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:STEP <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:BANDwidth:RESolution
<num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:TIME <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO
<num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:INPut:ATTenuation
<num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:INPut:GAIN <num_value>
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO ON|OFF
:[SENSe:]SCAN<1..10>:INPut:TYPE INPUT1|INPUT2
1088.7531.12
4.93
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Editing a Scan
The parameters of a scan subrange in a scan data record can be modified or complete subranges can
be added or deleted. When changing the scan limit frequencies, care should be taken that the scan
ranges do not overlap.
Complete scan ranges can be cleared or added with the INSERT RANGE and DELETE RANGE
softkeys.
Predefined settings of standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated receiver settings can be
selected (softkeys CISPR RANGE A...D).
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER - DEFINE SCAN menu
INS BEFORE
RANGE
The INS BEFORE RANGE softkey shifts the active scan range
in the table to the left by one column. A new column with
identical settings is created. The limit frequencies can be
changed accordingly.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
INS AFTER
RANGE
The INS AFTER RANGE softkey shifts the active scan range in
the table to the right by one column. A new column with identical
settings is created. The limit frequencies can be changed
accordingly.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
RANGE
--
With the RANGES 1-5/6-10 softkey a switchover can be made
between ranges 1-5 and 6-10.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
--
The DELETE RANGE softkey clears the activated scan range.
All other ranges are shifted to the left by one column.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
RANGES
1-5
6-10
--
4.94
--
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency Scan
CISPR
RANGE A
CISPR
RANGE C
CISPR
RANGE B
The CISPR RANGE A/B/C/D softkeys enter the following
standard-conformal frequency ranges and associated receiver
settings into the scan table:
Start frequency
Stop frequency
Step width
RBW
MEAS TIME
Band A
9 kHz
150 kHz
80 Hz
200 Hz
50 ms
IEC/IEEE-bus command
Band B
150 kHz
30 MHz
4 kHz
9 kHz
1 ms
Band C
30 MHz
300 MHz
40 kHz
120 kHz
100 us
Band D
300 MHz
1 GHz
40 kHz
120 kHz
100 us
--
CISPR
RANGE D
Running a Scan
The scan is started with the RUN SCAN softkey. It can also be started with the RUN key in the SWEEP
field.
At the beginning of the scan, ESIB sets up the diagram as specified in the scan table and starts the scan
in the selected mode (SINGLE or CONTINUOUS). With SINGLE selected, ESIB performs a single scan
and stops at the end frequency. With CONTINUOUS selected, the scan is performed continuously until
it is deliberately stopped.
The measurement can be interrupted with HOLD SCAN or stopped with STOP SCAN. The two softkeys
are displayed instead of the menu shown before the scan is started.
If a transducer set is defined with points of changeover, the scan automatically stops at the frequencies
of the new subrange of the transducer set and the user may exchange the transducer.
The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached:
TDS Range # reached, CONTINUE / BREAK
He can continue the scan at the point of change over by confirming the message (CONTINUE) or he
can switch off the transducer (BREAK).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
1088.7531.12
:INITiate2:CONMeas
--
4.95
(CONTINUE)
(BREAK)
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu
RUN
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
The RUN SCAN softkey starts the frequency
scan with the selected settings. The HOLD
SCAN submenu is displayed instead of the
menu shown before the scan is started.
REF LEVEL
AUTO
HOLD
SCAN
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INITiate2[:IMMediate]
CONTINUE
SCAN
STOP
SCAN
CONTLEVEL
AT
REF
REC
FREQ
AUTO
CONTINUE
AT HOLD
STOP
SCAN
HOLD
SCAN
The HOLD SCAN softkey interrupts the scan.
The CONTINUE SCAN submenu is displayed. The scan stops at
the frequency at which it was interrupted until it is continued with
the CONT AT REC FREQ or CONTINUE AT HOLD softkeys.
While the scan is stopped, the receiver settings can be changed,
eg for a detailed analysis of the recorded trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CONT AT
REC FREQ
With the CONT AT REC FREQ softkey the scan is continued at
the current receiver frequency when the receiver frequency is
lower than the frequency at which the scan was interrupted.
Otherwise the scan continues at the frequency at which it was
interrupted.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CONTINUE
AT HOLD
--
The STOP SCAN softkey stops the scan. Upon restart, scanning
starts at the beginning. The results of the performed
measurements are lost.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:INITiate2[:IMMediate]
With the CONT AT HOLD softkey the scan is continued where it
was interrupted. The scan is always continued with the settings
in the scan table.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
STOP
SCAN
:HOLD
4.96
:ABORt
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
Data Reduction and Peak List
EMI measurements may involve much time because the time constants prescribed by the standard for
the quasi-peak weighting require transients which lead to long measurement times per each value. In
addition, the standards stipulate procedures for finding local EMI maxima such as shifting the absorbing
clamp, variation of the test antenna height and rotating the DUT. Measuring with quasi-peak weighting
at each frequency and for each setting of the test configuration would lead to unacceptably long
measurement times. For this reason, R&S has developed a method which reduces the time-consuming
measurements to a minimum with an optimum reliability of detection.
The interference spectrum is first pre-analyzed in a fast prescan to optimize the duration of the
measurement. Data reduction follows so that the time-consuming final measurement is performed at
only some important frequencies:
dB
80
Subrange
70
60
Subrange maximum
50
Limit line
40
30
Acceptance line
20
10
0
0,03
Fig. 4-7
GHz
1,0
0,1
Dividing the spectrum into eight subranges
Data reduction is of crucial importance. It is initiated by the user pressing a key after the prescan and
then automatically performed by the receiver. Data reduction is used to select frequencies with a very
high interference level. Several data reduction methods are used:
• Acceptance analysis, ie the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with levels
above a line parallel to a limit line.
• Generating subrange maxima, ie the interference spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with
the highest interference level of a frequency subrange (search method SUBRANGES).
• Determination of a specific number of peak values relative to the limit lines with the level values
being independent of their frequency spectral distribution (search method PEAKS).
1088.7531.12
4.97
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
For generation of subrange maxima, the whole frequency range is divided into equidistant subranges. A
subrange maximum is determined for each subrange (search method SUBRANGES).
Determining the level maxima irrespective of their distribution in the frequency spectrum (search mode
PEAKS) is suitable for measurement regulations that demand determination of the relatively highest
level irrespective of the distribution in the measured frequency range, eg FCC.
If the prescan is performed in parallel with several detectors, typically with peak value and average
value, the maxima are determined separately for the two detectors so that the distribution of narrowband
and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account. For example, the frequency of the
maximum determined with the average detector can be used for the final measurement performed with
this detector and the frequency found in the prescan carried out with the peak detector is taken for the
final measurement using the quasi-peak detector.
Consideration of the limit lines ensures that the final measurement is not performed at frequencies at
which the inference level is far below the limit value. The margin between the acceptance line and the
limit line can be selected by the user in dB as the MARGIN. Each limit line is allocated to a trace, ie
different limit lines are taken for the different detectors.
Two values should therefore be defined for this purpose:
• the number of subranges or highest level values (NO OF PEAKS in the range from 1 to 500; default
value: 25)
• the acceptance margin (MARGIN; default value: 6 dB). It is valid for all limit lines.
As an alternative method, it is possible to preset a list of frequencies at which the final measurements
are performed. A typical application is, for example, the statistical analysis of several units.
The peak list can be either edited manually or can be filled with desired values by adopting the marker
values.
If no limit lines are activated, the measurement procedure is as if all measured values would exceed the
limit line.
1088.7531.12
4.98
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu (right side menu)
EMI
RECEIVER
PEAK
SEARCH
EDIT PEAK
LIST
The PEAK SEARCH softkey starts the determination of the subrange
maxima list from the available scan results. The procedure can be repeated
as often as desired to try out different settings of margin and number of
subranges.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate]
NO OF
PEAKS
PEAKS
SUBRANGES
MARGIN
FINAL
MEAS TIME
LISN
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
INTER
ACTIVE
RUN
FINAL MEAS
The following table shows the peak list which is determined by the peak-search function after the
prescan:
¦
Trace1:
014QP
Trace3:
--TRACE
2 Average
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
2 Average
2 Average
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
1 Max Peak
2 Average
2 Average
1088.7531.12
EDIT PEAK LIST (Prescan Results)
Trace2:
014AV
Trace4:
--FREQUENCY
LEVEL dBpT
80.0000 MHz
35.34
89.4800 MHz
38.83
98.5200 MHz
47.53
98.5200 MHz
46.63
100.7200 MHz
54.14
102.3200 MHz
50.89
113.2400 MHz
49.68
116.9200 MHz
44.81
125.8800 MHz
55.01
125.8800 MHz
53.55
138.4800 MHz
45.68
138.4800 MHz
42.17
144.0400 MHz
43.72
167.0400 MHz
44.77
176.2400 MHz
45.52
200.4800 MHz
52.49
200.4800 MHz
48.76
210.2800 MHz
60.55
226.5600 MHz
59.02
230.0000 MHz
48.59
4.99
DELTA LIMIT dB
-3.91
-0.91
-2.63
6.47
3.88
10.56
-1.08
3.91
3.78
12.33
-5.95
0.53
1.90
2.32
2.83
-0.75
5.51
7.09
15.24
4.75
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu (right side menu)
EDIT PEAK
LIST
EDIT PEAK
LIST
EDIT
FREQUENCY
The EDIT PEAK LIST softkey calls the
EDIT PEAK LIST submenu used for
editing the peak list. A frequency list can
thus be predefined and a final
measurement carried out at these
frequencies.
INSERT
A peak list can also be generated by
adopting the marker values (see section
"Changing the device settings with
Markers marker →")
DELETE
SORT BY
FREQUENCY
ASCII
CONFIG
SORT BY
DELTA LIM
EDIT PATH
ASCII
EXPORT
ASCII
CONFIG
DECIM SEP
.
,
NEW
APPEND
PAGE UP
HEADER
ON
OFF
PAGE DOWN
ASCII
COMMENT
EDIT
FREQUENCY
The EDIT FREQUENCY softkey activates table EDIT
PEAK LIST. The cursor marks the upper field of column
FREQUENCY.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
INSERT
The INSERT softkey creates an empty line above the
current cursor position
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
--
The softkey SORT BY FREQUENCY sorts the table in a
descending order according the entries in the
FREQUENCY column.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
--
The DELETE softkey erases the complete line at the
cursor position. Before deletion, a message appears
requesting confirmation..
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SORT BY
FREQUENCY
--
4.100
--
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
SORT BY
DELTA LIM
The softkey SORT BY DELTA LIMIT sorts the table in a
descending order according to the entries in the DELTA
LIMIT column (see table below).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
The following table shows the peak list sorted according to the margin to the limit value list:
¦
Trace1:
014QP
Trace3:
--TRACE
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
1
Max Peak
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
1
Max Peak
1
Max Peak
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
2
Average
1
Max Peak
2
Average
1
Max Peak
1
Max Peak
EDIT PEAK LIST (Prescan Results)
Trace2:
014AV
Trace4:
--FREQUENCY
LEVEL dBpT
226.5600 MHz
59.02
125.8800 MHz
53.55
102.3200 MHz
50.89
210.2800 MHz
60.55
98.5200 MHz
46.63
200.4800 MHz
48.76
230.0000 MHz
48.59
116.9200 MHz
44.81
100.7200 MHz
54.14
125.8800 MHz
55.01
176.2400 MHz
45.52
167.0400 MHz
44.77
144.0400 MHz
43.72
276.9200 MHz
45.81
138.4800 MHz
42.17
267.2800 MHz
44.44
200.4800 MHz
52.49
89.4800 MHz
38.83
113.2400 MHz
49.68
98.5200 MHz
47.53
ASCII
EXPORT
DELTA LIMIT dB
15.24
12.33
10.56
7.09
6.47
5.51
4.75
3.91
3.88
3.78
2.83
2.32
1.90
1.16
0.53
-0.05
-0.75
-0.91
-1.08
-2.63
The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the final measurement data
in a file with ASCII format.
Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be
entered. The default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured
data of the trace are stored.
The function can be configured in the ASCII CONFIG submenu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:MMEMory:STORe:FINal <path with file names>
ASCII
CONFIG
1088.7531.12
In the ASCII CONFIG submenu, various settings for the TRACE
ASCII EXPORT function can be made (see Section "Trace
Selection and Setup").
4.101
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Structure of the ASCII file:
RECEIVER mode, final measurement data:
File header
Content of file
Description
Type;ESIB 7;
Instrument model
Version;2.07;
Firmware version
Date;01.Jan 2000;
Date record storage date
Mode;Receiver;
Instrument operating mode
Start;10000;Hz
Stop;100000;Hz
Start/stop of the display range.
Unit: Hz
x-Axis;LIN;
Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Scan Count;1;
Number of scans set
Transducer;TRD1;
Transducer name (if switched on)
Scan 1:
Loop over all defined scan ranges (1-10)
Start;150000;Hz
Stop;1000000;Hz
Step;4000;Hz
RBW;100000;Hz
Meas Time;0.01;s
Auto Ranging;ON;
RF Att;20;dB
Range - start frequency in Hz
Range – stop frequency in Hz
Range - step width in Hz for linear step width or in %
(1-100) for logarithmic step width
Range - resolution bandwidth
Range - measurement time
Auto ranging on - or off for current range
Range - input attenuation
Auto Preamp on or off for current range
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Range - preamplifier on (20dB) or off (0dB)
Preamp;0;dB
Range - input (1 or 2)
Input;1;
Data section
of the file
1088.7531.12
TRACE 1 FINAL:
Selected trace
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Trace mode:
CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAX HOLD,MIN HOLD,
VIEW, BLANK
Final Detector
Final detector
MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, RMS, AVERAGE,
QUASI PEAK, AC VIDEO
x-Unit;Hz;
Unit of x values:
y-Unit;dBuV;
Unit of y values:
Final Meas
Time;1.000000;s
Final measurement time
Margin;6.000000:s
Margin
Values;8;
Number of test points
2;154000.000000;81.638
535;15.638535;N;GND
1;158000.000000;86.563
789;7.563789;N;GND
2;1018000.000000;58.68
9873;-1.310127;N;GND
...
Measured values:
4.102
<Trace>;<x-value>, <y-value>; <phase>; <ground>
Phase and protective grounding are output only if a
line impedance stabilization has been activated. They
specify the setting at which the maximum RFI level at
the associated frequency was found.
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
Example :
Type;ESIB 40 ;
Version;2.08;
Date;30.May 2000;
Mode;Receiver;
Start;150000.000000;Hz
Stop;30000000.000000;Hz
x-Axis;LOG;
Scan Count;1;
Transducer;;
Scan 1:
Start;150000.000000;Hz
Stop;30000000.000000;Hz
Step;4000.000000;Hz
RBW;9000.000000;Hz
Meas Time;0.001000;s
Auto Ranging;OFF;
RF Att;10.000000;dB
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamp;0.000000;dB
Input;1;
Scan 2:
Start;30000000.000000;Hz
Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz
Step;40000.000000;Hz
RBW;120000.000000;Hz
Meas Time;0.000100;s
Auto Ranging;OFF;
RF Att;10.000000;dB
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamp;0.000000;dB
Input;1;
TRACE 1 FINAL:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;
Final Detector;QUASI PEAK;
TRACE 2 FINAL:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;
Final Detector;AVERAGE;
x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBuV;
Final Meas Time;1.000000;s
Margin;6.000000;dB
Values;11;
2;154000.000000;81.638535;15.638535;N;GND
1;158000.000000;86.563789;7.563789;N;GND
2;1018000.000000;58.689873;-1.310127;N;GND
2;302000.000000;63.177345;-2.822655;L1;GND
2;3294000.000000;56.523022;-3.476978;N;GND
2;1122000.000000;53.849747;-6.150253;N;GND
2;10002000.000000;47.551216;-12.448784;N;GND
1;3390000.000000;59.762917;-13.237083;N;GND
1;9998000.000000;58.309189;-14.690811;L1;GND
2;20002000.000000;45.142456;-14.857544;L1;GND
2;7502000.000000;36.406967;-23.593033;L1;GND
1088.7531.12
4.103
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu (right side menu)
NO OF
PEAKS
Der Softkey NO OF PEAKS activates the entry field of the number of
subranges or peaks for the determination of the peak list. The range of
values is 1 to 500.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges 1...500
PEAKS
SUBRANGES
The PEAKS SUBRANGES softkey defines the search method with which
maxima are searched for within a scan.
PEAKS
Determination of a specific number of peak values
relative to the limit lines with the level values being
independent of their frequency spectral distribution.
SUBRANGES
Generating subrange maxima, ie the interference
spectrum is further analyzed at frequencies with the
highest interference level of a frequency subrange.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK
MARGIN
The MARGIN softkey activates the entry field of the margin, ie of an
additional acceptance threshold for the determination of the peak list. The
limit line currently used is shifted by this amount for defining the maxima.
The range of values is -200 dB to 200 dB.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch:MARGin -200dB to 200dB
FINAL
MEAS TIME
The FINAL MEAS TIME softkey activates the entry field of the time of final
measurement.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]SWEep:FMEasurement <num_value>
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
The AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey selects the automatic routine for the final
measurement. This routine is run according to the available frequency list
without user interaction.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.104
--
E-15
ESIB
INTER
ACTIVE
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
The INTERACTIVE softkey selects the following sequence for the final
measurement:
• A frequency from the frequency list is set on the receiver together with
the associated settings from the corresponding partial scan.
• The marker is set on this frequency in the scan diagram.
• The final measurement sequence switches to the Interrupted status.
• The signal can be exactly analyzed by modifying the receiver settings.
• CONTINUE AT HOLD starts the actual final measurement, the receiver
settings being restored except the frequency.
•
The current frequency replaces the original one in the frequency list
(drifting interference sources)
• Next frequency of frequency list.....
Note:
With the AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey in the CONTINUE FINAL
MEAS submenu a switchover can be made to the automatic
mode before the measurement is started anew.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
RUN
FINAL MEAS
HOLD
FINAL MEAS
HOLD
FINAL MEAS
STOP
FINAL MEAS
The RUN FINAL MEAS softkey starts the final measurement
sequence as described above. The HOLD FINAL MEAS
submenu is called.
The detectors used for the final measurement replace those
used in the list or for the prescan.
The out-of-limit condition is shown by a plus sign preceding the
values in the DELTA LIMIT column (see table below).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
Note:
1088.7531.12
--
--
The final measurement function is only available in the
manual mode. For operation under program control it
is preferable to read the prescan results and the datareduced peak list, if any, from the ESIB with the
controller and carry out the individual measurements
with the controller. This considerably makes the
control of the interactive mode easier.
4.105
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
HOLD
FINAL MEAS
CONTINUE
FINAL MEAS
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
INTER
ACTIVE
SKIP
FREQUENCY
The HOLD FINAL MEAS softkey interrupts the
automatic run of the final measurement.
The CONTINUE FINAL MEAS submenu
appears.
With the final measurement halted all receiver
settings can be modified for example for
examining the signal in detail.
The mode of the measurement (automatic or
interactive) can again be selected.
The final measurement can be started with the
MEASURE softkey.
MEASURE
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
STOP
FINAL MEAS
AUTOMATIC
FINAL
The AUTOMATIC FINAL softkey selects the
automatic mode for the final measurement
(see above).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
The INTERACTIVE softkey selects the
interactive mode for the final measurement as
described above.
INTER
ACTIVE
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SKIP
FREQUENCY
MEASURE
--
The MEASURE softkey continues with the final
measurement. The final measurement starts at
the next frequency entry on the peak list or at a
marked frequency if one or several lines have
been skipped with the SKIP FREQUENCY
softkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
--
The STOP FINAL MEAS softkey halts the final measurement.
The final measurement starts from the beginning on a new start.
The previously collected data are lost.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
--
The SKIP FREQUENCY softkey skips the next
entry in the FREQUENCY column.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
STOP
FINAL MEAS
--
4.106
--
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Data Reduction and Peak List
The peak list available after the final measurement:
The detectors used for the final measurement replace those used in the list or for the prescan.
The out-of-limit condition is shown by a plus sign preceding the values in the DELTA LIMIT column.
EDIT PEAK LIST (Final Measurement Results)
Trace1:
014QP
Trace2:
014AV
Trace3:
--Trace4:
--TRACE
FREQUENCY
LEVEL dBpT
DELTA LIMIT dB
2 Average
80.0000 MHz
29.99
-9.26
2 Average
89.4800 MHz
35.64
-4.09
1 Quasi Peak
98.5200 MHz
49.94
-0.22
2 Average
98.5200 MHz
48.32
8.15
1 Quasi Peak
100.7200 MHz
55.33
5.07
2 Average
102.3200 MHz
50.86
10.53
1 Quasi Peak
113.2400 MHz
42.50
-8.26
2 Average
116.9200 MHz
44.44
3.53
1 Quasi Peak
125.8800 MHz
54.91
3.68
2 Average
125.8800 MHz
53.86
12.64
1 Quasi Peak
138.4800 MHz
41.83
-9.81
2 Average
138.4800 MHz
39.38
-2.25
2 Average
144.0400 MHz
40.77
-1.04
2 Average
167.0400 MHz
44.82
2.37
2 Average
176.2400 MHz
46.56
3.87
1 Quasi Peak
200.4800 MHz
50.93
-2.31
2 Average
200.4800 MHz
48.27
5.02
1 Quasi Peak
210.2800 MHz
58.71
5.25
2 Average
226.5600 MHz
59.07
15.29
2 Average
230.0000 MHz
46.90
3.05
¦
1088.7531.12
4.107
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement
The selection of detectors for the final measurement is made in the TRACE menu (see section
"Selection and setting of traces ").
The detectors to be used for the final measurement can be set here for each trace, ie any combination
of prescan and final measurement is possible. The required flexibility is thus obtained for the diverse
test specifications which are covered by means of the ESIB.
Traces 3 and 4 can be used for displaying the final measurement values. For this purpose, the FINAL
MEAS softkey should be activated in the associated menu. Trace 3 represents the allocated final
measurement values referring to trace 1 with the symbol "x" and trace 4 the final measurement values
for trace 2 with "+".
The results of prescan and final measurement in a diagram:
Det
Att 0 dB AUTO
ResBW
INPUT 1
Meas T
AV Trd
120 kHz
100 ms Unit
dBpT
100
100 MHz
90
80
1MA
2AV
70
xQP
60
+AV
50
014QP
40
014AV
30
20
10
0
30 MHz
Date:
Fig. 4-8
300 MHz
14.DEC.1999
11:41:33
Results of prescan and final measurement
1088.7531.12
4.108
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks
Automatic Control of Line Impedance Stabilization Networks
The selected phases are controlled during the prescan and the final measurement via the USERPORT
with the LISN switched on. In contrast, the LISN menu in the SETUP menu is used for the direct control
of the LISN and is not included in the automatic sequences.
Only one phase and one PE setting (1 out of n) can be selected for the prescan. Any number of settings
can be selected for the final measurement (m out of n).
All selected phase/PE combinations are measured during the final measurement and the maximum
value is determined.
CONFIGURATION MODE - EMI RECEIVER menu (right side menu)
LISN
LISN
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
The LISN softkey opens the submenu for
automatic control of V-networks (LISNs)
ESH3-Z5
OFF
PRESCAN
PHASES
PRESCAN/FINAL
PHASES
FINAL
PHASES
PHASE N
PHASE L1
PHASE L2
PHASE L3
PE
GROUNDED
PE
FLOATING
ESH2-Z5
ENV 4200
ESH3-Z5
Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5 and OFF allow to select
the V-network to be controlled via the user port.
ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200
four-line V-network is controlled,
ESH3-Z5
two-line V-network is controlled,
OFF
remote control is deactivated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:LISN[:TYPE]
TWOPhase| FOURphase| OFF
OFF
1088.7531.12
4.109
E-15
ESIB- Receiver
ESIB
PRESCAN
PHASES
The PRESCAN PHASES and FINAL PHASES softkeys open the
submenu for the selection of phase and protective earth setting.
PRESCAN PHASES:
Softkeys ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200, ESH3-Z5
and OFF or PHASE N, PHASE L1,
PHASE L2 and PHASE L3 as well as PE
GROUNDED and PE FLOATING are
toggle keys. Only one of them can be
activated at a time.
FINAL PHASES:
All combinations of phases and PE
setting are possible.
FINAL
PHASES
Softkeys PHASE N, PHASE L1, PHASE L2
and PHASE L3 select the phase of the Vnetwork on which the RFI voltage is to be
measured.
PHASE N
PHASE L1
PHASE L2
PHASE N
RFI on phase N is measured,
PHASE L1
RFI on phase L1 is measured,
PHASE L2
RFI on phase L2 is measured
(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200),
PHASE L3
RFI on phase L3 is measured
(only for ESH2-Z5/ENV 4200).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:LISN:PHASe L1| L2| L3| N
PHASE L3
Softkeys
PE
GROUNDED
and
PE
FLOATING switch the protective earth
conductor chokes on or off.
PE
GROUNDED
PE GROUNDED
protective earth conductor choke switched
off,
PE FLOATING
protective earth conductor choke switched
on.
PE
FLOATING
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut:LISN:PEARth
GROunded|FLOating
1088.7531.12
4.110
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Frequency and Span
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group
The FREQUENCY key group is used to specify the receiver frequency and the frequency axis of the
active measurement . The frequency axis is defined by the start and stop frequency.
After pressing one of the keys FREQ, START or STOP, the value of the corresponding parameter can
be defined in the appropriate dialog window.
Start Frequency – START Key
FREQUENCY – START menu:
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ
ZOOM
START
STOP
The START key opens a window where the start frequency of the scan
diagram can be entered.
The start frequency can be selected in the ESIB frequency range
irrespective of scan range limits.
IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <num_value>
Stop Frequency – STOP Key
FREQUENCY – STOP menu:
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ
ZOOM
START
STOP
The STOP key opens a window where the stop frequency of the scan
diagram can be entered.
The stop frequency can be selected in the ESIB frequency range
irrespective of scan range limits.
The permissible value range for the stop frequency is:
fstop > fstart
IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <num_value>
Receiver Frequency – FREQ Key
FREQUENCY – FREQ menu:
FREQUENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ
ZOOM
The FREQ key opens a window where the receiver frequency can be
entered.
A precondition is that the frequency and level readout is active.
The permissible value range depends on the selected input:
START
STOP
Input 1:
Input 2:
20 Hz ≤ fin ≤ fmax
20 Hz ≤ fin ≤ 1 GHz
If the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth
is automatically reduced so that this condition is met again.
If the frequency is increased again, the original IF bandwidth is restored. The
memory is cleared when the IF bandwidth is manually changed.
The resolution of the receive frequency is always 0.1 Hz.
IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP <num_value>
1088.7531.12
4.111
E-15
Frequency and Span - Receiver
ESIB
Receiver Frequency Step Size
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a menu for setting the step size of the
receiver frequency. The step size can be coupled to the receiver frequency or be manually set to a fixed
value.
In order to change the step size, the entry window for the receiver frequency must already be active.
After pressing the STEP key, the REC FREQ STEP menu appears.
The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can be active at a time.
Control is returned to the FREQUENCY FREQ menu via the menu key
.
DATA VARIATION - STEP menu
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
REC FREQ
STEPSIZE
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
STEPZIZE
=FREQUENC
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for the input of a fixed
step size.
IEC/IEEE bus command :[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <num_value>
STEPSIZE
= FREQUENC
The STEPSIZE = FREQUENC softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL and
the step size to a value equal to the receiver frequency.
This function is especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic
content, because, when entering the receiver frequency, the receiver frequency of
another harmonic is selected with each stroke of the STEP key.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
--
4.112
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Level Display/RF Input
Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group
The UNIT and RANGE keys are used to set the display units and the display range of the scan diagram.
The INPUT key sets the characteristics of the RF input (input, input attenuation, and preamplification).
Display Units - UNIT Key
In general, a receiver measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is calibrated in rms
values of an unmodulated sinewave signal. In the initial state, the level is displayed in dBµV. Via the
known input resistance of 50 Ω a conversion can be made to other units. The units dBm, dBµA, dBpW,
and dBpT are directly convertible and can be selected in the UNIT menu.
If the antenna coded connector on the front panel is used, the coded unit there determines the possible
display units. Connecting to the coded connector deactivates the settings of the UNIT menu.
By certain codings it is nevertheless possible to select a conversion of the unit in the menu. The
dependencies between the unit of the antenna coded connector and the unit which is to be selected for
the display are given in the softkey description.
The default coding defined by the connector can be switched off using the PROBE CODE ON/OFF
softkey. In this case, the unit can be set with the corresponding unit softkeys (dBm, dBµV, ... ) even if a
coded connector is plugged in. The coded entries in the connector are then ignored.
LEVEL UNIT submenu:
LEVEL
UNIT
REF/
UNIT
dBµV
dBm
The UNIT key opens a submenu in which the desired units
for the level axis can be selected and the coding of the
antenna coded connector can be switched on and off.
The unit softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
Only one of these switches may be active at any one time.
RANGE
dBµA
dBpW
dBpT
dBµV/m
dBµA/m
dB*/MHz
PROBE CODE
ON / OFF
1088.7531.12
4.113
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Receiver
dB µV
ESIB
The dBµV, dBm, dBµA, dBpW, dBpT, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dB*/MHz softkeys
set the display units to the corresponding logarithmic units.
The dBµV unit is the default unit in receiver mode.
dBm
dBµ A
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer
DBMV | DBM | DBUA | DBPW | DBPT |
DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBUV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ
dBpW
dBpT
µ
dBµV/m
dBµ A/m
dB*/MHz
PROBE CODE
ON / OFF
The PROBE CODE ON/OFF softkey enables or disables the units defined by
the coded connector.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.114
:UNIT:PROBe
ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Level Display/RF Input
Level Range – RANGE Key
LEVEL RANGE menu:
LEVEL
LEVEL RANGE
REF/
UNIT
LOG 120 dB
The RANGE key calls a menu in which the range for the
scan diagram can be selected.
The default setting is 100 dB.
LOG 100 dB
RANGE
LOG 50 dB
The most often used settings (120 dB, 100 dB, 50 dB,
20 dB and 10 dB) are each directly selectable by a
softkey.
All other ranges are chosen with the LOG MANUAL
softkey.
LOG 20 dB
LOG 10 dB
LOG
MANUAL
When the display range is changed, GRID MAX LEVEL
and GRID MIN LEVEL are newly set. GRID MIN LEVEL is
not changed, however.
Editing of GRID MAX LEVEL and GRID MIN LEVEL sets
LOG MANUAL.
GRID
MAX LEVEL
GRID
MIN LEVEL
LOG
MANUAL
The LOG MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the level display range. The
display rangesgo from 10 to 200 dB in 10-dB steps. Invalid entries are
rounded off to the nearest valid value.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing LOG
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y:SCALe 110DB
GRID
MAX LEVEL
The GRID MAX LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the maximum level of
the display range. Values from -83 dBµV to +307 dBµV are allowed.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing LOG
:DISP[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1. 4>:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <num_value>
GRID
MIN LEVEL
The GRID MIN LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the minimum level of the
display range. Allowed values are:
GRID MAX LEVEL - 200 ≤ GRID MIN LEVEL ≤ GRID MAX LEVEL - 10
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing LOG
:DISP[:WIND<1|2>]:TRACe<1. 4>:Y[:SCAL]:BOTTom <num_value>
1088.7531.12
4.115
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Receiver
ESIB
RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key
In addition to manual entry of the input attenuation, the ESIB provides an option which allows the RF
attenuation, dependent on the selected reference level, to be automatically set.
INPUT menu:
INPUT
INPUT
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
0 dB MIN
ON
OFF
The INPUT key opens the menu for configuring the RF
input. It contains the input attenuator for matching the RF
input to the input signal, the auto ranging of the
preamplifier, and the selection of the input.
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
PREAMP
ON
OFF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the entry of an attenuation factor
irrespective of the reference level.
The following attenuation factor can be set irrespective of the active input:
• INPUT 1:
0 to 70 dB
in 10 dB steps,
• INPUT 2:
0 to 70 dB
in 5 dB steps.
Other entries are rounded down to the nearest integer.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.116
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation 40DB
E-15
ESIB
0 DB MIN
ON
OFF
Receiver - Level Display/RF Input
The 0 DB MIN softkey determines whether the 0 dB setting of the attenuator
may be used in the manual or automatic setting of the attenuator.
0 DB MIN OFF is the default value, ie an RF attenuation of at least 10 dB is
always set on ESIB to protect the input mixer.
An attenuation factor of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This prevents
0 dB being switched on inadvertently particularly when DUTs with high RFI
voltage are measured.
Caution:
If 0 dB RF attenuation is used with autoranging, care must be
taken that the permissible signal level at the RF input is not
exceeded. Exceeding this level would damage the input
mixer. The 0 dB attenuation should under no circumstances
be used when RFI voltage measurements are performed with
the aid of artificial networks as in this case very high pulses
occur during phase switching.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:PROTection ON|OFF
AUTO RANGE
ON
OFF
The AUTO RANGE ON/OFF softkey switches auto ranging on or off.
When the autorange function is active, ESIB automatically sets the selected
attenuation so that a good S/N ratio is obtained without the receiver stages
being overdriven.
IEC/IEEE bus command :INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTOPREAMP
ON
OFF
The AUTOPREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the autopreamp function on or
off.
When the autopreamp function is active, the preamplifier is considered in the
autorange procedure. The preamplifier is only switched on when the RF
attenuation is reduced to the lowest settable value.
This function can only be controlled when the preamplifier is switched on.
IEC/IEEE bus command
PREAMP
ON
OFF
The PREAMP ON/OFF softkey switches the preamplifier on and off.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
:INPut<1|2>:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF
4.117
:INPut<1|2>:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Receiver
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
ESIB
The INPUT 1 softkey selects input 1 (default setting).
The INPUT 2 softkey selects input 2.
The INPUT 2 softkey switches on the pulse-resistant input 2. With the input 2
used, the frequency range is limited to 2 GHz. Higher frequencies cannot be
set.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:INPut:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
The softkeys INPUT 2 DC COUPLED and INPUT 2 AC COUPLED chose DC
or AC coupling for the RF input 2.
Default setting is AC coupling.
The bottom frequency limit is 1 kHz.
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
To indicate that input 2 is used (with AC or DC coupling), the enhancement
labels I2A or I2D are shown on the display.
When using the input 1, the two softkeys are then not offered for selection
(enhancement label IN1).
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.118
:INPut:COUPling AC | DC
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Main Markers
Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group
The markers are used for marking points on measurement curves, reading out measurement values
and for quickly selecting a display screen segment. Preselected measurement routines can be called by
pressing a key in the marker menu. The ESIB provides four markers and four delta markers. The
currently activated marker can be shifted with the cursor keys, the roll-key or the softkeys.
The marker which can be moved by the user is defined as the active marker.
Examples:
marker
1
active marker
3
temporary marker
T1
2
delta marker
The measurement values of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker
field. In the marker info list, the measurement values from all enabled markers are sorted in ascending
order. The marker info list can be switched off with the MARKER INFO softkey so that only the values
for the active marker are shown.
Main Markers– NORMAL Key
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
DE
A
MKR
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
MARKER 3
MARKER 4
The NORMAL key calls a menu which contains all marker
standard functions. The current state of the markers is
indicated by a colored illumination of the softkeys. If no
marker is enabled prior to pressing the NORMAL key,
MARKER 1 will be enabled as the reference marker and a
peak search on the measurement curve is carried out
(assumption: at least one measurement curve is active).
Otherwise, the peak search is omitted and the entry window
for the reference marker is activated.
The marker field at the upper left of the display screen shows
the marker location (here, frequency), the level and the
currently selected measurement curve.
MARKER
ZOOM
MARKER 1 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
123.4567 MHz
PREV ZOOM
RANGE
ZOOM
OFF
MARKER
INFO
ALL MARKER
OFF
1088.7531.12
Measured scan data can be subsequently represented in an
expanded form using the zoom function. If the measured
values obtained are more than the available pixels, several
measured values are combined to one pixel. This
compression is performed again for each zoom operation.
At the same time, the scan start and stop frequencies are set
to the new diagram limits. A newly started scan then sweeps
only the currently represented frequency range
4.119
E-15
Main Markers - Receiver
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
ON
MARKER 3
ESIB
The MARKER 1 to MARKER 4 softkeys switch the corresponding marker on/off or
activate it as the reference marker. If the marker is activated as a reference
marker, an entry field for manually setting the position of the reference marker is
opened simultaneously. If the marker is disabled, the softkey is not illuminated.
Enabled markers and the reference marker are indicated by illuminating the
corresponding softkeys in different colors.(In the instrument default state, the
active reference marker is displayed in red and enabled markers are displayed in
green.)
Operating example:
MARKER 4
MARKER 1 is shown as the reference marker by the colored background
illumination. MARKER 2 through MARKER 4 are turned off.
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
ON
MARKER 2
MARKER 3
MARKER 3
Pressing the MARKER 3 softkey switches MARKER 3 on and it becomes the
reference maker. The previous reference marker remains enabled and the
softkey remains illuminated. However, the entry mode for this marker is not now
active. Instead, the entry window for MARKER 3 is opened and the position of
MARKER 3 can be shifted.
MARKER 3
123.4567 MHz
The information in the marker field also changes to describe the new reference
marker.
MARKER 3 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
23.4567891 MHz
MARKER
NORMAL
1088.7531.12
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
ON
MARKER 2
MARKER 3
MARKER 3
4.120
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Main Markers
Pressing the current reference marker (MARKER 3) softkey again switches
MARKER 3 off. If at least one marker is enabled, the marker with the smallest
number will be selected as the new reference marker (in the example,
MARKER 1). Switching off the last active marker also deletes are delta markers.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>[:STATe] ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:X 10.7MHz;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:Y?
When several measurement curves (traces) are being displayed, the marker is set
to the maximum value (peak) of the active curve which has the lowest number (1 to
4). In case a marker is already located there, it will be set to the frequency of the
next highest level (next peak).
If a measurement curve is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker
functions are also erased. If the curve is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..),
these markers along with coupled functions will be restored to their original
positions.
A prerequisite for the restoration of the marker positions is that individual markers
have not been used on another measurement curve or that the scan data (start/stop
frequency) have not been changed.
If a marker (or, delta marker) necessary for a marker function is not available, it will
be automatically checked whether or not the enabling of the corresponding marker
is possible (see above). If this is not the case, a warning is issued.
WARNING:
No trace active
The activation of the desired marker function is then not possible.
On the other hand, if the marker can be enabled, a peak search is automatically
performed. Thereafter, the desired marker function can be executed.
MARKER NORMAL menu:
MARKER
ZOOM
The MARKER ZOOM softkey zooms 10% of the diagram around the current
marker. It opens at the same time a data entry field which allows to enter any
frequency range which is then displayed
Pressing the softkey again expands the diagram such that only 3 measured values
are represented.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <num_value>
PREV ZOOM
RANGE
The PREVIOUS ZOOM softkey sets again the previous frequency range
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
--
4.121
E-15
Main Markers - Receiver
ZOOM
OFF
ESIB
The ZOOM OFF softkey switches off the zoomed representation.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM OFF
ALL MARKER
OFF
The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta
markers). Similarly, it switches off all functions and displays correlated with the
markers/delta markers.
IEC/IEEE bus command
MARKER
INFO
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:AOFF
The MARKER INFO softkey opens the display of several markers within the grid. In
the upper right corner of the grid, a maximum of 4 markers/delta markers with the
marker symbols ∆/∇, marker number (1 to 4), position and measurement value are
listed. For the output of the marker position, the number or displayed characters will
be limited as required.
If the number of lines available is not enough for all the enabled markers and delta
markers, first the markers and then the delta markers are entered into the info list
IEC/IEEE bus command :DISPlay:WINDow<1|2>:MINFo ON | OFF
1088.7531.12
4.122
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Main Markers
Marker Step Size
DATA VARIATION – STEP menu:
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
MARKER
STEP SIZE
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a
menu to match the marker step size to each individual
application. In order to change the step size, the marker entry
mode must already be active.
Control is returned to the MARKER NORMAL menu via the
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
menu key
.
MKR TO
STEPSIZE
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
.
.
.
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the marker step size to AUTO. In this
case, the step size is exactly 10% of the grid. A one-raster movement of the
roll-key corresponds to one pixel.
STEPSIZE AUTO is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:STEP:AUTO
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
ON|OFF
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for defining a
fixed value for the marker step size.
Pressing the step key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The resolution of the roll-key is always one pixel per raster.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:STEP 10KHZ
MKR TO
STEPSIZE
The MKR TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the current
marker frequency.
This function is well suited to harmonic measurements. The marker is set to
the largest signal using the peak search function. After activation of the MKR
TO STEPSIZE function, the marker is set to the corresponding harmonic of
the signal each time the cursor key
marker position.
or
is pressed when entering the
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:MSTep
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
The DELTA TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the
difference between the reference marker and the last active delta marker.
The softkey is only available when at least one delta marker is enabled.
IEC/IEEE bus command --
1088.7531.12
4.123
E-15
Delta Markers - Receiver
ESIB
Delta Markers – DELTA Key
The delta markers are used to measure a level or frequency referred to a reference marker. They are
always referenced to the marker whose position was last changed. A delta marker is displayed
symbol. The reference marker is displayed as a filled
symbol.
as an empty
MARKER DELTA menu:
DELTA
MARKER
MARKER
DELTA 1
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA 2
DELTA
MKR
The DELTA key switches a delta marker on and calls the
menu for its control. If no marker is enabled, MARKER 1 is
automatically activated when the delta marker is switched on.
The delta marker activated to entry mode is shown on the
display screen as a filled
symbol.
DELTA 3
DELTA 4
REFERENCE
POINT
REFERENCE
FIXED
DELTA MKR
ABS
REL
ALL DELTA
OFF
DELTA 1
DELTA 2
DELTA 3
DELTA 4
The DELTA 1 to 4 softkeys are used to enable delta markers 1 to 4. The
control of the delta markers corresponds to that of the markers. After a delta
marker has been enabled, all entries are now applicable to this marker. The
main marker must be activated anew if its position is to be changed.
The delta marker field on the display screen contains the delta marker
number, the difference frequency from the delta marker to reference marker
and the level difference between the active delta markers and reference
markers.
The indicated differences are, in general, referred to the reference marker. If
the REFERENCE FIXED function are enabled, the reference values under
REFERENCE POINT are applicable.
IEC/IEEE bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4> ON|OFF
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:X 10.7MHZ
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:X:REL?
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:Y
1088.7531.12
4.124
E-15
ESIB
DELTA MKR
ABS
REL
Receiver - Delta Markers
The DELTA ABS REL softkey switches between relative and absolute entry
modes for the delta-marker frequency.
REL
The delta marker frequency is entered relative to the reference
marker. In this case, the entry mode for the delta-marker
frequencies is also relative.
ABS
The entry of the delta-marker frequency is in terms of absolute
frequency.
The default setting is REL.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MODE
ALL DELTA
OFF
ABS | REL
The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any
associated functions (e.g. REFERENCE FIXED).
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF
REFERENCE
FIXED
The REFERENCE FIXED softkey enables/disables relative measurements
with respect to a fixed, measurement-curve-independent reference value
(REFERENCE POINT).
The information in the delta-marker field on the display screen is referenced
to this fixed reference point. For the generation of the marker lists using
MARKER INFO list, the delta markers are also output relative to a fixed
reference. In the lists, the REFERENCE POINT is tagged by the number of
the reference marker (only one enabled)
When REFERENCE FIXED is enabled, the current settings of the reference
marker become the reference points. If no marker is active, MARKER 1 (with
peak search) is activated. After transferring the reference values, all markers
are deleted, and the active delta marker is set to the position of the reference
point. Additional delta markers can be switched on.
The reference point can be subsequently changed
1. by shifting it in the REFERENCE POINT sub-menu.
2. by starting a search:
In the MARKER NORMAL menu the REF POINT is handled as a reference
marker (even though it is not bound to the measurement curve). This
means, that it will be shown as enabled and can also be changed in
position. The co-ordinates of the REF POINT are overwritten by the marker
values (they lie, by definition, on the measurement curve). Thus, it is
possible, even for an enabled REFERENCE FIXED, to define a new
reference point with search functions.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.125
E-15
Delta Markers - Receiver
ESIB
MARKER DELTA- REFERENCE POINT submenu:
REFERENCE
POINT
REFERENCE
POINT
REF POINT
LEVEL
The REFERENCE POINT softkey opens a sub-menu in which
the reference value of the REFERENCE FIXED function can
be modified.
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
The position of the reference point is indicated by two
additional display lines (horizontal and vertical). In addition, an
offset level may be defined which is added to each difference
during output.
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
The softkey is only available when the REFERENCE FIXED
function is switched on.
REF POINT
LEVEL
The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for setting the
reference level relevant to the REFERENCE FIXED function.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:Y -10DBM
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates the entry box for the entry of
an additional offset level during output when the REFERENCE FIXED
function are enabled.
The offset level is set to 0 dB when the REFERENCE FIXED function are
switched on
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFSet 10DB
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry box for the input of
a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED function.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 10.7MHZ
1088.7531.12
4.126
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Delta Markers
Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key
STEP-DELTA STEP menu:
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
DELTA
STEP SIZE
STEPSIZE
AUTO
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a
menu to match the step size of the individual delta markers
to the specific application. In order to change the step size,
the entry mode for a delta marker must already be active.
Control is returned to the DELTA MARKER menu via the
menu key
.
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
.
.
.
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the delta marker step size to AUTO. In
this case, the step size of the delta marker is exactly 10% of the grid. The
roll-key corresponds to 1/500, i.e., for each rotational pulse, the delta
marker is shifted one pixel position.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey permits the entry of a fixed value for the
delta marker step size.
Pressing the step-key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The roll-key resolution, however, always remains constant at 1 pixel.
IEC/IEEE bus command
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
--
The DELTATO STEPSIZE softkey sets the delta marker step size to a
quantity equal to the difference between the delta and reference markers.
The softkey is only presented when at least one delta marker is switched
on.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:STEP 10HZ
1088.7531.12
4.127
E-15
Search Functions - Receiver
ESIB
Search Functions – SEARCH Key
The ESIB offers numerous functions useful for peak/min. peak searching. The search functions can be
used for marker as well as delta marker functions.
The setups applicable to the available search functions are performed in the MARKER-SEARCH menu.
The search functions are always related to the currently active marker. If the SEARCH key is pressed
while the marker entry mode is active, then all search functions are related to the current reference
marker. If the entry mode of a delta marker is active, then the functions will be applied to the
corresponding delta marker. For the case where no marker is active, MARKER 1 will be automatically
enabled (with peak search). The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey allows toggling between the active
marker and the active delta marker.
If the threshold line is turned on, the peak/min. search functions will only evaluate signals which have a
level above/below the selected threshold. In addition, the search range can also be limited (SEARCH
LIM ON/OFF softkey) by the frequency lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1/2).
MARKER SEARCH menu:
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA
1088.7531.12
MARKER
SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
MIN
PEAK
NEXT MIN
NEXT PEAK
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
NEXT MIN
LEFT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
TUNE TO
MARKER
TUNE TO
MARKER
MARKER
TRACK
MARKER
TRACK
SETTINGS
COUPLED
SETTINGS
COUPLED
PEAK
EXCURSION
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
MKR
4.128
E-15
ESIB
ACTIVE
MKR
DELTA
Receiver - Search Functions
The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and
the active delta marker.
If DELTA is illuminated, the following search functions are performed with the
active delta marker.
Note:
Switching between marker and delta marker entry modes may
also be performed using the NORMAL and DELTA keys.
IEC/IEEE bus command
SELECT
MARKER
--
The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of the marker/delta
markers. The selection box lists the currently enabled markers/delta markers.
MARKER SELECT
MARKER 1
MARKER 3
MARKER 4
DELTA SELECT
DELTA 1
DELTA 2
DELTA 3
IEC/IEEE bus command
PEAK
--
The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the peak of the
corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE bus commands :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1..4>:MAXimum
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:MAXimum
NEXT PEAK
The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next
lower peak on the corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAX:NEXT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:MAX:NEXT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to
the right of the current marker.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1..4>:MAX:RIGHt
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:MAX:RIGHt
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to the
left of the current marker.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1..4>:MAX:LEFT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:MAX:LEFT
TUNE TO
MARKER
The TUNE TO MARKER softkey sets the receiver frequency to the marker
frequency.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
1088.7531.12
4.129
E-15
Search Functions - Receiver
MARKER
TRACK
ESIB
The MARKER TRACK softkey couples the current receive frequency to the
marker frequency.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUPled[:STATe] ON|OFF
SETTINGS
COUPLED
The SETTINGS COUPLED softkey couples the receiver frequency settings
from the corresponding subscans to the marker frequency for functions
TUNE TO MARKER and MARKER TRACK.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:SCOupled[:STATe] ON|OFF
MIN
The MIN softkey sets the active marker to the lowest peak on the
corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MIN
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MIN
NEXT MIN
The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher of the low
peaks on the corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1..4>:MIN:NEXT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:MIN:NEXT
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to
the right of the current marker.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1...4>:MIN:RIGHt
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1...4>:MIN:RIGHt
NEXT MIN
LEFT
The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to
the left of the current marker.
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARK<1...4>:MIN:LEFT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1...4>:MIN:LEFT
PEAK
EXCURSION
The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates the entry the minimum amount a
signal level must decrease/increase before it is recognised by the search
functions (except PEAK and MIN) as a maximum or minimum.
The entry range is 0 dB to 80 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:PEXCursion 10DB
1088.7531.12
4.130
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Search Functions
The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB. This is sufficient for the functions NEXT
PEAK (or NEXT MIN) as the next smallest (or highest) signal is always
searched four.
Functions NEXT PEAK LEFT and NEXT PEAK RIGHT (or NEXT MIN LEFT
and NEXT MIN RIGHT) search for the next relative maximum (or minimum)
irrespective of the current signal amplitude.
As for wide bandwidths, the set 6-dB level change is already reached by the
noise indication of the receiver, the noise values are also identified as peak. In
this case, a value for PEAK EXCURSION which is greater than the difference
between the maximum and minimum noise display reading must be entered.
The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION
settings.
Marker [T1]
199.0140 MHz
-22.4 dBm
0
1
1
-10
2
-20
4
3
-30
-40
42dB
30dB
46dB
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
Fig. 4-9 Example: level measurements at various peak excursion settings
Maximum relative level change of the measured signals:
Signal 2:
42dB
Signal 3
30dB
Signal 4:
46dB
With Peak Excursion 40dB signal 2 and 4 are detected by NEXT PEAK or
NEXT PEAK RIGHT. Signal 3 is not detected since it is only decreased by 30
dB before rising again.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
1088.7531.12
4.131
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 4
E-15
Search Functions - Receiver
ESIB
With Peak Excursion 20dB signal 3 is detected since its highest level change
of 30 dB is now higher than the peak excursion.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 3
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal 4
With Peak Excursion 6dB all the signals are detected, NEXT PEAK RIGHT
does not produce the required results.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 3
or
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF softkey toggles between a limited (ON) and
unlimited (OFF) search range.
For peak and min. search functions, the search range can also be limited by
the frequency lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1, 2). If SEARCH LIMIT = ON, the
appropriate signal level will only be searched for between the specified
frequency lines.
The default setting is SEARCH LIMIT = OFF.
When only one line is enabled, frequency line 1 is defined as the lower limit
and the upper limit is defined by the stop frequency. If frequency line 2 turned
on, then it determines the upper limit.
For the case in which no line is active the search range is unlimited.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:X:SLIMits ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.132
E-15
Receiver - Marker Å Menu
ESIB
Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key
MARKER MKR →menu:
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
MARKER->
PEAK
The MKR → menu offers functions through which instrument
parameters can be changed with the aid of the currently
active marker. Exactly as in the SEARCH menu, these
functions can also be applied to the delta markers.
NEXT PEAK
DELTA
MKR
ADD TO
PEAK LIST
TUNE TO
MARKER
MKR->
STEPSIZE
MARKER
TRACK
SETTINGS
COUPLED
The choice between marker and delta marker is made
according to the currently active frequency entry mode for the
marker/delta marker. If no entry mode is active, the marker
with the lowest number will be activated as the reference
marker.
To simplify control, the functions PEAK, NEXT PEAK, TUNE
TO MARKER, MARKER TRACK, SETTINGGS COUPLED,
SELECT MARKER and ACTIVE MKR DELTA are also
available in the MRK→ menu. Thus, the most important
functions can be selected in one menu (see section "Search
Functions - SEARCH Key" for these softkeys).
MKR->
TRACE
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR
DELTA
ADD TO
PEAK LIST
The ADD TO PEAK LIST softkey adds the receiver frequency of the current
marker to the peak list (see also Section "Data Reduction and Subrange
Maxima").
IEC/IEEE bus command
MKR->
STEPSIZE
--
The MKR→STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the receiver frequency to
the current marker frequency.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:CSTep
MKR->
TRACE
The MKR→TRACE softkey opens a selection window through which the
marker can be set on a new trace. The traces available for selection appear
in the window.
SELECT TRACE
TRACE1
TRACE2
TRACE3
TRACE4
IEC/IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:TRACe 2
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:TRACe 2
1088.7531.12
4.133
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Receiver
ESIB
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field
Display Lines – D LINES Key
Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of measurement curve data more
convenient. The function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to
measure absolute and differential values on measurement curves.
In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions.
The ESIB provides four different types of display lines:
• two horizontal threshold lines for setting levels or for defining level search ranges – Display Line 1/2,
• two vertical frequency lines for indicating frequencies or for determining frequency search ranges –
Frequency Line 1/2,
• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum levels (Peak Search) –
Threshold Line
• a reference line which serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between measurement curves
– Reference Line
For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following
abbreviations:
D1
D2
F1
F2
Display Line 1
Display Line 2
Frequency Line 1
Frequency Line 2
TH
Threshold Line
REF Reference Line
The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full
width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction.
The lines for frequency are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the diagram.
They are movable in the x-direction.
Note:
The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a threeposition switch:
Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the rollkey, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
2nd press:
The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).
Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the rollkey, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
2nd press:
1088.7531.12
The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).
4.134
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Display and Limit Lines
Menu LINES-D-LINES
LINES
D LINES
LIMITS
D LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
The D LINES key activates the sub menu for setting of
the display lines.
DISPLAY
LINE 2
THRESHOLD
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
.
.
.
DISPLAY
LINE 1
The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate
the entry of the line location.
The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window.
DISPLAY
LINE 2
THRESHOLD
LINE
IEC\IEEE bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON|OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> -20dBm
The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and
activates the entry of the line location.
The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This
threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in
the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.).
IEC\IEEE bus commands
REFERENCE
LINE
The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and
activates the entry of the line position.
The reference line serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between
measurement curve data (see section "Mathematical Operations on
Measurement Curves"
IEC\IEEE bus commands
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold -82dBm
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe -10dBm
The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the frequency lines 1/2 on/off
and activate the entry of the line locations.
The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement
window or define search ranges (see section "Marker Functions").
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
1088.7531.12
IEC\IEEE bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> 120 MHz
4.135
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Receiver
ESIB
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key
Limit lines are used to define limits to amplitude curves or spectral distributions on the screen. They
indicate, for example, the upper limits for spurious emissions from a Unit Under Test (UUT). The lower
and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be checked either
visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The ESIB supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data points. For
each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined:
• The name of the limit line. The limit line is stored under this name and is displayed in the LIMIT LINES
table.
• The X-coordinates of the interpolation points. In the receiver mode, the limit line is specified for
absolute frequencies.
• The Y-coordinates of the interpolation points. In the receiver mode, the limit line is selected for
absolute levels.
• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this information and the active limit checking function
(LIMIT CHECK), the ESIB checks for compliance with each limit.
• The limit line units to be used. The units for the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the
active measurement window.
• The trace to which the limit line is assigned. For the ESIB, this defines the trace to which the limit is to
be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed.
• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation.
• A comment can also be entered for each limit line, eg, a description of the application.
In the LINES LIMIT menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The
SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the marked
limit lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE
submenus.
1088.7531.12
4.136
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Display and Limit Lines
LINES LIMIT menu
USER
LINES
SELECETED LIMIT LINE
D LINES
LIMITS
LIMIT
LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
Name:
Domain:
Unit:
Comment:
GSM22UP
FREQUENCY
dB
Line 1
Limit:
X-Axis:
X-Scaling:
Y-Scaling:
LOWER
LOG
ABSOLUTE
RELATIVE
NEW LIMIT
LINE
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
LIMIT LINES
NAME
GSM22UP
LP1GHz
LP1GHz
MIL461A
COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECKTRACE
off
on
off
off
1
1
1
2
MARGIN
0
0
0
-10
COPY
LIMIT LINE
dB
dB
dB
dB
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
X OFFSET
Y OFFSET
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line
Limit Line Selection
The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table
characteristics of the marked limit line :
Name
Domain
Limit
X-Axis
X-Scaling
Y-Scaling
Unit
Comment
provides
information
about
the
name
frequency domain
upper/lower limit
linear or logarithmic interpolation
absolute frequencies
absolute Y-units
for vertical scale
comment
The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW LIMIT
LINE) submenu.
Note:
1088.7531.12
In the receiver mode only frequency domain and absolute scaling of the
x and y axis are valid.
4.137
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Receiver
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
ESIB
The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the
selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table.
The column heading are as follows:
Name
Compatible
NAme of limit line to be selected.
Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement
window of the given trace.
These functions are not available in the receiver mode. Entries
made in these columns are not effective.
Limit Check
Trace
Margin
Name and Compatible - Switching on limit lines
A maximum of 8 limit lines can be switched on at any one time. A check mark at
the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled. A limit line can only
be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible column, ie, only when
the display mode of the x-axis and the y-axis units are identical to those of the
measurement window.
Note:
In the receiver mode, limit lines are only used in the frequency
domain with absolute X and Y scales. The limit line cannot be
switched on when other parameters are entered (time domain or
relative scale).
It should be noted that lines with dB scales are compatible with all dB(..) scales
for the Y-axis.
If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the
window the trace would be displayed in.
If the y-axis unit is changed, all non-compatible limit lines are automatically
switched off in order to avoid misinterpretations. The limit lines must be
switched on again when the original display mode is restored.
IEC\IEEE bus
commands
COPY
LIMIT LINE
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:NAME <string>;
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:STATe ON | OFF
The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data set of the marked limit line and
saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be easily generated
by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The name can be
arbitrarily chosen and entered via an entry window (max. of 8 characters).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:COPY 1..8|<name>
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
Pressing the DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before
deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DELete
X OFFSET
The X OFFSET softkey is not used in the receiver mode.
Y OFFSET
The Y OFFSET softkey is not used in the receiver mode.
1088.7531.12
4.138
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Display and Limit Lines
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines
A limit line is characterized by
• its name
• the domain assignment (frequency)
• the scale in absolute frequencies
• linear or logarithmic interpolation
• the vertical unit
• the vertical scale
• the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit.
• the interpolation points for frequency and level
When the limit line is entered, the ESIB immediately checks ll limit lines according to rules that
guarantee correct operation.
• The frequencies for each interpolation point must be entered in ascending order, however, for any
single frequency, two data points may be entered (vertical segment of a limit line).
The interpolation points are allocated in order of ascending frequency. Gaps are not allowed. If gaps
are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
• The entered frequencies need not necessarily be selectable in ESIB. A limit line may also exceed the
frequency display range. The minimum frequency for an interpolation point is -200 Hz, the maximum
frequency is 200 GHz.
• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB/+200 dB for the logarithmic or 10-20/10+20 or
-99.9%/+ 999.9% for the linear amplitude scales.
1088.7531.12
4.139
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Receiver
ESIB
LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT
LIMIT LINE submenu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading,
the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The frequency and
level points are entered in the columns.
NEW LIMIT
LINE
Name
Enter name.
Domain
Indication of domain.
Unit
Select the units.
X-Axis
Selection of interpolation
X-Scaling
Entry of absolute values for the X-axis
Y-Scaling
Entry of absolute values for the Y-axis
Limit
Select upper/lower limit.
Comment
Enter comments.
Frequency
Enter frequency points.
Limit/dB(..)
Enter level points.
USER
Name:
Domain:
Unit:
X-Axis:
X-Scaling:
Y-Scaling:
Limit:
Comment:
EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE
Limit_22
FREQUENCY
dBuV/m
LOG
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
UPPER
Limit 22
FREQUENCY
30.000
230.000
230.000
1.000
EDIT
LIMIT LINE
MHz
MHz
MHz
GHz
LIMIT/dBuV/m
NAME
VALUES
INSERT
VALUE
26
30.0000
30.0000
37.0000
37.0000
DELETE
VALUE
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
SHIFT
EDIT Y
LIMIT GRAPH
LINE
TABLE
ACCEPT
POSITION
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
49
50
Press
25 ENTER to edit field.
1088.7531.12
4.140
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Display and Limit Lines
NAME
The NAME softkey activates the entry of characteristics in the table heading.
Name - Enter name
A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be
compatible with the MS-DOS conventions for file names. The instrument
automatically stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>
Domain - Indication of frequency domain
In the receiver mode, only frequency domain is used.
EE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DOMain FREQuency
X-Axis - Indication of interpolation
Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled
between LIN and LOG (toggle function).
EC-Bus-Befehl
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:SPACing LIN | LOG
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:SPACing LIN | LOG
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:SPACing LIN | LOG
Scaling - Indication of scaling
In the receiver mode, absolute scaling is used.
X-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The frequencies are interpreted as absolute
physical units.
Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The limit values are absolute levels or voltages.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:MODE ABSolute
Unit - Selecting the vertical scale units for the limit line
Units are selected in a selection box. The default setting is dBm.
IEC\IEEE bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT
DB| DBM| PCT |DBUV| DBMW | DBUA | DBPW|
DBPT | WATT| VOLT | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ
| DBUA_M | DBUA_MMHZ
Limit - Selecting the upper/lower limit
A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit.
IEC\IEEE bus command
-(defined by the key words :UPPer or :LOWer)
Comment - Enter comments
Comments are user selectable, but may not exceed 40 characters in length.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:COMMent ’string’
1088.7531.12
4.141
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Receiver
VALUES
ESIB
The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table
columns Frequency and Limit/dB(..).
The desired frequency data points are entered in ascending order (two
repeated frequencies values are permitted).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA]
<num_value>,<num_value>..
INSERT
VALUE
The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor
position where a new data point can be entered. However, when entering new
values, the ascending order for frequency values must be kept.
IEC\IEEE bus command
DELETE
VALUE
The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the
cursor position. All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly.
IEC\IEEE bus command
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
--
--
The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted horizontally direction.
The shift units are the same as the the horizontal scale units: Hz, kHz, MHz
or GHz.
This means that it is easy to create a new limit line from an existing limit line
which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey)
under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:SHIFt 50kHz
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted vertically.
The shift takes place in dB.
This means that a new limit line can easily be created from an existing limit
line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey)
under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:SHIFt 20dB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:SHIFt 20dB
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line . The
name can be entered in an entry window (max. 8 characters)
IEC\IEEE bus command -- (automatically executed during remote control)
1088.7531.12
4.142
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Traces
Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group
The ESIB can display up to four separate traces at the same time. A trace has a maximum of 500 pixels
along the horizontal frequency axis. If there are more measurement values than pixels available, then
several measurement values are assigned to one pixel.
The traces are selected using keys 1 to 4 of the TRACES key group.
The traces can be individually enabled for a measurement and, after the measurement is completed, be
frozen. Traces which are not enabled remain blanked.
A display mode ican be selected for each trace. The traces can be overwritten (CLEAR/WRITE mode)
after each sweep, or the maximum/ minimum over several sweeps can be displayed.
Individual detectors are selectable for the various traces. The peak detector displays the maximum
values represented by a pixel. The quasi peak detector displays the value of the level at a pixel weighted
according to CISPR. The rms detector displays the power (rms value) of the measured values
represented by a pixel, the average detector the linear average value.
The maximum number of measured frequencies which can be measured is limited and depends on the
number of the traces which are switched on.
Number of traces
Measured values /trace
1
250.000
2
150.000
3
100.000
4
80.000
They are stored for postprocessing. If the scan subranges are defined so that more than the possible
values would be measured, a respective message is output upon the scan start. Afterwards the scan is
performed up to the maximum value.
Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key
The trace functions are categorized as follows:
• type of trace display (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK)
• evaluation of the trace as a whole (MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD)
• detector of a trace (PEAK, QUASI PEAK, RMS, AVERAGE and AC VIDEO
(AC VIDEO with option ESIB-B1 only)
1088.7531.12
4.143
E-15
Traces - Receiver
ESIB
TRACE 1 menu
TRACE
1
3
3
2
TRACE 1
CLEAR/
WRITE
TRACE 1
T1-T2+REF
->T1
VIEW
T1-T3+REF
->T1
BLANK
T1-T4+REF
->T1
4
T1-REF
->T1
MAX HOLD
Traces 3 and 4 only
MIN HOLD
ASCII
EXPORT
FINAL
RESULTS
ASCII
CONFIG
SCAN
COUNT
DETECTOR
COPY
TRACE MATH
OFF
The TRACE keys 1...4 call a menu which presents the setting options for the selected trace.
This menu is used to determine how the measured data will be represented in the frequency domain
using the 500 pixels provided by the display.
When the measurement is started, a new trace can be displayed or the trace can be based on previous
results.
Traces can be displayed, blanked and copied. By applying mathematical functions, the traces can also
be corrected. The measurement detector for each of the display types may be chosen directly by the
ESIB.
All activated traces are marked with a LED at the corresponding key (here, TRACE 1). The default
setting is TRACE 1 with CLEAR / WRITE and the PEAK detector selected, TRACE2 with CLEAR /
WRITE and the AVERAGE detector selected . The remaining traces 3 to 4 are switched off (BLANK).
The CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, VIEW, and BLANK are mutually exclusive selection
switches.
CLEAR/
WRITE
The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the clear/write display mode.
The trace is displayed without additional trace evaluation. The trace memory
is overwritten by each scan. If more than one data point falls within a pixel,
the trace is displayed in bar form with the maximum and minimum values in a
pixel connected. In the clear/write display mode, all the available detectors
are selectable.
Whenever the CLEAR/WRITE softkey is pressed, the ESIB clears the
selected trace memory and restarts the measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE WRITe
1088.7531.12
4.144
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Traces
VIEW
The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and
displays them.
If, in the VIEW display mode, the level display range (LEVEL RANGE) is
changed, the ESIB automatically adapts the measured data to the changed
display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the
measurement in order to show details of the trace.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE VIEW
BLANK
The BLANK softkey removes the trace from the display screen. However, the
trace data remain stored in memory and can be displayed again by VIEW.
The markers for the blanked trace are also erased. If the trace is activated
again (with VIEW, CLEAR / WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD) the markers
will be restored to their original positions.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4> OFF
MAX HOLD
The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max hold function.
In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each scan the largest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. In this way,
the maximum value of a signal can be determined over several scans.
This is especially useful for measurement of modulated or pulse-like signals.
The signal spectrum is built up scan by scan until all the signal components
have been captured.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE MAXH
MIN HOLD
The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min hold mode.
In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each scan the smallest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. In this way,
the minimum value of a signal can be determined over several scans.
This function is, e.g., useful in making an unmodulated carrier in a mix of
signals visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are
suppressed by the MIN HOLD function while a CW signal maintains a
constant level.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE MINH
FINAL
RESULTS
(only traces 3 and 4)
The FINAL RESULTS softkey activates the display of final measurement
values. Trace 3 represents the allocated final measurement values referring
to trace 1 with the symbol "x" and trace 4 the final measurement values for
trace 2 with "+" (see section "Selection of Detectors for Final Measurement").
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE FRESults
1088.7531.12
4.145
E-15
Traces - Receiver
ESIB
In SINGLE SCAN mode, RUN SCAN initiates n single scans. The scans are stopped as soon as the
selected number of scans is reached.
SCAN
COUNT
The SCAN COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of scans for
SINGLE SCAN.
The permitted range for SCAN COUNT is 1 through 32767. The default setting is
1 scan.
IEC\IEEE bus command
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 10
The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the
detector.
The detector type may be indepently selected for each trace.
QUASIPEAK
Multiple detection is activated by switching on up to four single
detectors.
AVERAGE
RMS
For description of detector types see Section "Detector
Selection" in Analyzer Mode.
MIN PEAK
The detectors for the final measurement are marked by
"FINAL".
FINAL
MAX PEAK
FINAL
QUASIPEAK
Softkey AC VIDEO is available only if the instrument is
equipped with the linear video output option (option ESIB-B1).
It replaces softkey MIN PEAK.
FINAL
AVERAGE
FINAL
RMS
FINAL
MIN PEAK
MAX PEAK
The MAX PEAK softkey activates the max peak detector.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] POSitive
QUASIPEAK
The QUASIPEAK softkey selects the quasi-peak detector.
The quasi-peak detector yields the maximum detected value
weighted to CISPR 16 during the set measurement time. The
IF bandwidth is adapted as a function of the frequency range.
The coupling of the IF bandwidth to the frequency range can
be cancelled using softkey QP RBW UNCOUPLED in the EMI
RECEIVER DETECTOR menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] QPEak
1088.7531.12
4.146
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Traces
AVERAGE
The AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector.
The average detector supplies the straight average of the
signal during the measurement time.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] AVERage
RMS
The RMS softkey activates the rms detector.
The rms detector supplies the rms value of the signal. The
mean of squares of all sampled values is formed during the
measurement time.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] RMS
MIN PEAK
The MIN PEAK softkey activates the min peak detector.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative
AC VIDEO
The DETECTOR AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO
detector. The softkey is available only if the instrument is
equipped with the linear video output option (option ESIB-B1).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector[:FUNCtion] ACVideo
FINAL
MAX PEAK
The FINAL MAX PEAK selects the max peak detector for the
final measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement POSitive
FINAL
QUASIPEAK
The FINAL QUASIPEAK selects the quasi peak detector for
the final measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement QPEak
FINAL
AVERAGE
The FINAL AVERAGE selects the average detector for the
final measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement AVERage
FINAL
RMS
The FINAL RMS selects the rms detector for the final
measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement RMS
1088.7531.12
4.147
E-15
Traces - Receiver
ESIB
FINAL
MIN PEAK
The FINAL MIN PEAK selects the min peak detector for the
final measurement.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement NEGative
FINAL
AC VIDEO
The FINAL AC VIDEIO selects the AC video detector for the
final measurement. The softkey is available only if the
instrument is equipped with the linear video output option
(option ESIB-B1).
IEC\IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]DETector:FMEasurement ACVideo
COPY..
The COPY softkey copies the current trace as displayed on the screen to
another trace memory. A table appears in which the desired copy procedure
can be selected.
COPY TRACE 1 TO
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
Copying overwrites the contents of the selected memory and the new contents
are displayed in view mode.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:TRACe:COPY
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4,
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4
Mathematical Functions for Traces
TRACE 1- menu:
TRACE MATH
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
T1-T4+REF
-> T1
T1-REF
->T1
The T1-T2+REF, T1-T3+REF, T1-T3+REF and T1-REF softkeys subtract the
corresponding traces and add the set level to the difference. If the reference
line is switched on (see key D LINES), the level value of the reference line is
added to the difference. Thus, the differential curve can be positioned
anywhere on the screen by shifting the reference line. The difference of the two
traces with respect to the reference line is displayed.
The T1-REF softkey subtracts the level of the reference line from the trace
level.
To indicate that the trace is a difference trace, an enhancement label is
displayed at the right margin of the diagram (1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-R). In TRACE 1
main menu, the TRACE MATH softkey is illuminated to show that the function
is being used.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr>
TRACE MATH
OFF
The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the difference function off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe OFF
4.148
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Traces
ASCII Export for Trace data
TRACE 1- menu:
ASCII
EXPORT
The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in a file with ASCII format.
Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be entered. The
default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured data of the trace are stored.
The function can be configured in the ASCII CONFIG submenu.
IEC\IEEE bus command :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <path>
ASCII
CONFIG
ASCII
CONFIG
EDIT PATH
In the ASCII CONFIG submenu, various settings for the TRACE
ASCII EXPORT function can be made.
DECIM SEP
.
,
NEW
APPEND
HEADER
ON
OFF
ASCII
COMMENT
.
.
.
EDIT PATH
The EDIT PATH softkey defines the directory in which the file is to
be stored.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DECIM SEP
.
,
--
The DECIM SEP softkey selects the separator for the ASCII file:
’.’ (decimal point) or ’,’ (comma).
This means that the decimal separator used in various language
versions of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can be selected
so that the packages are supported.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA
NEW
APPEND
The APPEND NEW softkey defines whether output data are to be
written to an existing file or a new file.
• With APPEND, the data are added to an existing file.
• With NEW, either a new file is generated or an existing file is
overwritten by storage of the data.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend ON | OFF
1088.7531.12
4.149
E-15
Traces - Receiver
ON
ESIB
EDIT
OFF
The HEADER ON/OFF softkey defines whether important
instrument settings should be stored at the beginning of the file.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer ON | OFF
ASCII
COMMENT
The ASCII COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary
concerning the current ASCII data set. A total of 60 characters are
available for this purpose.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ’string’
Structure of the ASCII file:
The file consists of a header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the
trace data.
There are three columns of data in the file header, each separated by a semicolon “;”:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit
The data section starts with the keyword " Trace <n> " (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the
measured data in one or several columns (depending on the measurement) which are also separated
by a semicolon ",".
This format can be read in from spreadsheets, eg MS-Excel. It is necessary to define ';' as a separator.
1088.7531.12
4.150
E-15
ESIB
File header
Data section of the file
Receiver - Traces
Content of file
Description
Type;ESIB 7;
Instrument model
Version;2.07;
Firmware version
Date;01.Jan 2000;
Date of data set storage
Mode;Receiver;
Instrument mode
Start;10000;Hz
Stop;100000;Hz
Start/stop of the display range.
Unit: Hz
x-Axis;LIN;
Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Detector;AVERAGE;
Selected detector
MAX PEAK,MIN PEAK,RMS,AVERAGE,
QUASI PEAK,AC VIDEO
Scan Count;1;
Scan count
Transducer;TRD1;
Transducer name (if switched on)
Scan 1:
Loop over all defined scan ranges (1-10)
Start;150000;Hz
Range - start frequency in Hz
Stop;1000000;Hz
Range – stop frequency in Hz
Step;4000;Hz
Range - step width in Hz for linear step width or in %
(1-100) for logarithmic step width
RBW;100000;Hz
Range - resolution bandwidth
Meas Time;0.01;s
Range - measurement time
Auto Ranging;ON;
Auto ranging on - or off for current range
RF Att;20;dB
Range - input attenuation
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Auto Preamp on or off for current range
Preamp;0;dB
Range - preamplifier on (20dB) or off (0dB)
Input;1;
Range - input (1 or 2)
Trace 1:
Selected trace
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Trace mode:
CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAX HOLD,MIN HOLD, VIEW,
BLANK
x-Unit;Hz;
Unit of x values:
y-Unit;dBuV;
Unit of y values:
Values;31714;
Number of test points
Measured values:
150000.000000;11.459816;
154000.000000;13.225037;
158000.000000;12.387199;
162000.000000;13.124626;
166000.000000;13.615486;
<x value>, <y value>;
...;...;
1088.7531.12
4.151
E-15
Traces - Receiver
ESIB
Example for exported scan data:
Type;ESIB 7 ;
Version;2.07;
Date;01.Jan 2000;
Mode;Receiver;
Start;150000.000000;Hz
Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz
x-Axis;LOG;
Detector;MAX PEAK;
Scan Count;1;
Transducer;;
Scan 1:
Start;150000.000000;Hz
Stop;30000000.000000;Hz
Step;4000.000000;Hz
RBW;9000.000000;Hz
Meas Time;0.001000;s
Auto Ranging;OFF;
RF Att;10.000000;dB
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamp;0.000000;dB
Input;1;
Scan 2:
Start;30000000.000000;Hz
Stop;1000000000.000000;Hz
Step;40000.000000;Hz
RBW;120000.000000;Hz
Meas Time;0.000100;s
Auto Ranging;OFF;
RF Att;10.000000;dB
Auto Preamp;OFF;
Preamp;0.000000;dB
Input;1;
TRACE 1:
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;
x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBuV;
Values;31714;
150000.000000;11.459816;
154000.000000;13.225037;
158000.000000;12.387199;
162000.000000;13.124626;
166000.000000;13.615486;
.....
.....
999880000.000000;24.259178;
999920000.000000;25.103134;
999960000.000000;28.462601;
1000000000.000000;28.185074;
If all traces are to be stored in one file with the header information stored only once, the following
procedure is recommended:
[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]
[ASCII CONFIG] [NEW]
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER ON]
[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
Generate new file
with header
Store trace 1 with header
[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]
[ASCII CONFIG] [APPEND]
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER OFF]
[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
[TRACE 3] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
[TRACE 4] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
Append to end of file
without header
Write trace 2 to file
Write trace 3 to file
Write trace 4 to file
1088.7531.12
4.152
E-15
ESIB
Receiver - Scan Control
Scan Control – SWEEP Key Group
Using the SWEEP key group, the parameters are entered which determine the scan characteristics.
These are the scan range (SCAN key), the trigger used for starting the scan (TRIGGER key) and the
starting of the scan (RUN key).
Entry of Scan Data – SCAN Key
SWEEP SCAN menu:
SWEEP
TRIGGER
The SCAN key opens a submenu where existing scan tables can be edited or
new ones created. Tables with the current scan settings are displayed (see
section "Entry of Scan Data").
SWEEP/
SCAN
RBW
VBW
SWT
COUPLING/
RUN
Start of Frequency Sweep – RUN Key
SWEEP RUN menu
SWEEP
TRIGGER
The RUN key starts the frequency scan with the selected settings (see
section "Running a Scan").
SWEEP/
SCAN
RBW
VBW
SWT
COUPLING/
RUN
1088.7531.12
4.153
E-15
Receiver - Scan Control
ESIB
Triggering a Level Measurement – TRIGGER Key
SWEEP TRIGGER menu
SWEEP
TRIGGER
FREE RUN
TRIGGER
The FREE RUN and EXTERN softkeys are selection
switches. Only one key can be enabled at any one time
(illuminated).
SWEEP/
SCAN
RBW
The TRIGGER key opens a menu for selecting the various
trigger sources and the trigger polarity. The active trigger
mode is indicated by illumination of the corresponding
softkey.
EXTERN
VBW
If triggering has taken place, the trigger LED is turned on and
then turned off at the end of level measurement.
To indicate that the ESIB is set for triggering (= not free run),
the enhancement label TRG is displayed on the screen.
SWT
COUPLING/
RUN
SLOPE
POS
NEG
FREE RUN
The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-run level measurement (default
setting).
With free-run level measurement selected, the start of a scan is not explicitly
triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is started immediately.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
EXTERN
IMMediate
The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by an external
voltage
(-5V to +5V) at the input connector EXT TRIGGER/GATE on the rear panel.
The trigger threshold can be set in an entry window within this range.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel 2.5V
SLOPE
POS
NEG
The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey selects the trigger slope.
The measurement starts after a positive or negative trigger signal edge. The
selected setting is illuminated. The selection is valid for all trigger modes with
the exception of FREE RUN.
The default mode is SLOPE POS.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POS |NEG
1088.7531.12
4.154
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Frequency and Span
Analyzer Mode
The analyzer mode is activated in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu (see also Section ’Mode
Selection - MODE Key)
CONFIGURATION
MODE
ANALYZER
MODE
EMI
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
SETUP
.
.
.
The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode.
The functions provided are those of a conventional
spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency
spectrum over the selected frequency range with the
selected resolution and sweep time, or, for a fixed
frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] SANalyzer
Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group
The FREQUENCY key group is used to specify the frequency axis of the active measurement window.
The frequency axis can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and
span. For the case when two measurement windows (SPLIT-SCREEN) are displayed simultaneously,
data entered are always related to the window selected in the SYSTEM-DISPLAY menu.
When one of the keys CENTER, SPAN, START or STOP is pressed, its value can be specified in an
entry window. At the same time, a softkey menu appears, which allows selecting the optional
parameters.
Start Frequency – START Key
FREQUENCY – START menu:
FREQ UENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
ZOOM
FREQ
START FREQ
START
MANUAL
CENTER
FIXED
START
STOP
SPAN
FIXED
STOP
FIXED
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
1088.7531.12
The START key opens a menu which displays the various
options for setting the start frequency of the sweep.
The START MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
opens the entry window for manual input of the start
frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is
set to STOP FIXED
The STOP FIXED, SPAN FIXED and CENTER FIXED
softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one
of these switches may be active at any one time. The
frequency coupling selected by the softkeys defines which of
the dependent parameters stop frequency, center frequency
and span is to remain constant when a change in the start
frequency is made.
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear
and logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis.
4.155
E-15
Frequency and Span - Analyzer
START
M AN UAL
ESIB
The START MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the start frequency.
The allowed range of values for the start frequency is:
0 Hz <= fstart <= fmax - minspan/2
IEC/IEEE-bus command
STO P
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt 20 MHz
If the STOP FIXED key is active, the stop frequency remains constant when
the start frequency is changed. The center frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range. STOP FIXED coupling is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SPAN
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STARt:LINK STOP
If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
start frequency is changed. The stop frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CENTER
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STARt:LINK SPAN
If the CENTER FIXED softkey is active, the center frequency remains
constant when the start frequency is changed. The stop frequency is adjusted
to the new frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
fstart
start frequency
minspan smallest selectable span)
fmax
max. frequency
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STARt:LINK CENTer
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
scales on the frequency axis.
When the log scale is used, the following restrictions apply:
• For the start/stop frequency ratio the following holds:
Stopfrequency
≥ 14
.
Startfrequency
At ratios below 1.4, a linear frequency scale is automatically selected.
• Up to five decades can be set.
Stopfrequency
≤ 105
Startfrequency
When the start or stop frequency is changed, the stop or start frequency is
adapted to the settable range, as required.
• A frequency offset is not allowed.
• The CHANNEL POWER, C/N, C/N0, ADJACENT CHAN POWER and
OCCUPIED PWR BANDW measurements are disabled.
Note:
The function of a limit line is influenced by the FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG
setting at the time of the definition.
Limit lines are entered as tabulated values (level and frequency).
Most regulations and standards prescribe the linking of values by
straight lines both for the linear and logarithmic display. When the
limit line is defined with the desired frequency scale selected, this is
automatically taken into account (linear interpolation).
To be able to use the correct limit values among the tabulated
values after a scale switchover, the limit line is recalculated after the
switchover.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG
4.156
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Frequency and Span
Stop Frequency – STOP Key
FREQUENCY – STOP menu:
FR EQ U EN C Y
CENTER/
FREQ
SPAN/
ZOOM
STOP FREQ
STOP
MANUAL
START
FIXED
START
STOP
CENTER
FIXED
SPAN
FIXED
The STOP key opens a menu which displays the various
options for setting the stop frequency of the sweep.
The STOP MANUAL softkey is automatically active and opens
the entry window for manual input of the stop frequency. At the
same time, parameter coupling is set to START FIXED.
The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and SPAN FIXED
softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one
switch can be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to
select the frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines
which of the dependent parameters start frequency, center
frequency or span is to remain constant when the stop
frequency is changed.
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
STOP
MANUAL
The STOP MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry window for the stop
frequency.
The allowed range of values for the stop frequency is:
minspan ≤ fstop ≤ fmax
fstop
stop frequency
minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax
max. frequency
IEC/IEEE-bus command
START
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP 13 GHz
If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant
when the stop frequency is changed. The center frequency is adjusted to the
new frequency range. The START FIXED coupling is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CENTER
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STOP:LINK STARt
If the CENTER FIXED softkey is active, the center frequency remains
constant when the stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted
to the new frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SPAN
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STOP:LINK CENTer
If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
scales on the frequency axis (see START key).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:STOP:LINK SPAN
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG
4.157
E-15
Frequency and Span - Analyzer
ESIB
Center Frequency – CENTER Key
FREQUENCY – CENTER menu:
FREQUENCY
CENTER/
FREQ
START
SPAN/
ZOOM
STOP
CENTER
CENTER
MANUAL
START
FIXED
SPAN
FIXED
STOP
FIXED
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
The CENTER softkey opens a menu which displays the
various options for setting the center frequency of the sweep.
The CENTER MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
opens the entry window for manual input of the center
frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is
set to SPAN FIXED.
The START FIXED, STOP FIXED and SPAN FIXED softkeys
are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can
be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to select the
frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines which of
the dependent parameters start frequency, stop frequency or
span remains constant when the center frequency is changed.
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
CENTER
MANUAL
The CENTER MANUAL softkey opens the entry window for entering the
center frequency.
The entry range for the center frequency is:
for the frequency domain (span > 0):
0 Hz <= fcenter <= fmax – minspan/2
and for the time domain (span = 0)
0 Hz ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax
fcenter
center frequency
minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax
max. frequency
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer 1.3 GHz
1088.7531.12
4.158
E-15
ESIB
SPAN
FIXED
Analyzer - Frequency and Span
If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
center frequency is changed. The start and stop frequency are adjusted to
the new frequency range. SPAN FIXED coupling is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
START
FIXED
If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant
when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new
frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
STOP
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK SPAN
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK STARt
If the STOP FIXED softkey is active, the stop frequency remains constant
when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new
frequency range.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:CENTer:LINK STOP
The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a straight
frequency offset which is added to the frequency axis. The offset range is 100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
scales on the frequency axis (see START key).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:OFFSet 10 GHz
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG
4.159
E-15
Frequency and Span - Analyzer
ESIB
Center Frequency Step Size
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a menu for setting the step size of the center
frequency. The step size can be coupled to the span (frequency domain) or the resolution bandwidth
(time domain) or it can be manually set to a fixed value.
In order to change the step size, the entry window for the center frequency must already be active. After
pressing the STEP key, the CENTER STEP menu appears. The softkeys are presented according to the
selected domain (frequency or time).
Only one of the menu softkeys can be activated at any one time.
Control is returned to the FREQUENCY CENTER menu via the menu key
DATA VARIATION - STEP menu
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
AUTO
0.1 * SPAN
for span ≠ 0
.
for span = 0
CENTER
STEPSIZE
AUTO
0.1 * SPAN
CENTER
STEPSIZE
AUTO
0.1 * RBW
AUTO
0.5 * SPAN
AUTO
0.5 * RBW
AUTO
X * SPAN
AUTO
X * RBW
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
STEPSIZE
= CENTER
STEPSIZE
= CENTER
Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.1 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for center
frequency entry to 10% of the span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 10PCT
AUTO
0.1 * RBW
Time domain:
The AUTO 0.1 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the
center frequency entry to 10% of the resolution
bandwidth
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 10PCT
AUTO 0.1 * RBW is the default setting.
1088.7531.12
4.160
E-15
ESIB
AUTO
0.5 * SPAN
Analyzer - Frequency and Span
Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.5 * SPAN softkey sets the step size for
center frequency entry to 50% of the span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 50PCT
AUTO
0.5 * RBW
Time domain:
The AUTO 0.5 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the
center frequency entry to 50% of the resolution
bandwidth
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 50PCT
AUTO
X * SPAN
Frequency domain:The AUTO X * SPAN softkey activates the entry of the
factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of
span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
AUTO
X * RBW
Time domain:
see AUTO 0.5 * SPAN
The AUTO X * RBW softkey activates the entry of the
factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of
the resolution bandwidth.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
see AUTO 0.5 * RBW
Values between 1 and 100% in steps of 1% are acceptable. The default
setting is 10%.
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for the input of a
fixed step size.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 1.3 GHz
STEPSIZE
= CENTER
The STEPSIZE = CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL
and the step size to the center frequency. This function is especially useful
when measuring harmonics, because, when the center frequency is entered,
each STEP key stroke slects the center frequency of the next harmonic.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.161
--
E-15
Frequency and Span - Analyzer
ESIB
Frequency Span – SPAN Key
FREQUENCY – SPAN menu:
FREQ UENCY
CENTER/ SPAN/
FREQ
ZOOM
SPAN
SPAN
MANUAL
START
FIXED
START
STOP
CENTER
FIXED
STOP
FIXED
ZERO SPAN
FULL SPAN
The SPAN key opens a menu for setting the sweep span.
The SPAN MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
opens the entry window for manual input of the span. At
the same time, the parameter coupling is set to CENTER
FIXED.
The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and STOP FIXED
softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only
one switch can be active at any one time. The frequency
coupling is selected with these softkeys. The frequency
coupling defines which of the dependent parameters start
frequency, center frequency or stop frequency is to remain
constant when the span is changed
LAST SPAN
ZOOM
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
SPAN
MANUAL
The SPAN MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry of the span.
The span entry range is for:
time domain (span = 0):
0 Hz
frequency domain (span > 0):
minspan ≤ fspan ≤ fmax
fspan
frequency span
minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax
IEC/IEEE-bus command
ZERO SPAN
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 10MHZ
The ZERO SPAN softkey sets the span value to 0 Hz. The x axis becomes
the time axis. The axis labelling corresponds to the sweep time (on the left, 0
ms, on the right, the current sweep time (SWT)).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
max. frequency
4.162
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0HZ
E-15
ESIB
FULL SPAN
Analyzer - Frequency and Span
The FULL SPAN softkey sets the span value to the maximum span of the
ESIB.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
LAST SPAN
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
The LAST SPAN softkey restores the previous setting if the span has been
changed. This makes it possible to switch over between an overview
measurement (FULL SPAN) and a detailed measurement (manually set
center frequency and span).
The FULL SPAN softkey modifies the center frequency as well as the
selected span. The LAST SPAN softkey cancels this change.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
START
FIXED
--
If the START FIXED softkey is activated, the start frequency remains
constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are
adjusted to the new span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
CENTER
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK START
If the CENTER FIXED softkey is activated, the center frequency remains
constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are
adjusted to the new span. The CENTER FIXED coupling is the default
setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
STOP
FIXED
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK CENTer
If the STOP FIXED softkey is activated, the stop frequency remains constant
when the span is changed. The center and start frequency are adjusted to the
new span.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
FREQ AXIS
LIN
LOG
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
scales on the frequency axis (see START key).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQ:SPAN:LINK STOP
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG
4.163
E-15
Frequency and Span - Analyzer
ESIB
Display Zoom
FREQUENCY SPAN- ZOOM submenu:
ZOOM
ZOOM
MOVE ZOOM
WINDOW
MOVE ZOOM
START
MOVE ZOOM
STOP
ZOOM
OFF
.
.
.
MOVE ZOOM
WINDOW
The ZOOM softkey activates the zoom mode and opens a
sub-menu to define the zoom span.
Two frequency lines, which show and define the frequency
range to be zoomed, appear in the active measurement
window when the zoom mode is switched on. The default
setting is a zoom span of 10% to the left and 10% to the right
of the center frequency. The zoomed display is shown in the
second measurement window.
The settings for the second measurement window are taken
from the original window. The second measurement window
thus becomes the active measurement window and its
settings can now be changed.
If only one window is active when the zoom function is
selected, SPLIT SCREEN mode is automatically switched on.
The zoom span can be edited by using the softkeys of the
sub-menu to change the position of the frequency lines.
The softkey ZOOM OFF switches off the zoom.
The MOVE ZOOM WINDOW softkey shifts the whole zoom window. The
window can shifted until the upper frequency line reaches the stop frequency
or the lower frequency line reaches the start frequency of the original window.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X:ZOOM:CENTer 1GHz
MOVE ZOOM
START
The MOVE ZOOM START softkey shifts the lower frequency line. The start
frequency of the zoomed display can then be modified. The frequency line
can be shifted to the start frequency of the original window or to the upper
frequency line (= zero span).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X:ZOOM:STARt 100MHz
MOVE ZOOM
STOP
The MOVE ZOOM STOP softkey shifts the upper frequency line. Thus, the
stop frequency of the zoomed display can be modified. The frequency line
can be shifted to the stop frequency of the original window or to the lower
frequency line (= zero span).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X:ZOOM:STOP 200MHz
ZOOM
OFF
The ZOOM OFF softkey switches the zoom function off and then returns
control to the main menu.
The frequency lines indicating the zoom range are deleted, SPLIT SCREEN
mode remains active, the settings of both measurement windows are
retained and the coupling of the two measurement windows is cancelled.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM OFF
1088.7531.12
4.164
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input
Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group
The REF and RANGE keys are used to set the reference level (= maximum RF input level, = overload
limit), the maximum level (= upper grid level) , and the display range of the active window. The INPUT
key sets the characteristics of the RF input (input impedance, selection of input and input attenuation).
Reference Level – REF key
In addition to the reference level (maximum RF input level), the ESIB provides a function to define a
maximum level (uppermost grid line on the display):
For a spectrum analyzer, the upper boundary of the measurement diagram (maximum level) is also the
limit of its dynamic range (reference level). This means, that a signal which goes beyond the upper grid
line also overdrives the analyzer.
For compensation of frequency or antenna characteristics, transducer factors can be applied to increase
the signal level. In this case, the calculated values can be above the reference level without actually
being physically applied to the instrument. In order to display these signals on the grid, an upper grid
level which is different from the reference level of the analyzer can be entered.
LEVEL REF menu:
LEVEL
REF/
UNIT
RANGE
REF LEVEL
REF LEVEL
MAX LEVEL
AUTO
The REF key opens a menu to set the
reference level and the input attenuation
for the active measurement window .
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
MAX LEVEL
MANUAL
The REF LEVEL softkey is automatically
active with the menu called up and
opens the entry window for manual input
of the reference level.
REF LEVEL
GRID
ABS / REL
UNIT
At the same time various settings
concerning the level and the attenuation
display can be made.
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
The functions for setting the attenuation
are identical to those under the INPUT
key and are described in
Section
"Configuration of the RF Input - INPUT
Key".
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE
ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST
MIXER
LEVEL
1088.7531.12
4.165
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer
REF LEVEL
ESIB
The REF LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the reference level. The unit of
the entry will be the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV, etc.).
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey is active, a change of the reference level
causes an equal amount of change in maximum level Thus, the separation
between the overload limit of the analyzer to the upper grid edge remains the
same. Thus, with only one entry, it is possible to make a change to the
display and simultaneously to perform an adjustment to the amplifier.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:RLEVel -60DBM
REF LEVEL
OFFSET
The REF LEVEL OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a straight level offset
( ±200 dB in 0,1 dB steps). The offset is added to the measured level
irrespective of the selected unit. The scaling of the y axis is changed
accordingly. The input can be used to take into account an external
attenuation.
The setting range is ±200 dB in 0,1-dB steps.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:RLEVel:OFFSet -1dB
GRID
REL
ABS
The GRID ABS/REL softkey toggles between absolute and relative scaling of
the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting.
For absolute scaling the labeling of the level lines is referenced to the
absolute value of the reference level.
For relative scaling, the upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale
units are in dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set
units (dBm, dBµV,..).
The softkey is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %)
in the LEVEL-RANGE menu since the % unit itself implies a relative scale.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:MODE
ABS | REL
The MAX LEVEL MANUAL and MAX LEVEL AUTO softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
Only one switch can be active at one time. The softkeys are used to select whether reference level and
maximum level are identical or not:
MAX LEVEL
AUTO
When MAX LEVEL AUTO softkey is active, the reference level and maximum
level are identical.
In this case, the reference level is displayed above the upper left corner of the
grid in the corresponding function field.
MAX LEVEL AUTO is the default setting.
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey was active prior to pressing the MAX
LEVEL AUTO softkey, the upper boundary of the grid is set to the reference
level.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:RVALue:AUTO ON
MAX LEVEL
MANUAL
The MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the maximum level.
The range of input values is ± 200dBm with 0.1 dB resolution.
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey is activated, the maximum level is
displayed in addition to the reference level to the right above the grid.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:RVALue:AUTO OFF
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:RVALue -20DBM
1088.7531.12
4.166
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input
Display Units
Generally, a spectrum analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is
calibrated in terms of therms values of an unmodulated sine wave. In the initial state, the level is
displayed at a power of 1 milliwatt (= dBm). As the input impedance is known to be 50Ω or 75Ω,
conversion to other units is possible. The units dBm, dBµV, dBµA, dBpW, V, A and W are directly
convertible and can be selected in the REF UNIT menu.
Units dB../MHz have a special status. They are applicable for broadband pulse signals. The measured
pulse voltage or the pulse current is referred to 1 MHz bandwidth. This conversion is not useful for
narrowband or sinewave signals.
If the antenna coded connector on the front panel is used, the coded unit there determines the possible
display units. Connecting to the coded connector deactivates the settings of the UNIT menu.
By certain codings it is nevertheless possible to select a conversion of the unit in the menu. The
dependencies between the unit of the antenna coded connector or the unit of the transducer and the
unit which is to be selected for the display are given in the softkey description.
The default coding defined by the connector can be switched off using the PROBE CODE ON/OFF
softkey. In this case, the unit can be set with the corresponding unit softkeys (dBm, dBµV, ... ) even if a
coded connector is plugged in. The coded entries in the connector are then ignored.
Note:
The units dBµV/m and dBµA/m can only be set via the unit of a transducer or via the unit of the
coded connector.
LEVEL REF UNIT submenu:
UNIT
UNIT
dBm
The UNIT softkey opens a sub-menu in which the desired
units for the level axis can be selected and the coding of the
antenna coded connector can be switched on and off.
dBmV
The selected units are valid for both displays when two
measurement windows are displayed.
dBµV
The unit softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
Only one of these switches may be active at any one time.
dBµA
dBpW
dB* / MHz
VOLT
AMPERE
WATT
PROBE CODE
ON / OFF
1088.7531.12
4.167
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer
dBm
dBmV
ESIB
The dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA, dBpW softkeys set the display units to the
corresponding logarithmic units. The dBm unit is the default unit in analyzer
mode.
The units dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA cannot be selected when the coded
antenna connector or the used transducer defines a unit.
Only for coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted.
dB µV
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBM |DBMV |DBUV |DBUA |DBPW
dBµA
dBpW
dB* / MHz
The dB*/MHz softkey activates/disactivates the display of results in units
relative to the bandwidth. Those units can be derived from the logarithmic
units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA and dBµA/m.
This leads to the following relative units:
⇒ dBmV/MHz
dBmV
dBµV
⇒ dBµV/MHz
dBµV/m ⇒ dBµV/mMHz
dBµA
⇒ dBµA/MHz
dBµA/m ⇒ dBµA/mMHz
Switching over is possible also if a coded antenna connector or a transducer
fixes the unit to be used.
Conversion to 1 MHz is via the pulse bandwidth of the selected resolution
bandwidth Bimp according to the following equation (example for dBµV) :
P / ( dBµV / MHz ) = 20 ⋅ log
Bimp / MHz
1MHz
+ P / ( dBµV ) ,
where P = display level
The dBµV/MHz unit can be combined with the following coded connector or
transducer units
dB
(the unit dBµV/MHz remains )
µV/m (yields the display unit dBµV/mMHz)
analogous for dBµA/MHz:
dB and µA
(the unit dBµA/MHz remains)
Other combinations are not allowed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUV_MHZ|DBUA_MHZ|DBMV_MHZ
1088.7531.12
4.168
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input
VOLT
AMPERE
The VOLT, AMPERE, WATT softkeys set the display units to the
corresponding linear units.
The units VOLT, AMPERE, WATT cannot be selected when the coded
antenna connector or the transducer table defines one of the following as
units:
µV/m
µA
For coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted.
WATT
PROBE CODE
ON
OFF
The PROBE CODE ON/OFF softkey enables or disables the units defined by
the coded connector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:UNIT<1|2>:PROBe
ON | OFF
Level Range – RANGE Key
LEVEL RANGE menu:
LEVEL
LEVEL RANGE
REF/
UNIT
LOG 120 dB
LOG 100 dB
RANGE
LOG 50 dB
LOG 20 dB
LOG 10 dB
LOG
MANUAL
The RANGE key calls a menu in which the range, linear or
logarithmic the display scale, absolute or relative and the
level units for the active window can be selected.
The display range of the analyzer can be set in 10 dB
steps from 10 to 200 dB.
The default setting is 100 dB.
The most often used settings (120 dB, 100 dB, 50 dB,
20 dB and 10 dB) are each directly selectable by a
softkey.
All other ranges are chosen with the LOG MANUAL
softkey.
After pressing the RANGE key, the LOG MANUAL entry
window is enabled if the display range is not set to LIN.
LINEAR/dB
LINEAR/ %
GRID
ABS REL
1088.7531.12
4.169
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer
LOG
MANUAL
ESIB
The LOG MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the level display range.
Display ranges from 10 to 200 dB are allowed in 10-dB steps. Values which
are not permissible are rounded to the next valid number.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing LOG
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y 110DB
LINEAR/dB
The LINEAR/dB softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to linear
scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled according to the selection GRID
ABS/REL in dB* or *.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing LINear
LINEAR/ %
The LINEAR/% softkey switches the display range of the analyzer to linear
scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled in %. The grid is divided into
decades.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:SPACing PERCent
GRID
REL
ABS
The GRID ABS/REL softkey switches between absolute and relative scaling
of the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting.
ABS The labelling of the level lines is referenced to the absolute value of the
reference level.
REL The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale units are in
dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set units
(dBm, dBµV,..).
The softkey is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %)
since the % unit itself implies a relative scale.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y:MODE
1088.7531.12
4.170
ABS | REL
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input
RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key
In addition to manual entry of the input attenuation, the ESIB provides an option which allows the RF
attenuation, dependent on the selected reference level, to be automatically set. Thus, it is guaranteed
that an optimum combination of RF attenuation and IF amplification is always used. For the automatic
selection process, three modes are provided. The AUTO LOW NOISE mode selects the
amplification/attenuation combination so that the display of noise on the ESIB is at a minimum. The
signal/noise ratio is maximised. The AUTO LOW DISTORTION mode is tuned for minimisation of the
internally generated interference products. This causes, however, a lower signal/noise ratio. The ATTEN
AUTO NORMAL mode is a compromise between low noise and low distortion.
When the instruemnt is equipped with option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output, the ESIB26 and ESIB40
can be operated with external mixer.
INPUT menu:
INPUT
INPUT
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
The INPUT key opens the menu for configuring the RF
input. It contains the input attenuator and mixer level for
matching the RF input to the input signal.
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL
The RF ATTEN MANUAL, ATTEN AUTO NORMAL,
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW
softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. only
one can be active at any one time.
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE
ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST
MIXER
LEVEL
Softkeys INTERNAL MIXER and EXTERNAL MIXER are
only available when the ESIB is equiped with option FSEB21, External Mixer Input (see manual of option).
The INPUT SELECT softkey calls a submenu for
configuration of the RF input
INPUT
SELECT
INTERNAL
MIXER
EXTERNAL
MIXER
RF ATTEN
MANUAL
The RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey activates the entry of an attenuation factor
independent of the reference level.
The following attenuation settings are available, irrespective of which input is
active:
• INPUT 1:
• INPUT 2:
0 to 70 dB
0 to 70 dB
in 10 dB steps
in 5 dB steps
Other inputs will be rounded to the next higher integer value.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the
reference level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached"
will be output.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.171
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation 40DB
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL
ESIB
The ATTEN AUTO NORMAL softkey sets the RF attenuation automatically as
a function of the selected reference level.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE
The ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE softkey sets the RF attenuation always 10dB
lower than in the RF ATTEN AUTO mode. Therefore, for 10 dB RF
attenuation, the maximum reference level is -10 dBm. For reference levels
which are lower, at least 10 dB is always set (see above).
Setting Low Noise means that the indicated inherent noise level is low. This
setting is recommended if signals with a low level have to be measured as
the highest S/N ratio is then obtained.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON
ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST
The ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST softkey sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher
than in RF ATT AUTO mode. This means that for 10 dB RF attenuation, the
maximum reference level is -30 dBm (-40 dBm at the mixer).
This setting is recommended whenever a small signal is to be measured in
the presence of larger signals. Here, the intermodulation-free range of the
ESIB is large and the internal distortion products are minimised.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON
MIXER
LEVEL
The MIXER LEVEL softkey activates the entry of the maximum mixer level
attainable for a given reference level. At the same time it enables softkeys
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST .
Range of input values is -10 to -100 dBm
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.172
:INPut<1|2>:MIXer -30DBM
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input
INPUT INPUT SELECT submenu:
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
RF INPUT
50 OHM
RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAM
RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAZ
The INPUT SELECT softkey calls a submenu for selection an
configuration of the RF input. Default setting is 50 Ohm and
INPUT 1.
By connecting an impedance converter RAM or RAZ ahead, the
50-Ohm input can be transformed to 75 Ohm. ESIB
automatically takes the corresponding correction values for the
level display into account.
Alternatively, the pulse-resistant INPUT 2 may be used in the
frequency range up to 1 GHz. If INPUT 2 is switched on, the user
can choose between AC and DC coupling.
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
RF INPUT
50 OHM
The RF INPUT 50 OHM softkey sets the input impedance to 50
Ohm (= default setting). All level indications are referenced to 50
Ohm.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAM
:INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50
The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAM softkey sets the input impedance
of the ESIB to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAM. All
level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORR RAM
RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAZ
The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAZ softkey sets the input impedance
of the ESIB to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAZ. All
level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORR RAZ
1088.7531.12
4.173
E-15
Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
ESIB
The INPUT 1 softkey activates input 1 (default setting).
The INPUT 2 softkey activates pulse-resistant input 2. If input 2
is used, the frequency range is restricted to 1 GHz. Higher
frequencies cannot be set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:INPut<1|2>:TYPE
INPUT 2
AC COUPLED
INPUT 2
DC COUPLED
INPUT1|INPUT2
The INPUT 2 AC COUPLED and INPUT 2 DC COUPLED
softkeys select AC or DC coupling for RF input 2. The default
setting is AC coupling. The lower frequency limit is 1 kHz.
To indicate that input 2 with AC or DC coupling is activated, the
enhancement label I2A or I2D is shown on the display.
If the ESIB is operated with RF input 1, the softkeys are not
available (enhancement label IN1).
IEC/IEEE-bus command :INPut<1|2>:COUPling AC | DC
1088.7531.12
4.174
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group
The markers are used for marking points on measurement curves (traces), reading out measurement
values and for quickly selecting a screen mode. Preselected measurement routines can be called by
pressing a key in the marker menu. The ESIB has four markers and four delta markers per
measurement window. The currently activated marker can be shifted with the cursor keys, the roll-key or
the softkeys. The softkeys are defined according to the type of display representation selected
(frequency or time domain).
The marker which can be moved by the user is defined as the active marker.
Examples of marker displays:
marker
1
active marker
3
temporary marker
T1
2
delta marker
Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to evaluate the measurement
results. They disappear when the associated function is deactivated.
The measurement values of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker
field. In the marker info list, the measurement values from all enabled markers are sorted in ascending
order. The marker info list can be switched off with the MARKER INFO softkey so that only the values
for the active marker are shown.
The summary markers have a special function. They read out the rms or average value of the current
trace or the trace averaged over several sweeps in the marker info list. These markers are not
displayed.
Main Markers– NORMAL Key
The NORMAL key calls a menu which contains all the standard marker functions. The current state of
the markers is indicated by a colored illumination of the softkeys. If no marker is enabled prior to
pressing the NORMAL key, MARKER 1 will be enabled as the reference marker and a peak search on
the trace is carried out (assumption: at least one trace is active). Otherwise, the peak search is omitted
and the entry window for the reference marker is activated.
The marker field in the upper right corner of the display screen shows the marker values, in this case,
the frequency, the level and the currently selected trace.
MARKER 1 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
123.4567 MHz
1088.7531.12
4.175
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
MARKER NORMAL menu:
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
DE
A
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER
NORMAL
POWER MEAS
SETTING
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MKR
MARKER 2
CHANNEL
POWER
MARKER 3
CP / ACP
ABS
REL
MARKER 4
SET CP
REFERENCE
SIGNAL
COUNT
COUNTER
RESOL
C / N
MARKER
DEMOD
SIGNAL
TRACK
C / No
MARKER
ZOOM
NOISE
ADJACENT
CHAN POWER
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
ON
MARKER 3
ADJUST CP
SETTINGS
MARKER
INFO
OCCUPIED
PWR BANDW
ALL MARKER
OFF
The MARKER 1 to MARKER 4 softkeys switch the corresponding marker
on/off or activate it as the reference marker. If the marker is activated as a
reference marker, an entry field for manually setting the position of the
reference marker is opened simultaneously. If the marker is disabled, the
softkey is not illuminated. Enabled markers and the reference marker are
indicated by illuminating the corresponding softkeys in different colors.(In
the instrument default state, the active reference marker is displayed in red
and enabled markers are displayed in green.)
Operating example:
MARKER 4
MARKER 1 is shown as the reference marker by the colored background
illumination. MARKER 2 through MARKER 4 are turned off.
MARKER
NORMAL
1088.7531.12
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
ON
MARKER 2
MARKER 3
MARKER 3
4.176
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Pressing the MARKER 3 softkey switches MARKER 3 on and it becomes
the reference maker. The previous reference marker remains enabled and
the softkey remains illuminated. However, the entry mode for this marker is
not now active. Instead, the entry window for MARKER 3 is opened and the
position of MARKER 3 can be shifted.
MARKER 3
123.4567 MHz
The information in the marker field also changes to describe the new
reference marker.
MARKER 3 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
23.4567891 MHz
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER
NORMAL
MARKER 1
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
MARKER 2
MARKER 3
MARKER 3
Pressing the current reference marker (MARKER 3) softkey again switches
MARKER 3 off. If at least one marker is enabled, the marker with the
smallest number will be selected as the new reference marker (in the
example, MARKER 1). Switching off the last active marker also deletes are
delta markers.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>[:STATe] ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:X 10.7MHz;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:Y?
When several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum value (peak) of the active trace
with the lowest number (1 to 4). if a marker is already positioned there, it will be set to the frequency of
the next highest level (next peak).
When the split screen mode is active, the marker will be placed in the active window (for SCREEN A:
trace 1 or 3, for SCREEN B: trace 2 or 4). Since markers are attached to a trace, the marker can only be
enabled when at least one trace is displayed in the corresponding window.
If a trace is turned off, the markers and marker functions attached to the trace are also switched off. If
the trace is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..), these markers, along with any coupled functions
will be restored to their original positions. A prerequisite for the restoration of the marker positions is that
individual markers have not been used on another trace or that the sweep data (start/stop frequency for
span > 0 or sweep time for span = 0) have not been changed.
1088.7531.12
4.177
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
If a marker (or, delta marker) necessary for a marker function is not available, it will be automatically
checked whether or not the enabling of the corresponding marker is possible (see above). If this is not
the case, a warning is issued.
WARNING:
No trace active
The activation of the desired marker function is then not possible.
On the other hand, if the marker can be enabled, a peak search is automatically performed. Thereafter,
the desired marker function can be executed.
MARKER NORMAL menu:
ALL MARKER
OFF
The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta
markers). Similarly, it switches off all functions and displays correlated with
the markers/delta markers (signal count, signal track, marker zoom, N dB
down, shape factor, marker list and marker info).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SIGNAL
TRACK
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:AOFF
After each sweep, the SIGNAL TRACK softkey starts a search for the
maximum signal level on the screen (PEAK SEARCH) and then sets the
center frequency to the frequency of this signal (MARKER ->CENTER).
If a threshold line is enabled, only signals above the threshold level are
considered. If no signal is over the threshold, the center frequency remains
constant until a signal is available which is over the threshold.
If no marker is switched to the active trace, the next unused marker is
automatically activated and positioned by the peak search routine.
In order to reduce the search range, it is possible to apply the SEARCH LIMIT
ON/OFF function (see section: "Search Functions"). If the center frequency is
changed, the position of the frequency line relative to the center frequency
remains the same, ie its absolute position is correspondingly changed.
The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (spectrum) display
mode (span > 0.)
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUNt ON |OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUNt:FREQuency?
1088.7531.12
4.178
E-15
ESIB
MARKER
ZOOM
Analyzer - Main Markers
The MARKER ZOOM softkey expands the area around the active marker.
With the zoom function, more details of the spectrum can be seen. The
desired display range can be defined in an entry window.
The sweep is stopped at the reference marker. The frequency of the signal is
counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center frequency.
The zoomed display is set and the new settings are used by the ESIB for
further measurements.
As long as the switchover to the new frequency display range has not yet
taken place, pressing the softkey will abort the procedure.
If no marker is activated when the softkey is pressed, then MARKER 1 is
automatically activated and set to the highest peak in the measurement
window.
If an instrument setting is changed after selection of MARKER ZOOM, the
function is aborted.
The MARKER ZOOM softkey is only available for frequency domain
measurements (span > 0).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM
MARKER
INFO
1KHZ
The MARKER INFO softkey opens the display of several markers within the
grid. In the upper right corner of the grid, a maximum of 4 markers/delta
markers with the marker symbols ∆/∇, marker number (1 to 4), position and
measurement value are listed. For the output of the marker position, the
number or displayed characters will be limited as required.
If the number of lines available is not enough for all the enabled markers and
delta markers, first the markers and then the delta markers are entered into
the info list
In the SPLIT SCREEN display, the info list is partitioned into 2 partial lists and
assigned to the corresponding measurement window (SCREEN A and
SCREEN B). The info list for SCREEN A contains the markers which are
assigned to trace 1 or trace 3. The info list for SCREEN B contains the
markers which are assigned to trace 2 and trace 4.
For the two measurement windows, it is not possible to turn the MARKER
INFO function selectively on/off .
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay:WINDow<1|2>:MINFo ON | OFF
LF Demodulation
The ESIB provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators, a displayed signal
can be identified acoustically with of the internal loudspeaker or with external headphones. The
frequency at which demodulation is activated is coupled to the markers. The sweep stops at the
frequency determined by the set marker for the selected time and the RF signal is demodulated.
During time domain measurements (span = 0) the demodulation is switched on continuously.
1088.7531.12
4.179
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
MARKER NORMAL-MARKER DEMOD submenu:
MARKER
DEMOD
MARKER
DEMOD
MKR DEMOD
ON
OFF
The MARKER DEMOD softkey calls a sub-menu in which the
type of demodulation desired, the duration of the
demodulation may be selected
AM
FM
MKR
STOP TIME
.
.
.
MKR DEMOD
ON
OFF
The MKR DEMOD ON/OFF softkey switches the demodulation on/off. When
the demodulation is on, the sweep is stopped at all marker frequencies,
assuming the signal is over the threshold, and the signal is demodulated until
the entered sweep stop time elapses. A total of four stopping points (four
markers) can be programmed.
If no marker is set when the demodulation is switched on, the ESIB switches the
first marker on (MARKER 1) and positions it on the trace peak.
IEC-Bus-Befehl
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:DEM ON|OFF
MKR
STOP TIME
The MKR STOP TIME softkey activates the entry window for setting the stop
time.
The ESIB stops the sweep at the marker or the marker for the duration of the
defined stop time and then switches the demodulation on (see also MKR
DEMOD ON/OFF).
IEC-Bus-Befehl
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:DEM:HOLDoff 3s
AM
FM
The AM and FM are selection switches of which only one can be activated at
any one time. They are used to set the desired demodulation type, FM or AM.
The default setting is AM.
IEC-Bus-Befehl
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:DEM:SELect
1088.7531.12
4.180
AM|FM
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Frequency Measurement
To accurately determine the frequency of a signal, the ESIB is equipped with an internal frequency
counter. The frequency counter measures the frequency of the RF signal at the intermediate frequency.
Using the value found at the intermediate frequency, the ESIB calculates the frequency of the RF signal
by applying the known frequency conversion relationships.
The frequency measurement error depends only upon the accuracy of the frequency standard used
(external or internal reference). Although the ESIB always performs the frequency sweep in sync - no
matter what frequency range is set - the frequency counter gives a more exact frequency measurement
than a measurement performed with a marker. This is explained by the following:
•
The marker only gives the position of a pixel on the trace and the frequency of the signal is deduced
from this. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of pixels, so each pixel may represent
a number of measurement values that depends on the selected span. This reduces the frequency
resolution.
•
The resolution with which the frequency can be measured is proportional to the measurement time.
For measurement time reasons, the bandwidth is normally held as wide as possible and the sweep
time is set a short as possible. This results in a loss of frequency resolution.
For the measurement with the frequency counter, the sweep is stopped at the reference marker, the
frequency is measured to the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to continue (see also
Chapter 2, "Measurement Examples").
MARKER NORMAL menu:
SIGNAL
COUNT
The SIGNAL COUNT softkey switches the frequency counter on/off.
The frequency is counted at the position of the reference marker. The sweep
stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter outputs a result.
The time required for a frequency measurement depends on the selected
frequency resolution. The resolution is set in the COUNTER RESOL submenu.
If no marker is enabled when the SIGNAL COUNT softkey is pressed,
MARKER 1 is switched on and set to the trace peak.
The SIGNAL COUNT function is also indicated by [T x CNT] in the marker
field on the display screen.
MARKER 2 [T1 CNT]
-27.5 dBm
23.4567891 MHz
Switching the SIGNAL COUNT function off is accomplished by pressing the
softkey once again.
Note: For digital resolution filters (RBW < 1kHz or softkey RBW 1kHz set to
DIG), a analog prefilter of 2 kHz is active.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUNt ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUNt:FREQuency?
1088.7531.12
4.181
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
COUNTER
RESOLUTION
COUNTER
RESOL
10 kHz
ESIB
The COUNTER RESOL softkey in the right side menu opens
a sub-menu in which the resolution of the frequency counter
can be defined.
The value can be selected between 0.1 Hz and 10 kHz.
1 kHz
100 Hz
10 Hz
1 Hz
The time which the frequency counter requires for a
measurement is proportional to the selected resolution. For
example, a 1 Hz resolution will require approximately one
second measurement time. In order to prevent slowing the
sweep time unnecessarily, it is recommended that the
frequency resolution be set as low as possible.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:COUNt:RES 1KHZ
0.1 Hz
Noise Power Density Measurement
MARKER NORMAL menu (right side menu):
NOISE
The NOISE softkey switches noise measurement on/off.
During a noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the
position of the reference marker. The noise power density is displayed in
the marker field dependent upon the vertical units in dBx/Hz (for logarithmic
scale) or in V/Hz, A/Hz or W/Hz for linear scales. The correction factors for
the selected bandwidth and the conversion of the IF logarithmic converter
are automatically taken into consideration.
For trace setting AUTO SELECT, the sample detector is automatically
switched on and off with the noise marker to provide for displayof the rms
value of the noise power. For single sweep, a new sweep has to be started
after the marker has been switched on in order to ensure that the trace is
recorded with the correct detector.
For all other detector settings, the user is prompted to select the sample
detector for optimum results as soon as the noise marker is switched on. In
this case the sample detector has to be switched on manually.
In order to produce a smoother noise display, neighboring points
(symmetrical to measurement frequency) on the trace are averaged.
In the time domain display, an average of the measurement values takes
place in time (after each sweep).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NOISe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
1088.7531.12
4.182
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Channel Power Measurements
A modulated carrier is almost always used (exception e.g.,.: SSB-AM) for high-frequency transmission
of information. Due to the information modulated onto the carrier, the latter covers a spectrum which is
defined by the modulation, the data transmission rate and the signal filtering. Within a transmission
band, each carrier is assigned a channel taking into account these parameters. In order to ensure errorfree transmission, each transmitter must keep within its specified parameters. These include among
others:
•
the output power,
•
the occupied bandwidth, i.e., the bandwidth within which a defined percentage of the power must be
contained and
•
the power received by adjacent channels.
Using the power measurement function, the ESIB is capable of measuring all the specified parameters
with high precision and at high speed.
The power measurements settings are performed in the left-hand side-menu MARKER NORMAL.
MARKER NORMAL menu:
MARKER
NORMAL
POWER MEAS
SETTINGS
CHANNEL
POWER
CP / ACP
ABS
REL
SET CP
REFERENCE
C / N
The following measurements can be made:
•
channel power (CHANNEL POWER)
•
signal / noise power (C/N)
•
signal / noise power density (C/No)
•
adjacent channel power (ADJACENT CHAN POWER)
•
occupied bandwidth (OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH)
The channel power and the adjacent channel power can be measured either
relative (CP/ACP REL) to the power in the utilised channel or in absolute terms
(CP/ACP ABS).
Channel configuration is via sub menu POWER MEAS SETTINGS.
The above mentioned power measurements can be performed alternately.
C / No
ADJACENT
CHAN POWER
ADJUST CP
SETTINGS
OCCUPIED
PWR BANDW
1088.7531.12
4.183
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Channel Configuration
For all power measurements, a specified channel configuration is assumed which is, e.g. oriented on a
specific radio communications system.
The channel configuration is defined by the nominal channel frequency ( = center frequency of the
ESIB), the channel bandwidth (CHANNEL BANDWIDTH) and the channel spacing (CHANNEL
SPACING).
The channel is indicated on the display screen by vertical lines located at a half-channel bandwidth to
the left and to the right of the channel frequency. For the adjacent channel power measurement, the
adjacent channels are also indicated by vertical lines. The lines of the utilised channel are labelled with
CO for easier recognition.
st
nd
Depending on the radio communication service, the power of the 1 alternate channel and/or 2
alternate channel can be measured in addition (softkey SET NO.OF ADJ CHAN’S).
With the ACP STANDARD softkey, the channel configuration can be set automatically according to the
regulations of different digital mobile-radio standards. For some standards, the channel power has to be
evaluated by means of a root-cosine filter corresponding to the transmit filter. This filter is switched on
automatically if the corresponding standards are selected but can be switched off manually (softkey CH
FILTER ON/OFF).
MARKER NORMAL - POWER MEAS SETTINGS submenu:
POWER MEAS
SETTING
POWER MEAS
SETTINGS
SET NO. OF
ADJ CHAN’S
The POWER MEAS SETTINGS softkey calls the sub-menu
for the definition of the channel configuration.
ACP
STANDARD
CH FILTER
ON
OFF
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
CHANNEL
SPACING
EDIT
ACP LIMITS
LIMIT
CHECK
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
SET NO. OF
ADJ CHAN’S
The SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S softkey activates the input of number ±n
adjacent channels to be considered for adjacent channel power measurement
The individual powers are indicated separately. Example n=3:
CH0 Pwr
ACP UP
ACP LOW
ALT1 UP
ALT1 LOW
ALT2 UP
ALT2 LOW
-20.00
-45.23
-52.11
-60.04
-61.00
-63.34
-64.00
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
1, 2 or 3 adjacent channels are possible. ALT1 and
ALT2 (Alternate Channel Power) indicate the channel
power at ± 2 × channel spacing and ± 3 × channel
spacing from the center of the channel.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 2
1088.7531.12
4.184
E-15
ESIB
ACP
STANDARD
Analyzer - Main Markers
The ACP STANDARD softkey activates the selection of a digital mobile-radio
standard. The parameters for the adjacent channel power measurement are
set according to the regulations of the selected standard.
The following standards can be selected:
ACP STANDARD
NONE
NADC
TETRA
PDC
PHS
CDPD
CDMA800 FWD
CDMA800 REV
CDMA1900 FWD
CDMA1900 REV
W-CDMA FWD
W-CDMA REV
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
W-CDMA 3GPP REV
CDMA2000 MC
CDMA2000 DS
CDMA ONE 800 FWD
CDMA ONE 800 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 FWD
CDMA ONE 1900 REV
NADC (IS-54 B)
TETRA
PDC (RCR STD-27)
PHS (RCR STD-28)
CDPD
CDMA800FWD
CDMA800REV
CDMA1900REV
CDMA1900FWD
W-CDMA FWD
W-CDMA REV
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
W-CDMA 3GPP REV
CDMA2000 Multi Carrier
CDMA2000 Direct Sequence
CDMA ONE 800 FWD
CDMA ONE 800 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 REV
CDMA ONE 1900 FWD
If the full dynamic range of the analyzer is to be utilized for the W-CDMA
measurement (for a power measurement in this standard), the RF attenuation
has to be set to 0 dB.
However this is not done automatically to avoid damaging the analyzer input.
Instead, a window displaying the following note is shown if one of the WCDMA standards is selected: ’Attention: For higher dynamic range use RF
ATTEN MANUAL=0dB.
The following parameters change according to the standard selected:
•
•
•
•
•
•
channel spacing
channel bandwidth
modulation filter
resolution bandwidth
video bandwidth
detector
Trace Maths and Trace Averaging are switched off.
The reference level is not changed when a standard is selected. It has to be
set for an optimum dynamic range so that the signal maximum is in the
vicinity of the reference level.
The basic setting ACP STANDARD NONE.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet
NONE |NADC |TETRA |PDC |PHS |CDPD |F8CDma |R8CDma
|F19Cdma |R19Cdma |FWCDma | RWCDma |FW3Gppcdma
|RW3Gppcdma |M2CDma |D2CDma |FO8Cdma |RO8Cdma |FO19cdma
|RO19cdma
1088.7531.12
4.185
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
CH FILTER
ON
OFF
ESIB
The CH FILTER ON/OFF softkey switches a modulation filter for the channel
power and adjacent channel power measurement on or off.
When selecting the digital mobile-radio standards NADC, TETRA and WCDMA 3 GPP (FWD and REV) using the ACP STANDARD softkey, the
softkey is automatically set to ON. When the other standards are selected,
weighting is not selectable and the softkey is not available.
CH FILTER ON
The channel bandwidth is defined by the filter weighting
alone. Therefore, the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey
cannot be operated.
The activated modulation filter influences the channel
and adjacent channel power measurement.
Within the definition range of the filter, the individual
pixels are weighted with the calculated filter attenuation
as a function of the spacing to the channel center. The
weighted display points are then added to the total
channel power.
CH FILTER OFF
No modulation filter is switched on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:POWer:CFIL ON|OFF
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for setting the
channel bandwidth for the transmission channel and the corresponding
adjacent channels.
For all channels, the default setting is 14 kHz.
ACP CHANNEL BW
CHAN BANDWIDTH
CH
14 kHz
ADJ
14 kHz
ALT1 14 kHz
ALT2 14 kHz
Note:
If the bandwidth of one channel is changed, the new value is also
assigned to all subsequent channels in the table. The bandwidths
for the individual channels can be set independently, however, by
overwriting the table from the top to the bottom.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel] 24KHZ
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel 24KHZ
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<1|2> 24KHZ
1088.7531.12
4.186
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
CHANNEL
SPACING
The CHANNEL SPACING softkey opens an table for defining the channel
spacing. The channel spacing is the spacing of the center frequency of a
given channel relative to the center of the transmission channel.
The default setting for channel spacing is 20 kHz.
CHANNEL SPACING
CHAN SPACING
ADJ
20 kHz
ALT1 40 kHz
ALT2 60 kHz
Note:
Channel spacings can be selected separately for each channel. If a
spacing value is changed in the table, the following values are
changed automatically.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 24KHZ
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 24KHZ
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALT<1|2> 24KHZ
EDIT
ACP LIMITS
The EDIT ACP LIMITS opens a table for defining the limits for ACPmeasurement.
ACP LIMITS
CHAN
ADJ
ALT1
ALT2
CHECK
LOWER CHANNEL LIMIT UPPER CHANNEL LIMIT
-50 dB
-50 dB
-60 dB
-60 dB
The limit values are defined either in units of dB (forCP/ACP REL) or in dBm
(for CP/ACP ABS).
Note:
Measured values that exceed one of the limits are marked with an
preceding asterisk.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ACHannel 30DB,
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ACHannel:STATe
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ALT<1|2> 30DB,
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ALT<1|2>:STATe
LIMIT
CHECK
30DB
ON|OFF
30DB
ON|OFF
The LIMIT CHECK softkey switches on or off the limit check of the ACp
measurement.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ACHannel:RESult?
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:ACP:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?
% POWER
BANDWIDTH
The % POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for defining the
percentage of the power with respect to the total power in the displayed
frequency range. This defines the occupied bandwidth (percent of the total
power).
The permitted range is 10 % - 99,9 %
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.187
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:BANDwidth 99PCT
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Channel Power Measurement
The CHANNEL POWER measurement is performed by an integration of the measurement points within
the channel bandwidth. The channel is marked by two vertical lines to the left and to the right of the
center frequency as defined by the channel bandwidth (see Fig. 4-9).
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
Marker [T1]
200.0100 MHz
-22.4 dBm
RBW 300 Hz
VBW 300 Hz
SWT 100 ms
RF ATT 10 dB
Mixer -30 dBm
Unit
dBm
0
1
-24.5 dBm
200.000590 MHz
CH PWR
-18.0 dBm
CH BW
30.0 kHz
1
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
Center
Span 100 kHz
10 kHz/
200 MHz
channel width
Fig. 4-9
Determination of the channel width
MARKER NORMAL menu:
CHANNEL
POWER
The CHANNEL POWER softkey initiates the calculation of the power in the
measurement channel. The display takes place in the units of the y axis, e.g.,
in dBm, dBµV.
The calculation is performed by summing the power at the pixels within the
specified channel.
The measurement is either absolute or relative to a reference power (see the
CP/ACP ABS/ REL softkey).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNC:POW:SELect CPOWer;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNC:POW:RESult? CPOWer;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNC:POW[:STATe] OFF
1088.7531.12
4.188
E-15
ESIB
CP/ACP
ABS
REL
Analyzer - Main Markers
The CP/ACP ABS/REL softkey (Channel Power/Adjacent Channel Power
Absolute /Relative) switches between an absolute and relative display of the
power measured in the channel or adjacent channel.
Channel power measurement
CP ABS
The absolute value of the power is displayed in the unit of the
Y axis, eg in dBm, dBV.
CP REL
The power of a freely selected channel is measured. This
power is set in relation to the power of a reference channel.
The reference channel power is selected beforehand using
the SET CP REFERENCE softkey, ie:
1. Declare the power in the currently measured channel as
the reference value using the SET CP REFERENCE
softkey.
2. Set the channel of interest by changing the channel
frequency (ESIB center frequency).
In case of linear scale of the Y axis the relative power
(CP/CPref) of the new channel is displayed in addition to the
reference channel. In case of dB scale, the logarithmic ratio
20×log (CP/CPref) is displayed.
Therefore, the relative channel power measurement can also
be used for universal adjacent channel power measurements.
Example:
Measurement of the 1597-QCDMA adjacent channel power.
The useful channel and the adjacent channels have different
bandwidths (1.23 MHz or 30 kHz).
Adjacent channel power measurement
The power of the adjacent channels is measured. The
reference value is the power of the useful channels (see
measurement of the adjacent channel power). The useful
channel is marked by two vertical lines that are labelled with
C0.
ACP ABS
The powers of the useful channel and of the adjacent
channels are displayed as absolute values in the unit of the Y
axis.
ACP REL
The logarithmic ratio 20×log (CP/CP0) of the powers of the
adjacent channels to the useful channel is displayed
The softkey is not available for OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH, C/N and
C/N0
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABS|REL
SET CP
REFERENCE
The SET CP REFERENCE softkey sets the reference value to the currently
measured channel power for an activated CHANNEL POWER power
measurement,.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REF:AUTO ONCE
1088.7531.12
4.189
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Signal / Noise Power Measurement
MARKER NORMAL menu:
C / N
The C/N (Carrier to Noise) softkey calculates the ratio of carrier power to
noise power and the power of interference signals in the channel defined
under POWER MEAS SETTING. For the measurement, a marker must be
set to the carrier of interest.
The unit of C/N is dB when the display is logarithmic. When the display is
linear, C/N is shown without a unit.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:SELect CN;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? CN;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW[:STATe] OFF
C / N0
The C/N0 softkey starts the C/N0 measurement.
In contrast to the C/N measurement, C/N calculates the ratio of carrier
power to noise and interference signals based on a 1 Hz bandwidth in the
channel defined under POWER MEAS SETTING.
The unit of C/No is dB/Hz when the display is logarithmic and 1/Hz when the
display is linear.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:SELect CN0;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? CN0;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW[:STATe] OFF
Measurement procedure:
1.
Activate a marker and position it to the peak of the carrier signal (e.g., with the Marker -> Peak
softkey).
2.
Select With the desired frequency range (channel) with the FREQUENCY CENTER and CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH (POWER MEAS SETTING sub-menu) softkeys.
3.
Press the C/N or C/N0 softkey. The marker is set to reference fixed and activates each
measurement. It must be observed that the carrier is either located outside of the measurement
channel or turned off at the UUT (Unit Under Test).
4.
Press the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey to active the default settings with modified channel
parameters.
The measurement values for C/N or C/No are displayed in the marker info field.
Notes: – If no carrier marker was set, only N or No with the appropriate units is displayed.
– Is the carrier located inside the measurement channel, C/C+N or C/C+N0 will be displayed
1088.7531.12
4.190
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Example:
The signal-to-noise ratio of the carrier (f = 199.9 MHz) in the channel with +100 kHz separation from 200
MHz (channel center frequency) is to be measured. The channel bandwidth is 150 kHz.
1. Using the CENTER key, set the center frequency to the channel center frequency 200 MHz.
2. Using the SPAN key, set the span, e.g., to 1 MHz (carrier must be visible).
3. Using the MARKER NORMAL key, activate MARKER 1 (If Marker 1 was not yet active, the function
MARKER→ PEAK is automatically executed. In this case, skip step 4.)
4. Using the MARKER→ PEAK key, set MARKER 1 on the carrier (assumption: the 200 MHz carrier has
the highest level in the selected span).
5. Press the MARKER NORMAL key and change to the left-hand supplementary menu.
6. Using the POWER MEAS SETTING softkey, call the sub-menu for defining the measurement channel.
7. Using the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH: softkey, set the bandwidth to 150 kHz (The channel spacing
does not need to be entered for this measurement). Then press ⇑ menu change key.
8. Using the C/N softkey, start the C/N measurement. In the marker info field, the outputs CHANNEL
CENTER, CHANNEL BANDWIDTH as well as the corresponding C/N measurement values appear.
MARKER 1 is also set to reference fixed.
9. Using the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey, activate the default settings with modified channel
parameters (channel bandwidth = 150kHz) for the correct C/N measurement (span = 2 × channel
bandwidth = 300 kHz, RBW = 3 kHz, VBW = 10 kHz, detector: sampling ).
Two vertical lines mark the channel 200 MHz ± 75 kHz in which the noise measurement is performed
(see Fig.4-10). The reference value is the measurement from MARKER 1 (Reference Fixed).
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
0
Marker [T1]
-24.4 dBm
199.9020 MHz
RBW 3 kHz
VBW 10 kHz
SWT 100 ms
FXD -20.7021 dBm
RF ATT
10 dB
Unit
1
-24.4
199.90200000
C/N
65.43
CH BW 150.00000000
-10
dBm
dBm
MHz
dB
kHz
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
FXD
-100
Center
200 MHz
Span 300 kHz
30 kHz/
CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
Fig.4-10
1088.7531.12
Example: measurement of the signal/noise power
4.191
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Adjacent Channel Power
MARKER NORMAL menu:
ADJACENT
The ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey starts the measurement of the
CHAN POWER
adjacent channel power.
The ADJACENT CHAN POWER measures the power which the transmitter
delivers to the two adjacent channels (upper channel , lower channel). The
measurement values are displayed according to the setting of the CH/ACD
ABS/REL softkey as absolute values in the scale of the X axis (see Fig.4-11)
or as a logarithmic ratio of adjacent channel to useful channel in dB (20 × log
(CP/CP0).
If the power of the other neighbouring channels is to be measured in addition
to the adjacent channel power, the number of adjacent channels can be
extended (on one side only) using SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S in the submenu
POWER MEAS SETTINGS.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:SELect ACP;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? ACP;
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW[:STATe] OFF
A prerequisite for the correct measurement of the adjacent channel power is the correct setting of the
ESIB center frequency, the channel bandwidth and the channel spacing. The CHANNEL SPACING and
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS sub-menu.
For an activated measurement of adjacent channel power, the analyzer itself optimally sets all other
values (span, resolution bandwidth, detector, etc.) after the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey is pressed.
The carrier power in the utilised channel, the power (absolute or relative to the utilised channel) in the
upper and lower adjacent channels as well as the largest of the two power values and the channel raster
with channel spacing and bandwidth are displayed as the result of the measurement. The C0 lines mark
the bandwidth of the carrier channel. Other unlabelled frequency lines mark the adjacent channels (see
Fig.4-11). With SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 2 selected, the other two neighbouring channels (1st
Alternate Channels) are displayed as well, with SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 3 selected, an additional
channel each (2nd Alternate Channels).
The measurement values are updated and displayed until the ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey is
pressed again and the measurement of the adjacent channel power is stopped.
1088.7531.12
4.192
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Ref Lvl
-20 dBm
Marker [T1]
-28.4 dBm
200.0100 MHz
0
RBW 300 Hz
VBW 300 Hz
SWT 100 ms
C0
RF ATT 10 dB
Mixer -30 dBm
Unit
dBm
C0
1
-28.4 dBm
200.0100
MHz
CH0 PWR
-18.3 dBm
ACP Max
-67.23 dBm
ACP UP
-67.23 dBm
ACP LOW
-69.45 dBm
CH Space
30 kHz
Ch BW
24 kHz
1
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
Center
200 MHz
Channel BW
Channel BW
Channel
Spacing
Lower
Channel
Fig.4-11
Span 100 kHz
10 kHz/
Channel BW
Channel
Spacing
Transmit
Channel
Upper
Channel
Measurement of the adjacent channel power.
If the limit check is activated for ACP measurements, the result of the limit check (PASSED/FAILED) is
displayed as well as an asterisk preceding each measured ACP power that exceeded one of the limits.
Note: The limit check is activated and the limits are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS menu.
1088.7531.12
4.193
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
An important characteristic of a modulated signal is the bandwidth which it occupies. In a radio
communications system, for instance, the occupied bandwidth must be limited prevent in adjacent
channel interferences. The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which a defined
percentage of the total transmitter power is contained. The percentage of the power can be set between
10 and 99% in the ESIB.
MARKER NORMAL menu:
OCCUPIED
PWR BANDW
The OCCUPIED PWR BANDW (occupied power bandwidth) softkey starts
the measurement for determining the occupied bandwidth.
In the spectrum display mode, the bandwidth is determined in which a
predefined percentage of the power in the displayed bandwidth is contained.
(selectable in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS sub-menu with the : % POWER
BANDWIDTH softkey). The occupied bandwidth is output to the marker
display field and marked on the trace with temporary markers.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:SELect OBW
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW:RESult? OBW
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POW[:STATe] OFF
Measurement principle:
For example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 99% of the signal power is contained. The routine
calculates first the total power of all displayed points (pixels) of the trace. In the next step, the
measurement points from the right edge of the trace are integrated until 0.5% of the total power is
reached. Then the ESIB integrates, in an analog fashion, from the left edge of the trace until 0.5% of the
power is reached. The delta marker is positioned at this point. Thus, 99% of the power is located
between the two markers. The difference between the two frequency markers is the occupied bandwidth
which is displayed in the marker info field.
A prerequisite for the correct operation of the measurement is that only the signal to be measured is
visible on the display screen of the ESIB. An additional signal would falsify the measurement.
In order to be able to perform correct power measurements, especially for noisy signals, and thus to
achieve the correct occupied bandwidth, the selection of the following parameters should be observed:
RBW
<< occupied bandwidth (≤ approx. 1/20 of the occupied bandwidth, for voice
communications, typ. 300 Hz or 1 kHz)
VBW
detector
≥ 3 x RBW
sampling
span
≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth
According to the application or other measurement guidelines, it may be necessary or reasonable to
average a definite number of sweeps in order to achieve a usable value for the occupied bandwidth.
This is provided by the TRACE (1....4) key group and the averaging function. With the SWEEP COUNT
softkey, the number of averages is defined.
Some measurement instructions (e.g. PDC, RCR, STD-27B) require the occupied bandwidth to be
measured by means of a peak detector. In this case, the detector of the ESIB must be corrected
appropriately.
1088.7531.12
4.194
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Parameters for Channel Power Measurements / Configuration
For the correct measurement of channel power, C/N, C/N0, adjacent channel power and occupied
bandwidth, it is recommended that an automatic optimisation of the analyzer settings be performed after
enabling the corresponding measurement and selecting the channel configuration (channel power
settings).
MARKER NORMAL menu:
ADJUST CP
SETTINGS
The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey optimises automatically the settings of
the analyzer for the selected power measurement (see below).
All relevant analyzer settings for a power measurement within a defined
frequency range (channel bandwidth) are optimally set including:
• span
• resolution bandwidth
• video bandwidth
• detector
dependent upon the channel configuration (channel bandwidth and, if
needed, channel spacing).
The trace mathematical functions and trace averaging are switched off.
The reference level is not influenced by the automatic optimisation routine.
The reference level is to be so adjusted that the signal maximum is located
near the reference level.
The optimisation is performed only once, however, if necessary, the
instrument settings may be changed later.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ADJust
Span
The span should cover at least the frequency range that is to be observed. For
channel power measurements, C/N and C/N0, this is the channel bandwidth.
For adjacent channel power measurements, this is the utilised channel
bandwidth and the adjacent channels located within the channel spacing.
If the span is large compared to the observed frequency band(s), then only a
few points on the trace are available for the measurement.
The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the span as follows:
2 × channel bandwidth
for channel power, C/N, C/No or
2 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power
4 × channel bandwidth
for adjacent channel power and NO.
OF ADJ CHAN‘ S 2
6 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power and NO.
OF ADJ CHAN‘ S 3
For measurements of the occupied bandwidth, the span is not influenced.
1088.7531.12
4.195
E-15
Main Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
In order to achieve acceptable speed as well as the necessary selectivity (to
suppress spectral components outside of the channel to be measured and,
especially adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth that is selected must
not be too narrow or too broad.
If the resolution bandwidth is too narrow, the measurement speed becomes
very slow and it is possible that relative spectral components are not displayed
(due to the sampling detector necessary for power measurements and the
finite number of points).
On the other hand, the resolution bandwidth should not be so broad that, due
to insufficient selection, spectral components outside of the observed
frequency range (from adjacent channel) falsify the measurement results.
The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW)
dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows:
RBW ≤ 1/40 of the channel bandwidth. The maximum possible RBW, with
due regard to the 1, 2, 3, 5 step size and the requirement RBW ≤ 1/40 will be
selected.
The RBW is not influenced by measurements of the occupied bandwidth.
Video bandwidth (VBW) Since a power measurement of the noise components is also necessary
(otherwise, errors occur due to the logarithmic characteristics of the spectrum
analyzer), the video bandwidth should be slected to be substantially larger
than the resolution bandwidth.
The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey adjusts the video bandwidth (VBW)
dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows:
VBW ≥ 3* RBW. The minimum VWB with regard to the available 1, 2, 3, 5
step size is selected.
Detector
1088.7531.12
The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey selects the sampling detector.
The sampling detector is to be selected, above all, for correct power
measurements of noisy signals within the observed frequency range.
4.196
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Main Markers
Marker Step Size
DATA VARIATION – STEP menu:
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
MARKER
STEP SIZE
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a
menu to match the marker step size to each individual
application. In order to change the step size, the marker entry
mode must already be active.
Control is returned to the MARKER NORMAL menu via the
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
menu key
.
MKR TO
STEPSIZE
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
.
.
.
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the marker step size to AUTO. In this
case, the step size is exactly 10% of the grid. A one-raster movement of the
roll-key corresponds to one pixel.
STEPSIZE AUTO is the default setting.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:STEP:AUTO
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
ON|OFF
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for defining a
fixed value for the marker step size.
Pressing the step key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The resolution of the roll-key is always one pixel per raster.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:STEP 10KHZ
MKR TO
STEPSIZE
The MKR TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the current
marker frequency or marker time.
In the frequency domain, this function is well suited to harmonic
measurements. The marker is set to the largest signal using the peak search
function. After activation of the MKR TO STEPSIZE function, the marker is
set to the corresponding harmonic of the signal each time the cursor key
or
is pressed when entering the marker position (see also Chapter 2,
"Measurement Examples").
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:MSTep
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
The DELTA TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the
difference between the reference marker and the last active delta marker.
The softkey is only available when at least one delta marker is enabled.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.197
--
E-15
Delta Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Delta Markers – DELTA Key
The delta marker.s are used to measure a level or frequency referred to a reference marker. They are
always referenced to the marker whose position was last changed. A delta marker is displayed
symbol. The reference marker is displayed as a filled
symbol.
as an empty
MARKER DELTA menu:
DELTA
MARKER
MARKER
DELTA 1
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA 2
DELTA
MKR
The DELTA key switches a delta marker on and calls the
menu for its control. If no marker is enabled, MARKER 1 is
automatically activated when the delta marker is switched on.
The delta marker activated to entry mode is shown on the
display screen as a filled
symbol.
DELTA 3
DELTA 4
PHASE
NOISE
REFERENCE
POINT
REFERENCE
FIXED
DELTA MKR
ABS
REL
ALL DELTA
OFF
DELTA 1
DE
A 2
DELTA 3
The DELTA 1 to 4 softkeys are used to enable delta markers 1...4. The
control of the delta markers corresponds to that of the markers. After a delta
marker has been enabled, all entries are now applicable to this marker. The
main marker must be activated anew if its position is to be changed.
The delta marker field on the display screen contains the delta marker
number, the difference frequency from the delta marker to reference marker
and the level difference between the active delta markers and reference
markers.
DELTA 4
The indicated differences are, in general, referred to the reference marker. If
the PHASE NOISE or REFERENCE FIXED functions are enabled, the
reference values under REFERENCE POINT are applicable.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4> ON|OFF
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:X 10.7MHZ
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:X:REL?
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:Y
1088.7531.12
4.198
E-15
ESIB
DELTA MKR
ABS
REL
Analyzer - Delta Markers
The DELTA ABS REL softkey switches between relative and absolute entry
modes for the delta-marker frequency.
In the REL position, the delta marker frequency is entered relative to the
reference marker. In this case, the entry mode for the delta-marker
frequencies is also relative.
In the ABS position, the entry of the delta-marker frequency is in terms of
absolute frequency.
The default setting is REL.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MODE
ALL DELTA
OFF
ABS | REL
The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any
associated functions (e.g. REFERENCE FIXED, PHASE NOISE).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF
REFERENCE
FIXED
The REFERENCE FIXED softkey enables/disables relative measurements
with respect to a fixed, measurement-curve-independent reference value.
The information in the delta-marker field on the display screen is referenced
to this fixed reference value. For the generation of the marker lists using
MARKER INFO list, the delta markers are also output relative to a fixed
reference. In the lists, the REFERENCE POINT is tagged by the number of
the reference marker (only one enabled)
When REFERENCE FIXED is enabled, the current settings of the reference
marker become the reference values. If no marker is active, MARKER 1 (with
peak search) is activated. After transferring the reference values, all markers
are deleted, and the active delta marker is set to the position of the reference
value. Additional delta markers can be switched on.
The reference value can be subsequently changed
1. by shifting it in the REFERENCE POINT sub-menu.
2. by starting a search:
In the MARKER NORMAL menu the REF POINT is handled as a reference
marker (even though it is not bound to the trace). This means, that it will be
shown as enabled and can also be changed in position. The co-ordinates
of the REF POINT are overwritten by the marker values (they lie, by
definition, on the trace). Thus, it is possible, even for an enabled
REFERENCE FIXED, to define a new reference point function with search
functions.
The REFERENCE FIXED function is particularly useful for measurements
which are performed relative to a reference signal that is not available during
the whole measurement time (e. g. harmonics measurements, see chapter
"Measurement Example").
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.199
E-15
Delta Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
MARKER DELTA- REFERENCE POINT submenu:
REFERENCE
POINT
REF POINT
LEVEL
REFERENCE
POINT
REF POINT
LEVEL
The REFERENCE POINT softkey opens a sub-menu in which
the reference value the REFERENCE FIXED and PHASE
NOISE functions can be modified.
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
The position of the reference value is indicated by two
additional display lines (horizontal and vertical). In addition, an
offset level may be defined which is added to each difference
during output.
REF POINT
TIME
The softkey is only available when the REFERENCE FIXED or
PHASE NOISE function is switched on.
The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for setting the
reference level relevant to the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE.
functions.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:Y -10DBM
REF POINT
FREQUENCY
The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry box for the input of
a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE.
functions.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 10.7MHZ
REF POINT
LVL OFFSET
The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates the entry box for the entry of
an additional offset level during output when the REFERENCE FIXED or
PHASE NOISE. functions are enabled.
The offset level is set to 0 dB when the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE
NOISE. functions are switched on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFSet 10DB
REF POINT
TIME
The REF POINT TIME softkey activates the entry box for the input of a
reference time for the REFERENCE FIXED function in the time domain
(span = 0).
The entry of a reference time for the PHASE NOISE function is not possible.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELT<1..4>:FUNC:FIXed:RPOint:X 100ms
1088.7531.12
4.200
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Delta Markers
Phase Noise Measurement
MARKER DELTA menu:
PHASE
NOISE
The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE function on/off.
When PHASE NOISE measurement is switched on, the frequency and level
of the reference marker are used as fixed reference values, i.e. the
REFERENCE FIXED function is activated.
The difference between this reference point and the active delta markers is
determined. The correction factors for bandwidth and the logarithmic
converter are automatically taken into account. The sampling detector is
automatically seleced to allow the effective noise power to be displayed. The
measured values are displayed in the delta marker field in units of dBc/Hz.
If several delta markers are enabled, only the measurement value output of
the active marker is shown in the marker field. Using MARKER INFO and
MARKER LIST the measurement data of all delta markers can be displayed.
If no marker is present when the PHASE NOISE function is enabled,
MARKER 1 is automatically switched on (peak search), and the marker
values are saved as reference values. The reference value can be changed
later in the NORMAL menu, SEARCH menu or REFERENCE POINT submenu (see REFERENCE FIXED softkey).
Turning on an additional marker causes the PHASE NOISE function to be
disabled.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNC:PNOise ON | OFF
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNC:PNOise:RESult?
1088.7531.12
4.201
E-15
Delta Markers - Analyzer
ESIB
Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key
STEP-DELTA STEP menu:
DATA VARIATION
HOLD
STEP
DELTA
STEP SIZE
STEPSIZE
AUTO
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a
menu to match the step size of the individual delta markers
to the specific application. In order to change the step size,
the entry mode for a delta marker must already be active.
Control is returned to the DELTA MARKER menu via the
menu key
.
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
.
.
.
STEPSIZE
AUTO
The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the delta marker step size to AUTO. In
this case, the step size of the delta marker is exactly 10% of the grid. The
roll-key corresponds to 1/500, i.e., for each rotational pulse, the delta
marker is shifted one pixel position.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF
STEPSIZE
MANUAL
The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey permits the entry of a fixed value for the
delta marker step size.
Pressing the step-key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The roll-key resolution, however, always remains constant at 1 pixel.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
--
The DELTATO STEPSIZE softkey sets the delta marker step size to a
quantity equal to the difference between the delta and reference markers.
The softkey is only presented when at least one delta marker is switched
on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:STEP 10HZ
1088.7531.12
4.202
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Search Functions
Search Functions – SEARCH Key
The ESIB offers numerous functions useful for peak/min. peak searching. The search functions can be
used for marker as well as delta marker functions.
The setups applicable to the available search functions are performed in the MARKER-SEARCH menu.
The search functions are always related to the currently active marker. If the SEARCH key is pressed
while the marker entry mode is active, then all search functions are related to the current reference
marker. If the entry mode of a delta marker is active, then the functions will be applied to the
corresponding delta marker. For the case where no marker is active, MARKER 1 will be automatically
enabled (with peak search). The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey allows toggling between the active
marker and the active delta marker.
If the threshold line is turned on, the peak/min. search functions will only evaluate signals which have a
level above/below the selected threshold. In addition, the search range can also be limited (SEARCH
LIM ON/OFF softkey) by the frequency/time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1/2, TIME LINE 1/2).
For all peak search functions, the first local oscillator is omitted at 0 Hz if it happens to be displayed.
In the time domain display, the summary markers can be activated and set in addition to the search
functions in menu MARKER-SEARCH.
MARKER SEARCH menu:
SUMMARY
MARKER
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
DELTA
MKR
MARKER
SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
MARKER
SEARCH
MIN
PEAK
N DB DOWN
NEXT MIN
NEXT PEAK
SHAPE FACT
60 /3 DB
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
SHAPE FACT
60 /6 DB
NEXT MIN
LEFT
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
RMS
SUM MKR
ON
OFF
MEAN
SUMMARY
MARKER
PEAK HOLD
ON
OFF
EXCLUDE LO
ON
OFF
1088.7531.12
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
PEAK
EXCURSION
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
4.203
SWEEP
COUNT
ALL SUM
MKR OFF
E-15
Search Functions - Analyzer
ACTIVE
MKR
DELTA
ESIB
The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and
the active delta marker.
If DELTA is illuminated, the following search functions are performed with the
active delta marker.
Note:
Switching between marker and delta marker entry modes may
also be performed using the NORMAL and DELTA keys.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SELECT
MARKER
--
The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of the marker/delta
markers. The selection box lists the currently enabled markers/delta markers.
MARKER SELECT
MARKER 1
MARKER 3
MARKER 4
DELTA SELECT
DELTA 1
DELTA 2
DELTA 3
IEC/IEEE-bus command
PEAK
--
The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the maximum
displayed value on the corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAXimum
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MAXimum
NEXT PEAK
The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the trace
value next in magnitude after the peak.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAX:NEXT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MAX:NEXT
NEXT PEAK
The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to
the right of the current marker position.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAX:RIGHt
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MAX:RIGHt
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to the
left of the current marker position.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAX:LEFT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MAX:LEFT
MIN
The MIN softkey sets the active marker to minimum displayed value on the
corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MIN
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MIN
1088.7531.12
4.204
E-15
ESIB
NEXT MIN
Analyzer - Search Functions
The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher of the low
peaks on the corresponding trace.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MIN:NEXT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MIN:NEXT
NEXT MIN
RIGHT
The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey set the active marker to the next low peak to
the right of the current marker position.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MIN:RIGHt
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MIN:RIGHt
NEXT MIN
LEFT
The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to
the left of the current marker position.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MIN:LEFT
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MIN:LEFT
EXCLUDE LO
ON
OFF
The EXCLUDE LO ON/OFF softkey switches between a restriced (ON) and
an unrestricted search range (OFF).
ON
Because of non-ideal input mixer, the first LO of any analyzer can be
seen at 0 Hz. The search functions can possibly respond to this LO
level, in particular in the preset setting (FULL SPAN). To prevent
this, the search range is restricted according to the following
formula:
Search range ≥ 6 × resolution bandwidth
OFF
No restriction on the search range. The search functions find also
signals below the frequency limit quoted above.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:LOEXclude ON|OFF
PEAK
EXCURSION
The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates the entry box which sets the
minimum amount a signal level must decrease/increase before it is
recognised by the search functions (except PEAK and MIN) as a maximum or
minimum.
Input values from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed with a resolution of 0.1 dB.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:PEXCursion 10DB
The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB. This is sufficient for the functions NEXT
PEAK (or NEXT MIN) as the next smallest (or next largest) signal is always
searched for.
Functions NEXT PEAK LEFT and NEXT PEAK RIGHT (or NEXT MIN LEFT
and NEXT MIN RIGHT) search for the next relative maximum (or minimum)
irrespective of the current signal amplitude.
As for wide bandwidths, the intrinsic noise of the ESIB may equal the 6 dB
level change preset for PEAK EXCURSION and so noise peaks are identified
as signal peaks
In this case, a value for PEAK EXCURSION which is higher than the
difference between the maximum and minimum noise display reading must be
entered.
1088.7531.12
4.205
E-15
Search Functions - Analyzer
ESIB
The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION
settings.
Marker [T1]
199.0140 MHz
-22.4 dBm
0
1
1
-10
2
-20
4
3
-30
-40
42dB
30dB
46dB
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
Fig. 4-12 Example for level measurements at various peak excursion settings
Maximum relative level change of the measured signals:
Signal 2:
42dB
Signal 3
30dB
Signal 4:
46dB
With Peak Excursion 40dB signals 2 and 4 are detected by NEXT PEAK or
NEXT PEAK RIGHT. Signal 3 is not detected since it is only decreased by 30
dB before rising again.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 4
With Peak Excursion 20dB signal 3 is detected as well since its highest level
change of 30 dB is now higher than the peak excursion.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 3
1088.7531.12
4.206
or
PEAK:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
NEXT PEAK RIGHT:
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal 4
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Search Functions
Whith Peak Excursion 6dB all signals are detected, NEXT PEAK RIGHT
does not produce the required results.
Order in which signals are found:
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 2
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 4
NEXT PEAK:
Signal 3
or
PEAK:
Signal 1
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2
SEARCH LIM
ON
OFF
The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF softkey switches between a limited (ON) and
unlimited (OFF) search range.
For peak and min. search functions, the search range can also be limited by
the frequency and time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1, 2/TIME LINE 1, 2). If
SEARCH LIMIT = ON, the appropriate signal level will only be searched for
between the specified frequency/time lines.
The default setting is SEARCH LIMIT = OFF.
When only one line is enabled, frequency/time line 1 is defined as the lower
limit and the upper limit is defined by the stop frequency. If frequency/time
line 2 turned on, then it determines the upper limit.
For the case in which no line is active the search range is unlimited.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:X:SLIMits ON|OFF
N dB DOWN
The N dB DOWN softkey automatically activates the temporary markers T1
and T2 and sets them n dB below the active reference marker. Marker T1 is
located on the left, the marker T2 is located on the right of the reference
marker. The value n can be entered in an entry window. The default value is
6 dB.
The frequency difference between the two temporary markers is indicated in
the level output field.
If, e.g., due to the noise level, it is not possible to determine the frequency
difference for the n dB value, dashes are displayed instead of the measured
value.
Entry mode is switched to the reference marker for the case in which the
delta maker entry mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker
can be changed in the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak
search, etc.).
Pressing the N dB DOWN softkey again switches the function off, however,
the entry function for the reference marker remains turned on.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown 3DB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQ?
1088.7531.12
4.207
E-15
Search Functions - Analyzer
SHAPE FACT
60/3 DB
ESIB
The SHAPE FACT 60/3dB.and SHAPE FACT 60/6dB softkeys activate the
automatic measurement of the form factor for the displayed signals.
For this purpose, four temporary markers are used. The markers T1 to T4
indicate, in increasing order, the 3 dB/6 dB positions below the reference
marker level.
In the level output field, the relationship between the two frequency
differences ∆f60dB / ∆f3dB and ∆f60dB / ∆f6dB are displayed
SHAPE FACT
60/6 DB
The display of the measurement value takes place in the marker field. When
the level differences cannot be determined, the measurement value is
marked as invalid. The update of the shape-factor display takes place at the
end of sweep.
The entry mode is switched to the reference marker if the delta marker entry
mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker can be changed in
the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak search, etc.).
The SHAPE FACTOR function is turned off by pressing SHAPE FACTOR
softkey once again, or by enabling another marker.
The SHAPE FACTOR function is available only in the frequency domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor
(60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB)
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQ?
Summary Marker
The summary markers are available for measurements in the time domain (SPAN = 0).
Unlike the markers and delta markers, the summary markers are not used to mark the pixels of a trace.
They activate a measurement of the rms value (RMS) or of the average value (MEAN) of the whole
trace. The result is displayed in the marker info field.
The measured values are either updated after every sweep or averaged according to a defined number
of sweeps (AVERAGE ON/OFF and SWEEP COUNT). In case of maximum peak evaluation (PEAK
HOLD ON) the measured values are held until the occurrence of the next higher value.
Example:
Marker info field switched on with summary marker: MEAN, AVERAGE ON and PEAK HOLD ON
MEAN HOLD
MEAN AV
2.33 Watt
2.29 Watt
The evaluation range can be limited with the function SEARCH LIMITS ON and the time lines (TIME
LINE1,2), eg when measuring the average power of a sampled signal from the beginning to the end of a
burst.
With the summary marker switched on, the sampling detector is activated (TRACE-DETECTOR-AUTO).
MARKER SEARCH menu
SUM MKR
The SUM MKR softkey activates the summary marker
ON
OFF
The measurement, rms or average value and the settings for maximum peak
evaluation and averaging is selected in the submenu SUMMARY MARKER.
The softkey is only available in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary ON|OFF
1088.7531.12
4.208
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Search Functions
MARKER SEARCH menu
SUMMARY
MARKER
SUMMARY
MARKER
The SUMMARY MARKER softkey calls up the submenu for
selecting the summary marker measurements.
The softkey is only available in the time domain.
RMS
MEAN
PEAK HOLD
ON
OFF
AVERAGE
OFF
ON
SWEEP
COUNT
ALL SUM
MKR OFF
RMS
The RMS softkey selects the measurement of the rms value of the signal per
sweep.
In case of maximum peak evaluation the highest rms value since the activation of
PEAK HOLD ON is displayed. In case of AVERAGE ON the rms values of a trace
are averaged and displayed over several sweeps.
The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD =
ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next
higher average value.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:RES?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?
MEAN
The MEAN softkey selects the measurement of the average value of the signal per
sweep.
Thus, the mean power can be measured, for example during a GSM burst.
In case of maximum peak evaluation, the highest average value since the
activation of PEAK HOLD ON is displayed.
In case of AVERAGE ON, the average values of a trace are averaged and
displayed over several sweeps.
The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD =
ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next
higher average value.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:RES?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?
1088.7531.12
4.209
E-15
Search Functions - Analyzer
PEAK HOLD
ON
OFF
ESIB
The PEAK HOLD ON/OFF softkey switches the maximum peak evaluation on and
off.
For all active summary markers, the displays are updated after each sweep only if
higher values have occurred.
The measured values can be reset by switching the PEAK HOLD ON / OFF
softkey on and off again.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON
AVERAGE
ON
OFF
The AVERAGE ON/OFF softkey switches the averaging of the summary markers
on and off.
The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE HOLD ON / OFF
softkey on and off again.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON
SWEEP
COUNT
The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps in the
SINGLE SWEEP mode.
The permissible range of values is 0 to 32767.
In case of AVERAGE ON:
If an averaging has been selected, SWEEP COUNT also determines the
number of measurements required for averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 0
10 measured values are required for running
averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 1
No averaging is carried out.
SWEEP COUNT > 1
An averaging is carried out over the set number of
measured values.
In the CONTINUOUS SWEEP mode averaging is performed until the number
of sweeps set under SWEEP COUNT is attained and then running averaging
is performed.
The maximum peak evaluation is infinite independent of the entry under SWEEP
COUNT.
Note: This setting is equivalent to the settings of the number of sweeps of menus
TRACE and SWEEP-SWEEP.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
ALL SUM
MKR OFF
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 20
The ALL SUM MKR OFF softkey switches all the summary markers off.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
4.210
E-15
Analyzer - Marker Å Menu
ESIB
Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Í Key
MARKER MKR →menu:
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
The MKR → menu offers functions that can be used to
change instrument settings with the currently active marker.
Exactly as in the SEARCH menu, these functions can also be
applied to the delta markers.
MARKER->
PEAK
MKR->
CENTER
DELTA
MKR
MKR->
REF LEVEL
The choice between marker and delta marker is made
according to the currently active frequency entry mode for the
marker/delta marker. If no entry mode is active, the marker
with the lowest number will be activated as the reference
marker.
MKR->CF
STEPSIZE
MKT->
START
MKR->
STOP
MKR->
TRACE
SELECT
MARKER
ACTIVE
MKR
DELTA
ACTIVE
MKR
DELTA
The ACTIVE MKR /DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and
the active delta marker.
If DELTA is illuminated, the following marker functions are carried out with the
active delta marker.
Note:
Switching between marker and delta marker can also be done with
the NORMAL and DELTA keys.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
PEAK
--
To simplify control, the PEAK search function (see section "Search Functions
- SEARCH Key") is also available in the MRK→ menu. Thus, the most
important functions MARKER→PEAK, MKR→CENTER and MKR→REF
LEVEL can be selected in one menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:MAX
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:MAX
MKR->
CENTER
The MKR→CENTER softkey sets the center frequency to the current
marker/delta marker frequency .
The softkey is not available in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
1088.7531.12
4.211
E-15
MarkerÅ Menu - Analyzer
MKR->
REF LEVEL
ESIB
The MKR→REF LEVEL softkey sets the reference level to that of the current
marker.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:REFerence
MKR->CF
STEPSIZE
The MKR→CF STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the center frequency
variation to the current marker frequency, and also sets step-size adaptation
to MANUAL. The CF STEP SIZE remains at this value until the center
frequency entry mode in the STEP menu is switched from MANUAL to AUTO
again.
The MKR→CF STEPSIZE function is, above all, useful when measuring
harmonics with a large dynamic range (small bandwidth and small span).
The softkey is not available in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:CSTep
MKR->
START
The MKR→START softkey sets the start frequency to the current marker
frequency.
The softkey is not available in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:STARt
MKR->
STOP
The MKR→STOP softkey sets the stop frequency to the current marker
frequency.
The softkey is not available in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:STOP
MKR->
TRACE
The MKR→TRACE softkey places the active marker on a new trace. The
traces available for selection appear in the selection window.
SELECT TRACE
TRACE1
TRACE2
TRACE3
TRACE4
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:TRACe 2
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:TRACe 2
1088.7531.12
4.212
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field
Display Lines – D LINES Key
Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of trace data more convenient. The
function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to measure absolute and
differential values on traces.
In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions.
The ESIB provides four different types of display lines:
• two horizontal threshold lines for setting levels or for defining level search ranges – Display Line 1/2,
• two vertical frequency/time lines for indicating frequencies/times or for determining frequency or time
search ranges – Frequency/Time Line 1/2,
• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum levels (Peak Search) –
Threshold Line
• a reference line which serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between traces – Reference
Line
For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following
abbreviations:
D1
D2
F1
F2
Display Line 1
Display Line 2
Frequency Line 1
Frequency Line 2
T1
T2
TH
REF
Time Line 1
Time Line 2
Threshold Line
Reference Line
The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full
width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction.
The lines for frequency and time are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the
diagram. They are movable in the x-direction.
For measurement operations in two separate windows, (Split Screen-Modus), the display lines are
available independently in both windows. In the currently active window, the display lines can be
activated and/or shifted. Lines previously defined in the currently inactive window remain unchanged.
The LINES-D LINES menu, used for switching on and setting the display lines, is dedicated to the
chosen display in the active measurement window (span or time). For the display of a spectrum (span ≠
0), the FREQUENCY LINE 1 and FREQUENCY LINE 2 softkeys appear, For the time display (span =
0), the TIME LINE 1 and TIME LINE 2 softkeys are displayed.
1088.7531.12
4.213
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
Note:
ESIB
The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a threeposition switch:
Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the rollkey, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
2nd press:
The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).
Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the rollkey, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
2nd press:
The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).
Menu LINES-D-LINES
for Span ≠ 0
LINES
DISPLAY
LINES
D LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
DISPLAY
LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 1
DISPLAY
LINE 2
DISPLAY
LINE 2
THRESHOLD
LINE
THRESHOLD
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
REFERENCE
LINE
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
TIME
LINE 1
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
TIME
LINE 2
BASELINE
CLIPPING
BASELINE
CLIPPING
LIMITS
1088.7531.12
for Span = 0
4.214
E-15
ESIB
DISPLAY
LINE 1
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate
the entry of the line location.
The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window.
DISPLAY
LINE 2
THRESHOLD
LINE
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> -20dBm
The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and
activates the entry of the line location.
The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This
threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in
the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.). For signal
tracking (SIGNAL TRACK function), this threshold value defines the lower
search limit (see section "Marker Functions")..
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
REFERENCE
LINE
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold -82dBm
The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and
activates the entry of the line position.
The reference line serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between
trace data (see section "Mathematical Operations on Measurement Curves"
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe -10dBm
FREQUENCY
LINE 1
The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the frequency lines 1/2 on/off
and activate the entry of the line locations.
The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement
window or define search ranges (see section "Marker Functions").
FREQUENCY
LINE 2
1088.7531.12
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> 120 MHz
4.215
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
TIME
LINE 1
ESIB
The TIME LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the time lines 1/2 on/off and activate the
entry of line locations.
The time lines mark the selected times or define the search range (see
section "Marker Functions").
TIME
LINE 2
BASELINE
CLIPPING
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;
:CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> 10ms
The BASELINE CLIPPING softkey switches on or off the BASELINE
CLIPPING function and allows a limit value to be entered.
The BASELINE CLIPPING function is for blanking measured values (for
example noise) which are below a preset threshold.
If the BASELINE CLIPPING function is active and a measured value is below
the preset threshold, the value is set to a lower boundary (-400 dBm).
Measured values above the clipping level are not changed.
Note:
It is advisable not to combine the BASELINE CLIPPING function
with the AUTOPEAK detector.
If the set clipping value is within the displayed noise band
(AUTOPEAK detector), activation of the CLIPPING function and
the resulting clipping of the MIN PEAK values will lead to a drastic
enlargement of the displayed noise band.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF
:CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold -82dBm
1088.7531.12
4.216
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key
Limit lines are used to define limits for amplitude curves or spectral distributions on the screen. They
indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are permissible
from a Unit Under Test (UUT). In the case of TDMA transmissions (e.g., GSM), the amplitude curve of
the bursts in a time slot must fall within a specified tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each
be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be cecked either visually or automatically for
any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The ESIB instrument supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data
points. For each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined:
• The name of the limit line. The limit line is stored under this name and is diplayed in the LIMIT LINES
table.
• The domain in which the limit line is to be used. A distinction is made between the time domain (span
= 0 Hz) and the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz).
• The X-coordinates of the interpolation points. The limit line can be specified either in terms of
absolute frequencies or times or in terms of frequencies referred to the set center frequency and
times referred to the time represented by the left-hand edge of the diagram.
• The Y-coordinates of the interpolation points. The limit line can be selected either for absolute levels
or voltages or referred to the set maximum level (Ref Lvl or Max Lvl). If the reference line is switched
on, it is used as reference when relative setting has been selected.
• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this definition and the limit checking function on
(LIMIT CHECK), the ESIB checks for compliance with each limit.
• The limit line units. The units for the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the active
measurement window.
• The trace to which the limit line is assigned. For the ESIB, this defines the trace to which the limit is to
be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed.
• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation.
• A comment can also be entered for each limit line, e.g., a description of the application.
In the LINES LIMIT menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The
SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information about the characteristics of the marked limit
lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE submenus.
1088.7531.12
4.217
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
ESIB
LINES LIMIT menu
USER
LINES
SELECETED LIMIT LINE
D LINES
LIMITS
LIMIT
LINES
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
Name:
Domain:
Unit:
Comment:
GSM22UP
FREQUENCY
dB
Line 1
Limit:
X-Axis:
X-Scaling:
Y-Scaling:
LOWER
LOG
ABSOLUTE
RELATIVE
NEW LIMIT
LINE
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
LIMIT LINES
NAME
COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECKTRACE
GSM22UP
LP1GHz
LP1GHz
MIL461A
off
on
off
off
1
1
1
2
MARGIN
0
0
0
-10
COPY
LIMIT LINE
dB
dB
dB
dB
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
X OFFSET
Y OFFSET
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line
Limit Line Selection
The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table provides information about the
characteristics of the marked limit line :
Name
Domain
Limit
X-Axis
X-Scaling
Y-Scaling
Unit
Comment
name
frequency or time
upper/lower limit
linear or logarithmic interpolation
absolute or relative frequencies/times
absolute or relative Y-units
for vertical scale
comment
The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW
LIMIT LINE) submenu.
SELECT
LIMIT LINE
The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the
selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table.
The columns headfings are as follows:
Name
Compatible
Limit Check
Trace
Margin
1088.7531.12
NAme of the limit line to be selected.
Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement
window of the given trace.
Activates the automatic "within limits" check.
Selects the trace to which the limit is assigned.
Defines a margin.
4.218
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
Name and Compatible - Switching on limit lines
A maximum of 8 limit lines can be switched at any one time. A check mark at
the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is switched on. A limit line
can only be switched on when it has a check mark in the Compatible column,
i.e., only when the display mode of the x-axis (time or frequency) and y-axis
units are identical to those in the measurement window.
It should be noted that lines with dB scales are compatible with all dB(..)
scales of the Y-axis.
If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the
window the trace would be displayed in.
Example:
In split screen mode, trace 2 is assigned measuring window B. A line
assigned to trace 2 is always displayed in measurement window B.
If the y-axis unit or the domain (frequency or time) are changed, all noncompatible limit lines are automatically switched off in order to avoid
misinterpretations. The limit lines must be switched on again when the
original display mode is restored.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:NAME <string>;
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:STATe ON | OFF
Limit Check - Activating the limit check
When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated, a limit check is performed automatically
on the active screen. In the center of the screen, a display window containing
the results of the limit check test appears:
LIMIT CHECK: PASSED
No out-of-limits conditions.
LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
One or more out-of-limits conditions. The
message contains the names of the limit lines
which were violated or whose margins were not
complied with.
LIMIT CHECK: MARGIN
The margin of at least one active limit line was not
complied with, however, no limit line was violated.
The message contains the names of the limit lines
whose margins were not complied with.
The following example shows three active limit lines:
LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
LINE VHF_MASK: Failed
LINE UHF2MASK: Margin
A limit check is performed only if the trace associated with the limit line is
turned on.
If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines, then the limit line check is
not executed and the display field not activated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.219
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
ESIB
Trace - Selecting the trace to which the limit line is assigned.
The trace is selected in an entry window. An integer entries 1, 2, 3 or 4
indicating the trace is entered. The default setting is trace 1. If the selected
limit line is not compatible with the assigned trace, the limit line is disabled.
(display and limit check).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:TRACe 1|2|3|4
Margin - Setting a margin.
The margin is defined as the level difference between the limit line and the
signal . When the limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin means
that the level is below the limit line. When the limit line is defined as a lower
limit, the margin means that the level is above the limit line. The default
setting is 0 dB (i.e., no margin).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:MARGin 10DB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:MARGin 10DB
COPY
LIMIT LINE
The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data set of the marked limit line
and saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be easily
generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The name
can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window (max. of 8
characters).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:COPY 1..8|<name>
DELETE
LIMIT LINE
The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before
deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
X OFFSET
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DELete
The X OFFSET softkey horizontally shift a limit lines which has been
specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis). The softkey opens an
entry window, where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via
the roll-key.
Note:
When changing the start or the stop frequency, the line on the
display only remains unchanged, if SPAN FIXED is set.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONT:OFFSet 100us
Y OFFSET
The Y OFFSET softkey vertically shifts a limit line, which has relative values
for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt). The softkey opens an entry
window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via the rollkey.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPP:OFFSet 3dB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOW:OFFSet 3dB
1088.7531.12
4.220
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
Entering and Editing of Limit Lines
A limit line is characterized by
• its name
• the domain assignment (frequency or time)
• whether the scale is absolute or relative (time or frequency)
• linear or logarithmic interpolation
• the vertical unit
• the vertical scale
• the definition of the limit line as either an upper or lower limit.
• the interpolation points for frequency/time and level
When the limit line is entered, the ESIB immediately checks all limit lines according to rules that
guarantee correct operation.
• The frequencies/times for each interpolation point must be entered in ascending order, however, for
any single frequency/time, twodata points may be entered (vertical segment of a limit line).
The interpolation points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not allowed. If
gaps are desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
• The entered frequencies/times need not necessarily be capable of selection on the ESIB. A limit line
may also exceed the frequency or time display range. The minimum frequency for an interpolation
point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time domain, negative times may also
be entered. The range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB/ +200 dB for the logarithmic scale or 10-20/
10+20 or-99.9%/ + 999.9% for linear amplitude scales.
1088.7531.12
4.221
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
ESIB
LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu
NEW LIMIT
LINE
EDIT LIMIT
LINE
The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT
LIMIT LINE submenu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading,
the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The frequency/time
and level points are entered in the columns.
Name
Enter name.
Domain
Select domain.
Unit
Select units.
X-Axis
Select interpolation
X-Scaling
Entry of absolute or relative values for the X-axis
Y-Scaling
Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y-axis
Limit
Select upper/lower limit.
Comment
Enter comments.
Time/Frequency
Enter time/frequency points.
Limit/dBm
Enter level points.
USER
Name:
Domain:
Unit:
X-Axis:
X-Scaling:
Y-Scaling:
Limit:
Comment:
EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE
Limit_22
FREQUENCY
dBuV/m
LOG
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
UPPER
Limit 22
FREQUENCY
30.000
230.000
230.000
1.000
EDIT
LIMIT LINE
MHz
MHz
MHz
GHz
NAME
VALUES
INSERT
VALUE
26
LIMIT/dBuV/m
30.0000
30.0000
37.0000
37.0000
DELETE
VALUE
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
49
50
Press
25 ENTER to edit field.
1088.7531.12
4.222
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
NAME
The NAME softkey activates the entry of characteristics in the table heading.
Name - Entry of name
A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be
compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names. The instrument
automatically stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>
Domain - Selection of time or frequency domain
The domain (frequency/time) can only be changed when the limit-line point
table is empty. The default setting is frequency.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQ | TIME
X-Axis - Indication of interpolation
Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. The ENTER key toggels between LIN and LOG
selection.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:SPACing LIN | LOG
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:SPACing LIN | LOG
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:SPACing LIN | LOG
Scaling - Selection of absolute or relative scale
The limit line scale can either be absolute (frequency or time) or relative. Any of
the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE, the
cursor must in the X-Scaling or the Y-Scaling line
X-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The frequencies or times are interpreted as absolute
physical units.
X-Scaling RELATIVE
The frequencies in the limit-line point table are
referred to the currently set center frequency. In the
time domain, the left boundary of the diagram
constitutes the reference.
Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE
The limit values are absolute levels or voltages.
Y-Scaling RELATIVE
The limit values refer to the reference level or, in
case a reference line is set, to the reference line.
Limit values in dB or % are always relative values.
RELATIVE scaling is always recommended, if masks for bursts are to be
defined in the time domain, or if masks for modulated signals are required in
the frequency domain.
An X-offset equal to half the sweep time may be entered to shift the mask in
the time domain to the center of the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:MODE REL | ABS
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:MODE REL | ABS
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:MODE REL | ABS
1088.7531.12
4.223
E-15
Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer
ESIB
Unit - Selection of the vertical scale units for the limit line
Units are selected in a selection box. The default setting is dBm.
UNITS
VERTICAL SCALE
dB
dBm
%
dBuV
dBmV
dBuA
dBpW
dBpT
V
A
W
dBuV/MHz
dBmV/MHz
dBuA/MHz
IEC/IEEE-bus command :CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT
DB| DBM| PCT |DBUV| DBMW | DBUA |
DBPW| DBPT | WATT| VOLT | AMPere |
DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ |
DBUV_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_M |
DBUA_MMHZ
Limit - Selection of upper/lower limit
A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
-(defined by the key words :UPPer or :LOWer)
Comment - Enter comments
Comments are user selectable, but may not exceed 40 characters in length.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:COMMent ’string’
VALUES
The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table
columns Time/Frequency and Limit/dB. Which table column appears
depends on the Domain selection in the table heading.
The frequency/time points are entered in ascending order (two repeated
frequencies/times are permitted).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA]
<num_value>, <num_value>..
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA]
<num_value>,<num_value>..
1088.7531.12
4.224
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines
INSERT
VALUE
The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor
position where a new data point can be entered. However, when entering new
values, the ascending order for frequency/time values must be kept.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DELETE
VALUE
The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the
cursor position. The data points that follow are moved along to fill the gap.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SHIFT X
LIMIT LINE
--
--
The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted horizontally.
The shift units are the same as the horizontal scale units:
– in the frequency domain in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz
– in the time domain in ns, µs, ms or s
This means that it is easy to create a new limit line from existing limit line
which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey)
under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:CONTrol:SHIFt 50kHz
SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE
The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
limit line may be shifted vertically.
The shift units are the same as the vertical scale units:
– for relative logarithmic units in dB
– for linear units, as a factor
This means that a new limit line can easily be created from an existing limit
line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey)
under a new name (NAME softkey).
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UPPer:SHIFt 20dB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:LOWer:SHIFt 20dB
SAVE
LIMIT LINE
The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line. The name
can be entered in an entry window (max. 8 characters)
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.225
-- (automatically executed)
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
ESIB
Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group
The ESIB can display up to four separate traces at a time on a screen. A trace has of a maximum of
500 pixels along the horizontal axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than pixels are
available, several measurement values are assigned to one pixel.
The traces are selected using keys 1 to 4 of the TRACES key group. When two measurement windows
(SPLIT SCREEN) are displayed, traces 1 and 3 are assigned to the upper (SCREEN A) and traces 2
and 4 are assigned to the lower (SCREEN B) measurement window.
The traces can be individually activated for a measurement or frozen after completion of a
measurement. Traces that are not activated are not displayed.
A display mode can be selected for each trace. The traces can be overwritten (CLEAR/WRITE mode)
after each sweep, averaged (AVERAGE mode) over several sweeps, or the maximum/ minimum value
from several sweeps can be displayed (MIN HOLD/MAX HOLD).
Individual detectors are selectable for each of the traces. The auto-peak detector displays the maximum
and minimum values on a vertical line. The max-peak detector and min-peak detector display the
maximum and /minimum levels represented by a pixel. The sampling detector displays the
instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. The rms detector displays the power (rms) of the spectrum at
a pixel, the average detector the average value.
Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key
The trace functions are categorized as follows:
• type of trace display (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK)
• evaluation of the trace as a whole (AVERAGE, MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD)
• evaluation of the individual pixels of a trace (AUTOPEAK, MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, SAMPLE, RMS
and AVERAGE)
TRACE 1 menu
TRACE
1
2
TRACE 1
CLEAR/
WRITE
TRACE 1
ANALOG TR
ON
OFF
VIEW
3
3
4
BLANK
AVERAGE
TRACE
MATH
MAX HOLD
MIN HOLD
ASCII
EXPORT
HOLD CONT
ON
OFF
ASCII
CONFIG
SWEEP
COUNT
DETECTOR
COPY
1088.7531.12
4.226
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
The TRACE keys 1...4 call a menu whith the setting options for the selected trace.
This menu is used to determine the method for compressing the measurement data in the frequency or
time domain to the 500 representable points of the display is determined.
When the measurement is started, a new trace can be displayed or the trace can be based on previous
results. The traces can be displayed, blanked and copied.
Traces can also be corrected with the mathematical functions.
The measurement detector for each of the display types may be chosen either directly or selected
automatically by the ESIB.
All activated traces are marked with a LED at the corresponding key (here, TRACE 1). The default
setting is TRACE 1 with CLEAR / WRITE selected. The remaining traces 2...4 are switched off
(BLANK). For the split screen display, the selection of the trace automatically selects the corresponding
screen for entry.
Only one of the CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, AVERAGE, VIEW and BLANK softkeys can
be activated at any one time.
CLEAR/
WRITE
The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the clear/write display mode.
The trace is displayed without additional trace evaluation. The trace memory
is overwritten by each sweep. If more than one data point falls within a pixel,
the trace is displayed in bar form with the maximum and minimum values
being assigned to one pixel. In the clear/write display mode, all the available
detectors are selectable. The autopeak detector is selected in the default
mode (detector to AUTO).
Whenever the CLEAR/WRITE softkey is pressed, the ESIB clears the
selected trace memory and restarts the measurement.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE WRITe
VIEW
The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and
displays them.
If the trace data were formed through MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD or AVERAGE,
the sweep is restarted and the trace contents are cleared, after switching to
these trace modes.
If a trace is frozen by VIEW, the instrument settings can be modified without
modifying the displayed trace. The fact that the trace and the current
instrument setting do not agree anymore is indicated by an enhancement
label "*" at the right edge of the grid. The initial instrument setting can be
restored using the ADJUST TO TRACE softkey in the TRACE MATH submenu.
If LEVEL RANGE or REF LEVEL is changed in the VIEW display mode, the
ESIB adjusts the measurement data to the changed display range. Thus, an
amplitude zoom can be performed after the measurement so that details of
the trace can be seen better.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE VIEW
1088.7531.12
4.227
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
ESIB
The BLANK softkey activates the blanking of the trace.
However, the trace remains stored in memory and can be displayed again by
pressing VIEW. The markers for the blanked trace are also erased. After
reactivation of the trace (with VIEW, CLEAR / WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN
HOLD, AVERAGE) the markers will be restored their their previous positions.
BLANK
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4> OFF
The AVERAGE softkey activates the trace averaging function. The average is
formed over several sweeps. The average can be calculated for each
available detector. If the detector is automatically selected by the ESIB , the
sampling detector is used.
AVERAGE
After enabling the averaging mode, the first trace is recorded in
CLEAR/WRITE mode with the selected detector. After the second sweep, the
average is then formed for each succeeding sweep. Here, the average is
formed over the samples/pixels, i.e., according to the LIN or LOG setting,
over amplitudes or levels.
Averaging is restarted every time the AVERAGE softkey is pressed. The
trace memory is also cleared. This is also the case when the trace is
switched from the setting AVERAGE to VIEW or BLANK
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE
AVER
Description of averaging:
Averaging is carried out using the pixels which are derived from the measurement value samples.
These pixels may in some cases be comprised of several combined measurement values. This means
that the average is formed over linear amplitude values when the level display is linear and over levels
when the level display is logarithmic. Because of this, the trace must be measured anew when changing
between the LIN and LOG display mode. The settings CONT/SINGLE SWEEP and the sliding average
apply to the average display analogously.
Two calculation procedures are available for averaging. For SWEEP COUNT= 0 , a sliding average is
calculated using the following equation:
TRACEn =
9 * TRACEn - 1 + Meas_Value
10
Because of the relative weighting of the new measurement value and the trace average, past values
have practically no no influence on the displayed trace after about 10 sweeps. For this setting, the signal
noise is effectively reduced without the need to restart the averaging process even if the signal is
changed.
If the SWEEP COUNT is >1 averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps. In this case,
the displayed trace is given by the following formula during averaging::
TRACEn =

1  n −1
 (Ti ) + Meas Value
n  i =1

∑
where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... SWEEP COUNT). For the first sweep, an average
is not calculated. The measurement values are stored directly in trace memory. With growing n, the
displayed trace becomes increasingly smoother since more individual trace data are available for
averaging.
The average is stored in trace memory after the defined number of sweeps. Until this number of sweeps
is reached, a preliminary average is displayed.
1088.7531.12
4.228
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
On completion of averaging, ie when the number of sweeps defined with SWEEP COUNT has been
reached, a sliding average given by the following formula is obtained with CONTINUOUS SWEEP
TRACEn =
(N − 1) ⋅ TRACEn - 1 + Meas Value , where
N
Trace
= new trace
Traceold = old trace
N
= SWEEP COUNT
The display "Sweep 200 of 200" then remains constant until there is a new start.
In SINGLE SWEEP mode, SWEEP START initiates n single sweeps. The sweeps are stopped as soon
as the selected number of sweeps has been reached. The number of the current sweep and the total
number of sweeps are shown in the display: "Sweep 3 of 200".
SWEEP
COUNT
The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
used for averaging.
The range for SWEEP COUNT is 0 through 32767. For 0, the ESIB performs
a sliding average over 10 sweeps. For 1, no averaging takes place.
The default setting is 10 sweeps. The programming naturally influences the
sweep duration. The number of sweeps used for averaging is the same for
all 4 traces.
Note :
The setting of the SWEEP COUNT in the trace menu is equivalent
to the setting in the sweep menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
MAX HOLD
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 10
The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max hold mode.
In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each sweep the largest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The
detector is set automatically to MAX PEAK. In this way, the maximum value
of a signal can be determined over several sweeps.
This is especially useful for measurement of modulated or pulsed signals.
The signal spectrum is built up sweep by sweep until all the signal
components have been captured.
Pressing of the MAX HOLD softkey again clears the trace memory and
restarts the max hold mode.
If MAX HOLD is enabled, a new start is made after clearing the trace memory
for each frequency change, (start frequency, stop frequency, center
frequency or frequency span), a reference level change or switching between
linear/logarithmic scales.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE MAXH
1088.7531.12
4.229
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
MIN HOLD
ESIB
The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min hold mode.
In this display mode, the ESIB saves for each sweep the smallest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The
detector is set automatically to MIN PEAK. In this way, the minimum value of
a signal can be determined over several sweeps. This function is, e.g., useful
for making an unmodulated carrier in a signals mixture easier to see on the
display. Noise, interference or modulated signals are suppressed by the MIN
HOLD function, whereas a CW signal maintains a constant level.
Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey clears the trace memory and the minimum
value function starts anew.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE MINH
HOLD CONT
ON
OFF
The HOLD CONT softkey defines whether the traces in the average mode
and min hold/max hold mode are reset after some definite parameter
changes.
OFF
The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes.
ON
This mechanism is switched off.
In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before
results are evaluated (e. g. with markers). For those changes that are known
to require a new measurement (e. g. modification of the span), the trace is
automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous results are
avoided.
This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the
described behavior is unwelcome.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE:HCON ON|OFF
COPY..
The COPY softkey copies the current trace as display on the screen to
another trace memory. A table appears in which the copy procedure can be
selected.
COPY TRACE 1 TO
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
For only one window, the selected trace can be copied to any of the other
trace memories since here, all four traces are displayed in one diagram with
the same frequency boundaries.
In the split screen display, this is only possible as long as the frequencies of
screen A and screen B are identical. If this is not the case, the selected trace
can only be copied to the corresponding trace memory, i.e., trace 1 to trace 3
and trace 2 to trace 4 or vice versa. In this case, only the available trace is
displayed.
After copying, the contents of the destination memory are lost. The
destination memory now changes automatically to view mode with the new
data.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4,
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4
1088.7531.12
4.230
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
Detector Selection
The ESIB detectors are all-digital. The detectors available are the max-peak detector which derives the
maximum value from a number of sample values, the min-peak detector which derivess the minimum
value from a number of sample values and the sampling detector. The sampling detector passes on the
sampled data without modification or performs a data reduction by suppressing non-displayable values.
The peak detectors compare the current level with the maximum/minimum levels of the previously
sampled data. When the number of samples defined by the instrument settings is reached, the samples
are combined as displayable pixels. Each of the 500 pixels of the display therefore represents 1/500 of
the sweep range and so all the individual measurements (frequency samples) that fall within this
subrange in a compressed form. Even though the recording rate is high, there are no recording gaps
thanks to the internal pipeline structure. For each trace display mode, an optimized detector is selected
automatically. Since the peak detectors and the sample detector are connected in parallel, a single
sweep is sufficient for record and display four traces with four detectors.
Peak value detectors
(MAX PEAK / MIN PEAK)
Peak value detectors are implemented with digital comparators.
For each of the levels measured at each of the frequencies
represented by one of the 500 pixels, they determine the
maximum (max peak) of all positive peaks and the minimum (min
peak) of all the negative peaks.
This is repeated for each pixel so that, for wide frequency spans
and inspite of the limited display resolution, a larger number of
measurements than would otherwise be possible can be used to
display the spectrum.
AUTOPEAK detector
The AUTOPEAK detector combines the two peak detectors. The
max-peak detector and min-peak detector determine the
maximum and minimum level over a displayed pixel at the same
time and display it as a common measurement value. The
maximum and minimum level over a frequency point are joined
with a vertical line.
SAMPLE detector
The SAMPLE detector passes on all sampled data without further
evaluation and either displays them directly or, for speed (short
sweep times), first writes them to a memory and subsequently
processes them.
Data reduction, i.e., summing of measurement values of
neighboring frequencies or time samples is not performed here.
If, during a sweep, more measurement values are generated
than can be displayed, measurement values will be lost. Discrete
signals can thus be lost
Therefore, the sampling detector can only be recommended for a
ratio of span-to-resolution bandwidth of up to approximately 250.
To ensure that no signal will be suppressed (example: span 1
MHz --> min. bandwidth 5 kHz).
1088.7531.12
4.231
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
ESIB
RMS detector
The rms detector finds the rms value of the measured values
over a pixel.
The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after the envelope
detection. The linear samples are squared, summed and the
sum is divided through the number of samples (= mean of
squares). With the logarithmic display, the logarithm of the sum
of squares is taken. With the linear display the mean of the
squares is displayed directly. Each pixel represents the total
power of the measured values assigned to the pixel.
The rms detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of
the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or
pulse signal). There is no need for the various waveform
correction factors which are required when other detectors are
used for the power measurement.
Average detector
The average detector averages the measured values over a
pixel.
The ESIB uses the linear display voltage after envelope
detection. The linear samples are summed and the sum is
divided by the number of measurement samples (= linear
average). With the logarithmic display, the logarithm of the
average is taken. With the linear display the average is
displayed directly. Each pixel therefore represents the average
of the measured values assigned the pixel.
The average detector gives the true average of the signal
irrespective of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier,
white noise or pulse signal).
AC video detector
(with option ESIB-B1 only)
The AC video detector finds the difference (max peak – min peak)
of measurement results within a pixel or a result.
For this purpose ESIB uses the linear display voltage after
envelope detection. The max peak detector and the min peak
detector determine the maximum and minimum levels within a
shown measurement point and display it as a common
measurement result. For logarithmic representation, the logarithm
of the difference is formed. For linear representation, the
difference itself is shown. This means that for analyzer operation
each pixel corresponds to the AC value of the measurement
results combined in the pixel. In receiver operation, on the other
hand, the AC value determined during the measurement time is
shown.
Irrespective of the signal form (CW carrier, modulated carrier,
white noise of pulsed signal), the AC video detector always
supplies the AC component of the signal.
If during a frequency sweep the dwell time on a certain frequency
point is not sufficient, this may lead to incorrect results being
displayed.
Notes: During a sweep, the ESIB switches the first oscillator frequency in steps which are smaller than
approximately 1/10 of the bandwidth. This guarantees that the level of a signal is correctly
measured. For narrow bandwidths and wide spans, a very large number of measurement values
are generated. The number of frequency steps is, however, always a multiple of 500 (= number
of displayable points). In the sampling mode, only every nth value is displayed. The quantity n
depends upon the number of measurement values, i.e on the span, resolution bandwidth and
the measurement rate.
For sweep times < 5ms in the time domain, the same detector is used for all active traces.
1088.7531.12
4.232
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
TRACE 1-DETECTOR submenu
DETECTOR
TRACE 1
DETECTOR
AUTO
SELECT
DETECTOR
AUTO PEAK
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the
detector.
Softkey AC VIDEO is available only if the instrument is
equipped with the linear video output (option ESIB-B1)
The detector may be independently selected for each trace.
Mode AUTO SELECT sets the best suitable detector for each
trace display mode (Clear Write, Max Hold oder Min Hold).
Only one of the softkeys for the detectors can be activated at
any one time.
DETECTOR
RMS
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
DETECTOR
AC VIDEO
AUTO
SELECT
The AUTO SELECT softkey (= default) selects the optimum detector for the
selected trace display mode (clear write, max hold, min hold).
Trace-mode
Clear/Write
Average
Max Hold
Min Hold
Detector
Autopeak
Sample
Max Peak
Min Peak
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..4>:AUTO ON|OFF
DETECTOR
AUTOPEAK
The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey selects the autopeak detector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..4> APEak
The DETECTOR MAX PEAK softkey selects the max peak detector. It is
recommended for pulse-like signals.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..4> POSitive
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK
The DETECTOR MIN PEAK softkey selects the min peak detector. Weak
sinewave signals can be brought out clearly against noise by using this
detector. For a composite signal made up of sinewaves and pulse-like-like
signals the pulse signals are suppressed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..4> NEGative
1088.7531.12
4.233
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
DETECTOR
SAMPLE
ESIB
The DETECTOR SAMPLE softkey selects the sample detector.
It is used for measuring uncorrelated signals such as noise. The power can
be determined by means of fixed correction factors for evaluation and the log
amplifier.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DETECTOR
RMS
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4> SAMPle
The DETECTOR RMS softkey activates the rms detector.
The rms detector gives the true power of the signal irrespective of the
waveform. The mean of the squares of all level samples is formed as a pixel
is swept. The sweep time, therefore, determines the number of values
averaged and, with increasing sweep time, better averaging is obtained. The
rms detector is therefore an alternative to averaging over several sweeps
(see TRACE AVERAGE).
In the time domain (SPAN = 0), the rms detector is only available for sweep
times ≥ 5 ms. Moreover, the combination of the rms detector with the
pretrigger function and the gaped sweep function is not permissible.
The video bandwidth has to be set to at least 10 times the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) so that the rms value of the signal is not invalidated by
video filtering.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DETECTOR
AVERAGE
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4> RMS
The DETECTOR AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector.
In contrast to the rms detector, the average detector supplies the straight
average of all the level sampleds as a pixel is swept over.
The same restrictions as those of the rms detector apply (see above).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DETECTOR
AC VIDEO
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4> AVERage
The DETECTOR AC VIDEO softkey activates the AC VIDEO detector.
Irrespective of the signal form, the AC VIDEO detector always supplies the
AC component of the signal. For this purpose the difference is formed of all
maximum and minimum level values collected during the runtime of the pixel
/ the set measurement time. The sweep / measurement time therefore
determines the number of values to be considered, so the AC component is
determined more accurately with increasing sweep / measurement time. The
AC VIDEO detector can thus be used as an alternative for the detection of
modulated signals.
The softkey is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video
output (option ESIB-B1).
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1..4> ACVideo
1088.7531.12
4.234
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
Quasi Analog Display
Normally, when measured values are displayed they are joined together with line segments to form a
trace which is deleted and redrawn after each sweep. When analog measurements are performed, the
persistence of the screen makes it possible to assess the signal’s frequency of occurrence. Frequently
occurring events appear brighter on the screen than events that occur less frequently.
The ANALOG TRACE function simulates an analog display.
In this case, a measured value is represented by a single pixel on the screen. After the trace has been
explicitly cleared with CLEAR / WRITE, this pixel is reset. As the trace is build up from several sweeps,
the frequency distribution is, in effect, indicated by the varying brightness of the trace.
TRACE 1 side menu
ANALOG TR
ON
OFF
The ANALOG TR ON/OFF switches the quasi-analog display mode on and off for
the selected trace
The measurement is always made with the selected detector.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF
Mathematical Functions for Traces
TRACE 1-TRACE MATH submenu:
TRACE
MATH
TRACE MATH
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
The TRACE MATH softkey opens a submenu in which a
differential curve for the selected trace is calculated.
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
T1-T4+REF
-> T1
T1-REF
->T1
ADJUST TO
TRACE
TRACE MATH
OFF
1088.7531.12
4.235
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
TRACE MATH
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
T1-T4+REF
-> T1
T1-REF
->T1
ESIB
The T1-T2+REF, T1-T3+REF, T1-T3+REF and T1-REF softkeys subtract the
traces and add the set level to the difference. If the reference line is switched
on (see key D LINES), the level value of the reference line instead of the
reference level is added to the difference. Thus, the differential curve can be
positioned anywhere on the screen by shifting the reference line. The
difference of the two traces with respect to the reference line is displayed.
The T1-REF softkey subtracts the level of the reference line from the trace
level.
To indicate that the trace is a difference trace, a enhancement label is
displayed at the right margin of the measurement value diagram (1-2, 1-3, 14, 1-R). In TRACE 1 main menu, the TRACE MATH softkey is on a coloured
background to show that the function is being used.
Important: For a display with two measurement windows, not all
combinations are allowed if the sweep data for screen A and
screen B are not the same. Only the traces allowed in the screen
can be combined (in screen A, only trace 1 with trace 3; in
screen B, only trace 2 with trace 4).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1..4>:STATe ON
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1..4>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr>
TRACE MATH
OFF
The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the math function off. The softkey
is only available when a conversion function is enabled.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
ADJUST TO
TRACE
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe OFF
The ADJUST TO TRACE softkey restores the original instrument settings
when the corresponding trace is set to VIEW and the current instrument
settings are different than those of the trace data.
If a trace is frozen with VIEW, changes in the instrument settings can be
made without influencing the trace. An asterisk( * ) at the edge of the display
screen indicates that the current instrument settings are different than those
in effect when the trace was recorded. In this case, the ADJUST TO TRACE
softkey is presented with which the original instrument setting can be
restored.
IEC/IEEE-bus command --
1088.7531.12
4.236
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
Trace Export
TRACE 1 menu:
The ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the active trace in a file with ASCII format.
Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be entered. The
default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured data of the trace are stored.
The function can be configured in the ASCII CONFIG submenu.
ASCII
EXPORT
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1..4,<path>
TRACE 1 menu:
ASCII
CONFIG
ASCII
CONFIG
EDIT PATH
The ASCII CONFIG softkey calls a submenu for various settings for
the TRACE ASCII EXPORT function.
DECIM SEP
.
,
NEW
APPEND
HEADER
ON
OFF
ASCII
COMMENT
.
.
.
EDIT PATH
The EDIT PATH softkey defines the directory in which the file is to be
stored.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
DECIM SEP
.
,
--
The DECIM SEP softkey selects the decimal separator for the ASCII
file. The choice is ’.’ (decimal point) or ’,’ (comma).
This means that the decimal separator used in various language
versions of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can be selected so
that the packages are supported. .
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMM
NEW
APPEND
The APPEND NEW softkey defines whether output data are to be
written to an existing file or a new file.
• With APPEND, the data are added to an existing file.
• With NEW, either a new file is generated or an existing file is
overwritten by storage of the data.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
HEADER
ON
OFF
The HEADER ON/OFF softkey defines whether important instrument
settings should be stored at the beginning of the file.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend ON | OFF
4.237
:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer ON | OFF
E-15
Traces - Analyzer
ASCII
COMMENT
ESIB
The ASCII COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary
concerning the current ASCII data set. A total of 60 characters are
available for this purpose.
IEC\IEEE bus command
:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent ’string’
Structure of the ASCII file:
The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing
the trace data. The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit
The data section starts with the keyword " Trace <n> " (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the
measured data in one or several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a
semicolon.
This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs, eg MS-Excel. It is necessary to
define ’;’ as a separator.
File header
Data section of
the file
Content of file
Description
Type;ESIB7;
Instrument model
Version;2.10;
Firmware version
Date;01.Jul 1999;
Date record storage date
Comment; test
Comment
Mode;Spectrum;
Instrument operating mode
Start;10000;Hz
Stop;100000;Hz
Start/stop of the display range.
Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0,
Center Freq;55000;Hz
Center frequency
Span;90000;Hz
Frequency range (0 Hz for zero span)
Freq Offset;0;Hz
Frequency offset
x-Axis;LIN;
Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
y-Axis;LOG;
Scaling of y axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Ref.Level;-30;dBm
Reference level
Level Offset;0;dB
Level offset
Max Level
Maximium level
Level Range;100;dB
Display range in y direction. Unit: dB for x axis LOG, % for x axis LIN
RF Att;20;dB
Input attenuation
RBW;100000;Hz
Resolution bandwidth
VBW;30000;Hz
Video bandwidth
SWT;0.005;s
Sweep time
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD
Detector;SAMPLE;
Detector set:
AUTOPEAK,MAXPEAK,MINPEAK,AVERAGE, RMS,SAMPLE
Sweep Count;20;
Number of sweeps set
Trace 1:;
Selected trace
x-Unit;Hz;
Unit of x values:
Hz for span > 0; s for span = 0; dBm/dB for statistics measurements
y-Unit;dBm;
Unit of y values:
dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit for y axis LOG or % for y axis
LIN
Values;500;
Number of measurement points
Measured values:
10000;-10.3;-15.7
10180;-11.5;-16.9
10360;-12.0;-17.4
<x value>, <y1>, <y2>
<y2> being available only with AUTOPEAK detector and containing in this
case the smaller of the two measured values for a measurement point.
...;...;
1088.7531.12
4.238
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Traces
Example:
Type;ESIB7;
Version;2.10;
Date;20.Sep 1999;
Comment; test
Mode;Spectrum;
Start;0.000000;Hz
Stop;3500000000.000000;Hz
Center Freq;1750000000.000000;Hz
Span;3500000000.000000;Hz
Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz
x-Axis;LIN;
y-Axis;LOG;
Level Range;100.000000;dB
Ref. Level;-20.000000;dBm
Level Offset;0.000000;dBm
Max. Level;-20.000000;dBm
RF Att;10.000000;dB
RBW;3000000.000000;Hz
VBW;3000000.000000;Hz
SWT;0.005000;s
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;
Detector;AUTOPEAK;
Sweep Count;0;
TRACE 1:
x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBm;
Values;500;
0.000000;-44.465958;-60.190887
7014028.056112;-49.233063;-81.451668
14028056.112224;-75.692101;-101.811501
21042084.168337;-75.147057;-101.229843
28056112.224449;-75.114517;-95.358429
35070140.280561;-71.769005;-100.755981
...
If all traces are to be stored in one file with the header information stored only once, the following
procedure is recommended:
[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]
[ASCII CONFIG] [NEW]
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER ON]
[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
Generate new file
with header
Store trace 1 with header
[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]
[ASCII CONFIG] [APPEND]
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER OFF]
[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
[TRACE 3] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
[TRACE 4] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT]
Append to end of file
without header
Write trace 2 to file
Write trace 3 to file
Write trace 4 to file
1088.7531.12
4.239
E-15
Coupled Settings - Analyzer
ESIB
Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group
Using the SWEEP key group, the parameters are entered which determine the sweep characteristics.
These are the coupled functions resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and sweep time (COUPLING
key), the trigger used for starting the sweep (TRIGGER key) and the type of sweep (SWEEP key).
Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key
The COUPLING key calls a menu for entering the sweep parameters resolution bandwidth (RBW),
video bandwidth (VBW) and sweep time (SWT). The parameters may be coupled as a function of the
span, coupled to each other or set by the user. When working with a split screen display, the settings
always refer to the active window.
The ESIB offers the resolution bandwidths 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 2, 3, 5steps:
The ESIB resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz have been implemented using digital filters with Gaussian
characteristics. They behave like analog filters. The 1-kHz filter has been implemented both as a
decoupled quartz filter and as a digital filter. One of the two filter types can be selected. The bandwidths
from 2 kHz to 30 kHz have been implemented using decoupled quartz filters, the bandwidths between
50 kHz and 5 MHz using decoupled LC filters. These filters consist of 5 circuits, their shape factor is <
12, typ. 9.5.
The 10-MHz filter is a critically coupled LC filter.
For bandwidths up to about 1 kHz, the FFT-algorithm, as compared to other filter methods with identical
settings, offers clear advantages with respect to the measurement time. The reason is that with analog
2
filters the sweep time required for a particular span is proportional to (Span/RBW ). The FFT-algorithm
reduces that time to a value proportional to (Span/RBW).
FFT-filters are provided for bandwiths between 1 Hz and 1kHz as an alternative to the analog filters.
The video bandwidths are available in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10 MHz. They can be set
independent of the resolution bandwidth. Video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 kHz are available for
resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz and video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 MHz are available for
resolution bandwidths greater than or equal to 2 kHz. The video filters are used to smooth the traces.
Small video bandwidths in relation to the resolution bandwidth average out noise peaks pulse-like
signals such that only the average value of the signals is displayed. A large video bandwidth in relation
to the resolution bandwidth is therefore recommended when measuring pulsed signals (VBW ≥ 10 x
RBW) so that the amplitude of pulses can be measured correctly.
1088.7531.12
4.240
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Coupled Settings
Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep
Time
SWEEP COUPLING menu
SWEEP
TRIGGER
SWEEP/
SCAN
RBW
VBW
SWT
COUPLING/
RUN
COUPLED
FUNCTIONS
RES BW
MANUAL
COUPLED
FUNCTIONS
RBW 1 KHZ
ANA
DIG
The COUPLING key calls a menu and a
supplementary menu for setting the resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and their
coupled states.
RES BW
AUTO
RBW<=1 KHZ
NORM
FFT
The AUTO softkeys are used to couple the
functions. The coupling ratios are selected in the
COUPLING RATIO sub-menu.
RES BW
3 dB 6 dB
The MANUAL softkeys request that the respective
parameter be entered in the entry window. This
parameter is not coupled to the other parameters.
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
VIDEO BW
AUTO
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
COUPLING
DEFAULT
COUPLING
RATIO
RES BW
AUTO
MAIN PLL
BANDWIDTH
The RES BW AUTO softkey couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span.
Changing the span causes automatic compensation of the resolution bandwidth.
Automatic coupling of the resolution bandwidth to span is always recommended
when, for the measurement problem on hand, a favorable setting of the resolution
bandwidth in relation to the selected span is desired.
The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO sub-menu.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and the active RBW LED.
The RES BW AUTO softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span >
0 Hz). The softkey is blanked in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON
4.241
E-15
Coupled Settings - Analyzer
RES BW
MANUAL
ESIB
The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry mode for the
resolution bandwidth.
The lower limit of the bandwidth is 1 Hz.
For numerical inputs, the values are always rounded to the next valid
bandwidth. For rollkey or the UP/DOWN key entries, the bandwidth is
adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards.
For manual input of the resolution bandwidth (coupling off), the RBW LED on
the front panel remains off.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution] 1MHz
RBW
3DB
6DB
The RES BW 3DB/6DB softkey switches between 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidths
of the resolution filters.
3-dB bandwidths:
6-dB bandwidths:
1 Hz to 10 MHz i available in steps of 1/2/3/5.
10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1 KHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz,
100 kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz.
The 9 kHz and 120 kHz CISPR bandwidths are only available as 6 dB
bandwidths.
Some of the marker functions are not available when using the 6 dB
bandwidths.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:FILTer 3|6
VIDEO BW
AUTO
The VIDEO BW AUTO softkey couples the video bandwidth of the ESIB to
the resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video
bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
The coupling of the video bandwidth is always recommended when the
maximum sweep time for a selected resolution bandwidth is to be obtained.
Small video bandwidths require longer sweep times due to the longer settling
time. Large bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO menu.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and the lighted VBW
LED on the front panel.
The coupling of the video bandwidth to the resolution filter is also permitted
for display in the time domain (span = 0).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.242
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON
E-15
ESIB
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
Analyzer - Coupled Settings
The VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry for the video
bandwidth.
The video bandwidth can be selected in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10
MHz. For bandwidths up to 1 kHz, the maximum video bandwidth is 10 kHz,
for larger resolution bandwidths, there is no restriction to the video bandwidth.
For numerical entries, rounding is made to the next valid bandwidth. For rollkey or UP/DOWN entries, the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either
downwards or upwards.
For manual input, the video bandwidth (coupling disabled) VBW LED on the
front panel is turned off.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
The SWEEP TIME AUTO softkey couples the sweep time to the span, video
bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). The sweep time is
automatically adjusted whenever the span, resolution bandwidth or video
bandwidth are changed. The ESIB always selects the shortest sweep time
which will not lead to spurious measurements.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and turning on the
SWT LED.
The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz). The
softkey is blanked in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo 10kHz
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
The SWEEP TIME MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry for the sweep
time. At the same time, the coupling of the sweep is cancelled and the SWT
LED is turned off. Other couplings (VIDEO BW, RES BW) remain in effect.
In the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz) and for resolution bandwidths ≥ 1 kHz,
sweep times from 5 ms through 16000 s are allowed in steps that are at most
5% of the sweep time. The digital resolution filters from 10 Hz to 1 kHz allow
a minimum sweep time of 20 ms.
If an FFT-filter is used the sweep time is fixed by the display range and
resolution bandwidth selected and therefore can not be changed.
In the time domain (span = 0 Hz), the sweep time range is 1 µs to 2500 s,
selectable in steps that are at most 5% of the sweep time.
Numerical entries are rounded to the next valid sweep time. For rollkey or
UP/DOWN entries, the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or
upwards.
If the selected sweep time is too small for the selected span and bandwidth,
measurement errors will occur. This happens because the available settling
time for the resolution filter or the video filter is too short. The ESIB, therefore,
outputs UNCAL on the display
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
1088.7531.12
4.243
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME 10s
E-15
Coupled Settings - Analyzer
COUPLING
DEFAULT
ESIB
The COUPLING DEFAULT softkey sets all coupled functions to AUTO. The
RBW / VBW ratio is also set to SINE [1] and the SPAN/RBW ratio is set to 50
in the COUPLING RATIO submenu (default setting, COUPLING RATIO
softkey not illuminated).
The relevant softkeys are then illuminated.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON;
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
RBW
ANA
1KHZ
DIG
The RBW 1kHz ANA/DIG softkey enables either the analog quartz filter
(ANA) or the digital filter (DIG) for the instruments’s resolution bandwidth of 1
kHz. In the default setting, the instrument uses the analog IF filter for the 1kHz bandwidth.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:MODE ANALog | DIGital
1088.7531.12
4.244
E-15
ESIB
RBW <=1KHZ
NORM
FFT
Analyzer - Coupled Settings
The RBW<=1kHz NORM/FFT softkey toggles between fixed filter and FFTfilter.
NORM
For resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz fixed IF-filters are used.
FFT
An FFT is performed. The filtered IF-signal is digitalized by the 3kHz resolution filters and then transformed into a spectrum by
FFT. The transformation range is equal to the selected span but
covers 4 kHz at maximum. If the span is larger than the
transformation range, serveral subsequent transformations are
performed, the results are combined to form a complete
spectrum. The frequency response of the 3-kHz preselection
filter is compensated for so that the amplitude response within
the transformation range is offset. A flattop window serves as a
window in the time domain so that a high amplitude precision
with good selectivity is obtained.
Span:
- minimum display range: 50× resolution bandwidth selected
- maximum display range:
Resolution bwidths > 20 Hz: 2 MHz (500 FFT-transf./sweep
at maximum)
Resolution bwidths < 20Hz: Reduction to 125 kHz
at 1 Hz resolution bandwidth
Level display range: 100 dB at max. With greater spans, the
trace is limited to 100 dB below the
reference level.
Sweep time:
fixed by the bandwidth selected and the
span.
(reason: an FFT-filter represents a block
transformation). The sweep time can not
be changed (softkey inactive).
Detector
All settings of the sample detector are
fixed, no other detector can be selected
(softkeys inactive)
Video bandwidth
not defined for FFT-transf. therefore it can
not be set (softkeys inactive).
Compared to fixed filters, FFT-filters cut sweep times
considerably. For a display range of 50 kHz and a resolution
bandwith of 100 Hz, e. g., the sweep time is reduced from 25 s to
520 ms. FFT-filters are ideal for stationary signals (sinusoidal
signals or signals that are continuously modulated in time). For
burst signals (TDMA) or pulses, fixed filters should be preferred.
The FFT is a block transformation so that the result depends on
the time relation between the dataset to be transformed and the
burst or pulse signal. A ’gated sweep’ measurement for TDMA
signals is therefore not provided if FFT-filters are used.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:MODE:FFT ON|OFF
4.245
E-15
Coupled Settings - Analyzer
MAIN PLL
BANDWIDTH
ESIB
The MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a selection window for setting
the PLL control bandwidth.
MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH
AUTO
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
The first local oscillator is synchronized with the PLL control bandwidth. The
control bandwidth determines the characteristic of the phase noise. A
medium or high control bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency
differences smaller than 10 kHz to the carrier, whereas a low control
bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency differences larger than
100 kHz to the carrier. If the control bandwidth is set unfavorably, the phase
noise is deteriorated.
The PLL bandwidth is set in the AUTO mode depending on the RBW and
SPAN according to the following tables:
MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
SPAN ≤ 100 kHz
and RBW < 3kHz
X
SPAN > 100 kHz
or RBW ≥ 3kHz
X
The setting is chosen such that the phase noise for small spans with small
resolution bandwidth near the carrier is optimized.
For measurements with small span but with a relatively large frequency
difference to the carrier (>100kHz), the automatic bandwidth setting
deteriorates the phase noise relative to the optimal setting. The MAIN PLL
BANDWIDTH softkey allows to by-pass this automatic setting. Optimal
settings are, as a function of the carrier difference @:
MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH
@ ≤ 10 kHz
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW
X
10 kHz < @ < 100 @ ≥ 100 kHz
kHz
X
X
If a larger control bandwidth is needed due to the sweep velocity, the
processor automatically increases the control bandwidth as far as
necessary.
1088.7531.12
4.246
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Coupled Settings
Sweep Coupling Ratio
SWEEP COUPLING-COUPLING RATIO submenu:
COUPLING
RATIO
COUPLING
RATIO
RBW / VBW
SINE [1]
The COUPLING RATIO softkey opens a sub-menu in
which the coupling ratio between resolution bandwidth,
video bandwidth and the span can be defined.
RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1]
These settings are effective only for the selected
parameters in ...AUTO of the main menu.
RBW / VBW
NOISE [10]
RBW / VBW
MANUAL
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]
The softkeys RBW/VBW PULSE, RBW/VBW SINE, RBW/
VBW NOISE, RBW/VBW MANUAL are selection keys.
Only one softkey can be enabled (illuminated) at any one
time.
The same is valid for the softkeys SPAN/RWB AUTO [50]
and SPAN / RWB MANUAL.
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
RBW / VBW
SINE [1]
The RBW / VBW SINE [1] softkey always sets the video bandwidth equal to
the resolution bandwidth.
This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth to video
bandwidth.
This coupling ratio is recommended when sine-wave signals are to be
measured.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio SINe
4.247
E-15
Coupled Settings - Analyzer
RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1]
ESIB
The RBW / VBW PULSE softkey sets the following coupling ratio:
video bandwidth = 10 x resolution bandwidth
or
video bandwidth = 10 MHz (= maximum video bandwidth).
This coupling ratio is recommended when the amplitude of pulsed signals is
to be measured. The IF filter characteristics alone determine the pulse shape.
No additional weighting is provided by the video filter.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command :[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio PULSe
RBW / VBW
NOISE [10]
The RBW / VBW NOISE softkey sets the following coupling ratio:
video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10
At this coupling ratio, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video
section. For noise signals, the ESIB displays the average value.
This softkey is disabled unless VBW AUTO is selected in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio NOISe
RBW / VBW
MANUAL
The RBW / VBW MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the coupling ratio for
resolution bandwidth to video bandwidth.
The range for the RBW/VBW ratio is 0,001 to 1000.
This softkey is disabled unless VBW AUTO is selected in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 10
The SPAN / RBW AUTO [50] softkey sets the following coupling (rounding is
made to the next higher value):
resolution bandwidth = span/50
This coupling corresponds to the default state.
This softkey is disabled unless RBW AUTO is selected in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.02
SPAN / RBW
MANUAL
The SPAN / RBW MANUAL softkey activates the entry for the coupling of
resolution bandwidth and span.
The range for the SPAN/RBW ratio is 1 to 10000.
This softkey is disabled unless RBW AUTO is selected in the main menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.1
1088.7531.12
4.248
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Trigger
Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key
SWEEP TRIGGER menu:
SW EEP
TRIGGER
FREE RUN
TRIGGER
The TRIGGER key opens a menu for selecting the various
trigger sources and the trigger polarity. The active trigger
mode is indicated by illumination of the corresponding
softkey.
VIDEO
SW
SC
LINE
RBW
EXTERN
VBW
SWT
RF POWER
COUPLING/
RUN
For triggering modes in which the trigger threshold can be
entered, the corresponding entry window is activated and, if
appropriate, a horizontal trigger line is displayed.
The FREE RUN, VIDEO, LINE, EXTERN and RF-POWER
softkeys are selection switches. Only one key can be
enabled at any one time (illuminated). For sweep operations
controlled by a gate signal, the FREE RUN setting is the only
setting possible.
If triggering has taken place, the trigger LED is turned on at
the beginning of the sweep and then turned off at the end of
sweep.
TRIGGER
DELAY
To indicate that the ESIB is set for triggering (= not free run),
the enhancement label TRG is shown on the display. If two
measurement windows are displayed, TRG appears next to
the window which is configured for triggering.
SLOPE
POS
NEG
FREE RUN
The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-run sweep mode (default setting),
i.e. the start of a sweep is not explicitly triggered. Once a measurement is
completed, another is started immediately.
IIEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
VIDEO
IMMediate
The VIDEO softkey activates triggering by the displayed voltage.
For the video triggering mode, a level line showing the trigger threshold is
displayed. Using the level line, the threshold can be adjusted with the roll-key
or the UP/DOWN keys.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 50PCT
LINE
The LINE softkey activates triggering derived from the mains (line) frequency.
The power supply generates a trigger pulse at the line frequency which is
used to trigger a new sweep.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce LINE
1088.7531.12
4.249
E-15
Sweep Trigger - Analyzer
EXTERN
ESIB
The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by an external voltage
(-5V...+5V) at the input connector EXT TRIGGER/GATE on the rear panel.
The trigger threshold can be set in an entry window within a range
of -5V...+5V.
External triggering in the sweep mode "gated sweep" (SWEEP SWEEPGATE ON) is not possible, because the EXT TRIG/GATE connector is used
to control the sweep. The softkey is not illuminated in these modes.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel 2.5V
RF POWER
The RF POWER softkey activates triggering of the measurement by signals
which are outside the measurement channel.
The ESIB uses a level detector at the intermediate frequency. The detector
threshold is approximately -20 dBm at the input mixer. This means that the
actual trigger level at the RF input is approx. -20 dBm plus the set RF
attenuation.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is approximately 160 MHz.
Triggering takes place when the trigger threshold is exceeded within a 100
MHz band about the selected frequency. Therefore, the measurement of
noise emissions, e.g., for pulsed carriers, is possible. The carrier itself is
suppressed via the selected resolution filter.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce RFPower
TRIGGER
DELAY
The TRIGGER DELAY softkey activates the entry window for delay time or a
pretrigger.
The triggering is delayed or advanced relative to the trigger signal by the
entered delay time. The delay time can be set in the range from -100 s to 100
s (default = 0 s).
Note: A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in the time domain
(SPAN < 0 Hz) only. The maximum range and the maximum
resolution of the pretrigger is limited by the set sweep time:
max. range = - 499/500 x sweep time
max. resolution = sweep time/500.
Pretriggering is not possible when the rms or the average detector is
activated.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff 500us
SLOPE
POS
NEG
The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey selects the trigger slope.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative trigger signal edge. The
selected setting is illuminated.
The selection is valid for all trigger modes with the exception of FREE RUN.
The default mode is SLOPE POS.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POS |NEG
1088.7531.12
4.250
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key
SWEEP SWEEP menu:
SWEEP
TRIGGER
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
SINGLE
SWEEP
SWEEP/
SCAN
R
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
VBW
SWT
SWEEP
COUNT
COUPLING/
RUN
GAP SWEEP
ON
OFF
The SWEEP key calls a menu in which the type of sweep
(sweep mode) is determined. In split screen mode, the entries
are valid only for the active measurement window.
In the menu, continuous or single sweep mode, gap-sweep
settings or the external gate function can be selected.
The CONTINUOUS SWEEP and SINGLE SWEEP softkeys
are selection switches. Only one softkey can be active at any
one time.
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
GATE
ON
OFF
GATE
SETTINGS
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
CONTINUOUS
SWEEP
The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey sets the continuous sweep mode. This
means, that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger
conditions.
In the case of split screen display with different settings in each measurement
window, screen A is swept first and then screen B. After pressing the softkey,
the sweep is initialized and restarted.
CONTINUOUS SWEEP is the default setting of the ESIB.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
SINGLE
SWEEP
:INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON;
:INITiate
The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts a series of n sweeps according to the
triggering definition. The number of sweeps, n, is determined by the SWEEP
COUNT softkey.
In split screen display mode, the spans of each window are swept
sequentially. If a displayed curve is averaged, the span is swept n times (n =
sweep count). For n = 0, a single sweep takes place.
To indicate that the ESIB is set for single sweep, the enhancment label SGL
is shown on the display.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
1088.7531.12
4.251
:INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF;
:INITiate
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
SWEEPTIME
AUTO
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
ESIB
The SWEEPTIME AUTO and SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkeys activate the
automatic or manual selection of the sweep time. These functions are
identical to the entries in the COUPLING menu (see section "Setting and
Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep Time").
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME 10s
SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF
The SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkey switches off the display during a single
sweep. The trace is displayed when the sweep has been completed.
IEC/IEEE-bus commands
SWEEP
COUNT
:INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF;
:INITiate
The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
performed by the ESIB after the start of a single sweep. If trace average, max
hold or min hold is switched on, this also determines the number of averages
or minimua/maxima that are taken.
Example:
[TRACE1: MAX HOLD]
[SWEEP: SWEEP COUNT: {10} ENTER]
[SINGLE SWEEP]
The ESIB performs the max hold function over 10 sweeps.
The sweep count range is 0 through 32767. For sweep count = 0 or 1, a
sweep is performed. For trace averaging (AVERAGE), sweep count = 0 and
continuous sweep, the ESIB performs a sliding average over 10 sweeps in
average mode. For sweep count = 1, no averaging takes place.
The default setting totals 10 sweeps.
Note:
The setting for the number of sweeps in the TRACE menu is
equivalent to the setting in the SWEEP menu. In SINGLE SWEEP
mode, the measurement is stopped after reaching the chosen
number of sweeps.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.252
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 0
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
Gated Sweep
By using a gate in the sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the
spectrum of pulsed carriers can be displayed without overlaid frequency components caused by
switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be examined when the carrier is inactive. The sweep can be
controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger.
Fig. 4-13
Pulsed signal with GATE OFF
Fig 4-14
TDMA-signal with GATE ON
1088.7531.12
4.253
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
ESIB
The ’gated sweep’ mode is activated by the GATE ON/OFF softkey. The mode is set in the GATE
SETTINGS sub-menu.
SWEEP SWEEP menu:
ON
GATE
OFF
The GATE ON / OFF softkey switches the sweep mode with an internal or
external gate on/off.
When GATE ON is selected, a signal applied to the rear panel connector EXT
TRIGGER/GATE or the internal RF power detector controls the sweep of the
analyzer. The sweep can be stopped and then continued. A switch from an
edge triggered to a level triggered mode can also be made.
Gate Mode LEVEL
Gate Mode EDGE
Delay
Delay Length
RF
ext. Gate
Meas. active
Fig. 4-15
Interaction of the parameters GATE MODE, GATE DELAY and
GATE LENGTH
The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0).
GATE ON is only possible when the trigger mode is set to FREE RUN
(SWEEP TRIGGER menu) .
To indicate that the ESIB is set for sweep mode with external gate, the
enhancement label GAT is displayed on the screen. GAT appears next to the
window for which the gate is configured.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.254
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
SWEEP SWEEP-GATE SETTINGS sub-menu:
GATE
SETTINGS
GATE
SETTINGS
GATE
LEVEL
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
GATE POL
POS
NEG
GATE
DELAY
In the GATE SETTINGS submenu, all settings are made
which are necessary for ’gated sweep’ operation.
On switching to the time domain, the GATE DELAY and
GATE LENGTH times are represented by horizontal time
lines which allow simple adjustment of the gate time.
The softkeys GATE EXTERN and GATE RF POWER provide
alternative settings, only one of them can be active at one
time.
GATE
LENGTH
GATE
EXTERN
GATE
RF POWER
GATE
ADJUST
GATE
LEVEL
The GATE LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for defining the
threshold value of the external gate signal.
The threshold can be set between -5V and +5V.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel 3V
The GATE MODE LEVEL/EDGE softkey selects the trigger mode. The sweep
mode GATE can be operated either as level or as edge triggered.
For level triggering, the GATE LENGTH softkey is deactivated and can not be
used.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE
GATE POL
POS
NEG
The GATE POL softkey determines the polarity of the GATE control line.
If level triggering with GATE POL POS is set, the sweep is stopped when the
gate signal is a logic ´ 0 ' (input signal < gate level) at the EXT
TRIGGER/GATE input and then, when the gate signal goes to a logic ' 1 ', the
sweep is continued after a delay time of GATE DELAY.
In the case of edge triggering, the sweep is continued on a ' 0 ' to ' 1'
transition for the duration of GATE LENGTH after a delay (GATE DELAY) has
elapsed.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POS|NEG
1088.7531.12
4.255
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
GATE
DELAY
The GATE DELAY softkey activates the entry window for setting the delay
time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep.
This may be usefull in allowing for a delay between the gate signal and the
stabilization of an RF carrier.
Gate delay values can be selected between 1 µs and 100 s. The resolution is
dependent upon the absolute value of the delay time:
Gate delay
Resolution
0 - 500 µs
1 µs
0.5 - 5 ms
5 µs
5 - 50 ms
50 µs
50 - 500 ms
500 µs
0.5 - 5 s
5 ms
5 - 50 s
50 ms
50 - 100 s
500 ms
In the time domain, a time line is displayed separated from the trigger point by
the gate delay time. This simplifies the adjustment of the necessary delay
time.
The values for GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH are displayed by two time
lines. The duration of the active sweep for span > 0 (continuation of sweep:
GATE DELAY line, stopping of sweep: GATE LENGTH line) is described by
these two lines. A change in parameters causes a shift of the corresponding
line position. After switching to span > 0, the selected times for the gated
sweep are effective.
IEC-bus command
GATE
LENGTH
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 100us
The GATE LENGTH softkey activates the entry window for defining the ESIB
sweep duration.
GATE LENGTH can be set to values between 1µs and 100 s. The resolution
is dependent upon the absolute value of the gate length:
Gate length
Resolution
0 - 500 µs
1 µs
0.5 - 5 ms
5 µs
5 - 50 ms
50 µs
50 - 500 ms
500 µs
0.5 - 5 s
5 ms
5 - 50 s
50 ms
50 - 100 s
500 ms
In the time domain (ZERO SPAN), a time line is displayed separated from the
GATE DELAY time by the GATE LENGTH time.
The softkey is only available for the GATE MODE EDGE setting (edge
triggering). It is disabled for the GATE MODE LEVEL setting (level triggering).
IEC/IEEE-bus command
GATE
EXTERN
The GATE EXTERN softkey selects a signal applied to the EXT
TRIGGER/GATE connector on the rear panel of the instrument as a gate
source.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
GATE
RF POWER
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXT
The GATE RF POWER softkey selects the internal RF power detector as a
gate source.
IEC-bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 10ms
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce RFPower
4.256
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
Setting the Gate Times
SWEEP SWEEP- GATE SETTINGS - GATE ADJUST submenu:
GATE
ADJUST
GATE
ADJUST
GATE
LEVEL
The GATE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu comprising all
softkeys that are used to set the parameters relevant for the
’gated sweep’ function.
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
On pressing this softkey, the display is switched to the time
domain (zero span setting) so that all necessary times can be
checked by means of cursor lines.
GATE POL
POS
NEG
GATE
DELAY
GATE
LENGTH
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL
RES BW
MANUAL
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
VIDEO BW
AUTO
The values for Res BW, Video BW and sweep time are taken
from the corresponding settings in the frequency domain.
To make sure that the times can be set correctly
corresponding to the conditions in the frequency domain, the
settings for the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth
should not be changed.
The sweep time must be selected such that, e. g., a full burst
is displayed. It usually differs from the sweep time in the
frequency range.
Finally, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH can be used to
set the times in such a way that the desired section in the
spectral range is covered.
On quitting the submenu, the original settings in the
frequency range are restored so that the measurement can
be directly performed with the required parameters.
Measurement example:
The modulation spectrum of a GSM or PCS1900 signal to be measured using the ’gated sweep’
function. The signal is generated by the test sender SME03. Its RF-output is directly connected to the
RF input of the ESIB.
Settings on the SME03:
FREQ:
Level:
Digital Mod:
Source:
Level Attenuation:
802 MHz
0 dBm: Return
Select: GMSK: Select
Select: PRBS: Select: Return
Select: 60 dB: Return
The SME03 provides a GMSK-modulated TDMA-signal (GSM)
1088.7531.12
4.257
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
ESIB
Operation steps on the ESIB:
[PRESET]
[MODE]
[↑]
[CENTER:
[SPAN
[REF LVL:
[COUPLING:
[TRACE 1:
[SWEEP:
ANALYZER
{802} MHz]
{3.6} MHz]
{0} dBm: RF ATTEN MANUAL: {10} dB]
RES BW MANUAL: {30} kHz]
DETECTOR: RMS]
SWEEPTIME MANUAL: {50} ms;
GATE ON
GATE SETTINGS: GATE MODE EDGE: GATE POL POS: GATE RF POWER
GATE ADJUST: SWEEPTIME MANUAL {1} ms: GATE DELAY {300} µs:
GATE LENGTH: {250} µs]
Note:
[KEY]
{Number}
SOFTKEY
Menu called by the KEY. All indications inside the bracket refer to this menu.
Numeric value to be entered for the corresponding parameter
Softkey used to select a parameter or enter a value.
The following figure shows the screen display for gate parameter setting: The vertical lines for gate
delay (GL) and gate length (GL) can be adapted to the burst signal by entering numbers or with the
rollkey.
Fig. 4-16
Setting the GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH times in the time domain using the GD
and GL lines
On quitting the menu GATE ADJUST, the ESIB returns to spectral representation.
1088.7531.12
4.258
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep
For measurements in the time domain, the GAP SWEEP function offers a high degree of flexibility with
regard to the display of measurement data. With the PRE TRIGGER softkey, it is possible to display
measurements taken before the trigger time. With the GAP TIME softkey, the measurements within a
predefined time range can be blanked. Thus, it is possible to display the rising and falling edge of a
signal with high resolution on a single diagram.
Displayed picture
Displayed picture
(not displayed)
Trigger
Pre-Trigger
Time
Fig 4-17
Trigger to Gap
Time
Gap
Time
Trace blanking in sweep mode.– Gap Sweep
RBW
VBW
SWT
Ref Lev
-10.0 dBm
Span 0 Hz
Fig. 4-18
1088.7531.12
1 MHz
300 kHz
800 µs
80 µs / Div
RF Att 20 dB
Unit
(dBm)
Center 914 MHz
Display of a burst without gaps
4.259
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
ESIB
RBW
VBW
SWT
Ref Lev
-10.0 dBm
Span 0 Hz
Fig. 4-19
50 us / Div
RF Att 20 dB
100 kHz
100 kHz
500 us
Unit
(dBm)
Center 914 MHz
Display of a burst with a gap
The GAP SWEEP measurement is activated by the GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey. The mode settings
are made in the GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu.
SWEEP SWEEP menu:
GAP SWEEP
ON
OFF
The GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey switches the GAP SWEEP measurement
on/off.
The softkey is available only in the time domain.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
1088.7531.12
4.260
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Analyzer - Sweep Control
SWEEP SWEEP-GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu:
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
TRIGGER
LEVEL
PRE
TRIGGER
The GAP SWEEP SETTINGS softkey opens a sub-menu in
which the parameters for the gap can be selected.
The trigger time corresponds to t = 0. Events occurring
before the trigger time are displayed in negative time.
TRG TO GAP
TIME
GAP
LENGTH
TRIGGER
LEVEL
The TRIGGER LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for trigger level.
This function corresponds to the setting in the trigger menu.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 50PCT
PRE
TRIGGER
The PRE TRIGGER softkey activates the entry window for the pre-trigger
time. The pre-trigger time defines the separation between the left edge of the
grid and the trigger time (t = 0).
At the same time the gap sweep is switched on (exception : entry t = 0)
The minimum pre-trigger time is −100 s, the maximum pre-trigger time
depends on the sweep time and the trigger to gap time (max = 100 s). The
maximum resolution is 50 ns.
The PRE TRIGGER value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0)
as well as in the time domain and GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It is, however,
only effective when the GAP SWEEP measurement is enabled.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 100us
1088.7531.12
4.261
E-15
Sweep Control - Analyzer
TRG TO GAP
TIME
ESIB
The TRG TO GAP TIME softkey opens an entry window for defining the
distance between the trigger time and the beginning of the gap.
The TRIGGER TO GAP TIME range is from 0 to 100 s with a resolution of 50
ns. The length of the gap is defined by GAP LENGTH. If the GAP LENGTH is
0 s, the entered value of TRG TO GAP TIME is only stored.
The TRG TO GAP TIME value can be entered in the frequency domain (span
> 0) as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has
an effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 50us
GAP
LENGTH
The GAP LENGTH softkey activates the entry window for defining the gap
within which the measurement values are to be blanked.
The beginning of the gap is defined by TRG TO GAP TIME.
GAP LENGTH can be set to values between 150 ns and 100 s in 1/2/3/5
steps. The resolution is dependent upon the absolute value of the gap length:
Gap length
150 ns - 50 µs
50 - 500 µs
0.5 - 5 ms
5 - 50 ms
50 - 500 ms
0.5 - 5 s
5 - 50 s
50 - 100 s
Resolution
50 ns
500 ns
5 µs
50 µs
500 µs
5 ms
50 ms
500 ms
The GAP LENGTH value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0)
as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has an
effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on.
IEC/IEEE-bus command
:[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 400us
1088.7531.12
4.262
E-15
ESIB
Tracking generator
Tracking Generator Option
In the normal mode, the tracking generator sends a signal exactly at the input frequency of the
instrument without a frequency offset.
For frequency-converting measurements it is possible to set a constant frequency offset of ±200 MHz
between the output signal of the tracking generator and the receive frequency of the instrument.
Also, two analog input signals can be used to I/Q or AM and BB-FM modulate the output signal (options
FSE-B9, FSE-B11).
The output level is level-controlled and can be set from -20 to 0 dBm in 0.1-dB steps The level control
can also be operated with external detectors. When the tracking generator is equipped with the optional
attenuator, the setting range is extended from -90 dBm to 0 dBm.
The tracking generator can be used in all operating modes. The recording of test setup calibration
values (SOURCE CAL) and the normalization with this correction values (NORMALIZE) is only possible
in operating mode ANALYZER MODE.
SYSTEM MODE menu:
CONFIGURATION
MODE
ANALYZER
MODE
The MODE key activates the menu in which the
submenu for setting the tracking generator can be
selected in addition to different operating modes.
EMI
RECEIVER
SE
P
TRACKING
GENERATOR
VECTOR
ANALYZER
.
.
1088.7531.12
4.263
E-15
Tracking generator
ESIB
Tracking Generator Settings
SYSTEM MODE menu:
TRACKING
GENERATOR
TRACKING
GENERATOR
The TRACKING GENERATOR softkey opens a menu for
setting the functions of the tracking generator.
SOURCE
ON
OFF
SOURCE
POWER
POWER
OFFSET
SOURCE
CAL
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
MODULATION
.
.
.
SOURCE
ON / OFF
The SOURCE ON/OFF softkey switches the tracking generator on or off.
Default setting is OFF
IEC/IEEE bus command
SOURCE
POWER
:OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF
The SOURCE POWER softkey activates the entry of the tracking generator
output level.
The output level can be set from 0 dBm to -20 dBm in 0.1-dB steps. The
setting range is extended to -90 dBm when the tracking generator is equipped
with the optional attenuator FSE-B12.
If the tracking generator is off, it is automatically switched on by the SOURCE
PWR softkey.
Default setting is -20 dBm.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <num_value>
POWER
OFFSET
The POWER OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a constant level offset of
the tracking generator.
With this offset it is possible to consider attenuators or amplifiers at the output
connector of the tracking generator during the input or output of output levels,
for example.
The permissible setting range is -200 dB to +200 dB in 0.1-dB steps. Positive
offsets apply to a subsequent amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator.
Default setting is 0 dB.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <num_value>
1088.7531.12
4.264
E-15
ESIB
Tracking generator - Transmission measurement
Transmission Measurement
In this measurement, the transmission characteristic of a two-port network is measured. The built-in
tracking generator is the a signal source. The tracking generator is connected to the input of the DUT.
The input of the instrument is connected to the output of the DUT.
GEN OUTPUT
RF INPUT
DUT
Fig. 4-20
Test setup for reflection measurements
Calibration can be carried out to allow for the effects from the test setup (eg. frequency response of
connecting cables).
Calibration of the Transmission Measurement
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:
SOURCE
CAL
SOURCE
CAL
CAL
TRANS
The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu with the
calibration functions for
transmission and reflection
measurements.
CAL REFL
SHORT
The calibration for the reflection measurement is described
of the following sections .
CAL REFL
OPEN
To carrry out a calibration for transmission measurements
the whole test setup is through-connected (THRU).
REF VALUE
POSITION
REF VALUE
NORMALIZE
RECALL
1088.7531.12
4.265
E-15
Transmission measurement - Tracking generator
CAL
TRANS
ESIB
The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration for the transmission
measurement.
It starts a sweep that records a reference curve. This trace is then used to
obtain the differences to the normalized values.
Fig. 4-21 Trace of a transmission calibration procedure
During the calibration sweep the following message is displayed:
SOURCE CAL
in progress
ABORT
After the calibration sweep the following message is displayed:
NOTE
Calibration complete
ABORT
This message is cleared after approx. 3 seconds.
By saving and recalling the reference data set with the SAVE and RECALL
keys, several calibration datasets can be saved and, then, if necessary, any of
these sets can be selected without going through a new calibration routine.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission
:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough
1088.7531.12
4.266
E-15
ESIB
Tracking generator - Transmission measurement
Normalization
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR -SOURCE CAL menu:
NORMALIZE
The NORMALIZE softkey switches the normalization on or off. The softkey is
only enabled if the memory contains a correction trace.
If no reference line is switched on when activating the normalization, all
measured values are with reference to the top grid line. The effects of the
test setup is corrected in such a way that the measured values are displayed
at the top grid margin.
Fig. 4-22
Normalized display
In SPLIT SCREEN mode, normalization is switched on in the currently active
screen. Different types of normalization can be activated in the two split
screens.
Normalization is aborted when the ANALYZER operating mode is quit but
can be switched on again as long as the reference trace stored in the
memory has not been overwritten.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
:[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF
4.267
E-15
Transmission measurement - Tracking generator
ESIB
It is now possible to shift the relative reference point within the grid by using the REF VALUE POSITION
softkey. This means that the trace can be shifted from the upper edge of the grid towards the center of
the grid:
REF VALUE
POSITION
The REF VALUE POSITION softkey (reference position) marks a reference
position in the active screen at which normalization is performed (difference
between trace and reference trace).
If no reference line is switched on, the softkey switches on a reference line
and activates the input of its position. The line can be moved within the grid
limits.
The reference line is switched off by pressing the softkey again.
The function of the reference line is explained in section "Calibration Method"
Fig. 4-23
Normalized measurement, shifted with REF POSITION 50 %
IEC/IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1..4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
0 to 100PCT
1088.7531.12
4.268
E-15
ESIB
REF VALUE
Tracking generator - Transmission measurement
The REF VALUE softkey activates the entry of a level difference which is
assigned to the reference line.
With normalization switched on, all measured values are displayed relative
to the reference line, or if the latter is switched off relative to the top grid line
which corresponds to 0 dB with default setting.
REF VALUE always refers to the ative screen.
Fig. 4-24
1088.7531.12
Measurement with REF VALUE 20 dB and REF VALUE
POSITION 50%
4.269
E-15
Transmission measurement - Tracking generator
ESIB
If, after source calibration, a 10 dB attenuator is inserted into the signal
path between DUT and analyzer input, the measurement trace will be
moved down by 10 dB. Entering a REF VALUE of –10 dB then moves the
reference line down 10 dB. This means that the measured trace and the
reference trace coincide again.
After the reference line has been moved by entering a REF VALUE of –10
dB, deviations from the nominal power level can then be displayed with a
high resolution (e.g. 1 dB/div). The power is still displayed in absolute
values, which means that in the above example 1 dB below the nominal
power (reference line) is equivalent to an attenuation of 11 dB.
Fig. 4-25
Measurement of a 10dB attenuator pad with 1 dB / Div
IEC/IEEE bus command
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
<num_value>
RECALL
The RECALL softkey restores the instrument setting that were used during
calibration.
This can be useful if the device setting was changed after calibration (eg
center frequency setting, frequency deviation, reference level, etc. ).
The softkey is only offered if:
• the analyzer mode has been selected
• the memory contains a calibration data set.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.270
:[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall
E-15
ESIB
Frequency Converting Measurements
Reflection Measurements
Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out with a reflection-coefficient bridge.
GEN OUTPUT
RF INPUT
BRIDGE
DUT
Fig. 4-26
Test setup for reflection measurements
Calibration of Reflection Measurement
This calibration procedure essentially corresponds to that of the transmission measurement.
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING-SOURCE CAL submenu
CAL REFL
OPEN
The CAL REFL OPEN softkey starts the open-circuit calibration.
During calibration the following message is displayed
SOURCE CAL
in progress
ABORT
CAL REFL
SHORT
IEC/IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod REFLexion
:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN
The CAL REFL SHORT softkey starts the short-circuit calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration
curve is formed by averaging the two measurements and is stored in the
memory. The order of measurements is optional.
The completion of the calibration is indicated by
NOTE
calibration complete
OK
The display is cleared after 3 seconds.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod REFLexion
:[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough
1088.7531.12
4.271
E-15
Functioning of Calibration - Tracking generator
ESIB
Calibration Methods
Calibration means forming the difference between current measured values and a reference curve, no
matter what the selected measurement type is (transmission/reflection). The hardware settings used for
measuring the reference curve are included in the reference dataset.
When normalization is switched on, a wide range of device settings can be changed without aborting
normalization. In other words, the number of repeat normalizations is kept to a minimum.
The reference dataset (trace with 500 measured values) is stored internally as a table of 500 points
(frequency/level).
Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current device setting are calculated
automatically. For small spans, a linear interpolation is used. If the span is increased, , the values at the
left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated out to the new start or stop frequency; in
other words, additional linearly extrapolated values are added to the reference dataset.
An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy. This enhancement
label is displayed at the right display margin when normalization is switched on and in case of an error
from the reference setting. Three accuracy levels are defined:
Table 4-1
Measurement accuracy levels
Accuracy
Enhancement
label
Reason/Limitation
High
NOR
No difference between reference setting and measurement
Medium
APP
(approximation)
Changes in the following settings:
• coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT)
• reference level, RF attenuation
• start or stop frequency
• output level of tracking generator
• frequency offset of tracking generator
• detector (max peak, min peak, sample...)
Change of frequency:
• at most 500 frozen continuation points within the set sweep limits (corresponds to
a doubling of the span)
-
Abortion of
calibration
• more than 500 frozen points within the set sweep limits (span doubling)
Note: At a reference level (REF LEVEL) of -10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the
same value the instrument operates without a headroom. ie the instrument is in danger of being
overloaded by any signal whose amplitude exeeds the reference line. In this case, either the
message "OVLD" for overload is displayed in the status line or the display range is exceeded
(clipping the top of the trace = Overrange).
This overload can be avoided as follows:
• Reducing the output level of the tracking generator (SOURCE POWER, SYSTEM-MODETRACKING GENERATOR menu)
• Increasing the reference level (REF LEVEL, LEVEL-REF menu)
1088.7531.12
4.272
E-15
ESIB
Tracking generator - Frequency Converting Measurements
Frequency-Converting Measurements
For frequency-converting measurements (eg on converters) the tracking generator is able to set a
constant frequency offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the receive
frequency of the instrument. Up to an output frequency of 200 MHz the measurement can be carried out
in inverted and normal position.
GEN OUTPUT
RF INPUT
DUT
Fig. 4-27
Test setup for frequency-converting measurements
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:
FREQUENCY
OFFSET
The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the entry of the frequency
offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the input
frequency of the instrument. The setting range is ±200 MHz in 1-Hz steps.
The default setting is 0 Hz.
If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates
an output signal frequency above the receive frequency of the instrument.
With a negative frequency offset it generates a signal frequency below the
receive frequency of the instrument. The output frequency of the tracking
generator is calculated as follows:
Tracking generator frequency = receive frequency + frequency offset.
A frequency offset cannot be entered if an external I/Q or FM modulation is
switched on. In this case, the FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey is blocked.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet <numeric value>
1088.7531.12
4.273
E-15
External Modulation - Tracking generator
ESIB
External Modulation of Tracking Generator
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:
MODULATION
MODULATION
The MODULATION softkey opens a submenu for
selecting the different modulation types.
EXT AM
The time characteristic of the output signal of the tracking
generator can be varied by applying external signals (input
voltage range -1 V to +1 V).
EXT ALC
EXT FM
The functions for amplitude and frequency modulation and
for external level control are always available.
EXT I/Q
The function IQ modulation is only available in models of
tracking generators that are equipped with the IQ
modulator (FSE-B9 and FSE-B11).
Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as
signal inputs. Their function changes depending on
selected modulation type:
TG-INPUT I / AM / ALC and
TG-INPUT Q / FM
The types of modulation can partly be combined with each other and with the frequency offset function.
The following table shows which modulation types can be selected simultaneously and which can be
combined with the frequency offset function.
Table 4-2
Simultaneous modulation types (tracking generator)
Modulation
Frequency
offset
Frequency offset
EXT AM
•
EXT ALC
•
EXT FM
•
EXT AM
EXT ALC
EXT FM
•
•
•
EXT I/Q
•
•
EXT I/Q
• modulations can be combined
1088.7531.12
4.274
E-15
ESIB
EXT AM
Tracking generator - External modulation
The EXT AM softkey activates AM modulation of the tracking generator
output signal.
The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT AM connector. The
maximum possible modulation depth is 80% which corresponds to an input
voltage of 0.8 V.
Switching on external AM deactivates the following functions:
– active external level control
– active I/Q modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command
:SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF
The EXT ALC softkey activates the external level control.
EXT ALC
In case of external level control the output level of the tracking generator is
determined from the signal of an external detector. The external detector
has to supply a negative voltage in the range of -0.1 to -1 V which is applied
to the TG-INPUT ALC connector. The setting of the output level is the same
as that of the internal level control but the output level depends on the
external detector.
Switching on an external level control deactivates the following functions:
– active external AM
– active I/Q modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command
EXT FM
:SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INT | EXT
The EXT FM softkey activates FM modulation of the tracking generator
output signal.
The modulation frequency range is 1 kHz to 100 kHz, the deviation is
approx. 1 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V.
The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT FM connector.
Switching on external FM deactivates the following function:
– active I/Q modulation.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.275
:SOURce:FM:STATe ON | OFF
E-15
External Modulation - Tracking generator
EXT I/Q
ESIB
The EXT I/Q softkey is only offered with I/Q modulator option built-in. It
activates external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator (FSE-B9 and
FSE B-11).
The modulation signals are connected to the two input connectors TGINPUT IN and TG-INPUT Q at the rear of the unit. The input voltage range
is ±1 V into 50 Ω.
Switching on external I/Q modulation deactivates the following functions:
– active external AM
– active external level control
– active external FM or
– a level offset.
Functional description of quadrature modulator:
I channel
0°
I mod
RF IN
RF OUT
90°
Q channel
Q mod
Fig. 4-28
I/Q modulation
I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator.
The RF signal is divided into the two orthogonal components, I and Q
(inphase and quadrature phase). Amplitude and phase are controlled in
each path by the I and Q modulation signal. Adding the two components
generates an RF output signal whose amplitude and phase can be
controlled.
IEC/IEEE bus command
1088.7531.12
4.276
:SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF
E-15
ESIB
Contents - Remote Control - Basics
Contents - Chapter 5 "Remote Control - "Basics"
5 Remote Control - Basics..................................................................................... 5.1
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 5.1
Brief Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 5.2
Switchover to Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 5.2
Indications during Remote Control .......................................................................................... 5.2
Remote Control via IEC Bus.................................................................................................... 5.3
Setting the Device Address ........................................................................................... 5.3
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.3
Remote Control via RS-232-Interface ..................................................................................... 5.4
Setting the Transmission Parameters ........................................................................... 5.4
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.4
Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 5.4
Remote Control via RSIB Interface ......................................................................................... 5.5
Windows Environment .................................................................................................. 5.5
Unix Enviroment ............................................................................................................ 5.5
Remote Control ............................................................................................................. 5.5
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.5
Messages.......................................................................................................................................... 5.6
IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages.......................................................................................... 5.6
RSIB Interface Messages........................................................................................................ 5.6
Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ........................................................ 5.7
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages ............................................................................. 5.8
SCPI Introduction..................................................................................................................... 5.8
Structure of a Command ......................................................................................................... 5.8
Structure of a Command Line................................................................................................ 5.11
Responses to Queries ........................................................................................................... 5.11
Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 5.12
Overview of Syntax Elements................................................................................................ 5.13
Instrument Model and Command Processing ............................................................................ 5.14
Input Unit ............................................................................................................................... 5.14
Command Recognition .......................................................................................................... 5.15
Data Set and Instrument Hardware ....................................................................................... 5.15
Status Reporting System ....................................................................................................... 5.15
Output Unit............................................................................................................................. 5.16
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization.......................................................... 5.16
Status Reporting System .............................................................................................................. 5.17
Structure of an SCPI Status Register .................................................................................... 5.17
Overview of the Status Registers .......................................................................................... 5.19
Description of the Status Registers ....................................................................................... 5.20
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ................................ 5.20
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)....................................................... 5.21
Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)..................... 5.21
STATus:OPERation Register ...................................................................................... 5.22
STATus:QUEStionable Register ................................................................................. 5.23
STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register ................................................................. 5.24
1088.7531.12
I-5.1
E-1
Contents - Remote Control - Basics
ESIB
STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register............................................................. 5.25
STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register ........................................................................ 5.26
STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register ................................................................. 5.27
STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register .................................................................... 5.28
STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register ...................................................................... 5.29
STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register ........................................................... 5.30
Application of the Status Reporting Systems......................................................................... 5.31
Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure ........................................... 5.31
Serial Poll .................................................................................................................... 5.31
Parallel Poll.................................................................................................................. 5.32
Query by Means of Commands................................................................................... 5.32
Error-Queue Query...................................................................................................... 5.32
Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System................................................................. 5.33
1088.7531.12
I-5.2
E-1
ESIB
Introduction
5 Remote Control - Basics
In this chapter you find:
• instructions how to put the ESIB into operation via remote control,
• a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments. This includes the description
of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard, the description of command
execution and of the status registers,
• diagrams and tables describing the status registers used in the ESIB.
In chapter 6, all remote control functions are described in detail. The subsystems are listed by
alphabetical order according to SCPI. All commands and their parameters are listed by alphabetical
order in the command list at the end of chapter 6.
Program examples for the ESIB can be found in chapter 7.
The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in chapter 8.
Introduction
The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 and
two RS-232 interfaces. The connector is located at the rear of the instrument and permits to connect a
controller for remote control.
The internal controller function may also be used as a controller (see chapter 1, section "Controller
function).
In addition, the instrument is equipped with an RSIB interface that allows instrument control by Visual
C++ and Visual Basic programs
The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of
device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers (see section "SCPI Introduction").
This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC-bus programming and operation of the controller. A
description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals. The RSIB interface
functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National
Instruments. The functions supported by the DLLs are listed in chapter 8.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of
the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers. Detailed
program examples of the main functions are to be found in chapter 7.
The program examples for IEC-bus programming are all written in Quick BASIC.
1088.7531.12
5.1
E-16
Brief Instructions
ESIB
Brief Instructions
The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the
instrument and setting of its basic functions. As a prerequisite, the IEC-bus address, which is factory-set
to 20, must not have been changed.
1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC-bus cable.
2. Write and start the following program on the controller:
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
IBFIND("DEV1", receiver%)
IBPAD(receiver%, 20)
IBWRT(receiver%, "*RST;*CLS")
IBWRT(receiver%, ’FREQ:CENT 100MHz’)
IBWRT(receiver%, ’INP:ATT 30DB’)
IBWRT(receiver%, ’DET:REC AVER’)
IBWRT(receiver%, ’*TRG’)
’Open port to the instrument
’Inform controller about instrument address
’Reset instrument
’Set receiver frequency to 100 MHz
’Set RF attenuation to 30 dB
’Select average detector
’Start level measurement
The receiver measures the level at 100 MHz.
3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel
Switchover to Remote Control
On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be
operated via the front panel.
It is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state)
IEC-bus
as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
RS-232
as soon as it receives the command ’@REM’ from a controller.
RSIB
as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via remote control interfaces. Switching
from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument
settings.
Indications during Remote Control
Remote control mode is indicated by the LED "REMOTE" on the instrument’s front panel. In this mode
the softkeys, the function fields and the diagram labelling on the display are not shown.
Note: Command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON activates all indications during remote control to
check the instrument settings.
1088.7531.12
5.2
E-16
ESIB
Switchover to Remote Control
Remote Control via IEC Bus
Setting the Device Address
In order to operate the instrument via the IEC-bus, it must be addressed using the set IEC-bus address.
The IEC-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the SETUP GENERAL SETUP menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 31 are permissible.
Manually:
½ Call SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu
½ Enter desired address in table GPIB ADDRESS
½ Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER).
Via IEC bus:
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
IBFIND("DEV1", receiver%)
’Open port to the instrument
IBPAD(receiver%, 20)
’Inform controller about old address
IBWRT(receiver%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18")’Set instrument to new address
IBPAD(receiver%, 18)
’Inform controller about new address
Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus.
Manually:
½ Press the LOCAL key.
Notes:
– Before switchover, command processing must be completed as
otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.
– The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO
(see chapter 8) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In
this case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC
bus.
– The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN
line of the IEC bus (see chapter 8).
Via IEC bus:
1088.7531.12
...
CALL IBLOC(receiver%)
...
5.3
’Set instrument to manual operation.
E-16
Switchover to Remote Control
ESIB
Remote Control via RS-232-Interface
Setting the Transmission Parameters
To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller
should have the same setting. Parameters can be manually changed in menu SETUP-GENERAL
SETUP in table COM PORT 1/2 or via remote control using the command
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1|2:... .
The transmission parameters of the interfaces COM1 and COM2 are factory-set to the following values:
baudrate = 9600, data bits = 8, stop bits = 1, parity = NONE and owner = INSTRUMENT.
Manually:
Setting interface COM1|2
½ Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu
½ Select desired baudrate, bits, stopbit, parity in table COM PORT 1/2.
½ Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER).
Return to Manual Operation
Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or via RS-232 interface.
Manually:
½ Press the LOCAL key.
Notes:
Before switchover, command processing must be completed as
otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.
– The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO
(see chapter 8) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In this
case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via remote
control.
– The LOCAL key can be enabled again by sending the control
codes "@LOC" via RS-232 (see chapter 8).
Via RS-232:
...
V24puts(port, ’@LOC’);
...
Set instrument to manual operation.
Limitations
The following limitations apply if the unit is remote-controlled via the RS-232-C interface:
− No interface messages, some control codes are defined (see chapter 8).
− Only the Common Commands *OPC? can be used for command synchronization, *WAI and *OPC
are not available.
− Block data cannot be transmitted.
When Windows NT is booted, data are output via the COM interface because of automatic external
device recognition. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the input buffer of the controller before remote
operation of the instrument via the COM interface.
1088.7531.12
5.4
E-16
ESIB
Switchover to Remote Control
Remote Control via RSIB Interface
Windows Environment
To access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the DLLs should be installed in the
corresponding directories:
•RSIB.DLL in Windows NT system directory or control application directory.
• RSIB32.DLL in Windows NT system32 directory or control application directory.
On the measuring instrument the DLL is already installed in the corresponding directory.
Unix Enviroment
In order to access the measuring equipment via the RSIB interface, copy the librsib.so.X.Y file to a
directory for which the control application has read rights. X.Y in the file name indicates the version
number of the library, for example 1.0 (for details see Chapter 8).
Remote Control
The control is performed with Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs. The local link to the internal
controller is established with the name ’@local. If a remote controller is used, the instrument IP address
is to be indicated here.
Via VisualBasic:
internal controller:
ud = RSDLLibfind (’@local’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
remote controller:
ud = RSDLLibfind (’82.1.1.200’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
Return to Manual Operation
The return to manual operation can be performed via the front panel (LOCAL key) or the RSIB interface.
Manually:
½ Press the LOCAL key.
Note:
Via RSIB:
1088.7531.12
Before switchover, command processing must be completed as
otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.
...
ud = RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl);
...
5.5
E-16
Messages
ESIB
Messages
The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus or the RSIB interface (see chapter 8) can be
divided into two groups:
– interface messages and
– device messages.
Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS-232-interface (see chapter 8).
IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages
Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line being active.
They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a
controller which has the IEC-bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into
– universal commands and
– addressed commands.
Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing,
addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages
relevant to the instrument are listed in chapter 8.
RSIB Interface Messages
The RSIB interface enables the instrument to be controlled by Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs. The
interface functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National
Instruments.
The functions supported by interface are listed in chapter 8.
1088.7531.12
5.6
E-16
ESIB
Messages
Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses)
Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being
active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are more or less equal for the different interfaces.
A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus:
– Commands
are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device
functions and request informations.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria::
1. According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Setting commands
cause instrument settings such as reset of the
instrument or setting the center frequency.
Queries
cause data to be provided for output on the IEC-bus,
e.g. for identification of the device or polling the
marker.
2. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2:
Common Commands
Device-specific
commands
are exactly defined as to their function and
notation in standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to
functions such as management of the standar-dized
status registers, reset and selftest.
refer to functions depending on the features of the
instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of
these commands has also been standardized by the
SCPI committee (cf. Section 3.5.1).
– Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can
contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the
instrument status (cf. Section 3.5.4).
Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following section. The commands are
listed and explained in detail in chapter 6.
1088.7531.12
5.7
E-16
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
ESIB
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
SCPI Introduction
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for
programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI
consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model
was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command
systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same
functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure.
Fig. 5-1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SENSe, which controls the
sensor functions of the devices.
SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the
common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with
greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section "Responses to Queries").
Structure of a Command
The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and
parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The
headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to
the header.
Note:
The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the
instrument.
Common commands
Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"
and one or several parameters, if any.
Examples:
1088.7531.12
*RST
RESET, resets the device
*ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the
event status enable register
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the event status register.
5.8
E-16
ESIB
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Device-specific commands
Hierarchy:
Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see
Fig. 5-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers.
Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This
key word denotes a complete command system.
Example:
SENSe
This key word denotes the command system
SENSe.
For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified,
starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being
separated by a colon ":".
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:LINK STARt
This command lies in the fourth level of the SENSe system. It
determines which parameter remains unchanged when the span is
changed. If LINK is set to STARt, the values of CENTer and STOP are
adjusted when the span is changed.
SENSe
BANDwidth
FUNCtion
STARt
FREQuency
STOP
DETector
CENTer
SPAN
HOLD
OFFSet
LINK
Fig. 5-1 Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system by way of example
Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their
effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which
position in the header of a command they are inserted.
Example: SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the third
command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and
modulation signal.
SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth
command level. It defines the polarity between modulation
voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the
external signal source indicated.
1088.7531.12
5.9
E-16
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Optional key words:
ESIB
Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square
brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized
by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard.
Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words.
Example: [SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the
instrument to other parameters. The following command has
the same effect:
BANDwidth:AUTO
Note:
Long and short form:
Parameter:
An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified
in detail by a numeric suffix.
The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form
or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible.
Beispiel:
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1
Note:
The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form
corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case
notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself
does not make any difference between upper-case and lowercase letters.
The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If
several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a
comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and
DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to
Section 3.5.5.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAXimum
Response: 3.5E9
This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency.
Numeric suffix:
If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g.
inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1.
Example:. SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 9600
This command sets the baudrate of the second serial interface.
1088.7531.12
5.10
E-16
ESIB
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>, a <New
Line> with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI
together with the last data byte.
Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs
to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 100MHz;:INPut:ATTenuation 10")
This command line contains two commands. The first command is part of the SENSe
system and is used to specify the center frequency of the analyzer. The second command
is part of the INPut system and sets the attenuation of the input signal.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the
command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after the semicolon starts with the
level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 5-1). The colon following the semicolon must be
omitted in this case.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(receiver, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")
This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated
from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SENSe command
system, subsystem FREQuency, i.e. they have two common levels.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
SENSe:FREQuency. The colon after the semicolon is omitted.
The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
CALL IBWRT(receiver,
"SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;STOP 1E9")
However, a new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(receiver,
CALL IBWRT(receiver,
"SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6")
"SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")
Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding
a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are
partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header.
Example:
INPut:COUPling?
Response: DC
2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text
parameter are returned as numerical values.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX
Response: 3.5E9
3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the
units set using the Unit command.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz
4. Truth values <Boolean values> are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
SENSe:BANDwidth:AUTO?
Response: 1 for ON
5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.5.5).
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS? Response(for standard): STAN
1088.7531.12
5.11
E-16
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
ESIB
Parameters
Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text,
character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the
permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.6).
Numerical values
Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and
exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or
down. The value range is -9.9E37 to 9.9E37. The exponent is introduced by an
"E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of
physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G
(giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U
(micro) and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5E9
Special numerical
The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
valuesspecial numerical values.
In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided.
Example: Setting command: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP MAXimum
Query:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? Response: 3.5E9
MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command
UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter
which can be set via UP, DOWN.
INF/NINF
INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the
numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent
as device reponses.
NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as
device response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division by
zero, the subtraction/addition of infinite and the representation of undefined
values.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is
represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically
untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a
query.
Example: Setting command: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe ON
Query:
DISPlay:WINDow:STATe?
1088.7531.12
5.12
Response: 1
E-16
ESIB
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages
Text
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be
entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be
separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short
form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: INPut:COUPling
Query:
INPut:COUPling?
Strings
GROund
Response GRO
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (’ or ").
Example: SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI"
SYSTem:LANGuage ’SCPI’
Block data
or
Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of
large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the
following structure:
Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx
ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how
many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example
the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow.
During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are
ignored until all bytes are transmitted..
Overview of Syntax Elements
The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements.
:
The colon separates the key words of a command.
In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost
command level.
;
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line.
It does not alter the path.
,
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
?
The question mark forms a query.
*
The asterisk marks a common command.
"
Double or single quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.
’
#
The double dagger # introduces block data.
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates
header and parameter.
1088.7531.12
5.13
E-16
Instrument Model and Command Processing
ESIB
Instrument Model and Command Processing
The instrument model shown in Fig. 5-2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of
IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously.
They communicate by means of so-called "messages".
Input unit with
IEC Bus
input puffer
Command
recognition
Data set
Status reportingsystem
Instrument
hardware
IEC Bus
Output unit with
output buffer
Fig. 5-2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus
Input Unit
The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the
input buffer. The input buffer has a size of 256 characters. The input unit sends a message to the
command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter,
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL.
If the input buffer is full, the IEC-bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed.
Subsequently the IEC-bus traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full when receiving the
delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and
execution. The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the
command recognition.
1088.7531.12
5.14
E-16
ESIB
Instrument Model and Command Processing
Command Recognition
The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in
which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is
only executed after the commands received before as well. Each recognized command is immediately
transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once.
Syntactical errors in the command are recognized here and supplied to the status reporting system. The
rest of a command line after a syntax error is analysed further if possible and serviced.
If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter or a DCL, it requests the data set to set the
commands in the instrument hardware as well now. Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process
commands again. This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be
serviced while the hardware is still being set ("overlapping execution").
Data Set and Instrument Hardware
Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual
instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included.
The instrument data base is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software.
IEC-bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data base management enters the
new values (e.g. frequency) into the data base, however, only passes them on to the hardware when
requested by the command recognition.
The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware
immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the detection is made that an
execution is not possible, an "execution error" is signalled to the status reporting system. The alteration
of the data base are cancelled, the instrument hardware is not reset.
IEC-bus queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit.
Status Reporting System
The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the
output unit on request. The exact structure and function are described in the following section.
1088.7531.12
5.15
E-16
Instrument Model and Command Processing
ESIB
Output Unit
The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data set
management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer.
The output buffer has a size of 4096 characters. If the information requested is longer, it is made
available "in portions" without this being recognized by the controller.
If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from
the data set management, the output unit sends error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the status
reporting system. No data are sent on the IEC bus, the controller waits until it has reached its time limit.
This behaviour is specified by SCPI.
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization
What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping.
Equally, setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which
they have been received.
In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order, each command must
be sent in a separate command line, that is to say, with a separate IBWRT()-call.
In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
must be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has
been set and has settled. By a suitable programming, the contoller can be forced to wait for the
respective action to occur (cf. Table 5-1).
Table 5-1 Synchronisation using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Commnd
Action after the hardware has settled
Programming the controller
*OPC
Setting the opteration-complete bit in the ESR
- Setting bit 0 in the ESE
- Setting bit 5 in the SRE
- Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC?
Writing a "1" into the output buffer
Addressing the instrument as a talker
*WAI
Continuing the IEC-bus handshake
Sending the next command
An example as to command synchronization can be found in chapter 7 "Program Examples".
1088.7531.12
5.16
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
Status Reporting System
The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 5-3) stores all information on the present operating state of the
instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have
occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers
and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.
The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in IEEE 488.2 and
its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the uppermost level. The STB receives
its information from the standard event status register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with
the associated mask register standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.
The IST flag ("Individual STatus") and the parallel poll enable register (PPE) allocated to it are also part
of the status reporting system. The IST flag, like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a
single bit. The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the
status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in
Fig. 5-3.
Table 5-12 at the end of this chapter comprises the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset.
Structure of an SCPI Status Register
Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions
(cf. Fig. 5-2). The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a
bit number which is valid for all five parts. For example, bit 3 of the STATus:OPERation register is
assigned to the hardware status "wait for trigger" in all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to
zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive
integer.
15 14 13 12
CONDition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
PTRansition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
NTRansition part
3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12
EVENt part
3 2 1 0
to higher-order register
&
&
& & & & &
& & & & & & & & &
+ Sum bit
15 14 13 12
ENABle part
& = logical AND
+ = logical OR
of all bits
3 2 1 0
Fig. 5-2 The status-register model
1088.7531.12
5.17
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
CONDition part
The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of
the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This
register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is
not affected by reading.
PTRansition part
The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
NTRansition part
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR-Bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR-Bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of
the condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
EVENt part
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last
reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events
passed on by the edge filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument.
This part can only be read by the user. During reading, its contents is set to
zero. In linguistic usage this part is often equated with the entire register.
ENABle part
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to
the sum bit (cf. below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the
associated ENABle bit (symbol ’&’). The results of all logical operations of this
part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function (symbol ’+’).
ENABle-Bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle-Bit = 1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as
well.
This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part
for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of
the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an
event, e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout
all levels of the hierarchy.
Note:
The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as ENABle
part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be
taken as the ENABle part of the ESR.
1088.7531.12
5.18
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
Overview of the Status Registers
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
& = logical AND
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
= logical OR of all bits
SRQ
not used
PROGram running
INSTrument summary bit
Scan results available
HCOPy in progress
CORRecting
WAIT for ARM
WAIT for TRIGGER
MEASuring
SWEeping
RANGing
SETTling
CALibrating
not used
Subrange limit attained
Subrange 10
Subrange 9
Subrange 8
Subrange 7
Subrange 6
Subrange 5
Subrange 4
Subrange 3
Subrange 2
Subrange 1
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
STATus:OPERation
-&-&-&-&-&-
SRE
7
6 RQS/MSS
5 ESB
4 MAV
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
STB
-&-&-&-&-&-&-
PPE
not used
COMMand warning
TRANsducer break
ACPLimit
SYNC
LMARgin
LIMit
CALibration (= UNCAL)
MODulation
PHASe
FREQuency
TEMPerature
POWer
TIME
CURRent
VOLTage
STATus:QUEStionable
IST flag
Error/event
queue
Fig. 5-3
1088.7531.12
Output
buffer
-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&ESE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Power on
User Request
Command Error
Execution Error
Device Dependent Error
Query Error
Request Control
Operation Complete
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
not used
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen B)
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen B)
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen B)
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen B)
ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen B)
ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen B)
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen A)
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen A)
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen A)
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen A)
ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen A)
ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen A)
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
not used
LMARgin 8 FAIL
LMARgin 7 FAIL
LMARgin 6 FAIL
LMARgin 5 FAIL
LMARgin 4 FAIL
LMARgin 3 FAIL
LMARgin 2 FAIL
LMARgin 1 FAIL
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin
not used
LO LEVel (screen B)
LO UNLocked (screen B)
LO LEVel (screen A)
LO UNLocked (screen A)b
OVEN COLD
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
not used
SYNC not found
BURSt not found
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
not used
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
LIMit
8 FAIL
7 FAIL
6 FAIL
5 FAIL
4 FAIL
3 FAIL
2 FAIL
1 FAIL
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
not used
IF_OVerload (screen B)
UNDerload Option B7 (screen B)
OVERload (screen B)
IF_OVerload (screen A)
UNDerload Option B7 (screen A)
OVERload (screen A)
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
ESR
Overview of the status registers
5.19
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
Description of the Status Registers
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by
collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition
part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is
that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll.
The STB implies the SRE. It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE
and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service Request (SRQ) is generated on the
IEC bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further
processed there.
The SRE can be set using command "*SRE" and read using "*SRE?".
Table 5-2
Meaning of the bits in the status byte
Bit No.
Meaning
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue.
If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request. Thus an error can
be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error
message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with IECbus control.
3
QUEStionable status sum bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to
1.
A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the
QUEStionable-Status register.
4
MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read.
This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller (cf. chapter 7,
program examples).
5
ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in
the event status enable register.
Setting of this bit implies an error or an event which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status
register.
6
MSS bit (master status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers
is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7
OPERation status register sum bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by
polling the OPERation-status register.
1088.7531.12
5.20
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)
By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be
queried by means of a parallel poll or using command "*IST?".
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The
bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in
contrast to the SRE. The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results. The PPE can be set using
commands "*PRE" and read using command "*PRE?".
Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register.
The event status register can be read out using command "*ESR?".
The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using command "*ESE" and read using command
"*ESE?".
Table 5-3
Meaning of the bits in the event status register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
1
Request Control
This bit is set if the instrument requests the controller function. This is the case when hardcopy is outputted to a
printer or a plotter via the IEC-bus.
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having send a query, or if it
does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query
which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a
positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf. chapter 9,
Error Messages).
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, however, cannot be performed for other reasons.
An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue (cf. chapter 9, Error Messages).
5
Command Error
This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a
number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the rror queue (cf.
chapter 9, -Error Messages).
6
User Request
This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key.
7
Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
1088.7531.12
5.21
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
STATus:OPERation Register
In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being
executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last
reading. It can be read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or "STATus
:OPERation[:EVENt]?".
Table 5-4
Meaning of the bits in the STATus.OPERation register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.
1
SETTling
This bit is set as long as the new status is settling after a setting command. It is only set if the settling time is
longer than the command processing time.
2
RANGing
This bit is set as long as the instrument is changing a range (e.g. Autorange).
3
SWEeping
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a sweep.
4
MEASuring
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a measurement.
5
WAIT for TRIGGER
This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for a trigger event.
6
WAIT for ARM
This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for an arming event.
7
CORRecting
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a correction.
8
HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
9
Scan Results available (device dependent)
This bit is set as soon as a data block is ready for output during a scan.
10-12
Device dependent
13
INSTrument Summary Bit
This bit is set when one or more logical instruments is reporting a status message.
14
PROGram running
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a program.
15
This bit is always 0
The ESIB supports bits 0 , 8, and 9 .
1088.7531.12
5.22
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
STATus:QUEStionable Register
This register comprises information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated
without meeting the specifications. It can be queried by commands STATus:QUEStionable:
CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-5
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
VOLTage
This bit is set if a questionable voltage occurs.
1
CURRent
This bit is set if a questionable current occurs.
2
TIME
This bit is set if a questionable time occurs.
3
POWer
This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (cf. also section "STATus:QUEStionable:POWerRegister")
4
TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.
5
FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (cf. section "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register")
6
PHASe
The bit is set if a phase value is questionable.
7
MODulation
The bit is set if a modulation is performed questionably.
8
CALibration
The bit is set if a measurement is performed uncalibrated (=;^ label "UNCAL")
9
LIMit (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register)
10
LMARgin (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a margin is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register)
11
SYNC (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if, during measurements with Option B7 (Signal Vector Analysis), the synchronization with
midamble or a successful search for bursts cannot be performed (see also STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
Register)
12
ACPLimit (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see also section
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register)
13
TRANsducer break
This bit is set when the limit of the transducer set subrange is attained.
14
COMMand Warning
This bit is set if the instrument ignores parameters when executing a command.
15
This bit is always 0.
The ESIB supports bits 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13, bits 7 (MODulation) and 11 (SYNC) only with
option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis.’.
1088.7531.12
5.23
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register
This register Tcomprises information about the observance of limits during adjacent power
measurements. It can be queried with commands ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
:CONDition?’ and ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?’
Table 5-
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
ADJ UPPer FAIL(Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel.
1
ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
2
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
3
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
4
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
5
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
6
not used
7
not used
8
ADJ UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel.
9
ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.
10
ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.
11
ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.
12
ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.
13
ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)
This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.
14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.24
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
This register comprises information about the reference and local oscillator.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-6
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. ’OCXO’ will then be
displayed.
1
LO UNLocked (Screen A)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. ’LO unl’ will then be displayed.
2
LO LEVel (Screen A)
This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed.
3
not used
4
not used
5
not used
6
not used
7
not used
8
not used
9
LO UNLocked (Screen B)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks.’ LO unl’ will then be displayed.
10
LO LEVel (Screen B)
This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed.
11
not used
12
not used
13
not used
14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.25
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register
This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines. It can be queried with
commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-7
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.
1
LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.
2
LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.
3
LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.
4
LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.
5
LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.
6
LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.
7
LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.
8
not used
9
not used
10
not used
11
not used
12
not used
13
not used
14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.26
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register
This register comprises information about the observance of limit margins. It can be queried with
commands
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition?
and
"STATus:QUEStionable
:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-8
Bit No.
0
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register
Meaning
LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1
LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.
2
LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.
3
LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.
4
LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.
5
LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
6
LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.
7
LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.
8
not used
9
not used
10
not used
11
not used
12
not used
13
not used
14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.27
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register
This register comprises all information about possible overloads of the unit.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable :POWer:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:POWer [:EVENt]?.
Table 5-9
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
OVERload (Screen A)
This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed.
1
UNDerload (Screen A) - Option FSE-B7
This bit is set if, during measurements in vector analyzer mode without capture buffer used, the lower level limit
in the IF path is violated.
2
IF_OVerload (Screen A)
This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed.
3
not used
4
not used
5
not used
6
not used
7
not used
8
OVERload (Screen B)
This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed.
9
UNDerload (Screen B) - Option FSE-B7
This bit is set if, during measurements without capture buffer used, the lower level limit in the IF path is violated.
10
IF_OVerload (Screen B)
This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed.
11
not used
12
not used
13
not used
14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.28
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register
This register comprises information about sync and burst events related to Vector Analyzer mode,
option FSE-B7. It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? and
"STATus :QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-10
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
BURSt not found
This bit is set if a burst was not found.
1
SYNC not found
This bit is set if the sync sequence of midamble was not found.
2 to 14
not used
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.29
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register
This register indicates that a transducer hold point is attained (bit 15) and what range is to be swept next
(bit 0 to 10). The sweep can be continued with command INITiate2:CONMeasure.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?.
Table 5-11
Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Range 1
This bit is set when subrange 1 is attained.
1
Range 2
This bit is set when subrange 2 is attained.
2
Range 3
This bit is set when subrange 3 is attained.
3
Range 4
This bit is set when subrange 4 is attained.
4
Range 5
This bit is set when subrange 1 is attained.
5
Range 6
This bit is set when subrange 6 is attained.
6
Range 7
This bit is set when subrange 7 is attained.
7
Range 8
This bit is set when subrange 8 is attained.
8
Range 9
This bit is set when subrange 9 is attained.
9
Range 10
This bit is set when subrange 10 is attained.
10
not used
11
not used
12
not used
13
not used
14
Subrange limit
This bit is set when the transducer is at the point of changeover from one range to another.
15
This bit is always 0.
1088.7531.12
5.30
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
Application of the Status Reporting Systems
In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must
be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are
represented in the following. Detailed program examples are to be found in chapter 7, Program
Examples.
Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually
this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react with
corresponding actions. As evident from Fig. 5-3, an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3,
4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information
of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The corresponding setting of the ENABle parts
of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In
order to make use of the possibilities of the service request, all bits should be set to "1" in enable
registers SRE and ESE.
Examples (cf. Fig. 5-3 and chapter 7, Program Examples, as well):
Use of command "*OPC" to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep.
½ Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)
½ Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)?
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program
should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The program
should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request routine is to
be found in chapter 7, Program Examples.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command "*STB", the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the
query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The serial-poll method has already
been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll
the status byte. The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The quick-BASIC command for executing a serial poll is "IBRSP()". Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a
fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus.
1088.7531.12
5.31
E-16
Status Reporting System
ESIB
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a
single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated
to each instrument to logically "0" or "1". By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which
conditions an SRQ is generated, there is a parallel poll enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6. The results are ORed, the result is then sent (possibly inverted)
as a response in the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll by
means of command "*IST".
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick-BASIC command "IBPPC()". This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted.
The parallel poll itself is executed using "IBRPP()".
The parallel-poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has
sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus. To this effect, SRE
and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in
chapter 7, Program Examples.
Query by Means of Commands
Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries. The individual commands are
indicated in the detailed description of the registers. What is returned is always a number which
represents the bit pattern of the register queried. Evaluating this number is effected by the controller
program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the
SRQ.
Error-Queue Query
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue
are detailed plain-text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control
or queried via the IEC bus using command "SYSTem:ERRor?". Each call of "SYSTem:ERRor?"
provides an entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the
cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller
program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the
instrument are recorded there as well.
1088.7531.12
5.32
E-16
ESIB
Status Reporting System
Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System
Table 5-12 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be
reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional
instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.
Table 5-12
Resetting instrument functions
Event
Switching on supply
voltage
Power-On-StatusClear
Effect
0
DCL,SDC
(Device Clear,
Selected Device
Clear)
*RST or
SYSTem:PRESet
STATus:PRESet
*CLS
1
Clear STB,ESR

yes



yes
Clear SRE,ESE

yes




Clear PPE

yes




Clear EVENTt parts of the
registers

yes



yes
Clear Enable parts of all
OPERation and
QUEStionable registers,
Fill Enable parts of all
other registers with "1".

yes


yes

Fill PTRansition parts with
"1" ,
Clear NTRansition parts

yes


yes

Clear error queue
yes
yes



yes
Clear output buffer
yes
yes
yes
1)
1)
1)
Clear command
processing and input
buffer
yes
yes
yes



1) Every command being the first in a command line, i.e., immediately following a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>
clears the output buffer.
1088.7531.12
5.33
E-16
ESIB
Contents - Description of Commands
Contents - Chapter 6 "Remote Control - Description
of Commands"
6 Description of Commands.................................................................................. 6.1
Notation ............................................................................................................................................ 6.1
Common Commands....................................................................................................................... 6.4
ABORt Subsystem ........................................................................................................................... 6.7
CALCulate Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.7
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem ..................................................................................... 6.8
CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.14
CALCulate:FEED Subsystem ................................................................................................ 6.18
CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.19
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem.................................................................................................. 6.21
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.31
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.55
CALCulate:PEAKsearch - Subsystem ................................................................................... 6.56
CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.58
CALibration Subsystem ................................................................................................................ 6.59
DIAGnostic Subsystem ................................................................................................................. 6.61
DISPlay Subsystem........................................................................................................................ 6.63
FORMat Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.74
HCOPy Subsystem ........................................................................................................................ 6.76
INITiate Subsystem........................................................................................................................ 6.81
INPut Subsystem ........................................................................................................................... 6.82
INSTrument Subsystem ................................................................................................................ 6.87
MMEMory Subsystem.................................................................................................................... 6.89
OUTPut Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.100
SENSe Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.102
SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.102
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem ............................................................................................. 6.104
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem ........................................................................................... 6.106
SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem......................................................................................... 6.109
SENSe:DEMod Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.119
SENSe:DETector Subsystem .............................................................................................. 6.120
SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.122
SENSe:FILTer Subsystem .................................................................................................. 6.130
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem.......................................................................................... 6.133
SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.137
SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.140
SENSe:POWer Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.142
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.146
1088.7531.12
I-6.1
E-15
Contents - Description of Commands
ESIB
SENSe:SCAN - Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.147
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................................. 6.150
SOURce Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.154
STATus Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.156
SYSTem Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.167
TRACe Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.174
TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.177
UNIT Subsystem .......................................................................................................................... 6.179
Alphabetical List of Commands ................................................................................................. 6.180
Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment ................................................ 6.192
Basic Instrument - EMI Receiver Mode ............................................................................... 6.192
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.192
FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.196
LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.197
INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.198
MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.198
LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.201
TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.202
SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.203
Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis Mode ............................................................................... 205
FREQUENCY Key Group............................................................................................. 205
LEVEL Key Group ........................................................................................................ 207
INPUT Key.................................................................................................................... 208
MARKER Key Group .................................................................................................... 209
LINES Key Group ......................................................................................................... 213
TRACE Key Group ....................................................................................................... 215
SWEEP Key Group ...................................................................................................... 216
Basic Instrument - General Device Settings........................................................................ 6.219
DATA VARIATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.219
SYSTEM Key Group.................................................................................................. 6.219
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.222
STATUS Key Group .................................................................................................. 6.225
HARDCOPY Key Group ............................................................................................ 6.225
MEMORY Key Group ................................................................................................ 6.226
USER Key ................................................................................................................. 6.228
Vector Signal Analysis Mode (Option FSE-B7) ................................................................... 6.229
CONFIGURATION Key Group- Digital Demodulation............................................... 6.229
CONFIGURATION Key Group - Analog Demodulation ........................................... 6.233
FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.234
LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.234
INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.236
MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.236
LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.238
TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.240
SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.240
TRIGGER Key Group - Digital Demodulation .......................................................... 6.241
TRIGGER Key Group - Analog Demodulation ......................................................... 6.242
Tracking Generator Mode (Option FSE-B10...B11)............................................................. 6.243
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.243
External Mixer Output (Option FSE-B21) ............................................................................ 6.244
INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.244
1088.7531.12
I-6.2
E-15
ESIB
Notation
6 Description of Commands
Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then
described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one
of the SCPI standards to a large extent. The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the
individual description of the commands.
Table of Commands
Command:
In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands
and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations).
Parameter:The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with their specified
range.
Unit:
Remark:
Indentations
The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters.
In the remark column an indication is made on:
– whether the command does not have a query form,
– whether the command has only one query form
– whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the
instrument
The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the
table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level is, the
farther the indentation to the right is. Please observe that the complete
notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well.
Example: :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer is represented in the table as
follows:
:SENSe
:FREQuency
:CENTer
Individual description
1088.7531.12
first level
second level
third level
In the individual description, the complete notation of the command is
given. An example for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI
information is written out at the end of the individual description.
The modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the
following abbreviations:
R
A
A-F
A-Z
VA
VA-D
VA-A
EMI Test Receiver
Spectrum analysis
Spectrum analysis - frequency domain only
Spectrum analysis - time domain only (zero span)
Vector signal analysis (option FSE-B7)
Vector signal analysis - digital demodulation (option FSE-B7)
Vector signal analysis - analog demodulation (option FSE-B7)
Note:
The receiver and spectrum analysis modes are implemented in
the basic unit. For the other modes, the corresponding options
are required.
6.1
E-15
Notation
ESIB
Upper/lower case notation Upper/lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key
words of a command in the description (see Chapter 5). The instrument
itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters.
Special characters
|
A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several
commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are
separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be
indicated in the header of the command. The effect of the command is
independent of which of the key words is indicated.
Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands of identical meaning can be
formed. They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal
to 1 kHz:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3
A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities
in the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on
which parameter is entered.
Example:Selection of the parameters for the command
INPut:COUPling
AC | DC
If parameter AC is selected, only the AC content is fed through, in
the case of DC, the DC as well as the AC content.
[ ]
Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header
(cf. Chapter 5, Section "Optional Keywords"). The full command length
must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the
SCPI standards.
Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the
command or omitted as well.
{ }
Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either
not at all, once or several times.
Description of parameters Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands
consists always of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has specified a
series of definitions therefore, which are used in the tables of commands.
In the tables, these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets
(<...>) and will be briefly explained in the following (see also Chapter 5,
Section "Parameters").
<Boolean>
1088.7531.12
This indication refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and
"off". The "off" state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the
numeric value 0, the "on" state is indicated by ON or any numeric value
other than zero. Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value
0 or 1.
6.2
E-15
ESIB
Notation
<numeric_value>
<num>
These indications mark parameters which may be entered as numeric
values or be set using specific keywords (character data).
The keywords given below are permitted:
MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible
value.
MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
DEFault
This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default
value.
UP
This keyword increments the parameter value.
DOWN
This keyword decrements the parameter.
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be
queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They
must be entered following the quotation mark.
Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as
result.
<arbitrary block program data>
This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of
a binary data block.
1088.7531.12
6.3
E-15
Common Commands
ESIB
Common Commands
The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have
the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed
by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in
detail in Chapter 5.
Command
Designation
Parameter
Remark
*CAL?
Calibration Query
query only
*CLS
Clear Status
no query
*ESE
Event Status Enable
0 to 255
*ESR?
Standard Event Status Query
0 to 255
query only
*IDN?
Identification Query
<string>
query only
*IST?
Individual Status Query
0 to 255
query only
*OPC
Operation Complete
*OPT?
Option Identification Query
*PCB
Pass Control Back
0 to 30
*PRE
Parallel Poll Register Enable
0 to 255
*PSC
Power On Status Clear
0|1
*RST
Reset
*SRE
Service Request Enable
*STB?
Status Byte Query
query only
*TRG
Trigger
no query
*TST?
Self Test Query
query only
*WAI
Wait to continue
no query
query only
no query
no query
0 to 255
*CAL?
CALIBRATION QUERY triggers a calibration of the instrument and subsequently query the
calibration status. Any responses > 0 indicate errors.
*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part
of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and
transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. Query *ESE?
returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
1088.7531.12
6.4
E-15
ESIB
Common Commands
*ESR?
STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal
form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification.
The instrument identification consists of the following elements which are separated by commas:
Manufacturer
Device (receiver model)
Serial number of the instrument
Firmware version number
Example: "Rohde&Schwarz, ESIB7, 825082/007, 2.10"
*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The IST
flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Chapter 5).
*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have
been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Chapter 5).
*OPC?
OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY writes message "1" into the output buffer as soon as all
preceding commands have been executed (cf. Chapter 5).
*OPT?
OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list
of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas.
Position
Option
1
2
FSE-B4
Low Phase Noise & OCXO
3
FSE-B5
FFT-Filter
4
5
reserved
FSE-B7
Vector Signal Analysis
8
FSE-B10
Tracking Generator 7 GHz
9
FSE-B11
Tracking Generator 7 GHz with I/Q modulator
10
FSE-B12
Output Attenuator for Tracking Generator
6
7
11 to 18
19
reserved
FSE-B21
External Mixer Output
Example: 0, FSE-B4, FSE-B5, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,..
Note:
The standard ESIB is equipped with options FSE-B4 and FSE-B6 The options are
indicated for reasons of compatibility to instrument family FSE.
*PCB 0 to 30
PASS CONTROL BACK indicates the controller address which the IEC-bus control is to be returned
to after termination of the triggered action.
1088.7531.12
6.5
E-15
Common Commands
ESIB
*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets parallel poll enable register to the value indicated.
Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
*PSC 0 | 1
POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is
maintained or reset in switching on.
*PSC = 0
*PSC = 0
causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained. Thus a service request
can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status
registers ESE and SRE.
resets the registers.
Query *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1.
*RST
RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to
pressing the [PRESET] key. The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands.
*SRE 0 to 255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit 6
(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is
triggered. Query *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit
6 is always 0.
*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
*TRG
TRIGGER triggers a measurement. This command corresponds to INITiate:IMMediate (cf.
Section "TRIGger subsystem", as well).
*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal
form.
*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding
commands have been executed and all signals have settled (cf. Chapter 5 and "*OPC" as well).
1088.7531.12
6.6
E-15
ESIB
ABORt / CALCulate Subsystem
ABORt Subsystem
The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An action can be
triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger events which is why they are not
assigned any *RST value.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
ABORt
HOLD
---
UNIT
---
COMMENT
no query
no query
:ABORt
This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system.
Example:
"ABOR;INIT:IMM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
0
conforming
:HOLD
This command interrupts a current scan measurement.
Example:
"HOLD"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R
conforming
CALCulate Subsystem
The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and
carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquistion, i.e., following
the SENSe subsystem.
In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between CALCulate1 and CALCulate2:
CALCulate1 =;^ screen A;
CALCulate2 =;^ screen B
For setting REAL/IMAG PART in Vector Analyzer mode a distinction is also made between CALCulate3
and CALCulate4 in the split-screen representation:
CALCulate3 =;^ screen C;
CALCulate4 =;^ screen D
1088.7531.12
6.7
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem checks the delta-marker functions in the instrument.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:DELTamarker<1 to 4>
[:STATe]
:MODE
:AOFF
:TRACe
:X
:RELative?
:Y?
:MAXimum
[:PEAK]
:APEak
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:LEFT
:MINimum
[:PEAK]
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:LEFT
:FUNCtion
:FIXed
[:STATe]
:RPOint
:Y
:OFFSet
:X
:PNOise
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:STEP
[:INCRement]
:AUTO
UNIT
COMMENT
<Boolean>
ABSolute|RELative
--
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
---
-HZ | S | SYM
---
query only
query only
------
------
no query
no query (vector signal analysis)
no query
no query
no query
-----
-----
no query
no query
no query
no query
no query
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
DBM
DB
HZ |S | SYM
<Boolean>
--
--
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
HZ |S | SYM
--
query only
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the selected delta marker. If no indication is made, delta marker 1
is selected automatically.
Example:
":CALC:DELT3 ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.8
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command switches over between relative and absolute input of frequency of the delta marker.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MODE ABS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
REL
device-specific
In the RELative mode, the frequency of the delta marker is programmed relative to the reference
marker. In the ABSolute mode, the frequency is defined by the absolute values.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active delta markers.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:AOFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4
This command assigns the selected delta marker to the indicated measuring curve.
Example:
":CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X
0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols)
This command positions the selected delta marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time
(span = 0). The query always returns the absolute value of frequency or time.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:X
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
10.7MHz"
device-specific
The SYM unit is only valid in Vector Signal Analysis mode.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X:RELative?
This command queries the frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) of the selected delta marker
relative to the reference marker.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:X:REL?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
device-specific
6.9
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the value of the selected marker.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:Y?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
In complex presentations (vector signal analysis - polar diagrams), the real and the imaginary
component as well as magnitude and phase are output separated by a comma.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MAX"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the delta marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MAX:APE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
VA
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the
current value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.10
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the
current value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MIN:NEXT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (ie in ascending X direction).
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current
value (ie in descending X direction).
Example:
":CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.11
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA-D
OFF
device-specific.
The reference value is independent of the current trace.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <numeric_value>
This command defines a new fixed reference value for the relative measurement.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
- (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
device-specific
The reference value is independent of the current trace.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines an additional level offset for the relative measurement.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0 dB
device-specific
The level offset is included in the output of the level value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <numeric_value>
This command defines the new fixed reference frequency, time or symbols for the relative
measurement.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 10.7MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
- (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
device-specific
The reference value is independent of the current trace. With span = 0, the reference time, otherwise
the reference frequency is defined.
1088.7531.12
6.12
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the measurement of the phase noise on or off.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
When the phase noise is measured, the correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are
automatically considered. The measurement uses the reference values defined by
FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X or :Y.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>
This command defines the delta marker step width.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:STEP 10kHz"
":CALC:DELT:STEP 5ms"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
(frequency domain)
(time domain)
- (STEP is set to AUTO)
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off.
Example:
":CALC:DELT:STEP:AUTO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ON
device-specific
With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span.
1088.7531.12
6.13
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:DLINe subsystem checks the display lines in the instrument, i.e., the level, frequency
and time lines (depending on the X-axis) as well as threshold and reference lines.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:DLINe<1|2>
<numeric_value>
:STATe
:THReshold
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
:STATe
:CTHReshold
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
:STATe
:RLINe
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
:STATe
:FLINe<1|2>
:STATe
:TLINe<1|2>
:STATe
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
UNIT
COMMENT
DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
HZ
S | SYM
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit)
This command defines the position of the display line.
Example:
":CALC:DLIN -20dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
The display lines mark the given level in the display.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis,
FSE-B7.
:CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the display line on or off.
Example:
":CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.14
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit)
This command defines the position of the thresholds.
Example:
":CALC:THR -82dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
For marker scan functions MAX PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc., the threshold serves as the lowest limit for
maximum or minimum search.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis,
FSE-B7.
:CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the threshold on or off.
Example:
":CALC:THR:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit)
This command defines the position of a threshold line (base line), below which all measured values
are cleared.
Example:
":CALC:CTHR -82dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis,
FSE-B7.
:CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF
This command is for switching on or off the threshold line (base line), below which all measured
values are cleared.
Example:
":CALC:CTHR:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.15
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit)
This command defines the position of the reference line.
Example:
":CALC:RLIN -10dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
The reference line serves as a reference for the arithmetic operation of traces.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis,
FSE-B7.
:CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the reference line on or off.
Example:
":CALC:RLIN:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> 0 GHz to fmax
This command defines the position of the frequency lines.
Example:
":CALC:FLIN2 120MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A-F, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
The frequency lines mark the given frequencies in the display. Frequency lines are only valid for a
SPAN >0.
:CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the frequency line on or off.
Example:
":CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A-F, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.16
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> 0 to 1000s
This command defines the position of the time lines.
Example:
":CALC:TLIN 10ms"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A-Z, VA
- (STATe to OFF)
device-specific
The time lines mark the given times in the display. Time lines are only valid for a SPAN = 0.
:CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the time line on or off.
Example:
":CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A-Z, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.17
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
CALCulate:FEED Subsystem
The CALCulate:FEED subsystem selects the measured data in operating mode vector signal analysis.
This subsystem is only valid in connection with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:FEED
UNIT
<string>
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
no query
:CALCulate<1|2>:FEED <string>
This command selects the measured data that are to be displayed.
Parameter:
<string>::=
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ |
‘XTIM:AM’ |
‘XTIM:FM’ |
‘XTIM:PM’ |
‘XTIM:AMSummary’ |
‘XTIM:FMSummary’ |
‘XTIM:PMSummary’ |
‘TCAP’
Example:
":CALC:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’
conforming
The string parameters have the following meaning:
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’
‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’
‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’
Test signal (filtered, synchronized to symbol clock)
Reference signal (internally generated from demodulated test
signal)
Error signal (magnitude and phase error)
Vector error signal
Symbol table (demodulated bits and table with modulation errors)
'XTIM:AM'
'XTIM:FM'
'XTIM:PM'
'XTIM:AMSummary'
'XTIM:FMSummary'
'XTIM:PMSummary'
‘TCAP’
Demodulated AM signal (analog demodulation)
Demodulated FM signal (analog demodulation)
Demodulated PM signal (analog demodulation)
AM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)
FM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)
PM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)
Test signal in capture buffer
1088.7531.12
6.18
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem
The CALCulate:FORMat subsystem determines further processing and conversion of measured data in
operating mode vector signal analysis.
This sub system is only valid in connection with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:FORMat
UNIT
MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase |
RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE |
TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS
:FSK
:DEViation
:REFerence
<numeric_value>
:CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
HZ
Vector Signal Analysis
MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE |
TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS
This command defines the display of the traces.
Example:
":CALC:FORM CONS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
MAGNitude
conforming
The availability of the parameters depends on the selected data (see command
:CALCulate:FEED).
Available for selection measurement signal, reference signal and modulation error
(CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’,‘XTIM:DDEM:REF) ,‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’):
MAGNitude
Display of the magnitude in the time domain (only available for settings
:CALCulate:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ (error signal) or
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ (measurement signal) or ‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’
(reference signal)
PHASe | UPHase
Display of the phase in the time domain with or without (”unwrapped”)
limitation to ±180°
RIMag
Display of the time characteristic of inphase and quadrature
component
FREQuency
Display of the frequency response in the time domain
COMP
Display of the polar vector diagram (complex)
CONS
Display of the polar vector diagaram (constellation)
Available for selection measurement signal and reference signal (CALCulate:FEED
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’,‘XTIM:DDEM:REF):
IEYE | QEYE
Eye diagram of the inphase or quadrature component
TEYE
Display of the trellis diagram
FEYE
Eye diagram of FSK modulation
1088.7531.12
6.19
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence <numeric_value>
This command defines the reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation.
Example:
":CALC:FSK:DEV:REF 20kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
device-specific
6.20
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem comprises the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. Limit lines
can be defined as upper and lower limit lines. The individual values of the limit lines correspond to the
values of the X-axis (CONTrol) which have to have the same number.
COMMAND
CALCulate<1|2>
:LIMit<1 to 8>
:ACTive?
:TRACe
:STATe
:UNIT
CATalog?
:CONTrol
[:DATA]
:DOMain
:OFFSet
:MODE
:UNIT
[:TIME]
:SHIFt
:SPACing
:UPPer
[:DATA]
:STATe
:OFFSet
PARAMETERS
UNIT
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
-DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | DBMV |
VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT | UNITLESS
Query only
<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
FREQuency | TIME
<numeric_value>
RELative | ABSolute
S | SYM
<numeric_value>
LINear | LOGarithmic
HZ | S | SYM
HZ | S | SYM
HZ | S | SYM
<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
:MARGin
:MODE
:SHIFt
COMMENT
RELative | ABSolute
<numeric_value>
Vector Signal Analysis
DBM | DB | DEG |
RAD | S | HZ | PCT
-DB | DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
-DB | DEG | RAD|
S | HZ | PCT
LINear | LOGarithmic
:SPACing
:LOWer
[:DATA]
:STATe
:OFFSet
<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
:MARGin
:MODE
:SHIFt
RELative | ABSolute
<numeric_value>
DBM | DB | DEG |
RAD | S | HZ | PCT
-DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
-DB | DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
LINear | LOGarithmic
:SPACing
:FAIL?
:CLEar
[:IMMediate]
:COMMent
:COPY
:NAME
:DELete
1088.7531.12
---
--
query only
no query
<string>
1 to 8 | < name>
<string>
6.21
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
COMMAND
CALCulate<1|2>
:LIMit<1 to 8>
:ACPower
[:STATe]
:ACHannel
:STATe
:RESult?
:ALTernate<1|2>
:STATe
:RESult?
ESIB
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
DB; DB
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>, <numeric_value>
<Boolean>
-<numeric_value>, <numeric_value>
<Boolean>
--
DB; DB
query only
query only
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACTive?
This command queries the name of all activated limit lines. The names are output in alphabetical
order. If no limit line is activated, an empty string will be output. The numeric suffixes in
CALCulate<1|2> and LIMit<1 to 8> are not significant.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:ACT?"
Features:
Modes:
*RST value:
SCPI:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:TRACe 1 to 4
This command assigns a trace to a limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM2:TRAC 2"
Features:
Modes:
*RST value:
SCPI:
R, A, VA
1
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the limit check for the selected limit line on or off.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with
CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UNIT
DBM | DBPW | DBPT | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ | UNITLESS
This command defines the unit of the selected limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UNIT DBUV"
Features:
*RST value:
DBM
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
In receiver mode the units DBM, DBUV, DBUA, DBPW, DBPT, DBUV_M, and DBUA_M are
available In analyzer mode all units are available except for DEG, RAD, S and HZ.
DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ.
Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative mode. For units
different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to the absolute mode.
The units DEG, RAD, S, HZ are available in the vector analysis mode only.
1088.7531.12
6.22
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate:LIMit:CATalog?
This command reads out the names of all limit lines stored on the harddisk.
Syntax of output format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name>,,<1st file length>,<2nd file name>,,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,
<nth file length>
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CAT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the X-axis values (frequencies or times) of the upper or lower limit lines.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT 1MHz,30MHz,300MHz,1GHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer- and/or LOWer limit lines
have to be identical. The following units are available:
receiver
HZ
spectrum analysis HZ | S
vector analysis
HZ | S | SYM.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME
This command defines the X-axis in the frequency or time domain.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM TIME"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
FREQuency
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the X-axis value of the selected relative limit line in the frequency
or time domain.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:OFFS 100us"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
1088.7531.12
0
device-specific
6.23
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the X-axis of the selected limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:MODE REL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
ABSolute
device-specific
Modes:
A, VA
Upon selection of RELative, the unit is switched to DB.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM
This command defines the unit of the x-axis scaling of limit lines.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:UNIT SYM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA
S
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <numeric_value>
This command shifts a limit line which has been specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis).
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:SHIF 50kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
-device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for determining the
limit line from the frequency points.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
LIN
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the values for the upper limit lines.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP -10,0,0,-10"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer limit line have to be
identical. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by command CALC:LIM:UNIT. If the
measured values exceed the UPPer limit line in analyzer or vector analyzer mode, the limit check
signals errors. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only.
1088.7531.12
6.24
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF
This command defines the selected limit line as upper limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPPer:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with
CALCulate:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative upper limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP:OFFS 3dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MARGin <numeric_value>
This command defines the margin of the selected upper limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP:MARG 10dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected upper limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP:MODE REL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
ABSolute
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SHIFt <numeric_value>
This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such
as volt).
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP:SHIF 20dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.25
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
LIN
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..
This command defines the values for the selected lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW -30,-40,-40,-30"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
conforming
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding LOWer limit line have to be
identical.If the measured values violate the LOWer limit line in analyzer or vector analyzer mode, the
limit check signals errors. The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
This command defines the selected limit line as lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOWer:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with
CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW:OFFS 3dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MARGin <numeric_value>
This command defines the margin of the selected lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
1088.7531.12
0
device-specific
6.26
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
ABSolute
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SHIFt <numeric_value>
This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such
as volt).
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW:SHIF 20dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
LIN
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of the limit check.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:FAIL?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
conforming
The result of the limit check responds with 0 in case of PASS and with 1 in case of FAIL.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:CLE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
conforming
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
1088.7531.12
6.27
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COMMent
<string>
This command defines a comment for the limit line selected.
Example:
":CALC:LIM:COMM ’Upper limit for spectrum’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
blank comment
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COPY 1 to 8 | <name>
This command copies one limit line onto another one.
Parameter:
1 to 8 ::= number of the new limit line or, alternatively:
<name> ::= name of the new limit line given as a string
Example:
":CALC:LIM1:COPY 2"
":CALC:LIM1:COPY ’GSM2’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters. This command is an "event"
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:NAME <name of limit line>
This command assigns a name to a limit line numbered 1 to 8. If it doesn’t exist previously, a limit
line with this name is created.
Example:
":CALC:LIM1:NAME ’GSM1’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
’REM1’ to ’REM8’ for lines 1 to 8
device-specific
The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:DELete
This command deletes the limit line selected.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM1:DEL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.28
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measurements. The
commands CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT or CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:STAT must be used in addition to
specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for the
alternate adjacent channels.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel 0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB
This command defines the limit for the upper/lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power
measurements.
Parameter:
The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the upper (lower) adjacent
channel.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0 dB
device-specific
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power
measurement is performed. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper /lower adjacent channel when
adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
Parameter:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value denotes the
lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent channel.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
Features:
Modes:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A, VA
-device-specific
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the
adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error.
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
1088.7531.12
6.29
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2> 0 to 100DB, 0 to 100 dB.
This command defines the limit for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent channel
power measurements.
Parameter:
The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the lower (upper) alternate
adjacent channel. The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1|2> denotes the first
or the second alternate channel.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB 30DB"
Features:
Modes:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A, VA
0DB
device-specific
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command activates the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent
channel power measurements. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A, VA
Modes:
OFF
device-specific
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
:CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for
adjacent channel power measurements.
Parameter:
The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second) returned value
denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent channel.
Examples:
":CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
-device-specific
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the
adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error.
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.
1088.7531.12
6.30
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer<1 to 4>
[:STATe]
:AOFF
:TRACe
:X
:SLIMits
[:STATe]
:COUNt
:RESolution
:FREQuency?
:COUPled
[:STATe]
:SCOupled
[:STATe]
:LOEXclude
:Y?
:MAXimum
[:PEAK]
:APEak
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:LEFT
:MINimum
[:PEAK]
:NEXT
:RIGHt
:LEFT
:STEP
[:INCRement]
:AUTO
:PEXCursion
:READout
:FUNCtion
:NDBDown
:STATe
:RESult?
:FREQuency?
:ZOOM
:NOISe
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:DEModulation
:SELect
[:STATe]
:HOLDoff
:SFACtor
:STATe
:RESult?
:FREQuency?
1088.7531.12
<Boolean>
--
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
-HZ | S | SYM
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
--
-HZ
--
query only
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
--
--
query only
---
---
----
----
no query
no query,
Vector Signal Analysis
no query
no query
no query
-----
-----
no query
no query
no query
no query
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
MPHase | RIMaginary
HZ | S | SYM
-DB
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
--<numeric_value>
DB
no query
<Boolean>
Vector Signal Analysis
--HZ
query only
query only
no query
<Boolean>
--
--
query only
AM|FM
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
S
<expr>
<Boolean>
---
---
6.31
query only
query only
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer
:FUNCtion
:STRack
[:STATe]
:ADEMod
<Boolean>
Vector Signal Analysis
:AM
[:RESult]?
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS
query only
[:RESult]?
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV
query only
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS
query only
:FM
:PM
[:RESult]?
:AFRequency
query only
[:RESult]?
:FERRor
query only
[:RESult]?
:SINad
[:STATe]
<Boolean>
query only
:RESult?
:CARRier
query only
[:RESult]?
:DDEMod
:RESult?
:POWer
:SELect
:RESult?
:PRESet
:CFILter
[:STATe]
:SUMMary
:STATe
:MAXimum
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
:PPEak
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
1088.7531.12
MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM | PEPK | PEPS
|EVRM | EVPK | EVPS | IQOF | IQIM | ADR |
FERR | DEV | FSRM | FSPK | FSPS | RHO
|FEPK | DTTS
ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | OBWidth |
CN | CN0
ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
NADC | TETRA | PHS| PDC | CDPD | F8CDma
| R8CDma | F19Cdma | R19Cdma | FWCDma |
RWCDma | FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma |
M2CDma | D2CDma | FO8Cdma | RO8Cdma |
FO19cdma | RO19cdma | NONE
Vector Signal Analysis
query only
query only
no query
<Boolean>
OFF
<Boolean>
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
6.32
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer
:FUNCtion
:SUMMary
:MPEak
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
:MIDDle
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
:RMS
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
:MEAN
[:STATe]
:RESult?
:AVERage
:RESult?
:PHOLd
RESult?
:AOFF
:PHOLd
:AVERage
:CENTer
:CSTep
:STARt
:STOP
:MSTep
:REFerence
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
<Boolean>
query only
query only
query only
no query
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
no query
no query
no query
no query
no query
no query
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the currently selected marker. If no indication is made, marker 1 is
selected automatically.
Example:
":CALC:MARK3 ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.33
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active markers.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:AOFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4
This command assigns the selected marker (1 to 4) to the indicated test curve.
Example:
":CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2"
Features:
*RST value
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X 0 to MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols)
This command positions the selected marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0).
Example:
":CALC:MARK:X 10.7MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
Available units: receiver: Hz; analyzer: HZ | S; vector analyzer: HZ | S | SYM
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches between a limited (ON) and unlimited (OFF) search range.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON"
features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the frequency counter at the marker position.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:COUN ON"
Features:
Mode:
1088.7531.12
*RST value:
SCPI:
A
OFF
device-specific
6.34
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:RESolution 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz
This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
1kHz
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:FREQuency?
This command queries the result of the frequency counter.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the coupling of markers on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:COUP ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
R, VA
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:SCOupled[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the coupling of the receiver frequency at the marker frequency on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:SCO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
ON
device-specific
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF
This command switches the local oscillator suppression on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:LOEX ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A-F
The numeric suffixes 1|2 and 1 to 4 are not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.35
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the selected marker value.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:Y?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MAX"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MAX:APE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next lower maximum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MAX:NEXT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current
value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.36
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current
value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (ie in ascending X direction).
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value
(ie in descending X direction).
Example:
":CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A
is command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.37
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>
This command defines the marker step width.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:STEP 10kHz" (frequency domain)
CALC:MARK:STEP 5ms" (time domain)
Features:
*RST value:
- (STEP is set to AUTO)
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
This command sets STEP:AUTO to OFF. The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:STEP:AUTO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
ON
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span. The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not
significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:PEXCursion <numeric_value>
This command defines the peak excursion.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
6dB
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:READout MPHase | RIMaginary
This command determines the type of the marker display.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:READ RIM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA-D
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <numeric_value>
This command defines the "N dB Down" value.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB"
Features:
*RST value:
6dB
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned by n dB below the active reference marker. The
frequency spacing of these markers can be queried with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult?.
1088.7531.12
6.38
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the "N dB Down" function on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the frequency spacing (bandwidth) of the "N dB Down" markers.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequencies of the "N dB Down" marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
The two frequency values are separated by comma and indicated in ascending order. This command
is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <numeric_value>
This command defines the range to be enlarged around the active marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A-F
The subsequent frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the frequency of the signal is
counted. This frequency becomes the new center frequency, the zoomed span is then set. This
command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the noise measurement on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
The noise power density is measured at the position of the markers. The result can be queried with
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.
1088.7531.12
6.39
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM | FM
This command selects the demodulation type.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
AM
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the demodulation on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the
signal is demodulated during the given stop time.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 10ms to 1000s
This command defines the duration of the stop time for the demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
- (DEModulation is set to OFF)
device-specific
With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the
signal is demodulated during the given stop time.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB)
This command defines the shape factor measurement 60dB/6dB or 60dB/3dB.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC (60dB/3dB)"
Features:
*RST value:
(60dB/6dB)
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
The temporary markers T1 to T4 are positioned in pairs by 60dB and by 3dB or 6dB below the active
reference marker. The frequency spacing ratio of these markers - the shape factor - can be queried
with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?.
1088.7531.12
6.40
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the shape factor measurement on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?
This command queries the result of the shape factor measurement.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequencies of the shape factor measurement.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:FREQ?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A
Four frequency values (at -60 dB, -6 or. -3 dB, -6 or -3 dB, -60dB) are indicated in ascending order.
They are separated by a comma. This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the signal-track function on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A-F
With SIGNAL TRACK function activated, the maximum signal is determined after each frequency
sweep and the center frequency of this signal is set. With drifting signals the center frequency follows
the signal.
1088.7531.12
6.41
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult]? PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle| RMS
This command queries the results of the AM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AM? PPE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
PPEak
MPEak
MIDDle
RMS
Result of the measurement with detector +PK
Result of the measurement with detector -PK
Result of averaging ±PK/2
Result of the measurement with detector RMS
device-specific
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only. This command is
only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle |
RMS | RDEV
This command queries the results of the FM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FM? PPE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
PPEak
MPEak
MIDDle
RMS
Result of the measurement with detector +PK
Result of the measurement with detector -PK
Result of averaging ±PK/2
Result of the measurement with detector RMS
device-specific
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only. This command is
only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult]?PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle| RMS
This command queries the results of the PM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:PM? PPE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
PPEak
MPEak
MIDDle
RMS
Result of the measurement with detector +PK
Result of the measurement with detector -PK
Result of averaging ±PK/2
Result of the measurement with detector RMS
device-specific
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only. This command is
only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
1088.7531.12
6.42
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult]?
This command queries the audio frequency of the analog demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AFR? "
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor[:RESult]?
This command queries the frequency error of the analog demodulation.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FERR? "
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
device-specific
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult]?
This command queries the results of the carrier frequency measurement.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:CARR?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
device-specific
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the SINAD measurement on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
OFF
device-specific
This command is valid only in the analog demodulation mode with Real Time ON.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult?
This command queries the results of the SINAD measurement.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
device-specific
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
1088.7531.12
6.43
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult?
MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM | PEPK | PEPS | EVRM | EVPK
| EVPS | IQOF | IQIM | ADR | FERR | FEPK | RHO| DEV |
FSRM | FSPK | FSPS | DTTS
This command queries the error measurement results of digital demodulation.The results correspond
to the values obtained when the symbol table (SYMBOL TABLE/ ERRORS softkey) is selected in
manual operation. Marker values can be queried queried with command CALCulate<1|2>:
MARKer<1...4>:Y? and trace data with command TRACe[:DATA].
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:DDEM:RES? EVRM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
MERM
MEPK
MEPS
magnitude error in %rms
maximum of magnitude error in %pk
symbol number by which the maximum
of the magnitude error occurred
FERR frequency error in Hz
FEPK maximum of frequency error
in Hz
ADR amplitude drop in dB/symbol
PERM
PEPK
PEPS
phase error in deg
maximum of phase error in deg
symbol number by which the maximum
of the phase error occurred
RHO
DEV
EVRM
EVPK
EVPS
vector error in %rms
maximum of vector error in %pk
symbol number by which the maximum
of the vector error occurred
FSPK maximum of FSK deviation error
in Hz
FSRM FSK deviation error in Hz
FSPS symbol number by which the
maximum of error occurred
IQOF
IQIM
I/Q-offset error in %
I/Q Imbalance in %
DTTS trigger delay of synchronization
Rho-Factor
FSK deviation in Hz
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command selects the type of power measurement without modifying other settings.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
A-F
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
ACPower
adjacent channel power measurement
CPOWer
channel power measurement
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
occupied bandwidth power measurement
CN
signal / noise power measurement
CN0
signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth
1088.7531.12
6.44
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult?
ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command queries the results of the power measurement (see also CALCulate:MARKer:
FUNCtion:POWer:SELect.)
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
ACPower
adjacent channel power measurement; Results are output separated by commas
in the following order: Power of main channel
Power of lower adjacent channel 1
Power of upper adjacent channel 1
Power of lower adjacent channel 2
Power of upper adjacent channel 2
...
The number of results depends on the number of adjacent channels selected.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in dBm, with linear
scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W. If SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:MODE REL
is selected, adjacent channel power is output in dB.
CPOWer
channel power measurement
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is output in dBm, with
linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W.
device-specific
OBANdwidth | OBWidth occupied bandwidth power measurement
The return value is the occupied bandwidth in Hz
CN
signal / noise power measurement
The return value is always in dB..
CN0
signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth
The return value is always in dB/Hz
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe]
OFF
This command switches the power measurement off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-F, VA-D
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
1088.7531.12
6.45
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD |
FWCDma | RWCDma | FW3Gppcdma
| RW3Gppcdma| M2CDma | D2CDma |
F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma |
R19Cdma | NONE| FO8Cdma
|
RO8Cdma | FO19cdma | RO19cdma
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A-F
device-specific
FWCDma
FW3Gppcdma
M2CDma
F8CDma
F19Cdma
FO8Cdma
RO8Cdma
W-CDMA forward
W-CDMA 3GPP forward
CDMA2000 Multi Carrier
CDMA800 forward
CDMA1900 forward
CDMA One 800 forward
CDMA One 800 reverse
RWCDma
RW3Gppcdma
D2CDma
R8CDma
R19Cdma
FO19cdma
RO19cdma
W-CDMA reverse
W-CDMA 3GPP reverse
CDMA2000 Direct Sequence
CDMA800 reverse
CDMA1900 reverse
CDMA One 1900 forward
CDMA One 1900 reverse
The selection of a standard influences the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and
spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time.
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF
This command switches the weighting filter for the selected standard on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:CFIL ON"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A-F
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the messages selected by the summary marker (eg RMS and MEAN) on
and off. One or several measurements can be selected with the commands listed in the following
and then switched jointly on and off with SUMMary:STATe.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
A-Z, VA
OFF
device-specific
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX ON"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
VA
OFF
device-specific
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.46
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult?
This command queries the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value.
Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands
...:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:RES?"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
VA
device-specific
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult?
This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute
value if the average is calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:AVER:RES?"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
VA
device-specific
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?
This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute
value when the peak hold function is switched on with command :CALCulate<1|2>:
MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:PHOL:RES?"
Features:
Mode:
*RST value:
SCPI:
VA
device-specific
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the positive peak value if the calculation and.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.47
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
and ...:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the
average is calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the peak
hold function is switched on with command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the negative peak value.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.48
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value. Results of average
calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? and
...:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the average is
calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:AVER:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the peak hold
function is switched on with command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.49
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value. Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands
...:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:RES? "
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value if the average is calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:
MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:AVER:RES? "
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value if the peak hold function is switched on using the command
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:PHOL:RES? "
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the effective (rms) value of the total trace.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.50
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:RMS:AVERage:RESult? and
...:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?..
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the
average is calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak
hold function is switched on using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the measurement of the mean value of the total trace.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.51
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? and
...:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?..
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the
average is calculated using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak
hold function is switched on using the command :CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?"
Features:
*RST- value: SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the peak-hold function.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
The peak-hold function is reset by switching off and on, again.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF
This command switches the calculation of the average value on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
The calculation of the average is reset by switching off and on, again.
1088.7531.12
6.52
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command switches off all measuring functions.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF"
Features:
*RST value:
_
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A-Z, VA
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command sets the center or receiver to that of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:CENT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A-F
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CSTep
This command sets the step width of the center frequency to the x-value of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:CST"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A-F
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STARt
This command sets the start frequency to the frequency of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STAR"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A-F
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STOP
This command sets the stop frequency to the frequency of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:STOP"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A-F
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.53
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MSTep
This command sets the marker step width to the x-value of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:MST"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:REFerence
This command sets the reference level to that of the current marker.
Example:
":CALC:MARK:FUNC:REF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
A, VA
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.
1088.7531.12
6.54
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
The CALCulate:MATH - subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe-subsystem in numeric
expressions.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
CALCulate<1|2>
:MATH<1 to 4>
[:EXPRession]
[:DEFine]
:STATe
<expr>
<Boolean>
---
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>[:EXPression][:DEFine] <expr>
This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces and reference line. Command
CALCulate:MATH:STATe switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off .
Parameter:
<expr>::= ‘OP1 - OP2 [ + RLINE]’
OP1 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4
OP2 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | RLINE
Examples:
":CALC:MATH1 (TRACE1 - TRACE3 + RLINE)"
":CALC:MATH4 (TRACE4 - RLINE)"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
The operand [+ RLINE] may be used only if OP2 is different from RLINE. The numeric suffix in
CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH<1 to 4> denotes the trace where
the result of the mathematical operation is stored. The number must be identical to the number of the
operand OP1.
:CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off.
Example:
":CALC:MATH1:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH<1 to 4>
denotes the trace which the command refers to.
1088.7531.12
6.55
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
CALCulate:PEAKsearch - Subsystem
The CALCulate:PEAKsearch subsystem allows data to be processed for final measurement.
Command
PARAMETER
Unit
Comment
CALCulate<1|2>
:PEAKsearch | :PSEarch
[:IMMediate]
:MARGin
:SUBRanges
:METHod
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
SUBRange | PEAK
dB
--
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate]
This command activates the generation of final measurement data.
Example:
"CALC:PEAK"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
device-specific
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin MINimun .. MAXimum
This command defines the margin of the final measurement.
Example:
"CALC:PEAK:MARG 5 dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
6 dB
device-specific
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant.
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges 1 to 500
This command defines the number of subranges for the final measurement.
Example:
"CALC:PEAK:SUBR 10"
Features:
*RST value:
25
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
R
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.56
E-15
ESIB
CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate<1|2>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK
This command defines the method that is used to determine the maxima of a scan.
Example:
"CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR"
Features:
*RST value:
PEAK
SCPI:
device-specific
Mode:
R
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.57
E-15
CALCulate Subsystem
ESIB
CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem
The CALCulate:Unit subsystem defines the units for vector signal analyzer mode and power
measurements.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALCulate<1|2>
:X
:UNIT
:TIME
:UNIT
:ANGLe
:POWer
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
S | SYM
DEG | RAD
DBM | V | W | DB |
PCT | UNITLESS |
DBPW | WATT |
DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |
DBPT | DBUA | AMPere
DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
Vector Signal Analysis
:CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME S | SYM
This command selects seconds or symbols as an x-axis unit.
Example:
":CALC:X:UNIT:TIME S"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
:CALCulate<1|2>: UNIT:ANGLe
S
device-specific
DEG | RAD
This command selects the unit for angular measurement.
Example:
":CALC:UNIT:ANGL DEG"
Features:
*RST- value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
:CALCulate<1|2>: UNIT:POWer
RAD
device-specific
DBM | V | W | DB | PCT | DBPT | UNITLESS | DBPW | WATT |
DBUV |DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DBUV_MHZ |DBMV_MHZ|
DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
This command selects the unit for power.
Example:
":CALC:UNIT:POW DBM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
_
device-specific
In the receiver mode, the units DBM, DBUV, DBPT, DBUA, DBPW, DBT, DBUV_M and DBUA_M
are available. In the analyzer mode, all unit are available except for DBPT, DEG, RAD, S, and HZ.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available only in the vector analyzer mode.
DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ.
1088.7531.12
6.58
E-15
ESIB
CALibration Subsystem
CALibration Subsystem
The commands of the CALibration subsystem perform instrument calibrations.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
CALibration
[:ALL]?
:BANDwidth
[:RESolution]?
:BWIDth
[:RESolution]?
:IQ?
UNIT
COMMENT
--
--
query only
--
--
query only
---
---
:LDETector?
:LOSuppression?
---
---
query only
query only /
Vector Signal Analysis
query only
query only
:PPEak?
:PRESelector?
:SHORt?
:STATe
---<Boolean>
-----
query only
query only
query only
::CALibration[:ALL]?
This command performs a complete calibration of the instrument. A "0" is returned if the calibration
was successful.
Example:
"CAL?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
:CALibration:BANDwidth | BWIDth[:RESolution]?
This command performs a calibration of the filter bandwidths. A "0" is returned if the calibration was
successful.
Example:
":CAL:BAND?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALibration:IQ?
This command performs a calibration of the vector signal analyzer. A "0" is returned if the calibration
was successful.
Example:
":CAL:IQ?"
features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA
1088.7531.12
device-specific
6.59
E-15
CALibration Subsystem
ESIB
:CALibration:LDETector?
This command performs a calibration of the log module’s characteristic and of the detectors. A "0" is
returned if the calibration was successful.
Example:
":CAL:LDET?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALibration:LOSuppression?
This command performs a calibration of the local oscillator suppression. . A "0" is returned if the
calibration was successful.
Example:
":CAL:LOS?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALibration:PPEak?
This command performs a calibration of the tracking YIG filter (preselector peaking). A "0" is
returned if the calibration was successful.
Example:
":CAL:PPE?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
:CALibration:PRESelector?
This command performs a calibration of the preselector. If this is done successfully, "0" is returned.
Example:
":CAL:PRES?"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
device-specific
R
:CALibration:SHORt?
This command performs a short calibration. A "0" is returned if the calibration was successful.
Example:
":CAL:SHOR?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:CALibration:STATe ON | OFF
This command determines whether (ON) or not (OFF) the current calibration data are taken into
consideration.
Example:
":CAL:STAT OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
conforming
6.60
E-15
ESIB
DIAGnostic-Subsystem
DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for
maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are
device-specific.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
DIAGnostic
:SERVice
:INPut
[:SELect]
:FUNCtion
:NSOurce
:INFO
:CCOunt
:ATTenuation<1 | 2 | 4>?
CALibration | RF
<numeric_value>,>numeric_value>
<Boolean>
UNIT
----
COMMENT
no query
query only
:DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration | RF
This command toggles between the RF input on the front panel and the internal 120-MHz reference
signal.
Example:
":DIAG:SERV:INP CAL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
RF
device-specific
:DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>...
This command activates a service function.
Example:
":DIAG:SERV:FUNC 2,0,2,12,1"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
The service function is selected via five parameters: functional group number, board number,
function number, parameter 1 and parameter 2 (see service manual).
:DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF
This command switches the 28-V supply at the rear connector of the noise source on and off.
Example:
":DIAG:SERV:NSO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.61
E-15
DIAGnostic Subsystem
ESIB
:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation<1 | 2 | 4>?
This command queries the cycle counters of the attenuators. The suffix selects the attenuator:
1: Basic Instrument, input 1
2: Tracking Generator 4: Basic intrument,input2
The result is output as a list of values separated by a ’,’. The list starts with the date.
Example:
":DIAG:INFO:CCO:ATT?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned.
1088.7531.12
6.62
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as
well as of trace data on the display.
The displays in the split-screen mode are assigned to WINDow 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B) .
COMMAND
DISPlay
:FORMat
:PROgram
[:MODE]
:ANNotation
:FREQuency
:LOGO
:CMAP<1 to 13>
:DEFault
:HSL
:PDEFined
[:WINDow<1|2>]
:TEXT
[:DATA]
:STATe
:TIME
:MINFo
:TRACe<1 to 4>
:X
[:SCALe]
:RVALue
:ZOOM
[:FREQuency]
:STARt
:STOP
:CENTer
:SPACing
:Y
[:SCALe]
:MODE
:RLEVel
:OFFSet
:RVALue
UNIT
COMMENT
SINGle | SPLit
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
0 to 100,0 to 100,0 to 100
BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen |
CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow |
WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe |
LGREen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta
<string>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
Vector Signal Analysis
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
LINear | LOGarithmic
HZ
HZ
HZ
--
<numeric_value>
ABSolute | RELative
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
DB
:AUTO
:RPOSition
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
:PDIVision
<numeric_value>
:BOTTom
:TOP
:SPACing
1088.7531.12
PARAMETERS
DBM
DB
DBM|DB|HZ|
DEG|RAD
PCT
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
LINear|LOGarithmic|PERCent
6.63
Analyzer mode only
Vector Signal Analysis or
Tracking Generator
Vector Signal Analysis
DBM|DB|HZ|
DEG|RAD
----
E-15
DISPlay Subsystem
ESIB
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
DISPlay
[:WINDow<1|2>]
:TRACe<1 to 4>
:MODE
:CWRite
:ANALog
:HCONtinuous
[:STATe]
:SYMBol
:EYE
:COUNt
:BARGraph
:LEVel
:LOWer?
:UPPer?
:PSAVe
[:STATe]
HOLDoff
UNIT
WRITe | VIEW | AVERage |
MAXHold | MINHold | FRESult
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
DOTS | BARS | OFF
--
<numeric_value>
---
SYM
-----
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
Vector Signal Analysis
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
:DISPlay:FORMat SINGle | SPLit
This command switches the test result display between FULL SCREEN and SPLIT SCREEN.
Example:
":DISP:FORM SPL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
SINGle
device-specific
:DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] ON | OFF
This command switches the display between the measuring instrument and the computer function.
Example:
":DISP:PROG ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF
This command switches the x-axis annotation on or off.
Example:
":DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
ON
conforming
6.64
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF
This command switches the factory logo on the screen on or off.
Example:
":DISP:LOGO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
:DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:DEFault
This command resets the screen colors of the instrument to their default settings.
Example:
":DISP:CMAP:DEF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-conforming
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned. The numeric suffix in
CMAP<1 to 13> is not significant.
:DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
This command defines the color table of the instrument.
Parameter:
hue = TINT
sat = SATURATION
lum = BRIGHTNESS
The value range is 0.0 to 100.0 for all parameters.
Example:
":DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-conforming
To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified
by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies:
CMAP1
CMAP2
CMAP3
CMAP4
CMAP5
CMAP6
CMAP7
Trace 1
CMAP8
Trace 2
CMAP9
Trace 3
CMAP10
Trace 4
CMAP11
Marker
CMAP12
Grid
CMAP13
softkey State On
Soft key State Data Entry
Soft key State OFF
Soft key Shade
Text
Title
Background
The values set are not changed by *RST.
1088.7531.12
6.65
E-15
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:PDEFined
ESIB
BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |
YELLow |WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen |
LCYan |LRED | LMAGenta
This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values. To each
numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by
varying the corresponding color setting. The same assignment as for :DISPlay:CMAP<1 to
13>:HSL applies.
Example:
":DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-conforming
The values set are not changed by *RST.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:MINFo ON | OFF
This command switches the marker info list on the screen on or off.
Example:
":DISP:MINF ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>
This command defines a comment (max. 50 characters) which can be displayed on the screen.
Example:
":DISP:TEXT "signal/noise power measurement"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
"" (empty)
conforming
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the screen display of the comment.
Example:
":DISP:TEXT:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.66
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time.
Example:
":DISP:TIME ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue <numeric_value>
This command defines the reference value for the X-axis of the measuring diagram.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:RVAL 20SYM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON | OFF
This command displays the zoomed current frequency range in the opposite window of the split
screen representation.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
OFF
device-specific
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt
<numeric_value>
This command defines the start frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between
start and stop frequency of the original range.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STAR 100MHZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
-- (depending on the current frequency setting)
device-specific
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP <numeric_value>
This command defines the stop frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between
start and stop frequency of the original range.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STOP 200MHZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
-- (depending on the current frequency setting)
device-specific
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.67
E-15
DISPlay Subsystem
ESIB
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer <num_value>
This command shifts the zoomed frequency range to the specified center frequency.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:CENT 1GHZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
-- (depending on the current frequency setting)
device-specific
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
LOGarithmic
conforming
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB
This command defines the display range of the Y-axis (level axis) with logarithmic scaling
(DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG).
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
100dB
device-specific
For linear scaling, (DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN | PERC) the display range is fixed and cannot be
set. The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative
This command defines the scale of the y-axis (absolute or relative).
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ABS
device-specific
As long as SYSTem:DISPlay is set to OFF, this command does not directly influence the screen.
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
-200dBm to 200dBm
This command defines the reference level.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
-20dBm
conforming
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.68
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
-200dB to 200dB
This command defines the offset of the reference level.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0dB
conforming
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
<numeric_value>
This command defines the reference value for the y-axis of the measurement diagram.
This defines the upper limit of the display range, the corresponding parameters of the manual control
vary according to the measurement mode.
In the spectrum analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter MAX LEVEL.
In the vector signal analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE Y
AXIS.
IF option tracking generator is fitted and the normalization in the analyzer mode is activated, the
value corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm"
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL +1.20"
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL 0"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
(spectrum analysis)
(vector signal analysis)
(tracking generator)
- coupled to reference level
0
(vector signal analysis)
0 dB (tracking generator with active normalization)
device specific
A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO
ON | OFF
This command defines whether the reference value for the y-axis of the measured diagram is
coupled to the reference level (default) or can be set independently.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL:AUTO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ON
device-specific
This command is available in the analyzer mode only. The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not
significant.
1088.7531.12
6.69
E-15
DISPlay Subsystem
ESIB
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100PCT
This command defines the position of the reference value.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
100PCT (tracking generator)
50PCT (vector analyzer)
conforming
A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant. This command is only valid in conjunction
with option Tracking Generator or in vector analyzer mode.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision
<numeric_value>
This command defines the scaling of the Y-axis in the current unit.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:PDIV +1.20"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA
conforming
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <numeric_value>
This command defines the minimum grid level for the display in the receiver mode.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT -20"
Features:
*RST value:
0
SCPI:
conforming
Mode:
R
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:TOP
<numeric_value>
This command defines the maximum grid level for the display in the receiver mode.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:TOP 120"
Features:
*RST value:
100
SCPI:
conforming
Mode:
R
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y:SPACing
LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent
This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
LOGarithmic
conforming
The linear display can be LIN/% (PERCent) or LIN/dB (LINear). The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4>
is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.70
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE
WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold |
FRESult
This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces.
For selection FRESult (display of final measurement) only suffix 3 or 4 is valid for TRACe<1 to 4>.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2 to 4
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:CWRite
ON | OFF
This command selects continuous display of the measured values (continuous write).
Example:
":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:CWR ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF
This command selects continuous display of the measured values in the analyzer mode (analog
trace).
Example:
":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:ANAL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:HCONtinuous
ON | OFF
This command defines whether the traces in the min hold/max hold mode are reset after some
definite parameter changes.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes.
ON
This mechanism is switched off.
OFF
device-specific
In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before results are evaluated
(e.g. with markers). For those changes that are known to require a new measurement (e.g.
modification of the span), the trace is automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous
results are avoided. This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the
described behavior is unwelcome.
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.71
E-15
DISPlay Subsystem
ESIB
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches the display of the corresponding trace on or off.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC3 ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 4
conforming
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF
This command determines the display of the points of decision on the trace.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:SYMB BARS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:EYE:COUNt 1 to Result Length
This command determines the display range of the eye diagram in symbols.
Example:
":DISP:TRAC:EYE:COUNt 5"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
2
device-specific
:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer?
This command queries the minimum level of the bar graph.
Example:
":DISP:BARG:LEV:LOW?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
-device-specific
:DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer?
This command queries the maximum level of the bar graph.
Example:
":DISP:BARG:LEV:UPP?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
1088.7531.12
-device-specific
6.72
E-15
ESIB
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the screen saver mode on or off.
Example
":DISP:PSAV ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
OFF
device-specific
:DISPlay: PSAVe:HOLDoff <numeric_value>
This command determines the time after which the screen saver is switched on. Values are input in
minutes, the valid range is 1 to 100 minutes.
Example:
":DISP:PSAV:HOLD 10"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
1088.7531.12
1
device-specific
6.73
E-15
FORMat Subsystem
ESIB
FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument.
COMMAND
FORMat
[:DATA]
:DEXPort
:DSEParator
:HEADer
[:STATe]
:APPend
[:STATe]
:COMMent
PARAMETERS
UNIT
ASCii|REAL|UINT[,<numeric_value>]
-
COMMENT
POINt|COMMa
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<string>
:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL | UINT [, 32]
This command specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument.
Example:
":FORM REAL,32"
":FORM ASC"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ASCii
conforming
The data format is either ASCii or one of the formats REAL or UINT (Unsigned Integer). ASCii data
are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas. REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754
floating-point numbers in the "definite length block". The format UINT is only used in operating mode
Vector Signal Analysis, for the symbol table.
Format setting for the binary transmission of trace data (see also TRACE:DATA?):
Analyzer mode:
REAL, 32
Vector analyzer:
UINT, 8
Note:
with digital demodulation, symbol table
REAL, 32otherwise
Incorrect format setting will result in numerical conversion, which may lead to incorrect
results.
If the format ”FORM REAL, 32” is selected for the above example, the data stream from the analyzer
to the controller is as follows:
#432085334.....
||| ||
|||..|From here follow the data bytes of the data block, here 5334
||Number of bytes of data block stated in ASCII plain text, here 3208
|ASCII byte stating the length of the subsequent length counter, here 4
Head marker of binary data stream
For this example, the number of transmitted data bytes is as follows:
Number
=
number of test points * bytes/value* 2
3208
=
401
* 4* 2
The FORMat command is valid for the transmission of trace data. The data format of trace data
received by the instrument is automatically recognized, regardless of the format which is
programmed.
1088.7531.12
6.74
E-15
ESIB
FORMat-Subsystem
:FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA
This command determines the decimal separator (decimal point or comma)for the output of the
measurement data in ASCII format. Thus, evaluation programms (i.e. MS-Exel) of different language
versions are supported.
Example:
":FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
POINt
device specific
:FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This commad determines if the output file starts with a header (start frequency, sweep time, detector,
.. = ON) or not. OFF = only measurement data is output.
Example:
":FORM:DEXP:HEAD OFF
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device specific
:FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF
This commad determines if the output file is overwritten or the data is added to the end of the file.
Example:
":FORM:DEXP:APP OFF
Featuures:
*RSTvalue:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
:FORMat:DEXPort:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment for the output file.
Example:
":FORM:DEXP:COMM ’ASCII EXPORT TRACE 1’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
„“
conforming
6.75
E-15
HCOPy Subsystem
ESIB
HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation purposes on output
devices or files.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
HCOPy
:ABORt
:DESTination<1|2>
-‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’|
’SYST:COMM:CLIP' |
’MMEM’
:DEVice
:COLor
:LANGuage<1|2>
[:IMMediate<1|2>]
:ITEM
:ALL
:FFEed<1|2>
:STATe
:LABel
:TEXT
:PFEed<1|2>
:STATe
:WINDow<1|2>
:TABLe
:STATe
:TEXT
:TRACe
:STATe
:CAINcrement
:PAGE
:DIMensions
:QUADrant<1 to 4>
:FULL
:ORIentation<1|2>
<Boolean>
WMF | GDI | EWMF | BMP
--
UNIT
COMMENT
no query
no query
no query
no query
<Boolean>
<string>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<string>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
no query
no query
LANDscape|PORTrait
:HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example:
":HCOP:ABOR"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query.
1088.7531.12
6.76
E-15
ESIB
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <string>
This command selects the device for outputting the hardcopy. The availability of the parameters
depends on the selected data format (see command :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage).
Parameter:
<string>::=
’MMEM’ |
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ |
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’
Example:
":HCOP:DEST2 ’MMEM’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query.
’MMEM’
creates a file for the hardcopy output. Command MMEM:NAME <file_name>
defines the file name. All formats can be selected for
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’
directs the hardcopy to the printer. The printer is selected with command
SYSTEM:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect.
GDI should be selected for :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’
directs the hardcopy to the clipboard. EWMF should be selected for
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
:HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF
This command selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen.
Example:
":HCOP:DEV:COL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2>
OFF
conforming
WMF| EWMF | GDI | BMP
This command determines the data format of the printout.
Example:
":HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
WMF and
EWMF
(WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format)
Data formats for output files which can at a later time be integrated in
corresponding programs for documentation purposes.
BMP
(Bitmap) Data format for output files.
GDI
(Graphics Device Interface) Default format for the output to a printer configured
under Windows. For the output file the printer driver configured under Windows is
used and thus a printer-specific format is generated.
1088.7531.12
conforming
6.77
E-15
HCOPy Subsystem
ESIB
:HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command starts a hardcopy output.
Example:
"HCOP"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
HCOP[1] starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default), HCOP2 starts the output to device 2.
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
This command selects the complete screen to be output.
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:ALL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the
whole screen, only traces (commands ’:HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TRACe: STATe ON’) or tables
(command ’:HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON’) can be output.
:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
The command adds a form feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen.
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:FFE2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
:HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT <string>
This command defines the title of the screen with a maximum of 60 characters.
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:LAB:TEXT ’My Title’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
conforming
:HCOPy:ITEM:PFEed<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command adds a paper feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen (ON).
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:PFE2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.78
E-15
ESIB
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABLe:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed tables (ON).
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TABL:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The command :HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABLe:STATe
:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen.
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT
OFF same as command
<string>
This command defines the comment text for printout to trace 1 or 2 with a maximum of 100
characters.
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:WIND2:TEXT ‘comment’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed trace (ON).
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The command :HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe OFF same as command
:HCOPy:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen.
:HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF
The command automatically changes the colour of the currently displayed trace after printout (ON).
Example:
":HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:CAIN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
The automatic change of colour of the trace allows outputting to a plotter of several traces of the
same diagram. For a better distinction, the colour of the trace is changed (”Color Auto Increment”).
1088.7531.12
6.79
E-15
HCOPy Subsystem
ESIB
:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant<1 to 4>
The command defines the quadrant which is allocated to the screen output.
Example:
":HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD1"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
The quadrants are defined as QUAD1 at the top right, QUAD2 at the top left, QUAD3 at the bottom
left and QUAD4 at the bottom right. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
:HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL
This command defines that the full screen is to be printed out.
Example:
":HCOP:PAGE:DIM:FULL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned and *RST value and has no query.
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait
The command selects the format of the output (portrait and landscape) (hardcopy unit 1 or 2).
Example:
":HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
conforming
6.80
E-15
ESIB
INITiate Subsystem
INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem checks the initialization of the trigger subsystem.
In receiver mode, a distinction is made between single measurement (INITiate1) and scan (INITiate2).
In signal analyzer mode, a distinction is made between INITiate1 (screen A) and INITiate2 (screen B) in
split screen representation.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
INITiate<1|2>
:CONTinuous
:CONMeas
[:IMMediate]
:DISPlay
<boolean>
--<boolean>
UNIT
-----
COMMENT
no query
no query
:INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON | OFF
This command determines if the trigger system is continuously initiated ("Free Run").
Example:
":INIT:CONT OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
conforming
Setting "INITiate:CONTinuous ON" corresponds to function SCAN/SWEEP CONTinuous, ie the
scan/sweep of the receiver/analyzer is cyclically repeated. The setting "INITiate:CONTinuous
OFF" corresponds to function SCAN/SWEEP SINGLE.
:INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas
This command continues the sweep from the current sweep position.
Example:
":INIT:CONM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Sweeps are stopped, for example, in the case of transducer sets between the different transducer
factors.
:INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new sweep/scan or starts a single sweep/scan.
Example:
"INIT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF
This command switches the display on or off during a single sweep.
Example:
":INIT:DISP OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
ON
device-specific
6.81
E-15
INPut Subsystem
ESIB
INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem checks the input features of the instrument. In receiver mode, the suffix is not
significant. In analyzer mode, a distinction is made between INPut1 (screen A) and INPut2 (screen B) in
the split-screen representation.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
INPut<1|2>
:ATTenuation
:AUTO
:MODE
:PROTection
:UPORt<1|2>
[:VALue]?
:STATe
:LISN
[:TYPE]
:PHASe
:PEARth
:IMPedance
:CORRection
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
NORMal | LNOise|LDIStortion
<Boolean>
DB
----
-<Boolean>
---
TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF
L1 | L2 | L3 | N
GROunded | FLOating
50 | 75
RAM | RAZ
:MIXer
:COUPling
:GAIN
:STATe
:AUTO
:TYPE
UNIT
<numeric_value>
AC | DC
COMMENT
query only
OHM
DBM
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
INPUT1 |INPUT2
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation
0 to 70 dB
This command programs the input attenuator.
Example:
":INP:ATT 40dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
The attenuation of the input calibration line can be programmed in steps of 10 dB (INPUT1) and 5 dB
(INPUT2). If the attenuation is programmed directly, the autorange function (receiver) and coupling to
the reference level (analyzer) are switched off.
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF
This command activates the auto range function (receiver) or automatically couples the input
attenuation to the reference level. (analyzer).
Example:
":INP:ATT:AUTO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
ON
conforming
6.82
E-15
ESIB
INPut Subsystem
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal | LNOise | LDIStortion
This command optimizes the coupling of the input attenuation to the reference level to high sensitivity
or to high intermodulation immunity.
Example:
":INP:ATT:AUTO:MODE LDIS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
For LNOise, the input attenuator value is set 10 dB lower than for INPut:ATTenuation:
AUTO:MODE NORMal, for LDIStortion it is set 10 dB higher.
:INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF
This command defines whether the 0 dB position of the attenuator is to be used in manual or
automatic adjustment.
Example:
":INP:ATT:PROT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
OFF
device-specific
:INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]?
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
Example:
":INP:UPOR2?"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is a query command which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
:INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
Example:
":INP:UPOR2:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
With ON, the user port is switched to INPut, with OFF to OUTPut.
1088.7531.12
6.83
E-15
INPut Subsystem
ESIB
:INPut<1|2>:LISN[:TYPE] TWOPhase | FOURphase | OFF
This command selects the V-network to be controlled via the user port:
TWOPhase = Two-line V-network ESH3-Z5
FOURphase = Four-line V-networkESH2-Z5 oder ENV4200
OFF = remote control is deactivated
Example:
":INP:LISN:TWO"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device specific
The numeric suffix in INPut<1|2> is not significant.
:INPut<1|2>:LISN:PHASe L1 | L2 | L3 | N
This command selects the phase of the V-network on which the RFI voltage is to be measured.
Example:
":INP:LISN:PHAS L1"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
L1
device specific
The numeric suffix in INPut<1|2> is not significant.
:INPut<1|2>:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating
This command selects the setting of the protectoion earth of the V-network.
Example:
":INP:LISN:PEAR GRO"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
GROunded
device specific
The numeric suffix in INPut<1|2> is not significant.
:INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50 | 75
This command sets the nominal input impedance of the instrument.
Example:
":INP:IMP 75"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
50
conforming
Switching the input impedance to 75 Ω includes the matching elements RAM or RAZ selected by the
command INPut:IMPedance:CORRection.
1088.7531.12
6.84
E-15
ESIB
INPut Subsystem
:INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAM | RAZ
This command selects the matching element for 75 Ω input impedance.
Example:
":INP:IMP:CORR RAM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
:INPut<1|2>:MIXer
- (INPut:IMPedance = 50 Ω)
device-specific
-10 to -100 dBm
This command defines the nominal mixer level of the instrument.
Example:
":INP:MIX -30"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
device-specific
:INPut<1|2>:COUPling AC | DC
This command switches the input coupling of the RF input 2 between A.C. and D.C.
Example:
":INP:COUP DC"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
AC
conforming
:INPut<1|2>:GAIN:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on the preamplifier. The preselector has to be activated for the preamplifier
to become effective. Therefore, the preselector is switched on automatically when the preamplifier is
activated.
Example:
":INP:GAIN 20dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
E
OFF
conforming
:INPut<1|2>:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF
This command includes the preamplifier into the autoranging function of the receiver.
Example:
":INP:GAIN:AUTO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
1088.7531.12
OFF
conforming
6.85
E-15
INPut Subsystem
ESIB
:INPut<1|2>:PRESelection[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the preselection on or off.
Example:
":INP:PRES:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA, R
OFF
device-specific
:INPut<1|2>:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2
This command selects the type of input.
Example:
":INP:TYPE INPUT1"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
E, A, VA
1088.7531.12
INPUT1
conforming
6.86
E-15
ESIB
INSTrument Subsystem
INSTrument Subsystem
The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed
numbers. In the receiver mode, the suffix is not significant. In the analyzer and vector analyzer mode, a
distinction is made between INSTrument1 (screen A) and INSTrument2 (screen B) in the split-screen
representation.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
INSTrument<1|2>
[:SELect]
UNIT
SANalyzer | DDEMod | ADEMod |
RECeiver
<numeric_value>
NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol |
XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL
:NSELect
:COUPle
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
:INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] RECeiver | DDEMod | ADEMod | SANalyzer
This command switches between the operating modes by means of text parameters.
Parameter:
RECeiver:
receiver mode
SANalyzer:
spectrum analysis
DDEMod:
vector signal analysis, digital demodulation
ADEMod:
vector signal analysis, analog demodulation
Example:
":INST DDEM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
RECeiver
conforming
Switchover to DDEMod or ADEMod is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal
Analysis.
:INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 1 | 2 | 3 | 6
This command switches between the two modes by means of numbers.
Example:
":INST:NSEL 2"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
1:
2:
R, A, VA
spectrum analysis
vector signal analysis, digital demodulation
3:
vector signal analysis, analog demodulation
6:
receiver mode
6
conforming
Switchover to 2 or 3 is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-B7, Vector Signal Analysis.
1088.7531.12
6.87
E-15
INSTrument Subsystem
ESIB
:INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol | XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL
This command defines the coupling between the two measurement windows screen A and B.
Example:
":INST:COUP NONE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
NONE
MODE
X or Y
CONTrol
A, VA
no coupling.
the operating mode of the two screens is coupled.
the scaling of the x- or y axis of the two screens is coupled.
the trigger and gate parameter ,and the sweep parameters SINGle/ CONTinous
and COUNt of the two screens are coupled.
the scaling of the x- and y-axis of the two screens are coupled.
the trigger and gate parameter, and the sweep parameters SINGle CONTinous/
COUNt of the two screens are coupled.
the scaling of the x- or y axis the trigger and gate parameter and the sweep
parameters SINGle/ CONTinous/ COUNt of the two screens are coupled.
XY
XCONTrol bzw.
YCONTrol
ALL
ALL
device specific
The numeric suffix in INSTrument<1|2> is not significant.
1088.7531.12
6.88
E-15
ESIB
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access to the storage
media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings.
The NAME command stores the HCOPy outputs in a file.
The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage unit specifier <msus> using the conventional
DOS syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "C:", the floppy-disk drive installed by "A:".
The file names <file_name> are indicated as string parameters with the commands being enclosed in
quotation marks. They correspond to the DOS conventions.
DOS file names consist of max. 8 ASCII characters and an extension of up to three characters
separated from the file name by a colon "." Both, the colon and the extension are optional. The colon is
not part of the file name. DOS file names do not differ between uppercase and lowercase notation. All
letters and digits are permitted as well as the special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{",
"}", "(", ")", "@" and "‘ ". Reserved file names are CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM4, LPT1 to LPT3,
NUL and PRN.
The two characters "*" and "?" have the function of so-called "wildcards", i.e., they are variables for
selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character which may be any, the
asterisk means any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all files in a directory.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
MMEMory
:CATalog
<string>
:CDIRectory
<directory_name>
--
:COPY
<file_name>,<file_name>
--
:DATA
<file name>[,<block>]
--
:DELete
<file_name>
--
no query
:INITialize
<msus>
--
no query
:STATe
1,<file_name>
--
no query
:AUTO
no query
:LOAD
1,<file_name>
--
no query
:MDIRectory
<directory_name>
--
no query
:MOVE
<file_name>,<file_name>
--
no query
:MSIS
<msus>
--
:NAME
<file_name>
--
:RDIRectory
<directory_name>
--
no query
:STATe
1,<file_name>
--
no query
:TRACe
:FINal
<numeric_value>, <file_name>
<final_name>
:STORe
no query
no query
:CLEar
:STATe
1,<file_name>
--
:ALL
1088.7531.12
no query
no query
6.89
E-15
MMEMory Subsystem
ESIB
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
MMEMory
:SELect
[:ITEM]
:GSETup
:HWSettings
:TRACE<1 to 4>
:LINes
[:ACTive]
:ALL
:CSETup
:HCOPy
:MACRos
:SCData
:TRANsducer
[:ACTive]
:ALL
:CVL
[:ACTive]
:ALL
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
Option Tracking Generator
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
---<string>
:ALL
:NONE
:DEFault
:COMMent
no query
no query
no query
:MMEMory:CATalog? <string>
This command reads out the files and subdirectories of the current directory. A mask, eg "*.bat", can
be defined so that only files with "bat" as extension are selected.
Syntax of output format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name or name of subdirectory>,<file or subdirectory>,<1st file length>,<2nd file name or
name of subdirectory>,<file or subdirectory>,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,<file or
subdirectory>, <nth file length>.
<File or subdirectory>:
in case of a file the field remains empty,
in case of a subdirectory the field contains "DIR".
Parameter:
<string>::= DOS file name
Example:
":MMEM:CAT ’rem?.lin’"
Characteristics: *RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
1088.7531.12
conformal
R, A, VA
6.90
E-15
ESIB
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
":MMEM:CDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path
name complies with the DOS conventions.
:MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
This command copies the files indicated.
Parameter:
<file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
":MMEM:COPY ’C:\USER\DATA\SETUP.CFG’,’A:’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
The indication of the file name may include the path and the drive. The file names and path
information must be in accordance with the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is
why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>[,<block data>]
This command writes block data to the specified file.
Syntax:
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<block data>
:MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Example:
":MMEM:DATA? ’TEST01.HCP’"
":MMEM:DATA ’TEST01.HCP’, #217This is the file"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
Each <block> starts with the character ‘#’, followed by the value stating the length of the length
information. This is followed by one or several characters for the length information; then come the
data themselves. The end character must be set to EOI to ensure correct data transmission.
:MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
This command deletes the files indicated.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
":MMEM:DEL ’TEST01.HCP’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally, the drive. Indication of the path
corresponds to the DOS conventions. The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.91
E-15
MMEMory Subsystem
ESIB
:MMEMory:INITialize ’A:’
This command formats the disk in drive A.
Example:
":MMEM:INIT ’A:’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
Formatting deletes all data stored on the floppy disk. This command is an event which is why it is not
assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command loads instrument settings from files.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example:
":MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,’A:TEST’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Modes:
R, A, VA
The contents of the file is loaded and set as new instrument state. The file name includes indication
of the path and may also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions.
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,<file_name>
This command defines which device setting is automatically loaded after the instrument is switched
on.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension;
FACTORY denotes the data set previously in the
instrument
Example:
":MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,’C:\USER\DATA\TEST’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
Modes:
R, A, VA
The contents of the file are read after switching on the instrument and used to define the new device
state. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
This command creates a new directory.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
":MMEM:MDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.92
E-15
ESIB
:MMEMory:MOVE
MMEMory Subsystem
<file_source>,<file_destination>
This command renames existing files.
Parameter:
<file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example:
":MMEM:MOVE ’TEST01.CFG’,’SETUP.CFG’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:MSIS
’A:’ | ’C:’
This command changes to the drive indicated.
Example:
":MMEM:MSIS ’A:’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
"C:’
conforming
The drive may be the internal hard disk C: or the floppy-disk drive A:. The drive is indicated according
to the DOS conventions.
:MMEMory:NAME
<file_name>
This command specifies a file which is printed or plotted to.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS filename
Example:
":MMEM:NAME ’PLOT1.HPG’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path
information correspond to the DOS conventions. The output to the printer is routed into a file using
the command ":HCOP:DEST ’MMEM’".
:MMEMory:RDIRectory
<directory_name>
This command deletes the directory indicated.
Parameter:
<directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example:
":MMEM:RDIR ’C:\TEST’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
The directory name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.93
E-15
MMEMory Subsystem
ESIB
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command stores the current instrument setting in a file.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example:
":MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,’TEST’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
The current instrument state is stored as a file. The file name includes indication of the path and may
also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an
event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe
1 to 4,<file_name>
This command stores the selected trace (1 to 4) in ASCII format in a file.
Parameter:
1 to 4
<file_name>
:= selected trace 1 to 4
:= DOS file name
Example:
":MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,’A:\TEST.ASC’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path
information correspond to the DOS conventions.This command is an event which is why it is not
assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command deletes the instrument setting denoted by <file_name>.
Parameter:
<file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example:
":MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,’TEST’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
The device data set specified is deleted. The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.94
E-15
ESIB
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:STORe:FINal <file_name>
This command stores the final measurement data in an ASCII file.
Parameter:
<file_name>
:= DOS file name
Example:
"MMEM:STOR:FIN ’A:\TEST.ASC’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
device-specific
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all instrument settings in the current directory.
Example:
":MMEM:CLE:ALL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup
ON | OFF
This command includes the data of the general setup in the list of data subsets of a device setting to
be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:GSET ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings
ON | OFF
This command includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:HWS ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
Level and frequency lines are stored with this command as well.
1088.7531.12
6.95
E-15
MMEMory Subsystem
ESIB
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1 to 4>
ON | OFF
This command includes the data of the selected trace in the list of data subsets of a device setting to
be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:TRACE3 ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF for all Traces
device-specific
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF
This command includes the active limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:LIN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
Upon MMEM:LOAD the limit lines which are not currently active but contained in the data set are
restored as well.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL
ON | OFF
This command includes all limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
This command includes selection of the active limit lines.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup
ON | OFF
This command includes the current color setting in the list of partial datasets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:CSET ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy
ON
device-specific
ON | OFF
This command includes the hardcopy settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:HCOPy ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
ON
device-specific
6.96
E-15
ESIB
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos
ON | OFF
This command includes the keyboard macros in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:MACRos ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF
This command includes the tracking generator calibration data in the list of data subsets of a device
setting to be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:SCData ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
This command only available in conjunction with the option Tracking Generator.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive]
ON | OFF
This command includes the active transducer factors and set in the list of data subsets of a device
setting to be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:TRAN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
Upon MMEM:LOAD the transducer factors and sets which are not currently active but contained in the
data set are restored as well.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL
ON | OFF
This command includes all transducer factors and sets in the list of data subsets of a device setting
to be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.
1088.7531.12
6.97
E-15
MMEMory Subsystem
ESIB
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF
This command includes the active conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored /
loaded for a device setup.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:CVL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF
This command includes all conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored / loaded
for a device setup.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:CVL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:ALL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command deletes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:NONE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.
1088.7531.12
6.98
E-15
ESIB
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command sets the default list of the data subsets of a device setting to be stored/loaded.
Example:
":MMEM:SEL:DEFault"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
-device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.
:MMEMory:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment for a device setting to be stored.
Example:
":MMEM:COMM ’Setup for GSM measurement’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
blank comment
device-specific
6.99
E-15
OUTPut Subsystem
ESIB
OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut subsystem checks the output features of the instrument.
In conjunction with option tracking generator, in the split screen mode, a distinction is made between
OUTPut1 (screen A) and OUTPut2 (screen B).
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
OUTPut<1|2>
[:STATe]
:UPORt<1|2>
[:VALue]
:STATe
:AF
:SENSitivity
:OUTPut<1|2>[:STATe]
UNIT
<boolean>
--
<binary>
<boolean>
---
<numeric_value
PCT |
HZ | KHZ |
DEG | RAD
COMMENT
Option Tracking Generator
Vector Signal Analysis
ON | OFF
This command switches the tracking generator on or off.
Example:
":OUTP ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
conforming
This command is only valid in conjunction with one of the options tracking generator.
:OUTPut<1|2>UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] #B00000000 to #B11111111
This command sets the control lines of the user ports.
Example:
":OUTP:UPOR2 #B10100101"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
device-specific
User port 1 or 2 is written with the given binary pattern. If the user port is programmed to INPut
instead of OUTPut, the output value is temporarily stored.
:OUTPut<1|2>UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
Example:
":OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
OFF
device-specific
With ON, the user port is switched to OUTPut, with OFF to INPut.
1088.7531.12
6.100
E-15
ESIB
OUTPut Subsystem
:OUTPut<1|2>AF:SENSitivity <numeric_value>
This command changes the sensitivity of the AF-output.
Parameter:
<numeric_value> ::=
Example:
":OUTP:AF:SENS 20PCT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
1088.7531.12
0.1 PCT to 100 PCTfor AM
0.1 KHZ to 100 KHZfor FM
0.0 1RAD to 10 RADfor PM
100 % for AM
100 kHz for FM
10 rad for PM
device-specific
VA-A
6.101
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
The SENSe subsystem is itself divided up into several subsystems. The commands of these
subsystems directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the
measurement signal.
The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the receiver, the analyzer and vector
analyzer. In accordance with the SCPI standard, it is for this reason optional, which means that it is not
necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences.
In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between SENSe1 and SENSe2:
SENSe1 =;^ screen A;
SENSe2 =;^ screen B
SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem
This subsystem controls the parameters for analog demodulation.
It is active only in conjunction with option Vector Signal Analysis, FSE-B7.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:ADEMod
:AF
:COUPling
:SQUelch
[:STATe]
:LEVel
:SBANd
:RTIMe
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
AC | DC
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
NORMal | INVerse
<Boolean>
DBM
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC | DC
This command selects coupling of the AF-branch.
Example:
":ADEM:AF:COUP DC"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
AC
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command switches the squelch for the audio branch on or off.
Example:
":ADEM:SQU ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.102
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 30 to -150 dBm
This command defines the switching threshold for the squelch referred to the measured signal.
Example:
":ADEM:SQU -10DBM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
-40dBm
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse
This command selects the side band for the demodulation.
Example:
":ADEM:SBAN INV"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
:[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:RTIMe
NORMal
device-specific
ON | OFF
This command selects whether the demodulation performed in real time or in blocks.
Example:
":ADEM:RTIM ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
1088.7531.12
ON
device-specific
6.103
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the data acquired. A new test result is
obtained from various successive measurements. The amount of test points and the axis reference of
the new result correspond to those of the original measurements.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:AVERage
:COUNt
:AUTO
[:STATe]
:TYPE
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
MAXimum | SCALar
UNIT
COMMENT
-----
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 32767
The command specifies the number of measurements which are combined.
Example:
":AVER:COUN 16"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A. VA-D
0
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTO ON selects a suitable number of :COUNt for the respective type of measurement.
Example:
":AVER:COUN:AUTO ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A. VA-D
OFF
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the average function.
Example:
"AVER OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
1088.7531.12
OFF
conforming
6.104
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | MINimum | SCALar
The command selects the type of average function.
Example:
":AVER:TYPE SCAL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
SCALar
conforming
The following average functions have been defined:
MAXimum (MAX HOLD):
AVG(n) = MAX(X1 to .Xn)
MINimum (MIN HOLD):
AVG(n) = Min(X1 to .Xn)
SCALar (AVERAGE):
1088.7531.12
AVG (n)=
n
1
× ∑ xi
n
=
6.105
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s filter bandwidths. Both groups of commands
(BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:BANDwidth | :BWIDth
[:RESolution]
:AUTO
:MODE
:FFT
UNIT
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
ANALog|DIGital
<Boolean>
HZ
----DBHZ
---
:DEMod
:COUPling
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value><numeric_value>
<Boolean>
<numeric_value> | SINe | PULSe |
NOISe
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
:PLL
AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW
:RATio
:FILTer
:AUTO
:RATio
:VIDeo
HZ
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
Vector Signal Analysis
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 1 Hz to 10 MHz
This command defines the IF bandwidth (6-dB bandwidth) of the receiver or resolution bandwidth of
the analyzer.
Example:
":BAND 1MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
In the receiver mode, ESIB offers the IF bandwidths (6 dB bandwidths) 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 1
kHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 120 kHz, 1 MHz and 10 MHz. The bandwidth is limited by the set
receive frequency: RES BW ≤ fE/2. When the quasi peak detector is switched on, a fixed bandwidth
is preset depending on the frequency (see also chapter 4, section "Selecting a Detector").
In the analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the values for the resolution bandwidth are rounded in
1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF
In receiver mode with activated quasi peak detector, this command either automatically couples the
IF bandwidth of the receiver to the frequency range or cancels the coupling .
In analyzer mode, this command either automatically couples the resolution bandwidth of the
instrument to the span or cancels the coupling.
Example:
":BAND:AUTO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
ON
conforming
The automatic coupling matches the resolution bandwidth to the currently set span according to the
relationship between span and resolution bandwidth.
1088.7531.12
6.106
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital
This command toggles between analog and digital resolution filters for the 1-kHz bandwidth.
Example:
":BAND:MODE DIG"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ANALog
device-specific
Depending on the bandwidth, the resolution filters are automatically toggled between digital filters
(<1kHz) and analog filters (>1kHz). The 1-kHz bandwidth is present in the instrument as a digital
filter and as an analog filter and can be toggled using this command. If the analog filter is selected for
the bandwidth 1kHz, the FFT-filtering for bandwidths ≤ 1kHz is switched off.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF
This command toggles the digital filters used for bandwidths ≤ 1 kHz between ordinary mode and
FFT-filter mode.
Example:
":BAND:MODE:FFT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
The filter bandwidth of 1 kHz is switched to digital filtering for both ON and OFF.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1
This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth (Hz) / span (Hz).
Example:
":BAND:RAT 0.1"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA, R
-- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio Span/RBW used in manual control.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FILTer 3dB | 6dB
In analyzer mode, this command switches between 3 dB and 6 dB bandwidths of the resolution
filters.
Example:
"SENS:BWID:RES:FILT 6 dB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
1088.7531.12
3 dB
device-specific
6.107
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz
This command defines the instrument’s video bandwidth.
Example:
":BAND:VID 10kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
The values for the video bandwidth are rounded in 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either automatically couples the instrument’s video bandwidth to the resolution
bandwidth or cancels the coupling.
Example:
":BAND:VID:AUTO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ON
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATIO 0.001to 1000 | SINe | PULSe | NOISe
This command defines the ratio video bandwidth (Hz) / resolution bandwidth (Hz).
Parameter:
The parameters SINe, PULSe and NOISe may be used as synonyms for the
following values:
SINe:
1
PULSe: 10
NOISe:
0.1
Example:
":BAND:VID:RAT 10"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
- (AUTO is set to ON)
conforming
The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio RBW/VBW used in manual control.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 5kHz to 200kHz (Real Time on) |
5kHz to 5MHz (Real Time off)
This command defines the demodulation bandwidth of the instrument for analog demodulation.
Example:
":BAND:DEM 100KHZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
100KHZ
device-specific
The values for the demodulation bandwidth are rounded in steps of 1 | 2 | 3 | 5.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW
This command defines the bandwidth of the main PLL of the instrument synthesizer.
Example:
":BAND:PLL HIGH"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
1088.7531.12
AUTO
device-specific
6.108
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem
The SENSe:CORRection-subsystem controls the correction of measured results by means of
frequency-dependent correction factors (e. g. for antenna or cable attenuation).
It also controls calibration and normalization during operation with the option Tracking Generator .
COMMAND
[SENSe<1|2>]
:CORRection
:METHod
:COLLect
[:ACQuire]
[:STATe]
:RECall
:TRANsducer
:CATalog?
:ACTive?
:SELect
:UNIT
:SCALing
:COMMent
:DATA
[:STATe]
:DELete
:TSET
:CATalog?
:ACTive?
:SELect
:UNIT
:BREak
:COMMent
:RANGe<1 to 10>
[:STATe]
:DELete
:CVL
:CATalog?
:SELect
:MIXer
:SNUMber
:BAND
:TYPE
:PORTs
:BIAS
:COMMent
:DATA
:CLEar
1088.7531.12
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
option Tracking Generator
TRANsmission | REFLexion
THRough | OPEN
<Boolean>
no query
no query
query only
query only
<name>
<string>
LINear | LOGarithmic
<string>
<freq> , <level> ..
<Boolean>
--
HZ , ---
no query
query only
query only
<name>
<string>
<Boolean>
<string>
<freq> , <freq>, <name> ..
<Boolean>
--
<file_name>
<string>
<string>
A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
ODD | EVEN | EODD
2|3
<numeric_value>
<string>
<freq> , <level> ..
--
6.109
HZ, HZ, ---
no query
option external mixer output
query only
A
HZ , DB
--
no query
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates/deactivates normalization of the measurement results.
Example:
":CORR ON "
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
conforming
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion
This command selects the kind of measurement with active tracking generator
(transmission/reflexion).
Example:
":CORR:METH TRAN "
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
TRANsmission
device specific
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN
This command selects the kind of measurement for the reference values of the normalization
(response calibration).
Example:
":CORR:COLL THR"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
conforming
Mode:
A
THRough
"TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection between tracking
generator and device input.
"REFLexion" mode:
OPEN
calibration with short circuit at the input
only valid in "REFLexion" mode:calibration with open input
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value an a query. It is only valid in
conjunction with option Tracking Generator.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall
This command restores the instrument setting that was valid for the measurement of the reference
data.
Example:
":CORR:REC"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
conforming
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and a query. It is only valid
in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.
1088.7531.12
6.110
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?
This command reads out the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk.
Syntax of output format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name>,,<1st file length>,<2nd file name>,,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,
<nth file length>
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:CAT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive?
This command reveals the active transducer factor. If no transducer factor is switched on, a void
string will be output.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:ACT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect
<name>
This command selects the transducer factor designated by <name>. If <name> does not exist yet, a
new transducer factor is created.
Parameter:
<name>::=
Name of the transducer factor in string data form with a
maximum of 8 characters.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:SEL ’FACTOR1’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for modifying/activating transducer
factors.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <string>
This command defines the unit of the transducer factor selected.
Parameter:
<string>::=
’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBMV’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’
’DBUA/M’ | ’DBPW’ | ’DBPT’
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:UNIT ’DBUV’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
’DB’
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.
1088.7531.12
6.111
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear | LOGarithmic
This command defines whether the frequency scaling of the transducer factor is linear or logarithmic.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
LINear
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:COMM ’FACTOR FOR ANTENNA’"
Features:
*RST value
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
’’ (empty comment)
device specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <freq>,<level>..
This command defines the test points for the selected transducer factor. The values are entered as a
series of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies must be in ascending order.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:TRANsducer:DATA 1MHZ,-30,2MHZ,-40"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent. The level values are
sent as dimensionless numbers; the unit is specified by means of the command
SENS:CORR:TRAN:UNIT.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the selected transducer factor on or off.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
OFF
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.
1088.7531.12
6.112
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes the selected transducer factor.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:DEL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk.
Syntax of output format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name>,,<1st file length>,<2nd file name>,,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,
<nth file length>
Example:
":CORR:TSET:CAT?"
Mode:
R, A
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:ACTive?
This command reveals the active transducer set. If no transducer set is switched on, a void string will
be output.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:ACT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R, A
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name>
This command selected the transducer set designated by <name>. If <name> does not exist yet, a
new set is created.
Parameter:
<name>::= name of the transducer set in string data form with a maximum
of 8 characters.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:SEL ’SET1’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for changing/activating the
transducer sets.
1088.7531.12
6.113
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT ’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’ | ’DBUA/M’’ |
’DBPW’ | ’DBPT <string>
This command defines the unit of the selected transducer sets. When assigning transducer factors
to the set, only factors which are compatible to the selected unit, i. e. factors with the same unit or the
unit dB, are allowed.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:UNIT ’DBUV’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
’DB’
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF
This command defines if the sweep is to be stopped on changeover from range to another.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:BRE ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
OFF
device-specific
Prior to the above command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer set.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:COMM ’SET FOR ANTENNA’"
Features:
*RST value
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
’’ (empty comment)
device specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<1 to 10> <freq>,<freq>,<name>..
This command defines a partial range of the selected transducer set. The partial range is determined
by its start and stop frequencies plus a list of names of the assigned transducer factors. The ranges
1 to 10 must be sent in ascending order.
Parameter:
<freq>,<freq>::= start frequency, stop frequency of the range
<name>...::=
list of names for the assigned transducer factors.
The individual names must be characterized by single
quotation marks (’) and separated by commas.
Example:
":CORR:TRAN:TSET:RANG 1MHZ,2MHZ,’FACTOR1,’FACTOR2’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
1088.7531.12
6.114
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the selected transducer set on or off.
Example:
":CORR:TSET ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
OFF
device-specific
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:DELete
This command deletes the selected transducer set.
Example:
":CORR:TSET:DEL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
device-specific
This command is an event and thus has no *RST value assigned.
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all conversion-loss tables stored on the harddisk.
Syntax of output format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name>,,<1st file length>,<2nd file name>,,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,
<nth file length>
Example:
":CORR:CVL:CAT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
This command is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <file_name>
This command selects the Conversion Loss Table designated with <file_name>. If <file_name> is
not available, a new Conversion Loss Table will be created.
Parameter:
<file_name>::= Name of Conversion Loss Table as string data with
a maximum of 8 characters
Example:
":CORR:CVL:SEL ’LOSS_TAB’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands used to change/activate the
Conversion Loss files. It is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
1088.7531.12
6.115
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <string>
This command defines the type designation of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter:
<string>::= Type designation of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example:
":CORR:CVL:MIX ’FSE_Z60’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <string>
This command defines the serial number of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter:
<string>::= Serial number of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example:
":CORR:CVL:SNUM ’123.4567’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
This command defines the waveguide band in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:BAND E"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD
This command defines the type of harmonic in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:TYPE EODD"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
1088.7531.12
6.116
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2 | 3
This command defines the type of mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:PORT 3"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <numeric_value>
This command defines the bias current in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:BIAS 7mA"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter:
<string>::= Comment of mixer with a maximum of 60 characters
Example:
":CORR:CVL:COMMENT ’MIXER FOR BAND U’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:DATA <freq>,<level>..
This command defines the reference values of the selected Conversion Loss Tabels. The values are
entered as a result of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
1088.7531.12
6.117
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
This command deletes the selected Conversion Loss Table.
Example:
":CORR:CVL:CLE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
device-specific
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.
1088.7531.12
6.118
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe:DEMod Subsystem
The SENSe:DEMod subsystem controls the analog demodulation of the video signal.
COMMAND
PARAMETER
[SENSe<1|2>]
:DEMod
UNIT
COMMENT
OFF | AM | FM
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DEMod
OFF | AM | FM
This command selects the type of analog demodulation.
Example:
":DEM FM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
1088.7531.12
OFF
device-specific
6.119
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:DETector Subsystem
The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the recording of measurement values via the type of detector
selected for each trace.
The suffix in SENSe<1|2> is not significant in this subsystem.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:DETector<1to4>
[:FUNCtion]
UNIT
APEak | NEGative| POSitive | SAMPle| RMS
| AVERage | QPEak | ACVideo
-<Boolean>
:AUTO
:RECeiver
[:FUNCtion]
COMMENT
ACVideo only with option
ESIB-B1
POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage |
QPEak | ACVideo, POSitive | NEGative|
RMS | AVERage | QPEak | ACVideo
POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage |
QPEak | ACVideo
:FMEasurement
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive| SAMPle | RMS |
AVERage | QPEak
This command switches the detector for recording of the measured value.
Example:
":DET POS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
Trace1: POSitive
Trace 2: AVERage
conforming
R, A
In scan mode of the receiver, the detectors POSitive, RMS, AVERage, QPEak and ACVideo are
available (ACVideo only with option ESIB-B1).
In the analyzer mode, the detectors APEak, POSitive, NEGative, RMS, SAMPLe and AVERage are
available. The value "APEak" (AutoPeak) displays both the positive peak value and the negative
peak value when noise is present. The positive peak value is displayed when one signal is present.
The trace is selected by means of the numeric suffix after DETector.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling off.
Example:
":DET:AUTO OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
ON
conforming
The trace is defined by the numeric suffix at DETector.
1088.7531.12
6.120
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | QPEak|
ACVideo
This command switches on the detectors for single measurements.
Example:
":DET:REC POS,AVER,QPE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
POS
device-specific
The trace is not selectable; up to four detectors may be switched on simultaneously.
The RMS, NEgative and ACVideo detector cannot be switched on simultaneously.
Selection ACVideo is available only if the instrument is equipped with the linear video output (option
ESIB-B1).
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>:FMEasurement
NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage| QPEak |
ACVideo
This command selects the detector for the final measurement (the detector used for the subsequent
final measurement).
Example:
"DET:FME POS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
1088.7531.12
Trace 1, 3 POS
Trace 2, 4 AVERage
device specific
R
6.121
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem
This subsystem controls the parameters for digital demodulation.
It is only active in conjunction with operating mode Vector Signal Analysis (option FSE-B7).
COMMAND
[SENSe<1|2>]
:DDEMod
:FORMat
:SBANd
:QPSK
:FORMat
:PSK
:NSTate
:FORMat
:MSK
:FORMat
:QAM
:NSTate
:FSK
:NSTate
:SRATe
:TIMe
:PRATe
:FILTer
:MEASurement
:REFerence
:ALPHa
:NORMalize
:PRESet
:SEARch
:PULSe
:STATe
:SYNC
:CATalog?
:SELect
:OFFSet
:PATTern
:STATe
:NAME
:COMMent
:DATA
:DELete
:MONLy
:TIME
:TCAPture
:LENGth
1088.7531.12
PARAMETERS
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK
NORMal | INVerse
NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4
2|8
NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8
TYPE1 | TYPE2 |
NORMal | DIFFerential
16
2|4
<numeric_value>
HZ
<numeric_value>
1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16
SYM
OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 |
B25 | B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM
|RM95 | QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | B25 |
B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 |
QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
<numeric_value>
<Boolean>
GSM | EDGe | TETRa | DCS1800 | PCS1900
|PHS | PDCup | PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK |
APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 | ERMes |
MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 |
F64| FQCDma | F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma
| FNADc | RNADc
<Boolean>
query only
<string>
<numeric_value>
<string>
<Boolean>
<string>
<string>
<string>
SYM
<Boolean>
<numeric value>
SYM
Vector Signal Analysis
<numeric_value>
6.122
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK
This command selects the digital demodulation type.
Example:
":DDEM:FORM QPSK"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
MSK
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse
This command selects the sideband for the demodulation.
Example:
":DDEM:SBAN INV"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
NORMal
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4
This command determines the specific demodulation type for QPSK.
Example:
":DDEM:QPSK:FORM DPI4"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate
2|8
This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK.
Example:
":DDEM:PSK:NST 2"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
Value 2 (i.e. PSK2) corresponds to BPSK demodulation, value 8 the 8PSK demodulation.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8
This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK.
Example:
":DDEM:PSK:FORM DIFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
device-specific
6.123
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential
This command determines the specific demodulation type for MSK.
Example:
":DDEM:MSK:FORM TYPE2"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
TYPE2 | DIFFerential
device-specific
TYPE1 | NORMal corresponds to MSK demodulation, TYPE2 | DIFFerential corresponds to
DMSK demodulation.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate
16
This command determines the specific demodulation type for QAM.
Example:
":DDEM:QAM:NST 16"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
16
device-specific.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate
2|4
This command determines the specific demodulation type for FSK.
Example:
":DDEM:FSK:NST 2"
Features:
*RST- value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
The parameter 2 corresponds to the demodulation type 2FSK, the parameter 4 to the demodulation
type 4FSK.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SRATe 160 Hz to 1.6 MHz
This command defines the symbol rate.
Example:
":DDEM:SRAT 18kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
270.833333kHz
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:TIME 1 to Frame Length
The command determines the number of displayed symbols (result length).
Example:
":DDEM:TIME 80"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
147
device-specific
6.124
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16
This command determines the number of points per symbol.
Example:
":DDEM:PRAT 8"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
4
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement
OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25
| B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 |
QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
This command selects the input filter for the test signal.
B22
B25
B44
QFM or FM95
QFR or FR95
QRM or RM95
QRR or RR95
A25Fm
EMES
EREF
Bessel 22
Bessel 25
Bessel 44
IS95-CDMA fm
IS95-CDMA fr
IS95-CDMA rm
IS95-CDMA rr
APCO 25 fm
EDGE mes
EDGE ref
Example:
":DDEM:FILT:MEAS RCOS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
OFF
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence
RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25 | B44 |
QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR | RR95
| A25Fm | EMES | EREF
This command selects the input filter for the reference signal.
Example:
":DDEM:FILT:REF RCOS"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
GAUSsian
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 0.2 to 1
This command determines the filter characteristic (ALPHA/BT). Step width is 0.05.
Example:
":DDEM:FILT:ALPH 0.5"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
0.3
device-specific
6.125
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF
This command switches normalizing of the unit circle on or off using IQ offset.
Example:
":DDEM:NORM OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
ON
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe
ON | OFF
This command switches the signal burst search on or off.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:PULS:STAT OFF"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
ON
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all sync-file data sets stored on the harddisk. Syntax of output
format:
<Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files>,<free memory on hard disk>,
<1st file name>,,<1st file length>,<2nd file name>,,<2nd file length>,....,<nth file name>,
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:CAT?"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect <string>
This command selects a predefined sync file. A file that has been set previously by the command
DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern becomes invalid.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:SEL "PATT_1"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
""
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines the offset of the display with reference to the synchronization sequence.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:OFFS 10SYM"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
0 SYM
device-specific
6.126
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string>
This command defines the synchronization sequence.A file that has been set previously by the
command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:SELect becomes invalid.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT "1101001"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
""
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe
ON | OFF
This command switches the search for a synchronization sequence on or off.
Example:
":DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:STAT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
OFF
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME <string>
This command selects a sync file to be edited or entered anew.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME "PATT_NEW"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
""
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment on a sync file. This sync file must be previously selected by the
command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COMM "PATTERN FOR PPSK"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
""
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA <string>
This command defines a synchronization pattern for the sync file. Inputs other than "1" or "0" are
interpreted as "Don’t Care Bits". This sync file must be previously selected by the command
DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA "1101001"
Feature:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
""
device-specific
6.127
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete <string>
This command deletes a synchronization pattern on the hard disk. This sync file must be previously
selected by the command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DEL
Features:
*RST-value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
""
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF
For setting ON, this command sets the analyzer so that the measured values are displayed and
taken into account in the error analysis only if the set sync pattern is found . Bursts with a wrong sync
pattern (sync not found) are ignored. If an invalid sync pattern is found or if there is none, the
measurement is halted and continued in the presence of a valid sync pattern.
This command is available only if the search for a synchronization sequence is activated
(DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:STATe = ON).
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:MONL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
OFF
SCPI:
device specific
Mode:
VA-D
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 100 to 1600
This command determines the number of symbols required for demodulation (frame length). The
values > 800 are only permissible if the number of points per symbol is <16, the values > 1600 only if
the number of points per symbol is <8. Step width is 100.
Example:
":DDEM:SEAR:TIME 800"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
400
device-specific
6.128
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | EDGe | TETRa | DCS1800 | PCS1900 |PHS | PDCup |
PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK | APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2
| ERMes | MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 | F64|
FQCDma | F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma | FNADc | RNADc
This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standard
transmission method.
Example:
":DDEM:PRES TETR"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
GSM
device-specific
APCO25CQPSK
APCO25C4FM
F16
F322
F324
F64
FNADc
RNADc
FQCDma or F95Cdma
RQCDma or R95Cdma
:[SENSe<1|2>:]TCAPture:LENGth
APCO25 Continous Phase QPSK
APCO25Continous Phase 4FM
FLEX 1600 - 2FSK
FLEX 3200 - 2FSK,
FLEX 3200 - 4FSK
FLEX 6400 - 4FSK
Forward NADC
Reverse NADC
Forward CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard
Reverse CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard
1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384
This command determines the number of sampling points that are written into the memory for each
measurement (memory size).
Example:
"TCAP:LENG 1024"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-D
1088.7531.12
16384
device-specific
6.129
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:FILTer Subsystem
The SENSe:FILTer subsystem selects the filters in the video signal path.This subsystem is active only in
the Vector Signal Analysis mode (option FSE-B7).
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:FILTer
:HPASs
[:STATe]
:FREQuency
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analyzer
:LPASs
[:STATe]
:FREQuency
:CCITt
[:STATe]
:CMESsage
[:STATe]
:DEMPhasis
[:STATe]
:TCONstant
:LINK
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
-HZ
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
-HZ | PCT
<Boolean>
--
<Boolean>
--
<Boolean>
<numeric_value>
DISPlay | AUDio
S
Vector Signal Analyzer
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASs[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command activates the high-pass filter in the AF-branch for analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:HPAS ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
OFF
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 30 Hz | 300 Hz
In the Vector Signal Analysis mode with analog demodulation, this command defines the frequency
limit of the high-pass filter in the AF-branch. For REAL TIME ON absolute frequencies are entered,
for REAL TIME OFF, the frequencies are entered relative to the demodulation bandwidth.
Example:
":FILT:HPAS:FREQ 300HZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
- (STATe = OFF)
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the low-pass filter in the AF-branch with analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:LPAS ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
OFF
conforming
On switching to ON, a bandwidth of 3 kHz for REAL TIME ON and a bandwidth of 5 PCT for REAL
TIME OFF is set automatically.
1088.7531.12
6.130
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs:FREQuency <numeric_value>
This command defines the frequency limit of the low-pass filter in the NF-branch for analog
demodulation.
Parameter:
<numeric_value> ::=
3 kHz | 15 kHz for REAL TIME ON
5 PCT | 10 PCT | 25 PCT for REAL TIME OFF
Example:
":FILT:LPAS:FREQ 3KHZ" for REAL TIME ON
":FILT:LPAS:FREQ 25PCT" for REAL TIME OFF
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
- (STATe = OFF)
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CCITt[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command activates the weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the AF-branch
for analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:CCIT ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
OFF
conforming
This command is valid only in vector analysis mode with REAL TIME OFF.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe]
ON | OFF
This command activates the C-message weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the
AF-branch for analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:CMES ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
OFF
conforming
This command is valid only in vector analysis mode with REAL TIME OFF.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the selected de-emphasis for analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:DEMP ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
1088.7531.12
OFF
conforming
6.131
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant
50US | 75US | 750US
This command sets the time constant of the de-emphasis for analog demodulation.
Example:
":FILT:DEMP:TCON 75US"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
50us
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay | AUDio
For analog demodulation, this command selects whether the de-emphasis set is to be active in the
audio branch only or in addition for the display of measured values.
Example:
":FILT:DEMP:LINK DISP"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
AUDio
DISPlay
De-emphasis effective in the audio branch only
De-emphasis effective in the audio branch and in the display of measured values
1088.7531.12
AUDio
device-specific
6.132
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display. The frequency axis
can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:FREQuency
:CENTer
:LINK
:STEP
:LINK
:FACTor
:SPAN
:FULL
:LINK
:STARt
:LINK
:STOP
:LINK
:MODE
:OFFSet
:CW:
:STEP
:FIXed
:STEP
<numeric_value>
STARt | STOP | SPAN
<numeric_value>
SPAN | RBW | OFF
<numeric_value>
<numeric value>
-CENTer | STARt | STOP
<numeric_value>
CENTer | STOP | SPAN
<numeric_value>
CENTer | STARt |SPAN
CW | FIXed | SWEep
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
UNIT
COMMENT
HZ
-HZ
-PCT
HZ
--HZ
-HZ
--HZ
HZ
HZ
HZ
HZ
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer 0 GHz to fmax
This command defines the receiver frequency ot the center frequency of the analyzer.
Example:
":FREQ:CENT 100MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A, VA
fmax / 2
conforming
In the analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to SPAN FIXED.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN
This command defines the coupling of the center frequency to the start, stop frequency or the
frequency span.
Example:
":FREQ:CENT:LINK STAR"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
1088.7531.12
SPAN
device-specific
6.133
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to fmax
This command defines the step width of the receiver or center frequency.
Example:
":FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
- (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF
This command couples the step width of the center frequency to span (span >0) or to the resolution
bandwidth (span = 0) or cancels the couplings.
Example:
":FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
SPAN
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT
This command couples the step width of the center frequency with a factor to the span (span >0) or
to the resolution bandwidth (span = 0).
Example:
":FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
- (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 GHz to fmax
This command defines the frequency span of the analyzer.
Example:
":FREQ:SPAN 10MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
fmax
conforming
The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to CENTER FIXED.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command sets the maximum frequency span of the analyzer.
Example:
":FREQ:SPAN:FULL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
conforming
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
1088.7531.12
6.134
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK
CENTer | START | STOP
This command defines the coupling for frequency-span changes.
Example:
":FREQ:SPAN:LINK STOP"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
CENTer
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt 0 GHz to fmax
This command defines the start frequency of the scan in receiver mode or the start frequency of the
analyzer.
Example:
":FREQ:STAR 20MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
0
conforming
In analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STOP FIXED.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK
CENTer | STOP | SPAN
This command defines the coupling for start-frequency changes.
Example:
":FREQ:STAR:LINK SPAN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
STOP
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP 0 GHz to fmax
This command defines the stop frequency of the scan in receiver mode or the stop frequency of the
analyzer.
Example:
":FREQ:STOP 2000MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
R, A
fmax
conforming
In analyzer mode, the automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STARt FIXED.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK
CENTer | STARt | SPAN
This command defines the coupling for stop-frequency changes.
Example:
":FREQ:STOP:LINK SPAN"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
1088.7531.12
STARt
device-specific
6.135
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep
This command switches between frequency (SWEep) and time (CW | FIXed) domain in the analyzer
mode.
Example:
":FREQ:MODE SWE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
CW
conforming
For CW and FIXed, the frequency setting is via command FREQuency:CENTer. In the SWEep
mode, the setting is via commands FREQuency:STARt, STOP, CENTer and SPAN.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet
<numeric_value>
This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument.
Example:
":FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Modes:
A, VA
0 Hz
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]
fmin to fmax
This command defines the receiver frequency
Example:
":FREQ:CW 50MHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
100MHz
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:STEP
fmin .. fmax
This command defines the step width of the receiver frequency.
Example:
":FREQ:FIX:STEP 50kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
R
1088.7531.12
10kHz
conforming
6.136
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem
The SENSe:MIXer subsystem controls the settings of the external mixer. It is only active in Analyzer
mode (INSTrument SANalyzer).
This subsystem is available only if the instrument is equipped with the external mixer output (option
FSE-B21)
The suffix in SENSe<1|2> is not significant in this subsystem.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
:[SENSe<1|2>:]
:MIXer
[:STATe]
:BLOCk
:PORTs
:SIGNal
:THReshold
:HARMonic
:TYPE
:BAND
:LOSS
[:LOW]
:HIGH
:TABLe
:BIAS
UNIT
<Boolean>
<Boolean>
2|3
OFF | ON | AUTO
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
ODD | EVEN | EODD
A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
--
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<file_name>
<numeric_value>
DB
DB
--
COMMENT
Only query in band lock on
Not in band lock off
Not in band lock off
Not in band lock off
A
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates or shuts off the external mixer.
Example:
":MIX ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
This command is available only in conjunction with option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF
This command activates the BAND LOCK ON or BAND LOCK OFF mode.
Example:
":MIX:BLOC ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
1088.7531.12
6.137
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:PORTs 2 | 3
This command activates the 2- or 3-port mixer. In the BAND LOCK ON mode, the command refers
to the active band selected with SENSe:MIXer:HARMonic:BAND .
Example:
":MIX:PORT 3"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
2
device-specific
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:SIGNal ON | OFF | AUTO
This command activates the Signal ID or Auto ID mode.
Example:
":MIX:SIGN ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
OFF
device-specific
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:THReshold 0.1 to 100 dB
This command sets the level threshold for auto ID.
Example:
":MIX:THR 20"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
10
device-specific
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic 1 to 62
With BAND LOCK OFF, this command sets the nth harmonic. The command may be a query with
BAND LOCK ON.
Example:
":MIX:HARM 5"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
2
conforming
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD
With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the type of harmonic.
Example:
":MIX:HARM:TYPE EODD"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
EVEN
device-specific
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
1088.7531.12
6.138
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the active band.
Example:
":MIX:HARM:BAND E"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
U
device-specific
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <numeric_value>
This command sets the conversion loss of the mixer.
Example:
":MIX:LOSS -12DB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
0 dB
conforming
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH <numeric_value>
With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the conversion loss of the mixer for higher harmonics in
bands with two harmonics (band A: even harmonics, band Q: odd harmonics).
Example:
":MIX:LOSS:HIGH -14DB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
0 dB
device-specific
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe <file_name>
This command sets a conversion loss table.
Parameter:
<file_name> := DOS file name
Example:
":MIX:LOSS:table ’mix_1’"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
no table set
device-specific
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS <numeric_value>
This command sets the bias current.
Example:
":MIX:BIAS 7mA"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A
0A
conforming
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.
1088.7531.12
6.139
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem
This subsystem controls the modulation summary setting for analog demodulation.
It is active only in conjunction with option Vector Analysis, FSE-B7.
COMMAND
PARAMETERS
[SENSe<1|2>]
:MSUMmary
:AHOLd
[:STATe]
:MODE
:RUNit
:REFerence
UNIT
COMMENT
Vector Signal Analysis
<Boolean>
ABSolute | RELative
PCT | DB
<numeric_value>
:AUTO
:MTIMe
ONCE
<numeric_value>
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe]
PCT | HZ | DEG |
RAD
no query
S
ON | OFF
This command switches on the average/peak hold mode.
Example:
":MSUM:AHOL ON"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MODE
OFF
device-specific
ABSolute | RELative
This command selects the absolute or relative indication of the summary marker values.
Example:
":MSUM:MODE REL"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
ABSolute
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB
This command selects the relative unit of the summary marker in the relative result display.
Example:
":MSUM:RUN DB"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
1088.7531.12
DB
device-specific
6.140
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:REFerence
<numeric_value>
This command selects the reference modulation.
Parameter:
<numeric_value> :=
Example:
":MSUM:REF 50PCT"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
0.001PCT to 1000PCTfor AM
0.1HZ to 10MHZfor FM
0.0001RAD to 1000RADfor PM
100PCTfor AM
100KHZfor FM
10RAD for PM
device-specific
VA-A
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO
ONCE
This command sets the current absolute measured values of the main modulation signal as
reference values for the relative indication.
Example:
":MSUM:REF:AUTO ONCE"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
-device-specific
This command is an event and has therefore no query and no *RST value assigned.
:[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MTIMe
0.1 s | 1 s
This command selects the measurement time for the summary markers.
Example:
":MSUM:MTIM 100US"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
VA-A
1088.7531.12
0.1S
device-specific
6.141
E-15
SENSe Subsystem
ESIB
SENSe:POWer Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s power measurements.
COMMAND
[SENSe<1|2>]
:POWer
:ACHannel
:SPACing
[:UPPer]
:ACHannel
:ALTernate<1|2>
:ACPairs
:BANDwidth
[:CHANnel]
:ACHannel
:ALTernate<1|2>
:BWIDth
[:CHANnel]
:ACHannel
:ALTernate<1|2>
:MODE
:REFerence
:AUTO
:PRESet
:BANDwidth
:BWIDth
PARAMETER
UNIT
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
1|2|3
HZ
HZ
HZ
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
HZ
HZ
HZ
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
<numeric_value>
ABSolute | RELative
HZ
HZ
HZ
ONCE
ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0 | ADJust
<numeric_value>
PCT
<numeric_value>
PCT
COMMENT
no query
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 0 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier.
Example:
":POW:ACH:SPAC 28kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
24 kHz
conforming
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 0 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier. This command has the
same effect as POW:ACH:SPAC.
Example:
":POW:ACH:SPAC:ACH 338kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
1088.7531.12
24 kHz
device-specific
6.142
E-15
ESIB
SENSe Subsystem
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1|2> 0 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command defines the spacing of the first (ALTernate1) or the second alternate adjacent
channel (ALTernate2) relative to the carrier signal.
Example:
":POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 99kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
24 kHz
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 1 | 2 | 3
This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in pairs).
Example:
":POW:ACH:ACP 3"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI:
Mode:
A-F
1
device-specific
:[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel]
0 Hz to 1000 MHz
This command sets the channel bandwidth of the radio communication system.
Example:
":POW:ACH:BWID 30kHz"
Features:
*RST value:
SCPI